Report of Foreign Private Issuer

 

Pursuant to Rule 13a-16 or 15d-16 of

the Securities Exchange Act of 1934

 

30 April 2019

 

Commission file number: 001-10306

 

 

Form 6-K

 

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

 

 

Gogarburn

PO Box 1000

Edinburgh EH12 1HQ

Scotland

United Kingdom

 

(Address of principal executive offices)

 

 

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant files or will file annual reports under cover of Form 20-F or Form 40-F.

 

Form 20-F x                                              Form 40-F  o

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(1):o

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(7):o

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant by furnishing the information contained in this Form is also thereby furnishing the information to the Commission pursuant to Rule 12g3-2(b) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

 

Yes o                                                             No x

 

If “Yes” is marked, indicate below the file number assigned to

the registrant in connection with Rule 12g3-2(b): 82-

 

This report on Form 6-K, except for any information contained on any websites linked or documents referred to in this report, shall be deemed incorporated by reference into the company’s Registration Statement on Form F-3 (File No. 333-222022) and to be a part thereof from the date on which this report is filed, to the extent not superseded by documents or reports subsequently filed or furnished.

 


 

Presentation of information

 

 

 

 

Explanatory note

The company is filing this Form 6-K to restate certain disclosures in the company’s annual report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2018, filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 28 February 2019 (the “2018 Form 20-F”) in connection with the re-segmentation completed in Q1 2019 and effective from 1 January 2019 and changes in Reporting standard IAS 12 ‘Income taxes’ effective from 1 January 2019. The sections restated include the Business review, Capital and risk management, and the Financial statements.

 

Summary of the re-segmentation

Business Banking has been transferred from UK Personal and Business Banking (UK PBB) to Commercial Banking as the nature of the business, including distribution channels, products and customers, are more closely aligned to the Commercial Banking Business. Concurrent with the transfer, UK PBB has been renamed UK Personal Banking (UK PB) and the previous franchise combining UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI renamed Personal & Ulster. The Commercial and Private Banking franchise has also been renamed Commercial & Private Banking (CPB).

 

Changes in reporting standards

IAS 12 ‘Income taxes’ was revised with effect from 1 January 2019. The income statement is now required to include any tax relief on the servicing cost of instruments classified as equity. Relief of £67 million was recognised in the income statement and the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018; this and prior periods have been restated in the Q1 2019 results and in this document.

 

This Form 6-K

RBS released its results for the three months ended 31 March 2019, which were filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on a separate Form 6-K on 26 April 2019, reflecting the reclassified segmental information and the changes in Reporting standard IAS 12 ‘Income taxes’. To facilitate comparison with these interim results, the disclosures included in the 2018 Form 20-F have been restated in this Form 6-K.

 

Accordingly, the sections “Business review”, “Capital and risk management” and “Financial statements” of the 2018 Form 20-F have been represented in full and in which the undernoted pages that correspond to the 2018 Form 20-F have been restated to reflect the re-segmentation of results attributable to UK Business Banking and to reflect the changes in Reporting standard IAS 12 ‘Income taxes’. Page numbers in this Form 6-K remain unchanged to the 2018 Form 20-F to facilitate cross referencing and are therefore not necessarily consecutive.

 

Pages impacted by re-segmentation:

Page 40 (Business review – Analysis of results – Segmental summary income statements)

Pages 46 to 47 (Segmental performance – UK Personal & Business Banking)

Pages 50 to 51 (Segmental performance – Commercial Banking)

Page 117 (Capital and risk management – Capital, liquidity and funding risk – RWAs by segment)

Page 121 (Capital and risk management – Capital, liquidity and funding risk – Funding gap: maturity and segmental analysis)

Page 134 (Capital and risk management – Credit risk – Economic sensitivity analysis)

Pages 135 to 137 (Capital and risk management – Credit risk – banking activities – Portfolio summary – segment analysis (audited))

Pages 136 to 137 (Capital and risk management – Credit risk – banking activities – Segmental loans and impairment metrics (audited))

Page 140 (Capital and risk management – Credit risk – banking activities – REIL and provisions)

Pages 149 to 152 (Capital and risk management – Credit risk – banking activities – Flow statements (audited))

Page 163 (Capital and risk management – non-traded market risk - Net interest income - impact of product structural hedging (unaudited))

Pages 178 to 179 (Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm)

Page 192 (Notes on the consolidated accounts – Note 3 – Operating expenses – Headcount)

Page 194 to 197 (Notes on the consolidated accounts – Note 4 – Segmental analysis)

 

Pages impacted by Reporting standard IAS 12 ‘Income taxes’:

Pages 38 to 40 (Financial summary)

Page 180 (Consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2018)

Page 181 (Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2018)

Page 183 (Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018)

Page 204 (Notes on the consolidated accounts – Note 7 – Tax)

Pages 245 to 246 (Notes on the consolidated accounts – Note 36 – Consolidating financial information)

 

Forward – looking statements

Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements

Certain sections in this document contain ‘forward-looking statements’ as that term is defined in the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, such as statements that include the words ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘project’, ‘anticipate’, ‘commit’, ‘believe’, ‘should’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘could’, ‘probability’, ‘risk’, ‘Value-at-Risk (VaR)’, ‘target’, ‘goal’, ‘objective’, ‘may’, ‘endeavour’, ‘outlook’, ‘optimistic’, ‘prospects’ and similar expressions or variations on these expressions.

 

In particular, this document includes forward-looking statements relating, but not limited to: future profitability and performance, including financial performance targets such as return on tangible equity; cost savings and targets, including cost:income ratios; litigation and government and regulatory investigations, including the timing and financial and other impacts thereof; the implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package; the continuation of the Group’s balance sheet reduction programme, including the reduction of risk-weighted assets (RWAs) and the timing thereof; capital and strategic plans and targets; capital, liquidity and leverage ratios and requirements, including CET1 Ratio, RWA equivalents (RWAe), Pillar 2 and other regulatory buffer requirements, minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities, and other funding plans; funding and credit risk profile; capitalisation; portfolios; net interest margin; customer loan and income growth; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs, including with respect to goodwill; restructuring and remediation costs and charges; the Group’s exposure to political risk, economic risk, climate change risk, operational risk, conduct risk, cyber and IT risk and credit rating risk and to various types of market risks, including interest rate risk, foreign exchange rate risk and commodity and equity price risk; customer experience including our Net Promotor Score (NPS); employee engagement and gender balance in leadership positions.

 

Limitations inherent to forward-looking statements

These statements are based on current plans, estimates, targets and projections, and are subject to significant inherent risks, uncertainties and other factors, both external and relating to the Group’s strategy or operations, which may result in the Group being unable to achieve the current targets, predictions, expectations and other anticipated outcomes expressed or implied by such forward-looking statements. In addition, certain of these disclosures are dependent on choices relying on key model characteristics and assumptions and are subject to various limitations, including assumptions and estimates made by management. By their nature, certain of these disclosures are only estimates and, as a result, actual future gains and losses could differ materially from those that have been estimated. Accordingly, undue reliance should not be placed on these statements. Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date we make them and we expressly disclaim any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect any change in the Group’s expectations with regard thereto or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based.

 

Important factors that could affect the actual outcome of the forward-looking statements

We caution you that a large number of important factors could adversely affect our results or our ability to implement our strategy, cause us to fail to meet our targets, predictions, expectations and other anticipated outcomes or affect the accuracy of forward-looking statements we describe in this document, including in the risk factors and other uncertainties set out in the document and other risk factors and uncertainties discussed in this document. These include the significant risks for the Group presented by: operational and IT resilience risk (including in respect of: the Group being subject to cyberattacks; operational risks inherent in the Group’s business; the Group’s operations being highly dependent on its IT systems; the Group relying on attracting, retaining and developing senior management and skilled personnel and maintaining good employee relations; the Group’s risk management framework; and reputational risk), economic and political risk (including in respect of: the uncertainties surrounding the UK’s withdrawal from the European Union; increased political and economic risks and uncertainty in the UK and global markets; climate change and the transition to a low carbon economy; HM Treasury’s ownership of RBSG and the possibility that it may exert a significant degree of influence over the Group; continued low interest rates and changes in foreign currency exchange rates), financial resilience risk (including in respect of: the Group’s ability to meet targets and make discretionary capital distributions to shareholders; the highly competitive markets in which the Group operates; deterioration in borrower and counterparty credit quality;  the ability of the Group to meet prudential regulatory requirements for capital and MREL, or to manage its capital effectively; the ability of the Group to access adequate sources of liquidity and funding; changes in the credit ratings of RBSG, any of its subsidiaries or any of its respective debt securities; the Group’s ability to meet requirements of regulatory stress tests; possible losses or the requirement to maintain higher levels of capital as a result of limitations or failure of various models; sensitivity of the Group’s financial statements to underlying accounting policies, judgements, assumptions and estimates; changes in applicable accounting policies or rules; the value or effectiveness of any credit protection purchased by the Group; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs, including with respect to goodwill; and the application of UK statutory stabilisation or resolution powers) and legal, regulatory and conduct risk (including in respect of: the Group’s businesses being subject to substantial regulation and oversight; legal, regulatory and governmental actions and investigations; the replacement of LIBOR, EURIBOR and other benchmark rates; heightened regulatory and governmental scrutiny (including by competition authorities); implementation of the Alternative Remedies Package and the costs related thereto; and changes in tax legislation).

 

The forward-looking statements contained in this document speak only as at the date hereof, and the Group does not assume or undertake any obligation or responsibility to update any forward-looking statement to reflect events or circumstances after the date hereof or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.

 

The information, statements and opinions contained in this document do not constitute a public offer under any applicable legislation or an offer to sell or solicit of any offer to buy any securities or financial instruments or any advice or recommendation with respect to such securities or other financial instruments.

 

1


 

Presentation of information

 

 

 

 

In this document, and unless specified otherwise, the term ‘company’ or ‘RBSG’ means The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, ‘RBS’, ‘RBS  Group’ or the ‘Group’ means the company and its subsidiaries, ‘the Royal Bank’ or ‘RBS plc’ means The Royal Bank of Scotland plc; ‘NWH Ltd’ means NatWest Holdings Limited; and ‘NatWest’ means National Westminster Bank Plc.

 

The company publishes its financial statements in pounds sterling (‘£’ or ‘sterling’). The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling, respectively, and references to ‘pence’ represent pence in the United Kingdom (‘UK’). Reference to ‘dollars’ or ‘$’ are to United States of America (‘US’) dollars. The abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of dollars, respectively, and references to ‘cents’ represent cents in the US. The abbreviation ‘’ represents the ‘euro’, and the abbreviations ‘m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of euros, respectively.

 

Any information contained on websites linked or reports referenced in this report on Form 6-K are for information only and shall not be deemed to be incorporated by reference herein.

 

Non-GAAP financial information

RBS prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB which constitutes a body of generally accepted accounting principles (‘GAAP’). This document contains a number of non-GAAP (or non-IFRS) financial measures. A non-GAAP financial measure is defined as one that measures historical or future financial performance, financial position or cash flows but which excludes or includes amounts that would not be so adjusted in the most comparable GAAP measure.

 

The non-GAAP financial measures used in this document generally exclude certain items which management believe are not representative of the underlying performance of the business and which distort period-on-period comparison. These measures are used internally by management, in conjunction with IFRS financial measures, to measure performance and make decisions regarding the future direction of the business. Management believes these non-GAAP financial measures, when provided in combination with reported IFRS results, provide helpful supplementary information for investors. These non-GAAP financial measures are not a substitute for, and should be read in conjunction with, reported IFRS financial measures.

 

The main non-GAAP measures used in this document include:

·                  Performance, funding and credit metrics such as ‘return on tangible equity’, and related RWA equivalents incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes), total assets excluding derivatives (funded assets), net interest margin (NIM) adjusted for items designated at fair value through profit or loss (non-statutory NIM), cost:income ratio and loan:deposit ratio. These are internal metrics used to measure business performance; and

·                  Personal & Ulster franchise results, combining the reportable segments of UK Personal Banking (UK PB) and Ulster Bank RoI and Commercial & Private (CPB) franchise results, combining the reportable segments of Commercial Banking and Private Banking, which is presented to provide investors with a summary of the Group’s business performance.

·                  The Commercial Banking, Private Banking, RBS International and NatWest Markets operating segment period on period comparison is impacted by a number of business transfers executed in preparation for ring-fencing.  Commentary on the movements in the period for these segments has been adjusted for these items and reconciliation notes are provided.

·                  The Group also presents a pro forma CET1 ratio which is on an adjusted basis. This has not been prepared in accordance with Regulation S-X and should be read in conjunction with the notes provided, as well as the section “Forward-looking statements” on page 1 of this document.

 

Key operating indicators

This document includes a number of operational metrics which management believes may be helpful to investors in understanding the Group’s business, including the Group’s position against its own targets. These metrics include performance, funding and credit metrics such as ‘return on tangible equity’ and related RWA equivalents incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes), total assets excluding derivatives (funded assets) and net interest margin (NIM) adjusted for items designated at fair value through profit or loss (non-statutory NIM), cost:income ratio, and loan:deposit ratio. These are internal metrics used to measure business performance.

 

Capital and liquidity measures

Certain liquidity and capital measures and ratios are presented in this document as management believes they are helpful for investors’ understanding of the liquidity and capital profile of the business and the Group’s position against its own targets and applicable regulatory requirements. Some of these measures are used by management for risk management purposes and may not be required to be disclosed by a government, governmental authority or self-regulatory organisation. As a result, the basis of calculation of these measures may not be the same as that used by the Group’s peers. These capital and liquidity measures and ratios include: the liquidity coverage ratio, stressed outflow coverage and net stable funding ratio.

 

Recent developments

For recent developments, refer to the results for the quarter ended 31 March 2019, which were filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on a separate Form 6-K on 26 April 2019.

 

2


 

 

Page

Presentation of information

36

Financial summary

38

Segment performance

39

 

Presentation of information

 

In the Report and Accounts, unless specified otherwise, the terms ‘company’ and ‘RBSG’ mean The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, ‘RBS’, ‘RBS Group’ and the ‘Group’ mean the company and its subsidiaries; ‘the Royal Bank’ and ‘RBS plc’ mean The Royal Bank of Scotland plc; ‘NWH Ltd’ means NatWest Holdings Limited; ‘NatWest’ means National Westminster Bank Plc and ‘NWM Plc’ means NatWest Markets Plc.

 

The company publishes its financial statements in pounds sterling (‘£’ or ‘sterling’). The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling, respectively, and references to ‘pence’ represent pence in the United Kingdom (‘UK’). Reference to ‘dollars’ or ‘$’ are to United States of America (‘US’) dollars. The abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of dollars, respectively, and references to ‘cents’ represent cents in the US. The abbreviation ‘€’ represents the ‘euro’, and the abbreviations ‘€m’ and ‘€bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of euros, respectively.

 

Segmental reporting

RBS continues to deliver on its plan to build a strong, simple and fair bank for both customers and shareholders.

 

Reportable operating segments

The reportable operating segments are as follows. For full business descriptions see Note 4 on page 195.

 

Franchise

Reportable operating segment

Personal & Ulster

UK Personal Banking (UK PB)

Ulster Bank RoI

Commercial & Private (CPB)

Commercial Banking

Private Banking

Other reportable segments

RBS International (RBSI)

NatWest Markets

Central items & other

 

Allocation of central items

RBS allocates all central costs relating to Services and Functions to the business using appropriate drivers, these are reported as indirect costs in the segmental income statements. Assets (and risk-weighted assets) held centrally, mainly relating to RBS Treasury, are allocated to the business using appropriate drivers.

 

Key operating indicators

RBS prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB and as adopted by the European Union, which constitutes a body of generally accepted accounting principles (‘GAAP’). This document contains a number of adjusted or alternative performance measures, also known as non-GAAP financial measures. These measures exclude certain items which management believe are not representative of the underlying performance of the business and which distort period-on-period comparison. These measures include:

 

·          Performance, funding and credit metrics such as ‘return on tangible equity’, and related RWA equivalents incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes), total assets excluding derivatives (funded assets) and net interest margin (NIM) adjusted for items designated as fair value through profit or loss (non-statutory NIM), cost:income ratio, loan:deposit ratio and impairment provision ratios. These are internal metrics used to measure business performance.

 

·          Personal & Ulster franchise, combining UK Personal Banking and Ulster Bank RoI and Commercial & Private (CPB) franchise, combining the reportable segments of Commercial Banking and Private Banking.

 

36


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Financial summary

RBS’s financial statements are prepared in accordance with IFRS. Selected data under IFRS for each of the last five years is presented below.

 

Summary consolidated income statement

2018 

2017 

2016 

2015 

2014 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Net interest income

8,656 

8,987 

8,708 

8,767 

9,258 

Non-interest income

4,746 

4,146 

3,882 

4,156 

5,892 

Total income

13,402 

13,133 

12,590 

12,923 

15,150 

Operating expenses

(9,645)

(10,401)

(16,194)

(16,353)

(13,859)

Profit/(loss) before impairment (losses)/releases

3,757 

2,732 

(3,604)

(3,430)

1,291 

Impairment (losses)/releases

(398)

(493)

(478)

727 

1,352 

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

3,359 

2,239 

(4,082)

(2,703)

2,643 

Tax charge

(1,208) 

(731)

(1,107)

(3)

(1,901)

Profit/(loss) from continuing operations

2,151 

1,508 

(5,189)

(2,706)

742

Profit/(loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax

— 

— 

— 

1,541 

(3,445)

Profit/(loss) for the year

2,151 

1,508 

(5,189)

(1,165)

(2,703)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shareholders

1,622 

752 

(6,955)

(1,979)

(3,470)

Preference shareholders

182 

234 

260 

297 

330 

Dividend access share

— 

— 

1,193 

— 

320 

Paid-in equity holders

355 

487 

303 

108 

57 

Non-controlling interests

(8)

35 

10 

409 

60 

 

2,151 

1,508 

(5,189)

(1,165)

(2,703)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notable items within total income

2018 

2017 

 

 

 

£m

£m

 

 

 

IFRS volatility in Central items & other

(59)

 

 

 

Insurance indemnity

357 

— 

 

 

 

Of which:

 

 

 

 

 

  NatWest Markets

165 

— 

 

 

 

  Central items & other

192 

— 

 

 

 

UK PB debt sale gain

61 

185 

 

 

 

FX losses in Central items & other

(46)

(183)

 

 

 

Commercial Banking fair value and disposal gain

169 

 

 

 

NatWest Markets legacy business disposal losses

(86)

(712)

 

 

 

Own credit adjustment

92 

(69)

 

 

 

Loss on redemption of own debt

— 

(7)

 

 

 

Strategic disposals

— 

347 

 

 

 

 

488 

(431)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance key metrics and ratios

2018 

2017 

 

 

 

Return on tangible equity (%)

5.0 

2.5 

 

 

 

Net interest margin (%) (1)

1.98 

2.13 

 

 

 

Average interest earning assets (£m)

436,957 

422,337 

 

 

 

Cost:income ratio (%)

71.7 

79.0 

 

 

 

Earning per share (pence) - basic

13.5p

6.3p

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1)        Net interest margin is net interest income of the banking business as a percentage of interest earning assets (IEA) of the banking business.

 

38


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Financial summary continued

2018 

2017 

2016 

2015 

2014 

Summary consolidated balance sheet

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Cash and balances at central banks

88,897 

98,337 

74,250 

79,404 

74,872 

Trading assets

75,119 

85,991 

86,660 

103,972 

150,005 

Derivatives

133,349 

160,843 

246,981 

262,514 

353,590 

Settlement balances

2,928 

2,517 

5,526 

4,116 

4,667 

Loans to banks and customers - amortised cost

318,036 

321,633 

320,016 

297,020 

325,954 

Other financial assets

59,485 

51,929 

48,637 

47,004 

38,298 

Other assets

16,421 

16,806 

16,586 

21,378 

103,633 

Total assets

694,235 

738,056 

798,656 

815,408 

1,051,019 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits

384,211 

391,712 

357,173 

338,326 

346,172 

Trading liabilities

72,350 

81,982 

84,536 

92,299 

130,920 

Settlement balances, derivatives, and other financial liabilities

182,230 

200,398 

267,257 

288,023 

402,829 

Other liabilities

8,954 

14,871 

40,286 

42,613 

112,389 

Owners’ equity

45,736 

48,330 

48,609 

53,431 

55,763 

Non-controlling interests

754 

763 

795 

716 

2,946 

Total liabilities and equity

694,235 

738,056 

798,656 

815,408 

1,051,019 

 

 

Other financial data

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Share information

2018 

2017 

2016 

2015 

2014 

Dividend payout ratio (%)

14.9 

— 

— 

— 

— 

Basic and diluted earnings/(loss) per ordinary share from

 

 

 

 

 

  continuing operations - pence (1)

13.5 

6.3 

(59.5)

(27.7)

0.5 

Share price per ordinary share at year end - £

2.17 

2.78 

2.25 

3.02 

3.94 

Market capitalisation at year end - £bn

26.1 

33.3 

26.6 

35.1 

45.2 

Net asset value per ordinary share - £

3.86 

4.10 

4.18 

4.66 

5.12 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital ratios

 

 

 

 

 

Return on average total assets (2)

0.2%

0.1%

(0.8%)

(0.2%)

(0.3%)

Return on average total equity (3)

3.7%

2.0%

(10.2%)

(2.9%)

(4.6%)

Return on average ordinary shareholders’ equity (4)

4.0%

1.9%

(15.3%)

(4.0%)

(6.5%)

Average total equity as a percentage of average total assets

7.2%

7.0%

6.2%

6.0%

5.8%

Risk asset ratio - Tier 1 (5)

19.2%

19.7%

17.7%

19.1%

13.2%

Risk asset ratio - Total (5)

23.4%

23.9%

22.9%

24.7%

17.1%

 

 

Notes:

(1)       Basic fully diluted earnings per ordinary share in 2018 is 13.5p. There was no diluted impact in any other year.

(2)       Return on average total assets represents profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders as a percentage of average total assets.

(3)       Return on average total equity represents profit/(loss) attributable to equity owners expressed as a percentage of average shareholder funds.

(4)       Return on average ordinary shareholders’ equity represents profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average ordinary shareholders’ equity.

(5)       2018, 2017, 2016, 2015 and 2014 are calculated on a PRA transitional basis.

 

39


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Financial summary continued

Segmental summary income statements

 

 

Personal & Ulster

 

CPB

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ulster Bank

 

Commercial

Private

RBS

NatWest

Central items

Total

 

UK PB

RoI

 

Banking

Banking

International

Markets

& other

RBS

2018 

£m 

£m 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Net interest income

4,283 

444 

 

2,855 

518 

466 

112 

(22)

8,656 

Non-interest income

771 

166 

 

1,747 

257 

128 

1,330 

347 

4,746 

Total income

5,054 

610 

 

4,602 

775 

594 

1,442 

325 

13,402 

Other expenses

(2,428)

(490)

 

(2,288)

(456)

(260)

(1,213)

(224)

(7,359)

Strategic costs

(226)

(22)

 

(155)

(21)

(9)

(238)

(333)

(1,004)

Litigation and conduct costs

(213)

(71)

 

(44)

(1)

(153)

(809)

(1,282)

Operating expenses

(2,867)

(583)

 

(2,487)

(478)

(260)

(1,604)

(1,366)

(9,645)

Impairment (losses)/releases

(339)

(15)

 

(147)

92 

(398)

Operating profit/(loss)

1,848 

12 

 

1,968 

303 

336 

(70)

(1,038)

3,359 

Return on equity (1)

24.7%

0.5%

 

12.1%

15.4%

24.4%

(2.0%)

nm

5.0%

Cost:income ratio (2)

56.7%

95.6%

 

52.8%

61.7%

43.8%

111.2%

nm

71.7%

Third party customer asset rate (3)

3.36%

2.41%

 

3.02%

2.89%

2.15%

nm

nm

nm

Third party customer funding rate

(0.31%)

(0.20%)

 

(0.32%)

(0.25%)

(0.09%)

nm

nm

nm

Average interest earning assets

160,641 

24,834 

 

145,318 

20,547 

27,266 

27,851 

30,500 

436,957 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

4,342 

421 

 

3,074 

464 

325 

203 

158 

8,987 

Non-interest income

940 

183 

 

1,605 

214 

64 

847 

293 

4,146 

Total income

5,282 

604 

 

4,679 

678 

389 

1,050 

451 

13,133 

Other expenses

(2,618)

(451)

 

(2,354)

(445)

(202)

(1,528)

47 

(7,551)

Strategic costs

(433)

(56)

 

(195)

(45)

(9)

(436)

(391)

(1,565)

Litigation and conduct costs

(190)

(169)

 

(53)

(39)

(8)

(237)

(589)

(1,285)

Operating expenses

(3,241)

(676)

 

(2,602)

(529)

(219)

(2,201)

(933)

(10,401)

Impairment (losses)/releases

(207)

(60)

 

(390)

(6)

(3)

174 

(1)

(493)

Operating profit/(loss)

1,834 

(132)

 

1,687 

143 

167 

(977)

(483)

2,239 

Return on equity (1)

20.4%

(5.0%)

 

9.6%

6.4%

11.2%

(9.0%)

nm

2.5%

Cost:income ratio (2)

61.4%

111.9%

 

54.2%

78.0%

56.3%

209.6%

nm

79.0%

Third party customer asset rate (3)

3.46%

2.38%

 

2.85%

2.71%

2.71%

nm

nm

nm

Third party customer funding rate

(0.16%)

(0.31%)

 

(0.15%)

(0.09%)

(0.02%)

nm

nm

nm

Average interest earning assets

156,077 

25,214 

 

154,553 

18,799 

23,930 

31,231 

12,533 

422,337 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2016 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

4,185 

409 

 

2,903 

449 

303 

343 

116 

8,708 

Non-interest income

795 

167 

 

1,659 

208 

71 

869 

113 

3,882 

Total income

4,980 

576 

 

4,562 

657 

374 

1,212 

229 

12,590 

Other expenses

(2,819)

(457)

 

(2,515)

(511)

(169)

(2,084)

335 

(8,220)

Strategic costs

(232)

(40)

 

(120)

(37)

(5)

(190)

(1,482)

(2,106)

Litigation and conduct costs

(622)

(172)

 

(435)

(1)

— 

(550)

(4,088)

(5,868)

Operating expenses

(3,673)

(669)

 

(3,070)

(549)

(174)

(2,824)

(5,235)

(16,194)

Impairment (losses)/releases

(119)

113 

 

(212)

(10)

(253)

— 

(478)

Operating profit/(loss)

1,188 

20 

 

1,280 

111 

190 

(1,865)

(5,006)

(4,082)

Return on equity (1)

11.8%

0.7%

 

7.3%

5.6%

13.8%

(12.5%)

nm

(20.1%)

Cost:income ratio (2)

73.8%

116.1%

 

66.2%

83.6%

46.5%

nm

nm

129.0%

Third party customer asset rate (3)

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

— 

nm

nm

nm

Third party customer funding rate

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

— 

nm

nm

nm

Average interest earning assets

144,329 

25,193 

 

144,126 

16,887 

22,254 

37,856 

8,953 

399,598 

 

Notes:

(1)       RBS’s CET 1 target is approximately 14% but for the purposes of computing segmental return on equity (ROE), to better reflect the differential drivers of capital usage, segmental operating profit after tax and adjusted for preference share dividends is divided by average notional equity allocated at different rates of 14% (Ulster Bank RoI), 12% (Commercial Banking), 13.5% (Private Banking - 14% prior to Q1 2018), 16% (RBS International - 12% prior to November 2017) and 15% for all other segments, of the monthly average of segmental risk-weighted assets incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes). Return on equity is calculated using profit for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders.

(2)       Operating lease depreciation included in income £121 million (2017 - £142 million; 2016 - £141 million).

(3)       Ulster Bank Ireland DAC manages its funding and liquidity requirements locally. Its liquid asset portfolios and non-customer related funding sources are included within its net interest margin, but excluded from its third party asset and liability rates.

 

40


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

Income

£m 

£m 

£m 

Interest receivable (1,2)

11,049 

11,034 

11,258 

Interest payable (1,2)

(2,393)

(2,047)

(2,550)

Net interest income

8,656 

8,987 

8,708 

 

 

 

 

Net fees and commissions

2,357 

2,455 

2,535 

Income from trading activities

1,507 

634 

974 

  of which: Own credit adjustments

92 

(69)

154 

Other non-interest income

882 

1,057 

373 

Non interest income

4,746 

4,146 

3,882 

Total income

13,402 

13,133 

12,590 

 

Notes:

(1)        Negative interest on net loans to customers is classed as interest payable and on customer deposits is classed as interest receivable.

(2)        Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in income from trading activities.

 

 

2018 compared with 2017

 

·            Total income increased by £269 million, or 2.0%. Excluding notable items, income decreased by £650 million, or 4.8%, primarily reflecting lower NatWest Markets income and reduced net interest income. Excluding notable items, NatWest Markets and Central items, income was stable. Notable items are detailed on page 38.

 

·            Net interest income decreased by £331 million, or 3.7%, driven by margin pressure, active capital management in Commercial Banking, a reduction in the NatWest Markets legacy business and one-off Central items(1)  in 2017.

 

·            Net interest margin was 15 basis points lower than 2017, or 13 basis points lower excluding one-off items(1) reflecting an 8 basis points reduction relating to increased liquidity, 3 basis points from competitive pressures and 2 basis points from mix impacts.

 

·            Structural hedges of £159 billion generated £0.9 billion of incremental net interest income for the year, compared with £1.5 billion of incremental net interest income on a balance of £149 billion in 2017.

 

·            Non-interest income increased by £600 million, or 14.5%. Excluding notable items, non-interest income decreased by £381 million principally due to lower core NatWest Markets income driven by challenging fixed income, currencies and commodities (FICC) market conditions in Q4 2018, together with turbulence in European bond markets earlier in the year.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·            Net interest income of £8,987 million increased by £279 million compared with 2016. The movement was principally driven by higher mortgage volumes in UK PB, up £185 million or 3.7%, and deposit re-pricing benefits in Commercial Banking, up £143 million or 6.7%, partially offset by planned balance sheet reductions in NatWest Markets.

 

·            The net interest margin (NIM) was 2.13% for 2017, 5 basis points lower than 2016 reflecting increased liquidity, mix impacts and competitive pressures on margin.

 

·            Structural hedges of £129 billion generated a benefit of £1.3 billion through net interest income for the year.

 

·            Non-interest income of £4,146 million increased by £264 million, or 6.8%, compared with 2016, primarily reflecting a £185 million debt sale gain in UK PB and a £183 million increase in strategic disposals gains, partially offset by an own credit adjustment loss of £69 million compared with a gain of £180 million in 2016.

 

·            Net fees and commissions decreased by £80 million, or 3.2%, compared with 2016 reflecting a £48 million reduction in UK PB, driven by increased cash back payments as the Reward proposition continued to grow with customer accounts 26% higher than 2016, and lower income in NatWest Markets.

 

·            Income from trading activities, excluding own credit adjustments,  decreased by £117 million, or 14.3%, compared with 2016 primarily reflecting lower income in NatWest Markets, down £247 million, or 29.8%, driven by increased losses in the legacy business. A gain of £2 million for volatile items under IFRS in 2017 compared with a charge of £510 million in 2016. This movement was broadly offset by FX losses of £183 million in 2017, compared with FX gains of £446 million in 2016, following the strengthening of sterling against the US dollar.

 

Note:

(1)        One-off items in 2017 include central interest releases of £30 million and £44 million relating to Capital resolution.

 

41


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Financial summary continued

Statutory analysis (1,2)

 

Non-statutory analysis

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

Operating expenses

£m 

£m 

£m 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Staff expenses

4,122 

4,676 

5,124 

 

3,649 

3,923 

4,482 

Premises and equipment

1,383 

1,565 

1,388 

 

1,241 

1,218 

1,297 

Other administrative expenses

3,372 

3,323 

8,745 

 

1,787 

1,710 

1,619 

Strategic costs (1)

— 

— 

— 

 

1,004 

1,565 

2,106 

Litigation and conduct costs (2)

— 

— 

— 

 

1,282 

1,285 

5,868 

Administrative expenses

8,877 

9,564 

15,257 

 

8,963 

9,701 

15,372 

Depreciation and amortisation

731 

808 

778 

 

645 

684 

705 

Write down of other intangible assets

37 

29 

159 

 

37 

16 

117 

Operating expenses

9,645 

10,401 

16,194 

 

9,645 

10,401 

16,194 

 

 

Notes:

(1)   On a statutory, or GAAP, basis, strategic costs are included within staff, premises and equipment, and other administrative expenses.

(2)   On a statutory, or GAAP, basis, litigation and conduct costs are included within other administrative expenses.

 

 

2018 compared with 2017

 

·             Operating expenses decreased by £756 million, or 7.3%, primarily reflecting £561 million lower strategic costs and a £192 million reduction in other expenses, with litigation and conduct costs remaining broadly stable despite the US Department of Justice charge in the year. Excluding £86 million of one-off VAT releases in 2017, other expenses decreased by £278 million, or 3.6%, and FTEs reduced by 5.8%.

 

·             Strategic costs of £1,004 million included: a £195 million direct charge in NatWest Markets relating to both the wind-down of the legacy business and ongoing development of the core business infrastructure; £177 million in respect of implementing ring-fencing requirements; £171 million of technology costs; a £133 million charge relating to the reduction in our property portfolio; a £76 million net settlement relating to the International Private Bank pension scheme; with the remaining charge largely relating to restructuring costs to achieve cost efficiencies across front and back office operations.

 

·             Litigation and conduct costs of £1,282 million largely comprises the £1,040 million charge relating to the settlement with the Department of Justice and a £200 million charge relating to Payment Protection Insurance, partially offset by a £241 million provision release relating to a RMBS litigation indemnity.

 

·             The cost:income ratio of 71.7% is elevated due to the inclusion of the net RMBS related conduct charge. Excluding this item the cost:income ratio, including strategic costs, would be 65.7%.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·             Total operating expenses of £10,401 million were £5,793 million, or 35.8%, lower than 2016 reflecting a £4,583 million reduction in litigation and conduct costs, a £541 million reduction in restructuring costs, and a £669 million, or 8.1%, reduction in other operating expenses. Excluding VAT recoveries of £86 million (2016 - £227 million), other operating expenses have reduced by £810 million for the year, ahead of our £750 million targeted reduction, with approximately 45% of the total cost reduction delivered across UK PB, Ulster Bank RoI, CPB (comprising the reportable segments Commercial Banking and Private Banking, RBSI and the NatWest Markets core business, adjusting for transfers (1).

 

·             Excluding staff restructuring costs in 2017 and 2016 of £753 million and £642 million respectively, staff costs of £3,923 million were £559 million, or 12.5%, lower than 2016 underpinned by a 6,600, or 8.5%, reduction in FTEs.

 

·             Restructuring costs of £1,565 million included: a £303 million charge relating to the reduction in the property portfolio; a £319 million charge in NatWest Markets principally relating to the run-down and closure of the legacy business; £221 million relating to the business previously described as Williams & Glyn; £194 million in respect of implementing ring-fencing requirements; and a £73 million net settlement relating to the RBS Netherlands pension scheme.

 

·             Litigation and conduct costs of £1,285 million included: additional charges in respect of settlement with Federal Housing Finance Agency (FHFA) and the California State Attorney General and additional RMBS related provisions in the US; a further provision in relation to settling the 2008 rights issue shareholder litigation; an additional £175 million PPI provision; and a £169 million provision in Ulster Bank RoI for customer remediation and project costs relating to tracker mortgages and other legacy business issues.

 

 

Note:

(1)        Refer to footnotes on pages 27 and 28.

 

42


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Financial summary continued

2018 

2017 

Impairments

£m 

£m 

Loans - amortised cost (1)

319,800 

321,633 

ECL provisions (2)

3,368 

3,814 

 

 

 

Impairment losses

 

 

ECL charge (3,4)

398 

493 

ECL loss rate - annualised (basis points)

12.45 

15.33 

Amounts written off

1,494 

1,210 

 

 

Notes:

(1)        The table above summarises loans and related credit impairment measures on an IFRS 9 basis at 31 December 2018 and on an IAS 39 basis at 31 December 2017.

(2)        2018 ECL provisions in the above table are provisions on loan assets only. Other ECL provisions not included, relate to cash, debt securities and contingent liabilities, and amount to £28 million, of which £5 million was FVOCI.

(3)        2018 ECL charge balance in the above table included a £3 million charge relating to other financial assets, of which a £1 million charge related to assets at FVOCI; and a £31 million release related to contingent liabilities.

(4)        2017 comprises loan impairment losses of £530 million and releases on securities of £37 million.

 

2018 compared with 2017

 

·            A net impairment loss of £398 million, 13 basis points of gross customer loans, decreased by £95 million, or 19.3%, compared with 2017 primarily reflecting lower single name charges in Commercial Banking, partially offset by fewer provision releases in UK PB and NatWest Markets.

 

·            In addition, we took an additional £101 million charge in Q3 2018 reflecting the more uncertain economic outlook and a net £60 million impairment charge in Ulster Bank RoI principally in relation to ongoing sales from our loan book to further reduce the level of non performing loans. Underlying credit conditions remained benign during 2018.

 

43


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Tax

 

 

2018

2017

2016

 

£m

£m

£m

Tax charge

(1,208)

(731)

(1,107)

UK corporation tax rate

19.00%

19.25%

20.00%

 

2018 compared with 2017

 

·                  The tax charge for the year ended 31 December 2018 is higher than the UK statutory tax rate reflecting the impact of the banking surcharge, non-deductible bank levy and conduct charges for which no tax relief has been recognised. These factors have been offset partially by adjustments in respect of prior years.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·                  The tax charge for the year ended 31 December 2017 is higher than the UK statutory tax rate reflecting the impact of the banking surcharge, non-deductible bank levy and conduct charges for which no tax relief has been recognised, a reduction in the carrying value and impact of UK tax rate changes on deferred tax balances.  These factors have been offset partially by the release of tax provisions that reflect the reduction of exposures in countries where RBS is ceasing operations.

 

44


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Financial summary continued

 

Summary consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2018

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

 

88,897

 

98,337

 

74,250

Trading assets

 

75,119

 

85,991

 

86,660

Derivatives

 

133,349

 

160,843

 

246,981

Loans to banks - amortised cost

 

12,947

 

11,517

 

12,238

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

305,089

 

310,116

 

307,778

Settlement balances

 

2,928

 

2,517

 

5,526

Other financial assets

 

59,485

 

51,929

 

48,637

Other assets

 

16,421

 

16,806

 

16,586

Total assets

 

694,235

 

738,056

 

798,656

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

23,297

 

30,396

 

13,675

Customer deposits

 

360,914

 

361,316

 

343,498

Trading liabilities

 

72,350

 

81,982

 

84,536

Derivatives

 

128,897

 

154,506

 

236,475

Other financial liabilities

 

42,798

 

33,170

 

30,782

Subordinated liabilities

 

10,535

 

12,722

 

19,419

Other liabilities

 

8,954

 

14,871

 

20,867

Total liabilities

 

647,745

 

688,963

 

749,252

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total equity

 

46,490

 

49,093

 

49,404

Total liabilities and equity

 

694,235

 

738,056

 

798,656

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tangible net asset value per ordinary share (1)

 

287

p

288

p

294p

 

Note:

(1)             Tangible net asset value per ordinary share represents tangible equity divided by the number of ordinary shares in issue

 

From 1 January 2018, the Group adopted IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’. IFRS 9 changed the balance sheet classification categories from IAS 39. Refer to Note 33 for full details of the impact of IFRS 9 on the Group’s balance sheet.

 

·     Total assets of £694.2 billion as at 31 December 2018 were down £43.8 billion, 5.9%, compared with 31 December 2017. This was primarily driven by reductions in trading assets and derivatives reflecting the wind-down of the legacy business and management of the leverage exposure.

 

·     Cash and balances at central banks decreased by £9.4 billion, 9.6%, to £88.9 billion representing liquidity management, the payment of the settlement with the US Department of Justice and the pension contribution in the year.

 

·     Trading assets decreased by £10.9 billion, 12.6%, to £75.1 billion and trading liabilities decreased by £9.6 billion, 11.7%, to £72.4 billion mainly due to the wind-down of the legacy business in NatWest Markets.

 

·     Movements in the value of derivative assets, down £27.5 billion, 17.1%, to £133.3 billion, and liabilities, down £25.6 billion, 16.6% to £128.9 billion, due to trading volumes and valuations in NatWest Markets.

 

·     Loans to customers - amortised cost, decreased by £5.0 billion, 1.6%, to £305.1 billion including £3.5 billion in Commercial Banking due to active capital management, activity and approximately £0.7 billion, in Ulster Bank RoI, primarily in relation to the sale of a portfolio of non-performing loans.

 

·     Other financial assets includes debt securities, equity shares and other loans and increased by £7.6 billion, 14.6%, to £59.5 billion, primarily reflecting increases in the liquidity portfolio driven by increased customer surplus within in the ring-fenced banks, reduced funding requirement and net term issuance in NatWest Markets.

 

·     Other assets includes property, plant & equipment, deferred tax, assets of disposal groups, accruals, deferred income and pension scheme surpluses and decreased by £0.4 billion, 2.3% to £16.4 billion.

 

·     Bank deposits decreased by £7.1 billion, 23.4%, to £23.3 billion, with decreases relating to funding management including a £5 billion payment in relation to the Bank of England Term Funding Scheme participation.

 

·     Customer deposits decreased by £0.4 billion, 0.1% to £360.9 billion with increases in UK PB, Ulster Bank RoI and Private Banking offset by decreases in Commercial Banking and RBS International.

 

·     Other financial liabilities included customer deposits at fair value through profit and loss and debt securities and increased by £9.6 billion, 29.0%, to £42.8 billion primarily including issuances in the year of covered bonds and MREL in the year.

 

·     Subordinated liabilities decreased by £2.2 billion, 17.2% to £10.5 billion, primarily as a result of redemptions of £2.0 billion reflecting on-going liability management activities.

 

·     Other liabilities included deferred awards, deferred income, notes in circulation and accruals and decreased by £5.9 billion, 39.8% to £9.0 billion mainly due to the reduction in provisions in the year, primarily in relation to the settlement with the US Department of Justice.

 

·     Owners’ equity decreased by £2.6 billion, 5.4%, to £45.7 billion, primarily driven by preference share redemptions and the pension contribution in the year offset by the £2.1 billion profit for the year.

 

Cash flow

Refer to page 185 for the consolidated cash flow statement.

 

45


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance

 

UK Personal Banking

 

Income statement

 

2018

 

2017 

 

2016

 

£m

 

£m 

 

£m

Net interest income

 

4,283

 

4,342

 

4,185

Non-interest income

 

771

 

940

 

795

Total income

 

5,054

 

5,282

 

4,980

Other costs

 

(2,428)

 

(2,618)

 

(2,819)

Strategic costs

 

(226)

 

(433)

 

(232)

Litigation and conduct costs

 

(213)

 

(190)

 

(622)

Operating expenses

 

(2,867)

 

(3,241)

 

(3,673)

Impairment losses

 

(339)

 

(207)

 

(119)

Operating profit

 

1,848

 

1,834

 

1,188

Performance ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on equity (1)

 

24.7%

 

20.4%

 

11.8%

Net interest margin

 

2.67%

 

2.78%

 

2.90%

Cost:income ratio

 

56.7%

 

61.4%

 

73.8%

 

Note:

(1)        Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 15% of the monthly average of segmental RWAes, assuming 28% tax rate.

 

Capital and balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - personal advances

 

7.6

 

7.1

 

6.9

  - mortgages

 

138.4

 

136.9

 

128.0

  - cards

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.2

Total loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

150.0

 

148.0

 

139.1

Loan impairment provisions

 

(1.1

)

(1.0

)

(1.1)

Net loans to customers

 

148.9

 

147.0

 

138.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

171.0

 

166.6

 

157.3

Customer deposits

 

145.3

 

142.2

 

133.4

Risk-weighted assets

 

34.3

 

31.5

 

37.6

 

46


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

2018 compared with 2017

 

·     UK PB now has 5.9 million regular mobile app users, 17% higher than 2017, with 71% of our active current account customers being regular digital users. Total digital sales increased by 19% representing 44% of all sales. 61% of mortgage switching is now done digitally, compared with 51% in 2017. 57% of personal unsecured loans sales are via the digital channel, with digital volumes 31% higher.

 

·     Total income was £228 million, or 4.3%, lower reflecting £124 million lower debt sale gains and a £33 million transfer of the Collective Investment Funds business to Private Banking in Q4 2017(2). Excluding these items, income was £71 million, or 1.4%, lower, including a £28 million reduction in overdraft fees following changes implemented in H2 2017, which included increasing the number of customer alerts. Net interest income of £4,283 million decreased by 1.4% as balance growth and deposit margin benefits were offset by lower mortgage new business margins, with net interest margin down by 11 basis points to 2.67%.

 

·     Operating expenses decreased by £374 million, or 11.5%. Excluding strategic, litigation and conduct costs, operating expenses were £190 million, or 7.3%, lower driven by reduced back-office operations costs and lower headcount reflecting continued operating efficiencies, partially offset by increased technology investment spend as we continue to build our digital capability.

 

·     Impairments were £132 million higher driven by fewer provision releases and lower recoveries following debt sales in prior years, as well as increased provisioning requirements under IFRS 9. The underlying default rate remained broadly stable with asset growth also accounting for an element of the uplift.

 

·     Net loans to customers increased by 1.3% to £148.9 billion. The business has maintained a prudent approach to risk and pricing in a very competitive market, with gross new mortgage lending in 2018 at £30.4 billion, 1.9% lower than 2017. Mortgage market share was maintained at 11.3% supporting a stock share of around 10%. Momentum continued in personal advances, increasing by 7.0%.

 

·     Customer deposits increased by £3.1 billion, or 2.2%, as growth continued across current accounts and savings.

 

·     RWAs increased by £2.8 billion, or 8.9%, principally due to modelling changes on mortgages and unsecured loans.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·     Operating profit was £1,834 million compared with £1,188 million in 2016. The increase was driven by higher income, lower litigation and conduct charges and lower other operating expenses, partially offset by higher restructuring costs, largely relating to the reduction in our property portfolio and costs associated with the business previously described as Williams & Glyn(1), and higher impairments. Return on equity increased to 20.4% from 11.8% in 2016.

 

·     Total income of £5,282 million was £302 million, or 6.1%, higher than 2016, principally reflecting strong balance growth, savings re-pricing benefits and a £185 million debt sale gain. Net interest margin declined by 12 basis points to 2.78% driven by lower mortgage margins, asset mix and reduced current account hedge yield, partially offset by savings re-pricing benefits from actions taken in 2016 and following the Q4 2017 base rate increase.

 

·     Operating expenses decreased £432 million, or 11.8%, to £3,241 million. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, other operating expenses decreased by £201 million, or 7.1%, to £2,618 million compared with 2016 driven by a £42 million, or 6.8%, reduction in staff costs, with headcount down 8.4%, and a £53 million reduction in operational costs following process and productivity improvements in service operations and re-integration benefits in respect of the business previously described as Williams & Glyn(1). Cost:income ratio improved to 61.4% in 2017 compared with 73.8% in 2016.

 

·     The net impairment charge of £207 million, or 14 basis points of gross customer loans, reflected continued benign credit conditions. 2017 had lower recoveries partly as a result of the debt sales undertaken, compared with 2016. Defaults remained at very low levels across all portfolios compared to historic trends, although slightly higher than in 2016.

 

·     Net loans and advances increased by £9.0 billion, or 6.5%, to £147.0 billion as UK PB continued to deliver support for personal banking customers. Gross new mortgage lending in 2017 was £31.0 billion with market share of new mortgages at approximately 12%, resulting in stock share of approximately 10% at 31 December 2017 compared with 9.7% at 31 December 2016.

 

·     Customer deposits increased by £8.8 billion, or 6.6%, to £142.2 billion, driven by strong personal current account growth.

 

Notes:

(1)   The business previously described as Williams & Glyn was integrated in to the reportable operating segment UK PB in Q4 2017 and prior year comparatives re-presented.

(2)   UK PB Collective Investment Funds (CIFL) business was transferred to Private Banking on 1 October 2017. CIFL Business transfer included total income of £33 million and total expenses of £9 million. Comparatives were not re-presented.

 

47


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Ulster Bank RoI

 

Income statement

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

m

 

m

 

m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Net interest income

 

502

 

480

 

501

 

444

 

421

 

409

Non-interest income

 

187

 

209

 

100

 

166

 

183

 

167

Total income

 

689

 

689

 

704

 

610

 

604

 

576

Other costs

 

(553)

 

(516)

 

(559)

 

(490)

 

(451)

 

(457)

Strategic costs

 

(25)

 

(64)

 

(48)

 

(22)

 

(56)

 

(40)

Litigation and conduct costs

 

(79)

 

(192)

 

(211)

 

(71)

 

(169)

 

(172)

Operating expenses

 

(657)

 

(772)

 

(818)

 

(583)

 

(676)

 

(669)

Impairment losses

 

(17)

 

(68)

 

138

 

(15)

 

(60)

 

113

Operating profit/(loss)

 

15

 

(151)

 

24

 

12

 

(132)

 

20

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Average exchange rate  -

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.130

 

1.142

 

1.224

Performance ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on equity (1)

 

0.5%

 

(5.0%)

 

0.7%

 

0.5%

 

(5.0%)

 

0.7%

Net interest margin

 

1.79%

 

1.67%

 

1.62%

 

1.79%

 

1.67%

 

1.62%

Cost:income ratio

 

95.6%

 

111.9%

 

116.1%

 

95.6%

 

111.9%

 

116.1%

 

Note:

(1)            Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference share dividends divided by average notional equity (based on 14% of the monthly average of segmental risk-weighted assets incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes)), assuming a nil tax rate.

 

Capital and balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

bn

 

bn

 

bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 - mortgages

 

16.0

 

17.3

 

17.9

 

14.4

 

15.4

 

15.3

 - other lending

 

5.9

 

6.0

 

5.6

 

5.2

 

5.2

 

4.8

Total loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

21.9

 

23.3

 

23.5

 

19.6

 

20.6

 

20.1

Loan impairment provisions

 

(0.9)

 

(1.3)

 

(1.4)

 

(0.8)

 

(1.1)

 

(1.2)

Net loans to customers

 

21.0

 

22.0

 

22.1

 

18.8

 

19.5

 

18.9

Total assets

 

28.1

 

27.7

 

28.2

 

25.2

 

24.6

 

24.1

Funded assets

 

28.1

 

27.6

 

28.0

 

25.2

 

24.5

 

24.0

Customer deposits

 

20.1

 

19.1

 

17.7

 

18.0

 

16.9

 

15.2

Risk-weighted assets

 

16.4

 

20.2

 

21.1

 

14.7

 

18.0

 

18.1

Spot exchange rate -

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1.117

 

1.127

 

1.168

 

48


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

2018 compared with 2017

 

·   Ulster Bank RoI continued to strengthen its digital proposition in 2018 through enhancements to digital and mobile customer offerings.  69% of our active personal current account customers are choosing to bank with us through digital channels. A faster, more convenient and secure digital application experience was introduced for customers who are applying for current accounts and personal loans and further enhancements were made to the mobile app during the year. Mobile payments and transfers increased 36% compared with 2017, reflecting the continued customer migration from physical to digital channels.

 

·   Total income was in line with 2017. Net interest income increased by £23 million, or 5.5% (€22 million, or 4.6% in euro terms), supporting a 12 basis point increase in net interest margin, primarily driven by an improving asset mix, lower cost of deposits and a one-off funding benefit in 2018, partially offset by a reduction in income on free funds. Non-interest income decreased by £17 million, or 9.3% (€22 million, or 10.5% in euro terms), principally due to a lower number of non-recurring benefits and a reduction in fee income.

 

·   Operating expenses decreased by £93 million, or 13.8% (€115 million, or 14.9% in euro terms), principally due to a £98 million (€113 million) reduction in litigation and conduct costs and £34 million (€39 million) lower strategic costs. 2018 included a £71 million (€79 million) conduct and litigation provision for customer remediation and project costs associated with legacy business issues. Other expenses increased by £39 million (€37 million) primarily reflecting: the investment made into strengthening the risk, compliance and control environment; increased bank levies and regulatory fees; and higher spend on technology and innovation.

 

·   A net impairment charge of £15 million (€17 million) reflects a charge associated with a non-performing loan sale partially offset by observable improvements in the performance of the loan portfolio.

 

·   Net loans to customers reduced by £0.7 billion, or 3.6% (€1.0 billion, or 4.5% in euro terms), principally reflecting the sale of a portfolio of non-performing loans of £0.5 billion (€0.6 billion) in 2018 and a continued reduction in the tracker mortgage book.

 

·   Customer deposits increased by £1.1 billion, or 6.5% (€1.0 billion, or 5.2% in euro terms), supporting a reduction in the loan:deposit ratio to 105% from 115%.

 

·   RWAs reduced by £3.3 billion, or 18.3% (€3.8 billion, or 18.8% in euro terms), principally reflecting the impact of the non-performing loan sale and an improvement in credit metrics.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·   An operating loss of £132 million (€151 million) compared with a £20 million (€24 million) profit in 2016 primarily reflecting a £173 million (€206 million) increase in impairment losses, largely relating to a change in the non performing loan strategy to allow for further portfolio sales.

 

·   Total income of £604 million (€689 million) was £28 million, or 4.9% higher than in 2016 (€15 million, or 2.1% lower in euro terms). Adjusted income(1) of £607 million (€693 million) was £34 million, or 5.9% higher than 2016 (€8 million, or 1.1%, lower than 2016 in euro terms), primarily reflecting a £46 million (€53 million) reduction in income on free funds, partially offset by one off items, higher lending income and reduced funding costs. Net interest margin of 1.67% was 5 basis points higher than 2016 reflecting a combination of improved deposit and loan margins, one-off income adjustments and successful deleveraging measures in 2016 which have reduced the concentration of low yielding loans.

 

·   Operating expenses were £676 million, an increase of £7 million, or 1.0% compared with 2016 (a decrease of €46 million, or 5.6% to €772 million in euro terms). Excluding restructuring, and litigation and conduct costs, other operating expenses(1) decreased £6 million or 1.3% to £451 million; in euro terms other operating expenses of €516 million were €43 million, or 7.7%, lower than 2016. This was primarily due to continued progress in the delivery of cost saving initiatives, as evidenced by a 12.9% reduction in headcount, and lower pension costs. Cost:income ratio was 111.9% compared with 116.1% in 2016.

 

·   A litigation and conduct provision of £169 million (€192 million) related to customer remediation and project costs associated with legacy business issues.

 

·   A net impairment loss of £60 million (€68 million) compared with a £113 million (€138 million) release in 2016. The movement was driven by a provision relating to a change in the non performing loan strategy to allow for further portfolio sales, gains associated with asset disposals in 2016 and refinements to the mortgage provision models in 2017. REILs were £3.3 billion, 5.7% lower than 2016 (€3.7 billion, 9.8% in euro terms) reflecting credit quality improvements.

 

·   Ulster Bank RoI gross new lending was £2.3 billion in 2017, up 7.2% compared with 2016 (€2.6 billion, up 3.4% in euro terms).

 

·   RWAs remained stable at £18.0 billion, compared with £18.1 billion in 2016. In euro terms, RWAs of €20.2 billion reduced by €0.9 billion, or 4.3%, compared with 2016.

 

Note:

(1)  Excludes: Income - own credit adjustments of £3 million debit (2016 - £3 million credit); Costs - restructuring costs of £56 million (2016 - £40 million) and litigation and conduct costs of £169 million (2016 - £172 million).

 

49


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

 

Commercial Banking

 

Income statement

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Net interest income

 

2,855

 

3,074

 

2,903

Non-interest income

 

1,747

 

1,605

 

1,659

Total income

 

4,602

 

4,679

 

4,562

Other costs

 

(2,288

)

(2,354

)

(2,515)

Strategic costs

 

(155

)

(195

)

(120)

Litigation and conduct costs

 

(44

)

(53

)

(435)

Operating expenses

 

(2,487

)

(2,602

)

(3,070)

Impairment losses

 

(147

)

(390

)

(212)

Operating profit

 

1,968

 

1,687

 

1,280

Performance ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on equity (1)

 

12.1%

 

9.6%

 

7.3%

Net interest margin

 

1.96%

 

1.99%

 

2.01%

Cost:income ratio

 

52.8%

 

54.2%

 

66.2%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital and balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - SME & mid-corporates

 

30.0

 

30.7

 

32.2

  - large corporates

 

18.3

 

21.5

 

22.9

  - real estate

 

20.7

 

22.9

 

24.8

  - specialised business

 

18.0

 

19.7

 

20.5

  - business banking

 

6.7

 

6.7

 

6.3

  - commercial

 

7.0

 

8.3

 

8.8

  - other

 

2.0

 

3.3

 

0.4

Total loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

102.7

 

113.1

 

115.9

Loan impairment provisions

 

(1.3

)

(1.5

)

(1.2)

Net loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

101.4

 

111.6

 

114.7

Total assets

 

166.4

 

173.5

 

174.6

Customer deposits (excluding repos)

 

134.4

 

136.2

 

134.0

Loan:deposit ratio (excluding repos)

 

76%

 

82%

 

86%

Risk-weighted assets

 

78.4

 

83.3

 

83.2

 

Notes:

(1)     Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 11% of the monthly average of segmental RWAe, assuming 28% tax rate.

(2)     Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by preparations for ring-fencing, including the transfer of shipping and other activities from NatWest Markets, the transfer of whole business securitisations and Relevant Financial Institutions and other activities to NatWest Markets and the transfer of the funds and trustee depositary business to RBS International. The net impact of transfers on 2017 would have been to reduce income by £246 million, operating expenses by £10 million, impairments by £72 million, net loans to customers by £5.3 billion, customer deposits by £1.2 billion and RWAs by £2.2 billion. There is an additional £1.4 billion reduction in 2017 net loans to customers as a result of 2018 asset reclassifications under IFRS9. The variances in the commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these items excluding net interest margin.

 

50


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)

 

·   Commercial Banking successfully launched the Bankline mobile app in the Apple app store, whilst our lending journey now enables customers to apply digitally for loans of up to £750,000 through a self-service application process. This is the largest value offered by a UK commercial bank, giving customers rapid, digital access to funding decisions, with approximately 50% of loan applications given a decision in principle in under 24 hours. In Commercial Banking, 91% of current accounts and 68% of loans under £50,000 were originated digitally.

 

·   Total income increased by £169 million, or 3.8%, reflecting asset disposal and fair value gains of £169 million, compared with a £64 million loss in 2017, partially offset by lower lending. Net interest margin decreased by 3 basis points to 1.96% primarily reflecting reclassification of net interest income to non-interest income under IFRS 9, the impact of transfers and asset margin compression, partially offset by higher funding benefits from deposit balances.

 

·   Operating expenses decreased by £105 million, or 4.1%. Excluding strategic, litigation and conduct costs, operating expenses were £39 million, or 1.7%, lower reflecting continued operating model simplification.

 

·   Impairments decreased by £171 million, or 53.8%, mainly reflecting lower single name charges.

 

·   Net loans to customers decreased by £3.5 billion, or 3.3%, principally driven by significant active capital management reductions, with underlying lending growth of £3.5 billion in Commercial Banking. At Q3 2018, we announced an additional £2 billion of growth funding to help British businesses prepare for the Brexit transition, bringing the total commitment to £3 billion.

 

·   Customer deposits decreased by £0.6 billion, or 0.4%, supporting a broadly stable loan:deposit ratio of 76%.

 

·   RWAs decreased by £2.7 billion, or 3.3%, driven by £10.5 billion of gross RWA reductions associated with active capital management, partially offset by model updates, underlying business growth and partial reinvestment of gross RWA reductions through refinancing to existing clients under our revised pricing framework in Commercial Banking.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·   Operating profit of £1,687 million compared with £1,280 million in 2016, primarily reflecting a reduction in litigation and conduct costs. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs,  operating profit of £935 million, was £100 million, or 5.4%, higher than 2016, reflecting lower operating expenses and higher income, partially offset by higher impairments.

 

·   Total income increased by £117 million, or 2.6%, to £4,679 million primarily reflecting increased volumes in targeted segments and re-pricing benefits on deposits. Net interest margin decreased by 2 basis points as active re-pricing of assets and deposits has been more than offset by wider asset margin pressure in a low rate environment.

 

·   Operating expenses decreased by £468 million to £2,602 million. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, other operating expenses of £2,247 million, were £127 million, or 5.3%, lower than 2016, reflecting operating model simplification and productivity improvements, including a 13.9% reduction in front office headcount. The cost:income ratio improved to 54.2% compared with 66.2% in 2016.

 

·   Net impairment losses of £390 million were £178 million higher than 2016, reflecting a small number of single name impairments.

 

·   Net loans and advances decreased by £3.1 billion to £111.6 billion. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £1.8 billion, net loans and advances decreased by £4.9 billion to £109.8 billion, compared with 2016, as growth in targeted segments has been more than offset by active capital management of the lending book.

 

·   RWAs increased by £0.1 billion to £83.3 billion. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £1.5 billion, RWAs decreased by £1.4 billion, or 1.7%, to £81.8 billion compared with 2016 reflecting active capital management of the lending book, achieving £12.5 billion of gross RWA reductions.

 

Notes:

(1)  Excluding restructuring costs, and litigation and conduct costs.

(2)  Shipping and other activities, which were formerly in Capital Resolution, were transferred from NatWest Markets on 1 October 2017, including net loans and advances to customers of £2.6 billion and RWAs of £2.1 billion. Commercial Banking transferred whole business securitisations and relevant financial institution’s (RFI) to NatWest Markets during December 2017, including net loans and advances to customers of £0.8 billion and RWAs of £0.6 billion. Comparatives were not re-presented for these transfers.

 

51


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

 

Private Banking

 

Income statement

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Net interest income

 

518

 

464

 

449

Non-interest income

 

257

 

214

 

208

Total income

 

775

 

678

 

657

Other costs

 

(456)

 

(445)

 

(511)

Strategic costs

 

(21)

 

(45)

 

(37)

Litigation and conduct costs

 

(1)

 

(39)

 

(1)

Operating expenses

 

(478)

 

(529)

 

(549)

Impairment releases/(losses)

 

6

 

(6)

 

3

Operating profit

 

303

 

143

 

111

Performance ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on equity (1)

 

15.4%

 

6.4%

 

5.6%

Net interest margin

 

2.52%

 

2.47%

 

2.66%

Cost:income ratio

 

61.7%

 

78.0%

 

83.6%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital and balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - personal

 

2.0

 

2.3

 

2.3

  - mortgages

 

8.9

 

8.2

 

7.0

  - other

 

3.4

 

3.0

 

2.9

Total Net loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

14.3

 

13.5

 

12.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

22.0

 

20.3

 

18.6

Assets under management (2)

 

19.8

 

21.5

 

17.0

Customer deposits

 

28.4

 

26.9

 

26.6

Loan:deposit ratio

 

50%

 

50%

 

46%

Risk-weighted assets

 

9.4

 

9.1

 

8.6

 

Notes:

(1)   Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 13.5% (14% prior to Q1 2018) of the monthly average of segmental RWAes, assuming 28% tax rate.

(2)   Comprises assets under management, assets under custody and investment cash.

(3)   Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfer of the Collective Investment Fund business from UK PB and by the transfers of Coutts Crown Dependency and the International Client Group Jersey to RBS International. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £24 million and operating expenses by £15 million and reduce net loans to customers by £0.1 billion, customer deposits by £0.5 billion and assets under management by £0.7 billion. The variances in the commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers excluding net interest margin.

 

52


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)

 

·   Approximately 60% of clients bank with us digitally and 94% of clients positively rate our Coutts24 telephony service. Private Banking also recently launched Coutts Connect, a social platform which allows clients to network and build working relationships with one another.

 

·   Total income increased by £73 million, or 10.4%, largely due to increased lending, higher funding benefits from deposit balances and higher investment income. Net interest margin increased by 5 basis points as higher deposit income was partially offset by asset margin pressure.

 

·   Operating expenses decreased by £66 million, or 12.1%. Excluding strategic, litigation and conduct costs, operating expenses decreased by £4 million, or 0.8% driven by operating model efficiencies.

 

·   A net impairment release of £6 million largely reflects a £9m release in Q4 2018 due to data quality improvements.

 

·   Net loans to customers increased by £0.9 billion, or 6.7%, primarily in mortgages.

 

·   Customer deposits increased by £2.0 billion, or 7.6%, mainly due to higher personal client account balances.

 

·   Assets under management decreased by £1.0 billion, or 4.8%, reflecting market movements partially offset by new business inflows of £0.6 billion.

 

·   Private Banking manages a further £6.7 billion of assets under management on behalf of RBS Group which sit outside of Private Banking. Total assets under management overseen by Private Banking have decreased by 5.7% to £26.5 billion as a result of market movements partially offset by net new business.

 

·   RWAs increased by £0.3 billion, or 3.3%, relative to 6.7% growth in net loans to customers.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·   Operating profit increased by £32 million, or 28.8%, to £143 million compared with 2016 and return on equity increased from 5.6% to 6.4%. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, adjusted operating profit of £227 million was £78 million, or 52.3%, higher than 2016 primarily reflecting lower other operating expenses and higher income. Adjusted return on equity(1) increased to 11.3% from 7.8% in 2016.

 

·   Total income increased by £21 million to £678 million. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £9 million, total income increased by £12 million to £678 million due to increased lending volumes and an £8 million gain on a property sale, partially offset by ongoing margin pressure. Net interest margin fell 19 basis points to 2.47% reflecting the competitive market and low rate environment.

 

·   Operating expenses decreased by £20 million to £529 million. Excluding litigation and conduct costs, and restructuring costs, adjusted operating expenses of £445 million decreased by £66 million, or 12.9%, compared with 2016 largely reflecting management actions to reduce costs, including an 11.8% reduction in front office headcount. The cost:income ratio improved to 78.0% from 83.6% in 2016.

 

·   Net loans and advances of £13.5 billion were £1.3 billion, or 10.7%, higher than 2016 principally driven by growth in mortgages.

 

·   Assets under management were £4.5 billion higher than 2016 at £21.5 billion. Adjusting for transfers(2) of £2.1 billion, assets under management were £2.4 billion, or 14.4%, higher than 2016 at £21.5 billion, reflecting both organic growth and favourable market conditions.

 

·   RWAs of £9.1 billion were £0.5 billion, or 5.8%, higher than 2016 primarily due to increased mortgage lending.

 

Notes:

(1)       Excluding restructuring costs, litigation and conduct costs and write down of goodwill.

(2)       The UK PB Collective Investment Funds (CIFL) business was transferred from UK PB on 1 October 2017, including total income in Q4 2017 of £11 million and assets under management of £3.3 billion. Private Banking transferred Coutts Crown Dependencies (CCD) to RBS International during Q4 2017, including total income of £2 million and assets under management of £1.2 billion. Comparatives were not re-presented for these transfers.

 

53


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

 

RBS International

 

Income statement

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Net interest income

 

466

 

325

 

303

Non-interest income

 

128

 

64

 

71

Total income

 

594

 

389

 

374

Other costs

 

(260)

 

(202)

 

(169)

Strategic costs

 

(9)

 

(9)

 

(5)

Litigation and conduct costs

 

9

 

(8)

 

Operating expenses

 

(260)

 

(219)

 

(174)

Impairment releases/(losses)

 

2

 

(3)

 

(10)

Operating profit

 

336

 

167

 

190

Performance ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on equity (1)

 

24.4%

 

11.2%

 

13.8%

Net interest margin

 

1.71%

 

1.36%

 

1.36%

Cost:income ratio

 

43.8%

 

56.3%

 

46.5%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital and balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - corporate

 

10.2

 

5.7

 

6.2

  - mortgages

 

2.7

 

2.7

 

2.6

  - other

 

0.4

 

0.3

 

Total Net loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

13.3

 

8.7

 

8.8

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

28.4

 

25.9

 

23.4

Customer deposits

 

27.5

 

28.9

 

25.1

Risk-weighted assets

 

6.9

 

5.1

 

9.5

 

Notes:

(1)       Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity based on 16% (12% prior to November 2017) of the monthly average of segmental RWAes

(2)       Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfer of the funds and trustee depositary business from Commercial Banking and by the transfer of Coutts Crown Dependency and the International Client Group from Private Banking. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £151 million and operating expenses by £14 million, net loans to customers by £4.5 billion, customer deposits by £1.7 billion and RWAs by £1.9 billion. The variances in the commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers excluding net interest margin.

 

54


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)

 

·   The RBS International mobile app has been further developed to include new functionality, allowing customers to manage their finances more effectively and has 67 thousand users, an increase of 23% from 2017. 71% of wholesale customer payments are now processed using our newly introduced international banking platform, making the payments process simpler for customers.

 

·   Total income increased by £54 million, or 10.0%, largely driven by deposit margin benefits. Institutional Banking contributed 62% to income in 2018, with Local Banking contributing 32% and Depositary Services 6%. Net interest margin increased by 35 basis points primarily driven by the impact of transfers and a change in product mix.

 

·   Operating expenses increased by £27 million, or 11.6%, due to £39 million higher back-office costs associated with becoming a non ring-fenced bank and £5 million of remediation costs, partially offset by lower conduct and litigation costs.

 

·   Impairments decreased by £5 million reflecting a number of small releases and improvements in underlying lending quality.

 

·   Net loans to customers remained broadly stable at £13.3 billion and are split: £9.2 billion within Institutional Banking, of which £2.2 billion relates to real estate exposures; and £4.1 billion in Local Banking, of which £2.7 billion relates to mortgages.

 

·   Customer deposits decreased by £3.1 billion reflecting a large inflow of short term placements in Institutional Banking in 2017. Customer deposits represent RBS International’s primary funding source and are split: £18.1 billion Institutional Banking and £9.4 billion Local Banking.

 

·   RWAs decreased by £0.1 billion, or 1.4%, with model updates offset by business movements.

 

·   During 2018, we repositioned our balance sheet so that excess funds previously placed with RBS Group are now deployed into funding customer assets in our new London branch. We have also established a liquidity portfolio across central and correspondent banks and sovereign bond holdings. These changes provide continuity for our customers and support compliance with incoming Basel III Liquidity Coverage Ratio rules.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·   Operating profit of £167 million decreased by £23 million, or 12.1%, compared with 2016 and return on equity decreased to 11.2% from 13.8%, reflecting increased operational costs associated with the creation of a bank outside the ring-fence, partially offset by higher income. Adjusted return on equity(1) decreased to 12.6% from 14.2% in 2016 .

 

·   Total income increased by £15 million, or 4.0%, to £389 million driven by increased average lending balances in 2017 and re-pricing benefits on the deposit book.

 

·   Net loans and advances were broadly stable compared with 2016 and customer deposits increased by £3.8 billion to £28.9 billion primarily reflecting increased short term placements in the Funds sector.

 

·   RWAs of £5.1 billion reduced by £4.4 billion, or 46.3%, compared with 2016, reflecting the benefit of receiving the Advanced Internal Rating Based Waiver on the wholesale corporate book in November 2017, in advance of becoming a bank outside the ring-fence.

 

·   From 1st Jan 2018 RBS International will include the funds and trustee depositary business transferred from Commercial Banking, which generated around £150 million of income and £60 million of costs in 2017.

 

Note:

(1)  Excluding restructuring costs.

 

55


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

 

NatWest Markets

 

Income statement

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Net interest income

 

112

 

203

 

343

Non-interest income

 

1,330

 

847

 

869

Total income

 

1,442

 

1,050

 

1,212

Other costs

 

(1,213)

 

(1,528)

 

(2,084)

Strategic costs

 

(238)

 

(436)

 

(190)

Litigation and conduct costs

 

(153)

 

(237)

 

(550)

Operating expenses

 

(1,604)

 

(2,201)

 

(2,824)

Impairment releases

 

92

 

174

 

(253)

Operating loss

 

(70)

 

(977)

 

(1,865)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Analysis of income by product

 

 

 

 

 

 

Rates

 

662

 

959

 

807

Currencies

 

432

 

496

 

581

Financing

 

382

 

456

 

344

Revenue share paid to other segments

 

(217)

 

(246)

 

(211)

Core income excluding OCA

 

1,259

 

1,665

 

1,521

Legacy

 

91

 

(549)

 

(496)

Own credit adjustments

 

92

 

(66)

 

187

Total income

 

1,442

 

1,050

 

1,212

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performance ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on equity (2)

 

(2.0%)

 

(9.0%)

 

(12.5%)

Net interest margin

 

0.40%

 

0.65%

 

0.91%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital and balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Net loans to customers (amortised cost)

 

8.4

 

9.7

 

13.1

Total assets

 

244.5

 

277.9

 

372.5

Funded assets

 

111.4

 

118.7

 

128.5

Customer deposits

 

2.6

 

3.3

 

5.1

Risk-weighted assets

 

44.9

 

52.9

 

69.7

 

Notes:

(1)       The NatWest Markets operating segment should not be assumed to be the same as the NatWest Markets Plc legal entity or group.

(2)       Return on equity is based on segmental operating profit after tax adjusted for preference dividends divided by average notional equity (based on 15% of the monthly average of segmental risk-weighted assets incorporating the effect of capital deductions (RWAes)), assuming 28% tax rate.

(3)       Comparisons with prior periods are impacted by the transfer of shipping and other activities to Commercial Banking and the transfer of whole business securitisations and Relevant Financial Institutions from Commercial Banking in preparation for ring-fencing. The net impact of the transfers on 2017 would have been to increase income by £104 million, reduce operating expenses by £2 million, reduce the net release of impairments by £72 million and increase funded assets by £1.3 billion and RWAs by £0.4 billion. The variances in the full year commentary below have been adjusted for the impact of these transfers.

 

56


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

2018 compared with 2017 (comparisons adjusted for transfers)

 

·   NatWest Markets continues to focus on customer service and is increasingly using technology to enhance the way it provides innovative financial solutions to its customers and partners. For example, FXmicropay makes it simpler for businesses operating globally to accept payments in multiple currencies, reducing costs and increasing revenues for our customers. Our success in harnessing technology has been recognised with two awards: Best in Service Globally among Corporates for Algorithmic trading in the 2018 Euromoney FX Survey and Best Order Management award in the Profit & Loss 2018 Digital FX Awards.

 

·   Total income increased by £288 million, or 25.0%, primarily reflecting lower disposal losses in the legacy business and a £165 million indemnity insurance recovery, partially offset by lower income in the core business. The reduction in the core business was driven by challenging fixed income, currencies and commodities (FICC) market conditions in Q4 2018, together with turbulence in European bond markets earlier in the year.

 

·   Operating expenses decreased by £595 million, or 27.1%. This reflects reductions in other expenses across both the core and legacy businesses, down £313 million to £1,213 million, lower strategic costs, down £198 million to £238 million, and reduced litigation and conduct costs, down £84 million to £153 million.

 

·   The net impairment release decreased by £10 million to £92 million reflecting a lower level of legacy releases.

 

·   Funded assets decreased by £8.6 billion, or 7.2%, reflecting the wind down of the legacy business.

 

·   RWAs decreased by £8.4 billion to £44.9 billion, including RWAs for Alawwal bank of £5.9 billion. The decrease was driven by the legacy business, down £7.1 billion, in addition to reductions in the core business.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

·   An operating loss of £977 million compared with £1,865 million in 2016. The core business operating profit increased by £427 million to £41 million reflecting lower litigation and conduct costs and higher income, partially offset by increased restructuring costs reflecting back office restructuring activity. Adjusted operating loss(1) of £264 million, compared with £1,231 million in 2016, reflecting lower adjusted costs(1) and a net impairment release of £174 million in 2017, compared with a charge of £253 million in 2016.

 

·   Total income of £1,050 million compared with £1,212 million in 2016. In the core business, total income increased by £42 million, or 2.7%, to £1,616 million, whereas adjusted income(1) increased by £144 million, or 9.5%, to £1,665 million, principally driven by Rates as the business navigated markets well despite a lower level of customer activity than in 2016, which benefited from favourable market conditions following the EU referendum.

 

·   Operating expenses of £2,201 million were £623 million, or 22.1%, lower than 2016, whereas adjusted operating expenses(1) of £1,528 million were £556 million, or 26.7%, lower than 2016. In the legacy business, operating expenses decreased by £238 million, or 27.5%, to £627 million, whereas adjusted operating expenses decreased significantly reflecting a 77.7% reduction in headcount as the business moved towards closure. In the core business, operating expenses decreased by £383 million, 19.5%, to £1,577 million as the business continues to drive cost reductions, where as adjusted operating expenses were £1,268 million compared to £1,320 million in 2016.

 

·   RWAs decreased by £15.3 billion, adjusting for transfers(2), to £52.9 billion primarily reflecting reductions in the legacy business. In the core business RWAs decreased by £3.1 billion to £32.3 billion reflecting lower counterparty credit risk through mitigation activities and business initiatives. At the end of 2017 the legacy business within NatWest Markets had RWAs of £14.0 billion, excluding RBS’s stake in Alawwal Bank, a reduction of £10.9 billion, adjusting for transfers, over the course of the year.

 

·   Total assets fell by £94.6 billion to £277.9 billion, funded assets fell to £118.7 billion, a reduction of £7.3 billion, adjusting for transfers(2), mainly reflecting disposal activity.

 

Notes:

(1)       Excludes: Income - own credit adjustments of £66 million debit (2016 - £187 million credit), strategic disposals of £26 million credit (2016 - £81 million debit). Costs - restructuring costs of £436 million (2016 - £190 million) and litigation and conduct costs of £237 million (2016 - £550 million).

(2)       Shipping and other activities, which were formerly in Capital Resolution, were transferred to Commercial Banking on 1 October 2017, including total funded assets of £3.3 billion, net loans and advances to customers of £2.6 billion, and RWAs of £2.1 billion. Whole business securitisations and relevant financial institutions (RFI) were transferred from Commercial Banking during December 2017, including net loans and advances to customers of £0.8 billion, and RWAs of £0.6 billion. Comparatives were not re-presented for these transfers.

 

57


 

Business review

 

 

 

 

Segment performance continued

Central items & other

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Central items not allocated

 

(1,038)

 

(483)

 

(5,006)

 

Funding and operating costs have been allocated to operating segments based on direct service usage, the requirement for market funding and other appropriate drivers where services span more than one segment. Residual unallocated items relate to volatile corporate items that do not naturally reside within a segment.

 

2018 compared with 2017

 

·   Central items not allocated represented a charge of £1,038 million in 2018, largely comprises the £1,040 million charge relating to the civil settlement with the US Department of Justice and £333 million of strategic costs, partially offset by a £241 million provision release relating to an RMBS litigation indemnity and indemnity insurance recoveries of £192 million.

 

2017 compared with 2016

 

Central items not allocated represented a charge of £483 million in 2017, compared with a £5,006 million charge in 2016, and included litigation and conduct costs of £589 million, compared with £4,088 million in 2016. Treasury funding costs were a charge of £58 million, compared with a charge of £94 million in 2016. Restructuring costs in the year included £94 million relating to the former Williams & Glyn business, compared with £1,399 million in 2016. In addition to a VAT recovery of £86 million, compared with £227 million in 2016, a £156 million gain on the sale of Vocalink and a £135 million gain in relation to the sale of EuroClear(1).

 

Note:

(1)  The total gain in relation to the sale of Euroclear was £161 million, of which £135 million central items and £26 million NatWest Markets.

 

58


 

Directors’ Remuneration Report

 

 

 

 

 

Page

Annual statement from the Committee Chairman

74

Remuneration at a glance

75

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

77

Annual Report on Remuneration

81

Other Remuneration Disclosures

91

 

Letter from Robert Gillespie
Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee

 

“Capital strength has been a key performance measure and I am delighted that progress in this area has enabled RBS to resume dividend payments.”

 

Dear Shareholder,

 

This is my second report as Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee (the Committee) and it has proved to be another busy year. We have established additional remuneration committees for a number of RBS subsidiaries as part of our governance arrangements for ring-fencing. This will provide additional oversight of remuneration across our key legal entities before proposals are considered by the Committee.

 

In addition, the Committee spent time considering the latest updates to reporting regulations and the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code). We remain strong supporters of reforms aimed at improving the effectiveness, transparency and fairness of pay structures.

 

Broader pay considerations

Colleague engagementIn preparation for the new Code, we have taken steps to supplement our existing channels for colleagues to be heard at Board level. We have established a Colleague Advisory Panel to provide direct engagement with Board members. Amongst other strategic topics, this forum will be used to discuss executive remuneration and how it aligns with the wider company pay policy.

 

We believe that having an engaged and inclusive workforce is a key element of a successful business. This is why it is one of the areas included in the performance assessment for executive directors. The latest opinion survey shows engagement is at its highest level since we started measuring it and inclusion is our highest scoring category. We are now above the Global Financial Services (GFS) norms in all comparable survey categories.

 

Fairness and simplicity – We continue to make good progress. The number of employees at RBS who believe they are paid fairly rose during the year and is significantly above the GFS norm. In the UK, our rates of pay continue to exceed the Living Wage. Over the last four years we have made improvements to starting salaries and faster progression for those on lower levels of pay.

 

We have also removed variable pay for a significant number of these employees and increased their fixed pay. This provides more certainty and allows employees to concentrate on customers’ needs. As a result of these changes, 56% of employees across the Group are rewarded through fixed pay only.

 

We are confident we pay our employees fairly and our policies and processes are kept under review to ensure we continue to do so.

 

On pensions, action was taken during the year to significantly address the deficit in the main defined benefit pension scheme. Employees are provided with a range of flexible, market-leading benefits and wellbeing support. Over 23,000 employees have chosen to participate in share plans, which provide direct alignment with the company’s success and shareholders’ interests.

 

Transparency – Ahead of new reporting regulations coming into force next year, we have included the Chief Executive to employee pay ratios in this report along with broader disclosures on employee remuneration. Gender and ethnicity pay gap information can be found in the Strategic Report section, as well as the steps we are taking to address the position.

 

Executive director pay policy

Turning to executive pay, the Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2017 AGM. No changes are being made to the policy at this time. Variable pay is delivered entirely in shares as long-term incentive (LTI) awards with no annual bonus. The Chief Executive’s management team receive a similar remuneration construct.

 

The policy is based around a restrained pay position, with lower levels of LTI awards, reasonable performance expectations and significant shareholdings. Shares must be retained for the long-term, both during and after employment. I believe this creates a simple way of aligning executive directors’ interests with shareholders.

 

Executive director changes during 2018

Ewen Stevenson resigned as Chief Financial Officer (CFO) during the year. In line with policy, he continued to receive fixed pay until his departure date and all outstanding LTI awards were forfeited. No payment was made in lieu of notice.

 

After a successful period as interim CFO, Katie Murray was appointed to the Board as CFO from 1 January 2019. Katie’s pay has been set at a competitive level within the approved remuneration policy. The pension rate is 10% of salary. This is in line with the rate applicable to the wider RBS workforce and recognises emerging best practice.

 

Performance and pay decisions

The latest results demonstrate the business is building on its return to profitability in 2017 with a clear plan to deliver sustainable returns for shareholders. Income has risen and our core tier 1 capital ratio remains strong, exceeding our long-term target.

 

Remuneration structures are designed to support our strategic aims, one of which is building a safe and sustainable business. Capital strength has been one of the key performance measures for executive directors and I am delighted that progress in this area has enabled RBS to resume paying dividends to our ordinary shareholders.

 

Ross McEwan will be granted an LTI award in early 2019, following an assessment of performance over 2018. The assessment determined that overall performance had been strong, particularly in relation to capital and people measures, but the Committee applied a modest downwards adjustment of around 6% to the maximum grant as customer performance was not at the desired level.

 

Performance has also been assessed for the LTI award granted to the Chief Executive in 2016, following the end of the performance period in 2018. The award will vest at 27.5% reflecting improvements in capital strength and employee engagement, but with no vesting in areas where performance did not meet targets, such as total shareholder return. No discretion was exercised in determining the outcome. Full details of the assessments against the objectives and the award levels can be found in this report.

 

In terms of pay decisions for our broader employees, the bonus pool for 2018 is £335 million, which is around 2% lower than 2017. The size of the bonus pool in recent years reflects our transition to a smaller and simpler bank, staffed by highly capable and engaged people. Immediate cash bonuses continue to be limited to £2,000.

 

Looking ahead

One of the main priorities for the Committee during 2019 will be preparing the executive directors’ remuneration policy for its renewal at the 2020 AGM. The new Code requirements and engagement with our stakeholders will be part of that process. The Committee will also look at how it can enhance its existing role in considering wider workforce remuneration.

 

I would like to thank my fellow Committee members for their guidance and constructive challenge during the year and I look forward to considering how we can continue to develop remuneration practices at RBS for the benefit of all our stakeholders.

 

Robert Gillespie

Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee

14 February 2019

 

74


 

Directors’ Remuneration Report – at a glance

 

 

 

 

The ‘at a glance’ section summarises the key features of the executive directors’ remuneration policy and arrangements for 2018 and 2019.

 

Summary of the remuneration policy for executive directors approved at the 2017 AGM

 

Alignment with strategy of building a strong, simple and fair bank

Alignment via shares between executives and shareholders

Alignment with the growing external consensus on executive pay

 

Built around a restrained pay position for executives, with variable pay delivered entirely in LTI awards.

 

Performance assessed on factors that executive directors would reasonably be expected to achieve, encouraging safe and secure growth.

 

Quantum and structure of pay appropriate for a smaller, safer bank.

 

 

Aligns executives with shareholders predominantly through holding shares, both during and after employment.

 

The maximum value of LTI award is smaller and we have significantly increased the value of shares that executive directors need to hold.

 

LTI awards will be adjusted for underperformance or risk failings and are released over eight years with malus and clawback for a long-term view of performance.

 

Reduced complexity and quantum, in line with the Executive Remuneration Working Group and Government announcements on executive pay.

 

Reflects emerging investor guidelines with their common themes of restraint, meaningful shareholdings and flexibility of pay design.

 

Continues to provide transparency between performance and reward, with performance measured against pre-set objectives and disclosed each year.

 

 

 

Summary of pay construct

Chief Executive

Chief Financial Officer (from 2019)

Fixed pay

 

Base salary

 

 

£1,000,000

 

 

£750,000

 

Fixed Share Allowance

 

 

100% of salary

 

 

100% of salary

 

Pension

 

 

35% of salary

 

 

10% of salary

 

 

Maximum LTI award (delivered in shares)

 

 

175% of salary

 

 

200% of salary

 

Vesting period and conditions

·         Pre-grant and pre-vest performance assessments along with risk and stakeholder underpins.

·         Vests in equal amounts between years three to seven after grant.

·         12 months’ retention period following each vesting.

·         Malus and clawback provisions apply.

·         No pro-rating of LTI awards will apply in agreed good leaver circumstances.

Expected average vesting

80% of maximum over time.

 

Shareholding requirement

400% of salary

250% of salary

 

 

Summary of 2018 performance assessments for the Chief Executive

 

 

2018 highlights

Performance assessment for
vesting of 2016 LTI award

Performance assessment for
grant of 2019 LTI award

·         Operating profit before tax of £3,359 million and CET1 ratio remains strong at 16.2%, exceeding our long-term target.

·         The major legacy issues have now been resolved and 2018 saw the payment of the first dividend in 10 years.

·         Arrangements for ring-fencing have been implemented on time.

·         Employee engagement is at its highest level yet and there have been continued improvements in culture and inclusion scores.

·         Customer service results, however, are not consistently where they need to be to achieve our long-term ambition.

 

Performance assessed against pre-set objectives for 2016 – 2018, covering:

·         Economic Profit – 0% vesting.

·         Total Shareholder Return – 0% vesting.

·         Safe & Secure Bank – 12.5% vesting.

·         Customers & People – 15% vesting.

 

The performance assessment resulted in a total vesting percentage of 27.5% due to progress in capital strength, customer trust scores and employee engagement. The other elements did not meet the required performance levels for vesting. Full details can be found in the annual report on remuneration.

Performance assessed against pre-set objectives for 2018, covering core areas of:

·         Finance & Business – capital and RoTE targets met, ring-fencing structure in place.

·         Risk & Operations – risk culture target met, control environment not met in full.

·         Customers – Net Promoter Score was mixed, some but not all segments on target.

·         People & Culture – engagement, culture and diversity performance all meeting targets.

 

While overall performance was strong, the Committee concluded that a reduction of around 6% to the maximum grant would be appropriate for the Chief Executive to recognise that some areas were not fully at the desired level. A further assessment will take place prior to any vesting taking place. Full details can be found in the annual report on remuneration.

 

75


 

Directors’ Remuneration Report – at a glance

 

 

 

 

Executive directors who have left/joined during the year

Ewen Stevenson

Ewen Stevenson stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2018 and left RBS on 30 November 2018. He did not receive any payment in lieu of notice and all outstanding LTI awards were forfeited on his final date of employment.

 

Katie Murray

Katie Murray was appointed to the Board as Chief Financial Officer with effect from 1 January 2019. Benchmarking was undertaken for the role and the Committee agreed a remuneration package that was considered to be positioned appropriately compared to peers both in terms of fixed pay and projected total compensation. Remuneration includes a base salary at £750,000 per annum and a fixed share allowance of £750,000 per annum. Pension funding has been set at 10% of salary. This rate of 10% is the same as the pension rate applicable to the vast majority of RBS employees and recognises emerging best practice under the UK Corporate Governance Code and investor guidelines.

 

Any variable pay awards for performance year 2019 onwards (to be made in early 2020) will be delivered as LTI awards, with a maximum award of 200% of salary. For performance year 2018, a period prior to appointment to the Board, variable pay will continue to be awarded in line with arrangements in place at that time.

 

Remuneration outcomes for executive directors in 2018

 

Ross McEwan

 

Ewen Stevenson (as at 30 September 2018) (1)

 

 

 

 

(1) Ewen Stevenson also received fixed pay of £317,708 in 2018 for the period after stepping down from the Board until he left RBS on 30 November 2018.

 

 

Shareholding requirements

 

Ross McEwan

 

Ewen Stevenson (as at 30 September 2018)

 

 

 

 

 

Timing of payments for 2019 awards to Ross McEwan

 

 

Variable pay awarded to Katie Murray in 2019 for performance year 2018, a period prior to appointment to the Board, will be subject to deferral over seven years and retention periods in line with regulatory requirements.

 

76


 

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

 

 

 

 

Key features of the remuneration policy for executive directors

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the AGM on 11 May 2017. The policy will apply until the 2020 AGM unless changes are required which mandate a revised policy be submitted to shareholders for approval. There are no changes requiring shareholder approval at this time. The table below summarises the key features of the policy for executive directors. In the event of any conflict the approved policy, which can be found under the Board and Governance section of rbs.com, takes precedence over the information set out below.

 

Element of pay

Operation

Maximum potential value

Salary

To provide a competitive level of fixed cash remuneration and aid recruitment and retention of high performing individuals.

 

 

Paid monthly in cash and reviewed annually.

 

The rates for 2019 are:

·        Chief Executive – £1,000,000

·        Chief Financial Officer – £750,000

 

 

Future salary increases will not normally be greater than the average salary increase for RBS employees over the period. Other than in exceptional circumstances, the salary will not increase by more than 15% over the course of this policy.

Fixed share allowance

To provide fixed pay that reflects the skills and experience required and responsibilities for the role.

 

 

A fixed allowance paid entirely in shares. The shares vest immediately subject to any deductions for tax and are released in equal tranches over a three year retention period.

 

An award of shares with an annual value of up to 100% of salary at the time of award.

Benefits

To provide a range of flexible and market competitive benefits that are valued and assist individuals in carrying out their duties effectively.

 

 

Executive directors can select from a range of standard benefits including: company car; private medical cover; life assurance; and critical illness insurance.

 

Executive directors are also entitled to travel assistance in connection with company business including the use of a car and driver. RBS will meet the cost of any tax on the benefit.

 

Further benefits including relocation costs may be offered in line with market practice. RBS may also put in place certain security arrangements for executive directors.

 

 

Set level of funding for standard benefits (currently £26,250) which is subject to review.

 

The total value of benefits provided is disclosed each year in the annual report on remuneration.

 

Pension

To encourage planning for retirement and long-term savings.

 

Provision of a monthly cash pension allowance based on a percentage of salary. Opportunity to use the cash to participate in a defined contribution pension scheme.

 

·        Chief Executive – 35% of salary

·        Chief Financial Officer – 10% of salary

 

 

While the 2017 policy allows for pension funding of 35% of salary for existing executive directors and up to 25% of salary for new executive directors, a rate of 10% was agreed on the appointment of the new Chief Financial Officer to align with the UK Corporate Governance Code. The 10% rate is in line with the wider workforce.

Variable pay award

(long-term incentive)

To support a culture where individuals are rewarded for the delivery of sustained performance, taking into account RBS’s strategic objectives.

 

Delivery in shares with the ability to apply malus adjustments and clawback further supports longer-term alignment with shareholders’ interests.

 

LTI awards are subject to:

·        a one year pre-grant performance period;

·        a pre-vest performance assessment at the end of a three year period, with vesting taking place from years three to seven after grant;

·        malus prior to vesting and clawback which applies for seven (and potentially up to ten) years from the date of award; and

·        a 12 month post-vesting retention period.

 

Performance will be assessed in the areas of Finance, Risk & Operations, Customers and People & Culture to determine whether the executive has achieved what would reasonably have been expected in the circumstances. Risk & Control and Stakeholder Perception underpins will also apply.

 

 

The maximum award for current directors at the time of grant is capped at:

·   Chief Executive - 175% of salary.

·   Chief Financial Officer - 200% of salary.

 

Prior performance will be taken into account when determining the value of the award at the time of grant.

 

The vesting level of the award can vary between 0% and 100% of the original number of shares granted, dependent on the delivery of sustained performance.

Shareholding requirements

To ensure executive directors build and continue to hold a significant shareholding over the long-term.

 

Unvested shares from LTI awards will count on a net of tax basis towards meeting the shareholding requirement once the pre-vest performance assessment has taken place. When the applicable retention period has passed, the executive directors can dispose of up to 25% of the net of tax shares received until the shareholding requirement is met.

 

 

·     Chief Executive - 400% of salary.

·     Chief Financial Officer - 250% of salary.

 

 

77


 

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

 

 

 

 

Remuneration for the Chairman and non-executive directors

 

Element of pay

Operation

Maximum potential value

Fees

To reflect the required skills, experience and time commitment.

Fees are paid monthly in cash and reviewed regularly. Additional fees may be paid for new Board Committees provided these are not greater than fees payable for the existing Board Committees.

 

No variable pay is provided so that the Chairman and non-executive directors can maintain appropriate independence.

 

The rates for the year ahead are set out in the annual report on remuneration.

 

Other than in exceptional circumstances, fees will not increase by more than 15% over the course of the policy.

Benefits

To provide a level of benefits in line with market practice.

 

Reimbursement of reasonable out-of-pocket expenses. The Chairman and non-executive directors are entitled to travel assistance in connection with company business including the use of a car and driver. RBS will meet the cost of any tax due on the benefit. Other benefits may be offered in line with market practice.

 

The Chairman receives private medical cover.

The value of the private medical cover provided to the Chairman and any other benefits will be in line with market rates and disclosed in the annual report on remuneration.

 

Other policy elements

 

Provision

Operation

Recruitment policy

The policy on the recruitment of new directors aims to be competitive and to structure pay in line with the framework applicable to current directors, recognising that some adjustment to quantum within that framework may be necessary to secure the preferred candidate. A buy-out policy exists to replace awards forfeited or payments foregone which is in line with regulatory requirements. The Committee will minimise buy-outs wherever possible and ensure they are no more generous than, and on substantially similar terms to, the original awards or payments they are replacing.

 

Notice and termination provisions

Executive directors

As set out in executive directors’ service contracts, RBS or the executive director is required to give 12 months’ notice to the other party to terminate the employment. There is discretion for RBS to make a payment in lieu of notice (based on salary only) which is released in monthly instalments. The executive director must take all reasonable steps to find alternative work and any remaining instalments will be reduced as appropriate to offset income from any such work.

 

Chairman and non-executive directors

The Chairman and the non-executive directors do not have service contracts, they have letters of appointment. They do not have notice periods and no compensation would be paid in the event of termination of appointment, other than standard payments payable for the period served up to the termination date.

 

On an annual basis, all directors stand for election or re-election by shareholders at the company’s AGM. Non-executive directors appointed prior to 2017 do not have a set term as the letter of appointment operates on a rolling basis. From 2017 onwards, new non-executive directors have been appointed for an initial term of three years, commencing from the first election by shareholders. At the end of this period, further terms may be agreed, subject to an overall maximum tenure of nine years. The non-executive directors with terms of appointment that will currently expire unless otherwise renewed at the end of three years are: Mark Seligman (2020 AGM), Dr Lena Wilson (2021 AGM) and Patrick Flynn (2022 AGM).

 

Legacy

arrangements

RBS can continue to honour any previous commitments or arrangements entered into with current or former directors that may have different terms, including terms agreed prior to appointment as an executive director.

 

Treatment of outstanding employee share plan awards on termination

On termination, share awards will be treated in accordance with the relevant plan rules as approved by shareholders. Under the remuneration policy approved by shareholders at the 2017 AGM, LTI awards made in 2018 onwards will not be subject to pro rating for time in good leaver circumstances, for the reasons set out below.

 

RBS is unusual in having no annual bonus, and bonus awards would typically not be subject to pro rating for time. In addition, regulatory requirements can effectively prevent LTI awards being granted in the year of joining. The combination of these factors means executives at RBS could potentially receive no variable pay award either for the year of joining or in the final year of employment. This is not consistent with our aim of creating significant alignment with shareholders.

 

Removal of pro rating enables executive directors to receive an appropriate level of variable pay for the period that they work and helps to ensure executives are motivated up to the point of departure and beyond. It creates higher levels of shareholding for up to eight years post departure meaning executives can be held accountable for, and are financially exposed to, the long-term consequences of their actions.

 

Individuals will only qualify for good leaver treatment if they leave due to ill-health, injury, disability, death, retirement (as agreed with RBS), redundancy, the employing company ceasing to be a member of RBS, transfer of the employing business, or any other reason if, and to the extent, the Committee decides in any particular case. If good leaver treatment does not apply then LTI awards will be forfeited on leaving.

 

 

78


 

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

 

 

 

 

Approach to the new UK Corporate Governance Code (the new Code)

Ahead of its formal application in 2019, detailed analysis of the new Code was undertaken in 2018 with findings presented to the Committee. The majority of the changes are in line with existing practice at RBS. A summary of the main provisions is set out below. The Committee will continue to monitor and reflect on best practice for these new requirements.

 

Area

Description of provision

RBS position

Workforce remuneration and alignment with culture

 

Remuneration Committee to review workforce remuneration and related policies, and the alignment of incentives and rewards with culture, taking these into account when setting the policy for executive director remuneration.

 

The Committee already considers papers on the broader employee proposition, for example, the group-wide remuneration and deferral policy, annual pay outcomes including diversity information, and the annual Sharesave offer for employees.

 

The Financial Reporting Council’s (FRC) guidance asks Remuneration Committees to consider “How do workforce incentives support our culture and encourage the desired behaviours?” The removal of sales incentives for front-line employees in recent years is a good example where desired culture and remuneration proposals have been considered together at RBS.

 

The Committee will review relevant culture developments and consider the potential impact on remuneration policy. The aim is to assist the Board in its responsibility to monitor how well culture is being embedded across the organisation and the role that remuneration plays in that.

 

Post-employment shareholding requirements

Remuneration Committees should develop a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements encompassing both unvested and vested shares.

 

 

Under the current policy, executive directors automatically retain a significant number of shares after they leave. Shares from fixed share allowances continue to be held for at least three years regardless of the reason for leaving and LTI awards held by good leavers will continue to be released up to eight years post departure.

 

The Committee will consider whether a more formal post-employment shareholding requirement should be introduced when the new directors’ remuneration policy is due to be submitted to shareholders at the 2020 AGM.

 

Pension contribution rates

The pension contribution rates for executive directors should be aligned with those available to the workforce.

 

The FRC guidance recognises that it may not be appropriate to reduce the pension provision for existing directors. However, good practice is for the rates to move over time to be aligned with those of the wider workforce.

 

As noted earlier in this report, RBS has already taken steps in this area with the pension rate for the new Chief Financial Officer set at 10% of salary, rather than the 25% of salary allowed for under the policy for new executive directors. The rate at 10% is the same as that applicable to the majority of the wider workforce. The position for the Chief Executive will be reviewed as part of the renewal of the directors’ remuneration policy at the 2020 AGM.

 

Factors in determining executive director policy

Remuneration Committees should address the following criteria when determining executive director policy: clarity; simplicity; risk; predictability; proportionality; and alignment to culture.

 

The Committee already takes many of these factors into account when determining executive director policy. The current policy was designed around themes of simplicity, alignment with company strategy and culture, and ensuring rewards are supported by sustainable, risk-adjusted long-term performance.

 

In terms of predictability, it is worth noting that variable pay at RBS is already constrained by the 1:1 regulatory cap on grant. The new long-term incentive construct is based around lower awards levels with more predictable outcomes. In addition, there are discretionary underpins which provide scope to adjust outcomes for significant risk, stakeholder or reputational matters not already captured in the performance assessment.

 

Engagement with colleagues

 

Remuneration Committee to report on its work including engagement with colleagues on executive remuneration.

In 2018, we established a Colleague Advisory Panel, chaired by a designated non-executive director. The aim of the Panel is to provide direct engagement between colleagues and Board members. The Panel includes colleagues who volunteered to be involved, existing representatives from trade union bodies and works councils, our colleague-led networks and junior management teams.

 

Along with a broad range of strategic topics, the Panel will also be used to discuss executive remuneration and how it aligns with the wider company pay policy. Further information on the Panel can be found in the Strategic Report and the Report of the directors.

 

Discretion and use of malus and clawback

Remuneration schemes and policies should enable the use of discretion to override formulaic outcomes and include provisions to withhold or recover payments.

There is broad discretion under RBS remuneration arrangements and the Committee has used discretion in the past to apply downwards adjustment to the formulaic outcome of LTI vestings.

 

The remuneration policy and share plan rules contain malus and clawback provisions to adjust or recover awards where appropriate. Details of the process and the circumstances in which RBS can apply malus and clawback are set out on page 92.

 

79


 

Directors’ Remuneration Report

 

 

 

 

Wider workforce remuneration policy

Consistent with our executive remuneration principles, the aim is to deliver a simple and transparent pay policy which promotes the long-term success of RBS. The policy supports a culture where individuals are rewarded for delivering sustained performance in line with risk appetite and for demonstrating the right conduct and behaviours.

 

Employees are provided with salary and pension funding and certain roles are eligible for benefit funding and variable pay awards. Further details on the policy and remuneration levels for 2018 including pay ratios can be found later in this report.

 

Making RBS a great place to work

RBS is committed to providing four key things: a fulfilling job; fair pay; excellent training and a good leader.

 

Fulfilling job

The aim is for every colleague to have a clear and fulfilling job that connects to our purpose. Each colleague is set clear goals and objectives that reflect RBS’s overall strategy. Progress is reviewed throughout the year.

 

Wellbeing is essential for people to bring the best of themselves to work. A range of measures are provided to support good physical, mental, social and financial health. There is also an Employee Assistance Programme where employees can access confidential advice, support and short-term counselling.

 

Flexible working is offered where this is possible and appropriate. This allows colleagues to explore working patterns with their line manager and select a more flexible approach to work that meets their current needs.

 

Inclusion and diversity is another key element of creating a great place to work and also understanding the needs of our customers. RBS supports a variety of colleague-led groups that help influence strategy and employees also undertake unconscious bias training and mandatory annual inclusion training.

 

The inclusion category in our colleague opinion survey is the highest scoring category. Targets are in place to improve the proportion of women and ethnic minority leaders across all business areas and RBS is on track to meet these aspirations. Inclusion targets are also part of the measures that impact executive remuneration.

 

In June 2018, RBS was awarded the ‘Employer of the Year’ award at the Women in Finance Awards.

 

Fair Pay

RBS is committed to providing a fair wage for the role performed and also being very clear on how pay works. Employees are provided with flexibility in terms of how they wish to receive pay to suit their personal circumstances.

 

Fairness is built around a number of themes. A full pay review is undertaken each year for all salary ranges. Pay is compared against the external market so that pay and benefits are competitive. RBS is a fully accredited Living Wage Employer in the UK and our rates of pay continue to exceed the Living Wage Foundation Benchmarks.

 

RBS has also implemented a more transparent approach by moving more employees to published salary ranges. Improvements have been made to starting salaries with faster progression to the rate for the job. Investment in pay levels in recent years has focused mostly on junior employees, while not increasing fixed pay for executive directors.

 

RBS has also removed front-line incentives and variable pay for large numbers of employees, with an increase to fixed pay instead. This provides greater certainty for these employees and allows them to focus fully on providing the best service for customers.

 

We are confident that we pay our employees fairly and keep our HR policies and processes under review to ensure we do so.

 

Flexible benefits are provided allowing employees to change pension contributions and choose from a range of protection, healthcare and lifestyle options. Employees in the UK and Republic of Ireland can also participate in employee share plans and over 23,000 currently do so.

 

The number of employees at RBS who believe they are paid fairly increased during 2018 and is significantly above the Global Financial Services Norm.

 

Excellent training

RBS offers a number of ways for colleagues to learn and develop. This includes technical training, continuing professional development and further education qualifications on the job. Support is also provided for personal development. This helps employees serve customers well and also assists colleagues with their career aspirations.

 

RBS remains committed to embedding a strong service mindset through Service Excellence training which sits at the heart of achieving our ambition to be number 1 for customer service, trust and advocacy.

 

RBS continues to work closely with the Chartered Banker Institute and Chartered Banker Professional Standards Board to improve professional standards across the industry.

 

A Good Leader

RBS is continuing to develop great leaders and supporting the development of talent across the Group. Part of this commitment is delivering and embedding our flagship leadership programme – Determined to lead (Dtl). It teaches the skills to lead, manage and coach people so they make positive behaviour changes and improve their performance. By the end of 2018, around 11,000 leaders had completed their Dtl training.

 

Gender and ethnicity pay gaps

The latest gender and ethnicity pay gap reporting for RBS can be found in the ‘Our Colleagues’ section of the Strategic Report contained herein.

 

Listening to colleagues

In 2018 a more frequent approach to listening to our workforce was developed. This provides more opportunities to improve by assessing colleague sentiment and feedback, and checking progress in making RBS a great place to work.

 

Our colleague opinion survey provides everyone with the opportunity to have a say on what it feels like to work at RBS. Feedback in terms of engagement and leadership has a direct impact on executive pay. A survey by the Banking Standards Board, an independent body, is also used to help raise standards of behaviour and competence across the UK banking sector.

 

Regular engagement takes place with colleagues and representative bodies throughout the year. Board members visit business areas to hear directly from colleagues and there are regular townhall meetings and online forums to facilitate question and answer sessions with senior executives.

 

In 2018, a new Colleague Advisory Panel was established to enhance the colleague voice at Board level and a ‘meet the Board’ event took place for the first time following the AGM.

 

80


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

The sections audited by the company’s auditors, Ernst and Young LLP, are as indicated.

 

Single total figure of remuneration for executive directors for 2018 (audited)

 

 

Ross McEwan

 

Ewen Stevenson (5)

 

2018

£000

2017

£000

 

2018

£000

2017

£000

Salary

1,000

1,000

 

600

800

Fixed share allowance (1)

1,000

1,000

 

600

800

Benefits (2)

117

113

 

20

26

Pension (3)

350

350

 

210

280

Total fixed remuneration

2,467

2,463

 

1,430

1,906

Annual bonus

n/a

n/a

 

n/a

n/a

Long-term incentive award (4)

1,111

1,024

 

-

1,418

Total remuneration

3,578

3,487

 

1,430

3,324

 

Notes:

(1)    The value of the fixed share allowance is based on 100% of salary and, as part of fixed remuneration, it is not subject to any performance conditions.

(2)    Includes standard benefit funding of £26,250 with the remainder for Ross McEwan in 2018 being travel assistance in connection with company business (£72,220), relocation expenses (£15,493) consisting of a flight allowance and assistance with tax return preparation, and home security arrangements (£2,676).

(3)    The executive directors receive a monthly cash allowance to help fund pension arrangements but do not participate in the company’s defined benefit pension schemes. The executive directors can choose to participate in the company’s defined contribution pension arrangements.

(4)    The 2018 value relates to an LTI award granted in 2016. Performance has been assessed over the three year period to 31 December 2018 as set out below resulting in 487,285 shares due to vest in two equal tranches in March 2020 and March 2021. No discretion was exercised by the Committee as a result of share price appreciation or depreciation over the performance period. The estimated value above is £11,013 higher than the value of 487,285 shares at the time of grant, as a result of the share price rising from £2.2574 to £2.28 over the period.

(5)    Reflects remuneration paid to Ewen Stevenson for the period to 30 September 2018, the date he stepped down from the Board.

 

2016 LTI award – final assessment of performance measures (audited)

An assessment of performance of each relevant element was provided by internal control functions and PwC assessed relative Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance against a peer group of comparator banks.

 

Performance Measures
(and weightings)

Performance for
minimum vesting

Vesting at
minimum

Performance for
maximum (100%) vesting

Actual Performance

Vesting
outcome

Weighted
Vesting %

Economic Profit (25%)

(£200 million)

25%

£800 million

(£1,275 million)

0%

0%

Relative TSR (25%)

TSR at median

20%

TSR at upper quartile

Below lower quartile

0%

0%

Safe & Secure Bank (25%)

 

CET1 ratio (12.5%)

Cost:income ratio (12.5%)

 

Vesting between 0% - 100%*

CET1 ratio target: 13% or above

 

Cost:income ratio target: 57% or below

 

CET1 ratio: 16.2%

 

Cost:income ratio: 72%

100%

50%

12.5%

0%

Customers & People (25%)

 

Split across advocacy, trust and employee engagement

 

Net Promoter Score (NPS) (7.5%)

Net Trust Score (NTS) (5%)

Engagement Index (EI) (12.5%)

Vesting between 0% - 100%*

NPS target: Gap to number 1 of 2.3

 

NTS target: NatWest 63, RBS 50

 

EI target: 1 point above Global Financial Services (GFS) norm

 

NPS Gap to number 1 of 18.7

 

NTS: NatWest 64, RBS 25

 

EI: 4 points above GFS norm

 

0%

60%

15%

50%

100%

Final vesting outcome

27.5%

 

* Vesting in the Safe & Secure and Customers & People categories can be qualified by Committee discretion taking into account changes in circumstances over the period, the margin by which individual targets have been missed or exceeded, and any other relevant factors.

 

Economic Profit was defined as profit after tax and preference share charges less tangible net asset value multiplied by the cost of equity. The companies in the relative TSR group for this award were: Barclays, Lloyds, HSBC, Standard Chartered, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Crédit Agricole, Santander, Société Générale, Unicredit, ING, Intesa San Paolo and Nordea Bank.

 

Final outcome and discretionary underpin

If the Committee considers that the vesting outcome calibrated in line with the performance conditions above does not reflect underlying financial results, or if the Committee is not satisfied that conduct and risk management during the performance period has been effective, then the terms of the award allow for an underpin to be used to reduce the vesting.

 

In making its final judgement, the Committee considered the overall context of performance, noting significant improvements in capital strength and employee engagement over the period and the Trust score for NatWest also meeting the target. Relative TSR, the cost:income ratio and customer performance were not at the required level. The Committee also considered the potential impact of the US Department of Justice charge on the Economic Profit outcome. Input was also received from the Board Risk Committee on risk performance. Taking all circumstances into account, the Committee determined that no further adjustment was necessary under the discretionary underpin.

 

81


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

2016 LTI vesting amounts included in the total remuneration table (audited)

LTI awards were granted in March 2016. The award held by Ewen Stevenson lapsed on 30 November 2018, his final date of employment. The performance period ended on 31 December 2018 and the performance conditions have been assessed as set out on the previous page. While performance has been assessed, the shares will not vest until March 2020 and March 2021 and remain subject to employment conditions.

 

Ross McEwan

 

Performance category

% vesting

Maximum shares (1)

Shares due to vest

Estimated value (2)

Economic Profit

0%

442,987

£1,111,010

Relative TSR

0%

442,987

Safe & Secure Bank

50%

442,987

221,493

Customers & People

60%

442,987

265,792

Maximum shares for performance assessment (1)

1,771,948

 

Outcome following performance assessment (27.5% vesting)

487,285

 

Notes:

(1)    The maximum number of shares for the performance assessment is calculated in line with the underlying award structure, however the actual number of shares received will never exceed the number of shares capped under the approved policy and the regulatory maximum at the time of grant. Each performance category can vest up to 100% of salary at grant as shown above. For the 2016 award, the number of shares capped at grant was 1,187,207 and therefore the vesting outcome falls within the cap.

(2)    Based on a RBS share price of £2.28, the average over the three month period from October to December 2018.

 

2017 LTI awards to executive directors – current assessment

The table represents an early indication of the potential vesting outcome as at 31 December 2018. Details of the final performance assessment against targets at the end of the three year period and any use of discretion will be disclosed in the 2019 remuneration report. The Committee may consider the proximity of legacy items to the executive directors when assessing the vesting level.

 

Performance category

Measure

Weighting

Target

2017 LTI award
current assessment

Economic Profit

Economic Profit (total Bank)

25%

Targets set based on spot economic profit in FY2019 with vesting range from 25% up to 100% for performance ahead of Strategic Plan

Broadly tracking in range for vesting

Relative TSR

Relative Total Shareholder Return

25%

Relative TSR performance between median and upper quartile against comparator group results in vesting between 20% and 100%.

Currently upper quartile, which would result in full vesting

Safe & Secure Bank

Cost:income ratio

12.5%

C:I ratio – significant progress to 56%

Vesting under the Safe & Secure and Customers & People categories will be

qualified by Committee discretion taking into account the margin by which targets have been missed or exceeded and any other relevant factors

 

C:I ratio is broadly in range for vesting

CET1 ratio

12.5%

CET1 ratio target of >= 13%

CET1 ratio is in range for full vesting

Customers & People

Advocacy

7.5%

Significant progress to Number 1 in our chosen segments for customer advocacy and trust (further details below).

Some segments on track but overall behind target range

Trust

5%

Trust broadly in range for some vesting

Employee Engagement

12.5%

1 point above Global Financial Services Norm.

Engagement tracking above target for full vesting

 

Note:

(1)    There are six chosen customer segments for advocacy and five customer segments for Trust. Customer advocacy is measured by Net Promoter Score and Trust is measured by the percentage of customers that trust RBS to ‘do the right thing’. Chosen segments reflect RBS’s key products, service channels and customer groups. There are targets for each segment and full details will be disclosed in the 2019 report prior to any vesting. LTI awards granted in 2018 onwards have been made under the new remuneration construct. See overleaf for further details.

 

LTI awards granted during 2018 (audited)

 

 

Grant date

Face value of
award (£000s)

Number of
shares awarded

% vesting at
minimum and maximum

Performance Requirements

Ross McEwan

7 March 2018

1,575

592,328

Between 0% - 100% with no set minimum vesting

The awards were subject to a pre-grant performance assessment and a further assessment will take place at the end of three years. Full details can be found in the 2017 Report and Accounts and the performance assessment framework is also set out overleaf.

Ewen Stevenson

7 March 2018

1,440

541,557

 

Note:

(1)    Awards were granted as conditional share awards. The number of shares was calculated in line with the approved policy with the maximum potential award being 175% of salary for the Chief Executive and 200% of salary for the Chief Financial Officer. The award price of £2.659 was based on the average share price over five business days prior to grant. The award levels reflected a reduction of 10% to the maximum award following the pre-grant assessment of performance over 2017. Ewen Stevenson’s award was forfeited on 30 November 2018, his final date of employment. For Ross McEwan, subject to the pre-vest assessment, the award will be eligible to vest in equal amounts between years 2021 and 2025. Malus provisions will apply up until vest and clawback provisions will also apply for a period of at least seven years from the date of grant. Further details on malus and clawback can be found on page 92.

 

82


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Performance assessment framework for LTI awards granted from 2018 onwards

For each of the core performance areas, the Committee will consider whether the executive director has achieved what would reasonably have been expected over the relevant period. The Committee will follow a robust process to review performance against pre-set objectives relevant to RBSs strategic aims, but will apply its judgement without reference to formulaic targets and weightings. Performance will be assessed taking into account circumstances applying over the period. Risk & Control and Stakeholder Perception underpins will also apply under which the Committee, with input from the Board Risk Committee and Sustainable Banking Committee, can consider if there are any other factors that would lead to a downwards adjustment.

 

The majority of the performance variation will normally take place under the pre-grant assessment, with a further assessment prior to any vesting taking place. Overall, the achievement of reasonable or ‘target’ performance expectations will deliver full or nearly full payout of the LTI awards, as long as executives deliver good, sustainable performance. This approach reflects the significantly reduced level of awards compared to the previous policy, creating more predictable outcomes and encouraging safe and secure growth within risk appetite. Each year, the performance factors will be determined in light of RBS’s priorities for that year.

 

Pre-grant assessment for LTI awards to be made in 2019

 

Core area

Objectives for Performance Year 2018

Pre-grant assessment

Financial & Business Delivery

Reasonable performance against RoTE budget with a target of -1%.

 

CET1 ratio of 13% or more.

 

Delivery of ring-fencing requirements to meet the 1 January 2019 implementation deadline, ensuring timely remediation of issues throughout.

Good financial performance for 2018. RoTE at 4.8% exceeded the target.

 

CET1 ratio of 16.2%, above the target.

 

Ring-fencing structure delivered as planned with all key activities completed in order to ensure compliance. Reporting on activities will be provided to the PRA.

Risk & Control

Improve the control environment. Franchise/Function control environment to be rated 2 within appetite and achievement of self declared forecasted control environment ratings by the end of 2018.

 

Material progress towards our desired risk culture. Positive progress towards 2 (systematic) with strong tone from the top and effective action plans in place. Achieve Proactive Risk Culture rating as a minimum with no deterioration from 2017 assessment.

While improvements had been made, a number of franchises and functions had still to attain the desired control environment ratings. This part of the objective was therefore not considered to have been met in full.

 

Risk Culture target met, with overall assessment as ‘Positive progress towards 2 (systematic) with strong tone from the top and effective plans in place’. With one exception, all areas had achieved the required ‘Proactive’ Risk Culture rating.

 

Customers & Stakeholder

Achieve planned progress towards becoming number 1 for customer service, trust and advocacy by 2020 in chosen customer segments and brands.

Net Promoter Score performance was mixed during 2018, with three of the six customer segments on target. While the digital strategy was delivering positive customer advocacy, it was recognised that progress was not consistent enough.

People & Culture

Year-on-year improvement in engagement and leadership indices, with a one point increase in each.

Engagement score increased by three points and the leadership score increased by two points since 2017, exceeding the targets.

Year-on-year improvement in Culture index, with a target of a one point increase.

The Culture index had continued to improve with a three point increase since 2017, exceeding the target.

Progress towards target of at least 30% women in ‘senior roles’ by 2020 in each franchise and function.

Satisfactory progress had been made. As at Q3, there had been a 7% increase since the targets were introduced at the end of 2014 and six of the business areas were already at or above the 30% target.

Progress towards 2025 target of number of Black Asian Minority Ethnic (BAME)/non-white UK employees in the top four layers of RBS, of at least 14% (UK only).

Improvements made during the year. As at Q3, eight business areas had met their 2018 target and a further three business areas had already reached the longer term 14% target.

 

Outcome of the pre-grant assessment

The Committee also received advice from the Board Risk Committee and the Sustainable Banking Committee in making its final assessment. After considering all the factors above, the Committee determined that good progress had been made with strong performance particularly in relation to capital and people scores. 2018 was seen as a milestone year with a number of important legacy issues resolved, the resumption of dividends and arrangements in place for ring-fencing. Overall, the Committee considered that a 6% reduction was appropriate as customer and risk performance was not fully at the desired level. The resulting award level for the Chief Executive is set out below. As the Chief Financial Officer was appointed from 1 January 2019, the first LTI award will be granted in 2020, following an assessment of performance over 2019.

 

 

maximum LTI award level

2019 LTI award level

Ross McEwan

£1,750,000

£1,650,000

 

83


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Pre-vest assessment for 2019 LTI awards

In addition to the pre-grant assessment detailed on the previous page, a further assessment of performance will take place at the end of three years, prior to vesting. It is intended to be a look-back at the performance year for which the LTI award was granted to consider whether anything has come to light which might call into question the original award. Once the vesting amount has been approved, employment conditions as well as malus and clawback will continue to apply.

 

The pre-vest assessment allows the Committee to make a balanced assessment of performance in the round rather than relying on formulaic adjustments. Adjustments will be made if there have been failures of risk management and in the event of underperformance.

 

Factors considered in assessing pre-vest performance

Four core questions will be considered as part of the pre-vest assessment under the themes of Finance; Customers; People; and Risk & Control.

 

When assessing the performance of the year for which the award was made, “knowing what we know now”, and taking into account all circumstances, has RBS:

 

·          Remained safe and secure, taking into account our financial results and capital position?

·          Been a good bank for customers taking into account our customer and advocacy performance?

·          Operated in an environment in which risk is seen as part of the way we work and think?

·          Operated in a way that reflects our stated values?

 

Evidence used to support the Committee’s assessment of these questions will include whether there has been: a material fall in share price, net promoter scores, employee engagement or culture scores; a breach of minimum capital ratio; or a material deterioration in the risk culture or profile.

 

In addition, the Committee will consider the potential application of Risk & Control and Stakeholder Perception underpins following advice from the Board Risk Committee and Sustainable Banking Committee. This provides scope to consider significant risk, stakeholder or reputational matters not already captured in the performance assessment. The underpins allow the Committee to consider events arising during the period between grant and the end of year three.

 

In determining the final vesting level of the award, the Committee will consider both individual and collective performance which means that there may be different vesting levels by participant.

 

Performance Goals for 2019 (for the pre-grant assessment of LTI awards to be made in 2020)

The table below forms the basis of the pre-grant assessment for LTI awards to be made in early 2020. Further details on the 2019 goals and targets and the assessment of performance against these will be set out in the 2019 Directors’ Remuneration Report.

 

Core area

Performance Goals for 2019

Measures for assessing pre-grant performance for 2020 LTI awards

Financial & Business Delivery

Run a safe and secure bank.

 

Achieve planned RoTE targets for Group and NatWest Holdings (NWH Ltd).

 

Achieve CET1 ratio targets for Group and NWH Ltd, with appropriate repatriation of capital to the Group.

 

Risk & Control

Improve or maintain control environment.

 

Group and NWH Ltd achievement/maintenance and embedding of desired control environment rating.

 

Compliance with ring-fencing rules.

 

Compliance with the minimum controls for the effective management of compliance with ring-fencing rules.

 

Material progress towards our desired risk culture target where risk is simply part of the way we work and think.

 

Positive progress on risk culture rating for Group and NWH Ltd with strong tone from the top and effective action plans in place.

 

Customer & Stakeholder

Increase customer advocacy for our brands and chosen customer segments.

 

Achievement of targets for brands against Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) rankings and Net Promoter Scores (NPS).

 

Build a strong internal customer service.

 

Achievement of Group and NWH Ltd targets for internal NPS and Core Service Behaviour scores.

 

People & Culture

Provide clarity, build capability and
motivate our people.

 

Based on employee engagement and leadership scores for Group and NWH Ltd.

 

Build up and strengthen a healthy culture.

 

Based on the Banking Standards Board assessment and achieving the culture target for Group and NWH Ltd.

 

Improve diversity across our leaders to create a more mature, inclusive culture.

 

Progress on the number of women in senior roles across the top three layers of the Bank.

 

Progress on the number of BAME/non-white UK employees in the top four layers of RBS.

 

 

For the Chief Financial Officer, performance will be assessed in line with the framework and measures above and the performance of the Finance function will also be taken into account.

 

84


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Payments for loss of office (audited)

Ewen Stevenson resigned as Chief Financial Officer on 29 May 2018. He stepped down from the Board on 30 September 2018 and ceased to be an employee of RBS on 30 November 2018. Taking into account a range of business factors, it was agreed that Mr Stevenson could be released early from his 12 month notice period. No payment was made in lieu of notice.

 

In line with his contractual arrangements, Mr Stevenson continued to receive standard payments in respect of his fixed pay for the period up to his final date of employment. Payments for the period from 30 September to 30 November 2018 comprised salary (£133,333), fixed share allowance (£133,333), pension funding (£46,667) and benefit funding (£4,375), a total of (£317,708) before tax.

 

No other remuneration payment was made in connection with his departure and all outstanding long-term incentive awards were forfeited on his final date of employment.

 

Payments to past directors (audited)

Payments made to Ewen Stevenson during the year are set out above and in the total remuneration paid to executive directors table earlier in this report. There are no other payments to past directors to disclose for 2018.

 

Total remuneration for the Chairman and non-executive directors for 2018

As part of the implementation of ring-fencing arrangements during 2018, a number of additional Boards and Board Committees were established for key legal entities. The increase in governance structures results in additional responsibilities and time commitment, particularly for non-executive directors serving on the Group Board Risk Committee and Group Audit Committee.

 

Taking into account that fees for these committees had remained unchanged since 2014 and market practice by peers, the Chairman and the executive directors agreed it would be appropriate to raise the fees for the Chairman of the Group Board Risk Committee and Group Audit Committee from £60,000 to £68,000, and for members of the Group Board Risk Committee and Group Audit Committee from £30,000 to £34,000. The changes are within the 15% limit for fee increases under the directors’ remuneration policy and took effect from 1 October 2018.

 

For RBSG Board directors who also serve on the boards and committees of NatWest Holdings Limited, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, National Westminster Bank Plc and Ulster Bank Limited, the fees below reflect membership of all five boards and their respective board committees.

 

Where appropriate, RBSG Board directors also received fees in respect of membership of other subsidiary company boards and committees including NatWest Markets Plc, the value of which is included in the table below. In terms of other changes during the year, the NatWest Markets Working Group was replaced by the NatWest Markets Plc Board from 1 May 2018 and the UBIDAC Board Oversight Committee was stood down at the end of October 2018.

 

Lena Wilson was appointed as Chair of the Colleague Advisory Panel during 2018. This is considered a key role that will enhance our existing engagement mechanisms and strengthen the colleague voice at Board level. The Panel will also meet the new requirements for workforce engagement under the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

After considering the time commitment, number of meetings and responsibilities for this role, including providing regular updates to the Board, it was agreed that fees of £15,000 per annum should be paid to the Chair of the Panel with effect from 1 November 2018. The fees are equivalent to that paid to a member of our Board Oversight Committees.

 

Total single figure of remuneration for the Chairman and non-executive directors during 2018 (audited)

 

 

 

Fees

Benefits

Total

Chairman (composite fee)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2018
£000

2017
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

Howard Davies (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

750

750 

11

11

761

761

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees

Benefits

Total

Non-executive
directors
(2)

 

Board
£000

Group
N&G
£000

 

GAC
£000

Group
RemCo
£000

Group
BRC
£000

Group
SBC
£000

 

TIC
£000

 

SID
£000

GRG
BOC
£000

UBI DAC
BOC
£000

 

Other
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

2018
£000


2017
£000

2018
£000


2017
£000

Frank Dangeard (3)

60

 

 

10

12

 

22

 

 

 

148

252

135

4

3

256

138

Alison Davis

80

 

 

30

 

30

60

 

 

 

 

200

167

26

30

226

197

Patrick Flynn (4)

46

 

19

 

19

 

17

 

 

 

 

101

9

110

Morten Friis

80

 

31

 

31

 

 

 

 

 

 

142

148

50

42

192

190

Robert Gillespie

80

15

 

60

19

30

 

 

15

 

 

219

197

8

11

227

208

Penny Hughes (4)

33

7

 

 

12

25

 

 

6

 

 

83

187

3

11

86

198

Yasmin Jetha (4)

27

 

 

 

 

10

10

 

 

 

 

47

65

2

47

67

Brendan Nelson (3)

80

15

62

 

31

 

 

 

30

13

53

284

216

31

23

315

239

Baroness Noakes

80

15

31

 

62

 

 

 

15

13

 

216

196

18

16

234

212

Mike Rogers

80

 

 

30

 

48

 

 

 

 

 

158

137

12

16

170

153

Mark Seligman

80

15

 

30

 

 

 

30

3

13

 

171

68

5

4

176

72

Lena Wilson (3)

80

 

 

 

 

28

17

 

 

 

3

128

20

148

 

Notes:

(1)    The benefits column for Howard Davies includes private medical cover.

(2)    Non-executive directors are reimbursed expenses incurred in connection with travel and attendance at Board meetings. HMRC deems these expenses as taxable where the meetings take place at the company’s main offices and RBS settles the tax on behalf of the non-executive directors.

(3)    Under the ‘Other’ column, Frank Dangeard received fees as Chairman of the NatWest Markets Working Group and from 1 October 2018 received a composite fee as Chairman of the NatWest Markets Plc (NWM Plc) Board. Brendan Nelson received fees as a member of the Board and Audit Committee of NWM Plc from the end of April 2018. Lena Wilson joined the Board on 1 January 2018 and received fees as Chair of the Colleague Advisory Panel from 1 November 2018.

(4)    Penny Hughes stepped down from the Board on 30 May 2018. Yasmin Jetha’s fees are until 30 April 2018, the date she stepped down from the RBSG Board but she continues to receive fees as a member of the boards of NatWest Holdings Limited. Patrick Flynn joined the Board on 1 June 2018.

 

Key to table:

 

 

 

Group N&G

Group Nominations and Governance Committee

TIC

Technology and Innovation Committee

GAC

Group Audit Committee

SID

Senior Independent Director

Group RemCo

Group Performance and Remuneration Committee

GRG BOC

Board Oversight Committee for the GRG business areas

Group BRC

Board Risk Committee

UBI DAC BOC

Board Oversight Committee for the Ulster Bank Ireland business

Group SBC

Sustainable Banking Committee

 

 

 

85


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Implementation of remuneration policy in 2019

Details of remuneration to be awarded in 2019 to executive directors are set out below. The salary, benefits, pension and fixed share allowance for the Chief Executive are unchanged from 2018 and arrangements for the Chief Financial Officer are in line with those announced on appointment. The LTI pre-grant assessment has been completed and the Committee recommended to the Board who approved that an LTI award of £1,650,000 would be granted to the Chief Executive in March 2019. Details of the pre-grant assessment are set out on page 83.

 

Executive directors’ remuneration to be awarded in 2019

 

 

Salary

Standard benefits

Pension (% of salary)

Fixed share allowance
100% of salary (1)

LTI award following pre-grant assessment over 2018

Ross McEwan

£1,000,000

£26,250 (2)

£350,000 (35%)

£1,000,000

£1,650,000

Katie Murray

£750,000

£26,250     

£75,000 (10%)

£750,000

(3)

 

Notes:

(1)     Fixed share allowance payable broadly in arrears, currently in two instalments per year, with shares released in equal tranches over a three year period.

(2)     Amount shown relates to standard benefit funding. Executive directors are also entitled to travel assistance and security arrangements and the Chief Executive receives a flight allowance and assistance with tax returns as part of his relocation arrangements. The value of benefits received will be disclosed each year.

(3)     The first LTI award will be made to Katie Murray in her capacity as an executive director in 2020, following a pre-grant assessment of performance over 2019. For performance year 2018, a period prior to appointment to the Board, variable pay will continue to be awarded in line with arrangements in place at that time.

 

Chairman and non-executive directorsannual fees for 2019

 

Fees for RBSG Board (1)

Rates from 1 January 2019

Chairman (composite fee)

 

£750,000

Non-executive director basic fee

 

£80,000

Senior Independent Director

 

£30,000

 

 

 

Fees for RBSG Board Committees (1)

Member

Chairman

Group Board Risk Committee

£34,000

£68,000

Group Audit Committee

£34,000

£68,000

Group Performance and Remuneration Committee

£30,000

£60,000

Group Sustainable Banking Committee

£30,000

£60,000

Technology and Innovation Committee

£30,000

£60,000

GRG Board Oversight Committee

£15,000

£30,000

Group Nominations and Governance Committee

£15,000

 

 

 

Other fees for RBSG Board directors

 

 

Chairman of NatWest Markets Plc (composite fee to cover all boards and committees)

 

£260,000

Chairman of the Colleague Advisory Panel

 

£15,000

 

Note:

(1)     No additional fees are payable where the director is also a member of the boards and respective board committees of NatWest Holdings Limited, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, National Westminster Bank Plc and Ulster Bank Limited. Where appropriate, directors receive additional fees in respect of membership of other subsidiary company boards and committees including NatWest Markets Plc. The value of fees received will be disclosed in this report each year.

 

Other external directorships

Agreement from the Board must be sought before directors accept any additional roles outside of RBS. Procedures are in place to make sure that regulatory limits on the number of directorships held are complied with. The Board would also consider whether it was appropriate for executive directors to retain any remuneration receivable in respect of any external directorships, taking into account the nature of the appointment. Neither of the executive directors hold a non-executive director role at any other company at this time. Details of the directorships held by other directors can be found in the biographies section of the corporate governance report.

 

Directors’ interests in RBS shares and shareholding requirements (audited)

The shareholding requirement is to hold shares to the value of 400% of salary for the Chief Executive and 250% of salary for the Chief Financial Officer. Unvested shares from LTI awards count on a net of tax basis towards meeting the shareholding requirement once the pre-vest performance assessment has taken place, at the end of the three year period. Once the respective retention periods have passed, directors can only sell up to 25% of the shares received until the requirement is met. There are no shareholding requirements for non-executive directors.

 

86


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Shareholding requirements (audited)

 

Ross McEwan

 

 

Ewen Stevenson (as at 30 September 2018)

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)               Ross McEwan holds 142,925 shares from his 2015 and 2016 fixed share allowances that are included in the shares held below but these have been excluded from the shareholding requirements calculation as he will transfer these shares to charity at the end of the retention period.

(2)               Value is based on the share price of £2.17 as at 31 December 2018 for Ross McEwan and £2.50 as at 30 September 2018 for Ewen Stevenson, the date he stepped down from the Board. In both cases the shareholding requirement was exceeded. During the year the share price ranged from £2.03 to £3.02.

 

Share interests held by directors (audited)

 

 

Ross
McEwan

Ewen
Stevenson

Howard
Davies

Frank
Dangeard

Alison
Davis

Patrick
Flynn

Morten
Friis (4)

Robert
Gillespie

Penny
Hughes

Yasmin
Jetha

Brendan
Nelson

Baroness
Noakes

Mike
Rogers

Mark
Seligman

Lena
Wilson

Shares held (1) 

2,302,031

1,182,272

80,000

5,000

20,000

20,000

25,000

562

20,000

12,001

41,000

20,000

20,000

6,000

% of issued share capital

0.0191

0.0098

0.0007

0.0002

0.0002

0.0002

0.0002

0.0001

0.0003

0.0002

0.0002

LTI awards subject to service (2)

371,098

513,890

LTI awards subject to performance (3)

2,968,335

2,448,749

 

Notes:

(1)            Shares owned beneficially as at 31 December 2018 or date of stepping down from the Board if earlier. The interests shown above include shares held by persons closely associated with the directors. As at 14 February 2019, there were no changes to the shares held shown above. Katie Murray joined the Board on 1 January 2019 and held 34,282 shares as at 14 February 2019.

(2)            Performance assessment has taken place but awards are still subject to deferral periods and employment conditions before vesting. These awards count on a net of tax basis towards meeting the shareholding requirement. In Ewen Stevenson’s case, the award was forfeited on his final date of employment.

(3)            Still subject to performance assessment. All LTI awards held by Ewen Stevenson were forfeited on 30 November 2018, his final date of employment.

(4)            Interest is 10,000 American Depositary Receipts representing 20,000 ordinary shares.

 

Breakdown of all shares and share interests held by the Chief Executive as at 31 December 2018

 

Shares owned outright

Shares subject to conditions

Total

shares purchased
voluntarily by the
Chief Executive

shares from vested
LTI awards and fixed share
allowances released from
retention periods

shares from fixed share
allowances still subject to
retention periods

unvested LTI award from 2015 -
performance assessment has taken
place but subject to further deferral and
employment conditions prior to vesting

unvested LTI awards from 2016
to 2018 – subject to performance
assessment, deferral
and employment conditions

the vesting dates for
LTI awards are shown
in the table below.

299,458

1,442,951

559,622

371,098

2,968,335

5,641,464

 

Directors’ interests under the company’s share plans (audited)

Long-term incentive awards

 

 

 

 

Year of award

Awards held at
1 January 2018

Awards
granted

Award price
£

Awards lapsed
for performance
assessment

Awards
forfeited

Awards held at
31 December 2018

 

Expected vesting dates

Ross McEwan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2015

417,486

 

3.74

46,388

 

371,098

(1)

06.03.19 – 06.03.20

 

2016

1,187,207

 

2.26

 

 

1,187,207

(2)

08.03.20 – 08.03.21

 

2017

1,188,800

 

2.41

 

 

1,188,800

 

07.03.21 – 07.03.24

 

2018

 

592,328

2.66

 

 

592,328

 

07.03.21 – 07.03.25

 

 

2,793,493

592,328

 

46,388

 

3,339,433

 

 

Ewen Stevenson (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2015

578,128

 

3.74

64,238

513,890

 

 

 

2016

952,424

 

2.26

 

952,424

 

 

 

2017

954,768

 

2.41

 

954,768

 

 

 

2018

 

541,557

2.66

 

541,557

 

 

 

 

2,485,320

541,557

 

64,238

2,962,639

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)    The performance period ended on 31 December 2017 resulting in the lapse of 46,388 shares due to the performance conditions not being met in full. The remaining 371,098 shares will vest in two equal amounts in 2019 and 2020, subject to continued employment conditions.

(2)    The performance period ended on 31 December 2018 as set out earlier in this report. Following the assessment in January 2019, it was agreed that 487,285 shares would vest in 2020 and 2021, subject to continued employment conditions. The remaining shares will be lapsed and reflected in the 2019 report.

(3)    Ewen Stevenson ceased to be an employee on 30 November 2018, at which point all outstanding awards were forfeited.

 

87


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance

The graph below shows the performance of RBS over the past ten years in terms of TSR compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 Index. This index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies. The TSR for FTSE UK banks for the same period has been added for comparison. Source: Datastream

 

 

Chief Executive pay over the same period

 

 

 

2009

 

2010

 

2011

 

2012

 

2013 (1)

 

2014

 

2015

 

2016

 

2017

 

2018

Total remuneration (£000s) (1)

 

1,647

 

3,687

 

1,646

 

1,646

 

1,235 (SH)
393 (RM)

 

1,878

 

3,492

 

3,702

 

3,487

 

3,578

Annual bonus against max. opportunity

 

0%

 

85%

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

n/a

 

n/a

LTI vesting rates against max. opportunity (2)

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

 

0%

 

73%

 

62%

 

56%

 

89%

 

41%

 

Notes:

(1)     2013 remuneration includes Stephen Hester (SH) as Chief Executive for the period to 30 September and Ross McEwan (RM) for October to December 2013.

(2)     The maximum opportunity is set according to the approved policy and, for LTI awards granted in 2015 and onwards, the regulatory cap.

 

Relative importance of spend on pay

The table below shows a comparison of remuneration expenditure against other distributions and charges. These items have been included as they reflect the key stakeholders for RBS and the major categories of distributions and charges made by RBS.

 

 

 

2018
£m

 

2017
£m

 

Change

Remuneration paid to all employees (1)

 

3,628

 

3,945

 

(8.0%)

Distributions to holders of ordinary shares (2)

 

241

 

 

Distributions to holders of preference shares and paid-in equity

 

470

 

628

 

(25.2%)

Taxation and other charges recognised in the income statement:

 

 

 

 

 

 

- Social security, Bank levy and Corporation tax

 

1,062

 

1,100

 

(3.5%)

- Irrecoverable VAT and other indirect taxes incurred by RBS (3)

 

616

 

533

 

15.6%

 

Notes:

(1)     Remuneration paid to all employees represents total staff expenses per Note 3 to the Financial Statements, exclusive of social security and other staff costs. As the contents of other staff costs per Note 3 is different to prior years, the 2017 balance has been re-presented for consistency.

(2)     In 2018 RBS paid an interim dividend of 2.0p per ordinary share. In addition, the company announced that the directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share, which are both subject to shareholders’ approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019.

(3)     Input VAT and other indirect taxes not recoverable by RBS due to it being partially exempt.

 

88


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Change in Chief Executive pay compared with employees

The table below shows the percentage change in remuneration for the Chief Executive between 2017 and 2018 compared with the percentage change in the average remuneration of RBS employees based in the UK. In each case, remuneration is based on salary, benefits and annual bonus. The Chief Executive also receives a fixed share allowance as part of his fixed pay and this remained unchanged over the period.

 

 

 

Salary

 

Benefits

 

Annual Bonus

 

 

2017 to 2018 change

 

2017 to 2018 change

 

2017 to 2018 change

Chief Executive (1)

 

0%

 

0%

 

n/a

UK employees (2)

 

17%

 

-51%

 

8%

 

Notes:

(1)   Executive directors are not eligible for an annual bonus but receive variable pay in LTI awards. Standard benefit funding for executive directors remained unchanged between 2017 and 2018. The benefits for the Chief Executive excludes other benefits such as travel assistance in connection with company business and relocation benefits, the value of which is disclosed each year in the total remuneration table.

(2)   The data represents full year average salary costs of the UK based employee population. This is considered to be the most representative comparator group as it covers the majority of employees and the Chief Executive is based in the UK. The changes in salary and benefits for employees have largely been driven by a simplification and rebalancing of fixed pay arrangements. There was no material change to total remuneration as a result of these changes. The percentage reduction in benefits is not equal to the percentage uplift in salary because the underlying values are different and salary makes up a larger proportion of total remuneration.

 

CEO to employee pay ratios

We are including the table below ahead of new reporting requirements formally applying next year. The ratios compare the total remuneration of the Chief Executive, as set out in this report, against the remuneration of the median UK employee as well as employees at the lower and upper quartiles. The disclosure will build up over time to cover a rolling 10-year period.

 

A significant proportion of the Chief Executive’s pay is delivered in LTI awards, where awards are linked to the company’s performance and share price movements over the longer-term. Therefore, the ratios will depend significantly on LTI outcomes and may fluctuate from one year to the next. None of the three employees identified at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles this year received LTI awards. The table also includes ratios covering salary only so that a further comparison is possible as well as the remuneration values for the identified employees. The steps that RBS takes to ensure employees are paid fairly are set out earlier in this report.

 

 

 

Pay ratios

Remuneration values

Financial Year

 

Methodology

 

P25
(Lower Quartile)

 

P50
(Median)

 

P75
(Upper Quartile)

Calculation

 

Chief
Executive

 

Y25
(Lower Quartile)

 

Y50
(Median)

 

Y75
(Upper Quartile)

2018

 

A (see notes)

 

143:1

 

97:1

 

56:1

total remuneration

 

£3,577,649

 

£24,946

 

£36,727

 

£63,825

 

salary only

 

44:1

 

30:1

 

19:1

salary only

 

£1,000,000

 

£22,526

 

£33,146

 

£51,302

 

Notes:

(1)   The employees at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles (lower, median and upper quartile) were determined as at 31 December 2018 based on full-time equivalent remuneration for all UK employees other than for variable pay where the actual amount to be paid has been used.

(2)   ‘Option A’ methodology was selected as this is considered the most statistically accurate method under the reporting regulations. UK employees receive a pension funding allowance set as a percentage of salary. Some employees, but not the Chief Executive, continue to participate in the defined benefit pension scheme, under which it would be possible to recognise a higher value. For simplicity and consistency with our regulatory disclosures, the pension funding allowance value has been included in the calculation for all employees.

(3)   The data for the three individuals identified has been considered and fairly reflects pay at the relevant quartiles amongst the UK employee population. Each of the three individuals was a full-time employee during the year and none received an exceptional award which would otherwise inflate their pay figures.

 

Summary of remuneration levels for employees in 2018

49,875 employees earned total remuneration up to £50,000

11,508 employees earned total remuneration between £50,000 and £100,000

4,924 employees earned total remuneration between £100,000 and £250,000

932 employees earned total remuneration over £250,000

 

Remuneration of the eight highest paid senior executives below Board (1)

 

 

 

Executive 1

 

Executive 2

 

Executive 3

 

Executive 4

 

Executive 5

 

Executive 6

 

Executive 7

 

Executive 8

 

 

£000

 

£000

 

£000

 

£000

 

£000

 

£000

 

£000

 

£000

Salary

 

800

 

800

 

141

 

792

 

650

 

600

 

450

 

444

Fixed allowance (cash)

 

475

 

400

 

71

 

396

 

325

 

300

 

113

 

111

Fixed allowance (shares)

 

475

 

400

 

71

 

396

 

325

 

300

 

113

 

111

Annual bonus

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LTI awards (2)

 

714

 

714

 

 

460

 

460

 

410

 

246

 

47

Buyout award (3)

 

 

 

1,962

 

 

 

 

 

Total remuneration

 

2,464

 

2,314

 

2,245

 

2,044

 

1,760

 

1,610

 

922

 

713

 

Notes:

(1)     Remuneration for 2018 for eight members of the Chief Executive’s executive management team.

(2)     The value of the LTI awards reflects awards that were granted in 2016 and performance-assessed at the end of 2018. An estimated value is shown above based on the average share price between October and December 2018, consistent with the method used for executive directors in this report.

(3)     The buyout includes awards granted in replacement of awards forfeited on leaving a previous employer and also an award in respect of lost variable pay opportunity for 2018.

 

89


 

Annual Report on Remuneration

 

 

 

 

Consideration of matters relating to directors’ remuneration

Membership of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee

All members of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee (the Committee) are independent non-executive directors. Robert Gillespie served as Chairman of the Committee and Alison Davis, Mike Rogers and Mark Seligman were members of the Committee throughout 2018. Frank Dangeard joined the Committee with effect from 1 June 2018.

 

The Committee held seven scheduled meetings in 2018 and a further four ad hoc meetings. Details of attendance can be found in the ‘Our Board’ section of the governance report.

 

The role and responsibilities of the Committee

The Committee is responsible for:

 

·          approving the remuneration policy for all employees and reviewing the effectiveness of its implementation;

 

·          reviewing performance and making recommendations to the Board on arrangements for executive directors;

 

·          approving performance and remuneration arrangements for a defined ‘in scope’ population capturing members and attendees of the Group Executive Committee, and the direct reports of the Chief Executive including heads of key legal entities, control function heads and the company secretary. The Committee also approves arrangements where employees earn total compensation which exceeds an amount determined by the Committee, currently £1 million; and

 

·          setting the remuneration framework and principles for employees identified as Material Risk Takers falling within the scope of UK regulatory requirements.

 

In mitigating potential conflicts of interest, directors are not involved in decisions regarding their own remuneration and remuneration advisers are appointed by the Committee rather than management.

 

The terms of reference of the Committee are reviewed annually and available on rbs.com.

 

Summary of the principal activity of the Committee in 2018

The tasks that the Committee undertook during the year included reviewing and, where appropriate, approving:

 

First half of 2018

 

·          2017 performance reviews and remuneration arrangements for the Committee’s ‘in scope’ population.

 

·          2018 performance objectives for the ‘in scope’ population.

 

·          Variable pay allocations and the 2017 Directors’ Remuneration Report.

 

·          Vesting levels for LTI awards granted in 2015 and the interim assessment of 2016/17 LTI awards.

 

·          Remuneration governance arrangements for ring-fencing.

 

·          Regulatory updates and submissions.

 

·          Fixed and variable pay spend across all RBS employees, including analysis by employee level, geography and diversity.

 

·          The Group-wide remuneration policy principles.

 

·          Service provided by external advisers.

 

·          The bonus pool methodology.

 

Second half of 2018

 

·          Half-year and year-end performance reviews for the ‘in scope’ population.

 

·          The implications of the UK Corporate Governance Code changes and new pay ratio disclosures.

 

·          Year end planning and external stakeholder engagement plan.

 

·          Management’s assurance of the implementation of the Group-wide remuneration policy.

 

·          Fixed pay proposals across RBS for the annual cycle.

 

·          The 2018 employee Sharesave offer.

 

·          The draft Directors’ Remuneration Report for 2018.

 

·          2018 variable pay proposals.

 

Performance evaluation

The Committee has considered the findings of the annual review of the effectiveness of the Committee. This year the evaluation process was conducted externally by Independent Board Evaluation.

 

The Committee was felt to be fulfilling its remit in an effective way and is trusted by the Group Board to handle this potentially sensitive issue well. The Committee was encouraged to take a broad view of its agenda and to communicate as freely as possible with the Board so that remuneration decisions are seen to be taken in a strategic context. Actions were agreed as part of the evaluation and progress will be tracked and reported to the Committee during 2019.

 

Advisers to the Committee

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) was first appointed as remuneration adviser by the Committee in 2010, following a review of potential advisers and the services provided. An annual review of the quality of advice and the associated level of fees was undertaken during 2018, following which the Committee agreed to retain the services of PwC. The Committee will continue to review the performance of its advisers each year. PwC is a signatory to the voluntary code of conduct in relation to remuneration consulting in the UK.

 

As well as receiving advice from PwC, the Committee took account at meetings of the views of the Chairman; the Chief Executive; the Chief Financial Officer; the Chief HR Officer; the Director of Reward, Pension & Benefits; the Company Secretary; and the Chief Risk Officer. The Committee also received input from the Board Risk Committee, the Group Audit Committee and the Sustainable Banking Committee.

 

PwC also provides professional services in the ordinary course of business including assurance, advisory, tax and legal advice to RBS subsidiaries. There are processes in place to ensure the advice received by the Committee is independent of any support provided to management.

 

In relation to the fees paid to PwC for advising the Committee, a fixed fee structure has operated since October 2017 to cover standard services with any exceptional items charged on a time/cost basis. The fees for 2018 in relation to directors’ remuneration amounted to £128,625 excluding VAT (2017 - £170,476).

 

Statement of shareholder voting

The tables below set out the voting by shareholders on the resolutions to approve the Directors’ Remuneration Policy at the 2017 AGM and the Annual Report on Remuneration at the 2018 AGM.

 

Directors’ Remuneration Policy – 2017

 

Vote

 

No of shares

 

Percentage

For

 

42,143,861,332

 

96.33%

Against

 

1,603,968,780

 

3.67%

Withheld

 

40,411,396

 

 

Annual Report on Remuneration – 2018

 

Vote

 

No of shares

 

Percentage

For

 

44,384,841,256

 

99.18%

Against

 

366,523,976

 

0.82%

Withheld

 

38,493,640

 

 

Shareholder dilution

 

The company meets its employee share plan obligations through a combination of new issue shares and market purchase shares. In line with the Investment Association’s Principles of Remuneration, RBS’s employee share plans contain monitored limits that govern the number of shares that may be issued to satisfy share plan awards.

 

 

Robert Gillespie

Chairman of the Group Performance and Remuneration Committee

14 February 2019

 

90


 

Other Remuneration Disclosures

 

 

 

 

This section contains a number of disclosures which are required in accordance with Article 450 of the Capital Requirements Regulation. This section should be read in conjunction with the Directors’ Remuneration Report starting on page 74.

 

Remuneration policy for all employees

The remuneration policy supports the business strategy and is designed to promote the long-term success of RBS. It aims to reward employees for delivering good performance provided this is achieved in a manner consistent with RBS values and within acceptable risk parameters. The remuneration policy applies the same principles to all employees, including Material Risk Takers (MRTs), with some minor adjustments to the policy where necessary to comply with local regulatory requirements. The key elements of the policy are set out below.

 

Base salary

The purpose is to provide a competitive level of fixed cash remuneration.

 

Operation

Base salaries are reviewed annually and should reflect the talents, skills and competencies that the individual brings to the business.

 

Role-based allowance

The purpose is to provide fixed pay that reflects the skills and experience required for the role.

 

Operation

Role-based allowances are fixed allowances which form an element of the employee’s overall fixed remuneration for regulatory purposes and are based on the role the individual performs.

 

They are delivered in cash and/or shares depending on the level of the allowance and the seniority of the recipient. Shares are subject to an appropriate retention period, not less than six months.

 

Benefits and pension

The purpose is to provide a range of flexible and competitive benefits.

 

Operation

In most jurisdictions, employee benefits or a cash equivalent are provided from a flexible benefits account.

 

Pension funding forms part of fixed remuneration and RBS does not as a rule award discretionary pension benefits.

 

Annual bonus

The purpose is to support a culture where employees recognise the importance of serving customers well and are rewarded for superior performance.

 

Operation

The annual bonus pool is based on a balanced scorecard of measures including Customer, People, Financial & Business Delivery, and Risk & Control measures. Allocation from the pool depends on performance of the franchise or function and the individual.

 

Individual performance assessment is supported by a structured performance management framework. This is designed to assess performance against longer term business requirements across a range of financial and non-financial metrics as well as an evaluation of adherence to internal controls and risk management. A balanced scorecard is used to align with the business strategy. Each individual will have defined measures of success appropriate to their role.

 

Risk and conduct performance is also taken into account. Control functions are assessed independently of the business units that they oversee, with the objectives and remuneration being set according to the priorities of the control area, not the targets of the businesses they support. The Group Chief Risk Officer and the Chief Audit Executive have the authority to escalate matters to Board level if management do not respond appropriately.

 

Independent control functions exist for key legal entities outside the ring-fence (NatWest Markets Plc and RBS International), with dual solid reporting lines into both the legal entity Chief Executive Officer and the Group Control Function Head.

 

For awards made in respect of the 2018 performance year, immediate cash awards continue to be limited to a maximum of £2,000. In line with regulatory requirements, a significant proportion of annual bonus awards for our more senior employees is deferred and includes partial delivery in shares.

 

The deferral period varies from three years for standard MRTs, rising to five years for individuals identified as Risk Manager MRTs and seven years for Senior Managers under the UK’s Senior Managers Regime. All awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions. For MRTs, a minimum of 50% of any annual bonus is delivered in shares and a twelve month retention period will apply post vesting in line with regulatory requirements

 

Long-term incentive awards

The purpose is to: support a culture where good performance against a full range of measures will be rewarded; encourage the creation of value over the long-term; and align rewards with the returns to shareholders.

 

Operation

RBS provides certain employees in senior roles with long-term incentive awards. For awards made in respect of the 2018 performance year, the population receiving long-term incentive awards will be limited to executive directors and certain members of the Group’s senior executive committees.

 

Awards will be subject to pre-grant and pre-vest performance assessments that consider progress against Customer, People, Financial & Business Delivery, and Risk & Control measures, aligned with RBS’s strategic aims. Vesting will take place over a three to seven year period following grant.

 

The number of shares that vest under the award may vary between 0% -100% depending on the performance achieved. Awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions and a twelve month retention period applies post vesting.

 

Shareholding requirements

The requirements promote long-term alignment between senior executives and shareholders.

 

Operation

Executive directors and certain senior executives are required to build up and hold a shareholding equivalent to a percentage of salary. There is a restriction on the number of shares that individuals can sell until the requirement is met.

 

Other share plans

The purpose is to offer employees in certain jurisdictions the opportunity to acquire shares.

 

Operation

Employees in certain countries are eligible to contribute to share plans which are not subject to performance conditions.

 

91


 

Other Remuneration Disclosures

 

 

 

 

Criteria for identifying MRTs

The European Banking Authority has issued criteria for identifying MRT roles, those staff whose activities have a material influence over RBS’s performance or risk profile. The criteria are both qualitative (based on the nature of the role) and quantitative (for example those who exceed the stipulated total remuneration threshold).

 

The qualitative criteria can be summarised as: staff within the management body; senior management; other staff with key functional or managerial responsibilities; and staff who individually, or as part of a Committee, have authority to approve new business products or to commit to credit risk exposures and market risk transactions above certain levels. The quantitative criteria are: individuals earning €500,000 or more in the previous year; individuals in the top 0.3% of earners in the previous year; and individuals who earned more than the lowest paid identified staff per certain qualitative criteria. In addition to the qualitative and quantitative criteria, RBS has applied its own minimum standards to identify roles that are considered to have a material influence over its risk profile.

 

Personal hedging strategies

In accordance with UK regulatory requirements and internal dealing rules that apply to employees, the conditions attached to discretionary share-based awards prohibit the use of any personal hedging strategies to lessen the impact of a reduction in value of such awards. These conditions are explicitly acknowledged and accepted by employees when any share-based awards are granted.

 

Risk in our remuneration process

RBS’s approach to remuneration and related policies promotes effective risk management through a clear distinction between fixed remuneration, which reflects the role undertaken by an individual, and variable remuneration, which is directly linked and reflective of performance and can be risk-adjusted. Fixed pay is set at an appropriate level to avoid incentives that are adverse to sound risk management, and at a level which would allow RBS to pay zero variable pay.

 

Focus on risk is achieved through clear risk input into objectives, performance reviews, the determination of variable pay pools, and incentive plan design as well as the application of malus and clawback. The Committee is supported by the Group Board Risk Committee (BRC) and the RBS Risk function.

 

A robust process is used to assess risk performance. A range of measures are considered, specifically capital, liquidity and funding risk, credit risk, market risk, pension risk, compliance & conduct risk, financial crime, operational risk, business risk and reputational risk. Consideration is also given to overall risk culture. RBS’s remuneration arrangements are in accordance with regulatory requirements and the steps we take to ensure appropriate and thorough risk adjustment are also fully disclosed and discussed with the PRA and the FCA.

 

Variable pay determination

For the 2018 performance year, RBS operated a robust multi-step process, which is control function led, to assess performance and the appropriate bonus pool by franchise and function. At multiple points throughout the process, reference is made to Group-wide business performance (from both affordability and appropriateness perspectives) and the need to distinguish between go-forward and resolution activities.

 

The process considers a balanced scorecard of performance assessments at the level of each franchise or function, across financial, customer and people measures. Risk and conduct assessments at the same level are then undertaken to ensure that performance achieved without appropriate consideration of risk, risk culture and conduct controls, is not inappropriately rewarded.

 

BRC reviews any material risk and conduct events and, if appropriate, an underpin may be applied to the individual business and function bonus pools or to the overall bonus pool. BRC may recommend a reduction of a bonus pool if it considers that risk and conduct performance is unacceptable or that the impact of poor risk management has yet to be fully reflected in the respective inputs.

 

Following further review against overall performance and conduct, the Chief Executive will make a final recommendation to the Committee, informed by all the previous steps in the process and his strategic view of the business. The Committee will then make an independent decision on the final bonus pool taking all of these earlier steps into account.

 

The assessment process for LTI awards to executive directors and other recipients is founded on the balanced scorecard approach used for the multi-step bonus pool process, reflecting a consistent risk management performance assessment.

 

Remuneration and culture

RBS continues to assess conduct and its impact on remuneration as part of the annual Group-wide bonus pool process and also via the accountability review framework. RBS has continued to simplify its approach to reward and removed incentives for employees where this could drive unintended behaviours. The Committee will continue to review workforce remuneration and the alignment of incentives and reward with culture.

 

The governance of culture is clearly laid out with Senior Management Function roles having clearly defined accountabilities. The Board and Sustainable Banking Committee also play key roles in building our cultural priorities. Clear measurement frameworks are in place to measure progress.

 

Accountability review process and malus/clawback

The accountability review process was introduced in 2012 to identify any material risk management, control and general policy breach failures, and to ensure accountability for those events. This allows RBS to respond in instances where new information would change the variable pay decisions made in previous years and/or the decisions to be made in the current year.

 

Under the accountability review process RBS can apply:

 

·          Malus - to reduce (to zero if appropriate) the amount of any unvested variable pay awards prior to payment;

 

·          Clawback - to recover awards that have already vested; and

 

·          In-year bonus reductions - to adjust variable pay that would have otherwise been awarded for the current year.

 

Any variable pay awarded to MRTs from 1 January 2015 onwards is subject to clawback for seven years from the date of grant. For awards made in respect of the 2016 performance year onwards, this period has been extended to ten years for executive directors and other Senior Managers under the Senior Managers Regime where there are outstanding internal or regulatory investigations at the end of the normal seven year clawback period.

 

Circumstances in which RBS may apply malus, clawback or in-year bonus reduction include:

 

·          the individual being culpable, responsible or ultimately accountable for conduct which results in significant financial losses for RBS;

 

·          the individual failing to meet appropriate standards of fitness and propriety;

 

·          reasonable evidence of an individual’s misbehaviour or material error;

 

·          RBS or the individual’s relevant business unit suffering a material failure of risk management; and

 

·          for malus and in-year bonus reduction only, circumstances where there has been a material downturn in financial performance.

 

The above list of circumstances is not exhaustive and RBS may consider any further circumstances that it feels appropriate.

 

During 2018 a number of issues and events were considered under the accountability review framework. The outcomes covered a range of actions including: reduction and forfeiture of unvested awards through malus; dismissal with forfeiture of unvested awards; and suspension of awards pending further investigation.

 

92


 

Other Remuneration Disclosures

 

 

 

 

Remuneration of MRTs

The quantitative disclosures below are made in accordance with Article 450 of the EU Capital Requirements Regulation in relation to 588 employees who have been identified as MRTs.

 

1. Number of MRTs by business area

 

Number of beneficiaries

 

Senior
mgmt

 

Other
MRTs

 

Total

Executive Directors

 

2

 

 

2

Non-Executive Directors

 

 

13

 

13

PBB

 

1

 

55

 

56

CPB

 

1

 

75

 

76

RBSI

 

1

 

23

 

24

NatWest Markets

 

1

 

228

 

229

Corporate Functions

 

7

 

136

 

143

Control Functions

 

0

 

15

 

15

Other Business Areas

 

1

 

29

 

30

Total

 

14

 

574

 

588

 

2. Aggregate remuneration expenditure

Aggregate remuneration expenditure in respect of 2018 performance was as follows:

 

Aggregate remuneration

 

Senior
mgmt

 

Other
MRTs

 

Total

Number of beneficiaries

 

14

 

574

 

588

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Executive Directors

 

5.77

 

 

5.77

Non-Executive Directors

 

 

2.95

 

2.95

PBB

 

2.54

 

18.82

 

21.36

CPB

 

3.39

 

33.24

 

36.63

RBSI

 

1.22

 

5.08

 

6.30

NatWest Markets

 

3.56

 

152.36

 

155.92

Corporate Functions

 

12.01

 

48.18

 

60.19

Control Functions

 

 

4.81

 

4.81

Other Business Areas

 

2.65

 

14.66

 

17.31

Total

 

31.14

 

280.10

 

311.24

 

3. Amounts and form of fixed and variable remuneration

Fixed remuneration consisted of salaries, allowances, pension and benefit funding.

 

Fixed remuneration

 

Senior
mgmt

 

Other
MRTs

 

Total

Number of beneficiaries

 

14

 

574

 

588

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Executive Directors

 

4.12

 

 

4.12

Non-Executive Directors

 

 

2.95

 

2.95

PBB

 

1.44

 

13.27

 

14.71

CPB

 

1.89

 

20.52

 

22.41

RBSI

 

0.66

 

3.63

 

4.29

NatWest Markets

 

2.06

 

96.29

 

98.35

Corporate Functions

 

6.94

 

32.35

 

39.29

Control Functions

 

 

3.26

 

3.26

Other Business Areas

 

1.55

 

10.13

 

11.68

Total

 

18.66

 

182.40

 

201.06

 

Variable remuneration awarded for 2018 performance

Variable remuneration consisted of a combination of annual bonus and long-term incentive awards, deferred over a three to seven year period in accordance with regulatory requirements. Under the RBS bonus deferral structure, immediate cash awards are limited to £2,000 per employee.

 

Long-term incentive awards vest subject to the extent to which performance conditions are met and can result in zero payment.

 

Annual bonus

 

Senior
mgmt

 

Other
MRTs

 

Total

Number of beneficiaries

 

3

 

469

 

472

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Executive Directors

 

 

 

Non-Executive Directors

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PBB

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.09

 

0.09

Deferred bonds

 

 

1.90

 

1.90

Deferred shares

 

 

3.56

 

3.56

 

 

 

 

5.55

 

5.55

CPB

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.11

 

0.11

Deferred bonds

 

 

2.78

 

2.78

Deferred shares

 

 

9.83

 

9.83

 

 

 

 

12.72

 

12.72

RBSI

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.05

 

0.05

Deferred bonds

 

0.06

 

0.79

 

0.85

Deferred shares

 

0.50

 

0.62

 

1.12

 

 

0.56

 

1.46

 

2.02

NatWest Markets

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.39

 

0.39

Deferred bonds

 

 

9.65

 

9.65

Deferred shares

 

 

46.03

 

46.03

 

 

 

 

56.07

 

56.07

Corporate Functions

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.24

 

0.24

Deferred bonds

 

0.06

 

5.36

 

5.42

Deferred shares

 

1.44

 

10.23

 

11.67

 

 

1.50

 

15.83

 

17.33

Control Functions

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.02

 

0.02

Deferred bonds

 

 

0.45

 

0.45

Deferred shares

 

 

1.08

 

1.08

 

 

 

 

1.55

 

1.55

Other Business Areas

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash remuneration

 

 

0.05

 

0.05

Deferred bonds

 

 

1.18

 

1.18

Deferred shares

 

 

3.30

 

3.30

 

 

 

 

4.53

 

4.53

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

2.06

 

97.71

 

99.77

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Long-term incentives

 

Senior
mgmt

 

Other
MRTs

 

Total

Number of beneficiaries

 

9

 

 

9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Executive Directors

 

1.65

 

 

1.65

Non-Executive Directors

 

 

 

PBB

 

1.10

 

 

1.10

CPB

 

1.50

 

 

1.50

RBSI

 

 

 

NatWest Markets

 

1.50

 

 

1.50

Corporate Functions

 

3.58

 

 

3.58

Control Functions

 

 

 

Other Business Areas

 

1.10

 

 

1.10

Total

 

10.43

 

 

10.43

 

4. Outstanding deferred remuneration through 2018

The table below includes deferred remuneration awarded or paid out in 2018 in respect of prior performance years. Deferred remuneration reduced during the year relates to long-term incentives lapsed when performance conditions are not met, long-term incentives and deferred awards forfeited on leaving and malus adjustments of prior year deferred awards and long-term incentives.

 

Category of deferred
remuneration

 

Senior
mgmt
£m

 

Other
MRTs

£m

 

Total
£m

Unvested from prior year

 

44.59

 

137.10

 

181.69

Awarded during year

 

11.73

 

108.16

 

119.89

Paid out

 

1.76

 

81.99

 

83.75

Reduced from prior years

 

14.39

 

14.77

 

29.16

Unvested at year end

 

40.17

 

148.51

 

188.68

 

5. Guaranteed Awards (including ‘Sign-on’ awards) and Severance Payments

RBS does not offer ‘Sign-on awards’. Guaranteed awards may only be granted to new hires in exceptional circumstances in compensation for awards foregone in their previous company and are limited to the first year of service. Three new hire guarantees were made in respect of the 2018 performance year.

 

Severance payments and / or arrangements can be made to employees who leave RBS in certain situations, including redundancy. Such payments are calculated by a pre-determined formula set out within the relevant social plans, policies, agreements or local laws. Where local laws permit, there is a cap on the maximum amount that can be awarded.

 

No severance payments were made during the year in excess of contractual payments, local policies, standards or statutory amounts, other than payments to three individuals of £215,869, £81,923 and 502,877 each made in commercial settlement of potential legal proceedings related to the termination of employment.

 

Where required, remuneration is constrained within the limit of variable to fixed remuneration in accordance with EBA rules.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Definitions

 

PBB              Personal & Business Banking

 

CPB              Commercial & Private Banking

 

RBSI             RBS International

 

93


 

Other Remuneration Disclosures

 

 

 

 

6. Ratio between fixed and variable remuneration

The variable component of total remuneration for MRTs at RBS shall not exceed 100% of the fixed component. The average ratio between fixed and variable remuneration for 2018 is approximately 1 to 0.62. The majority of MRTs are based in the UK.

 

Ratio of fixed to variable

 

Senior
mgmt

 

Other
MRTs

 

Total

Number of beneficiaries

 

12

 

469

 

481

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ratio

 

ratio

 

ratio

Executive Directors

 

1:0.69

 

 

1:0.69

Non-Executive Directors

 

 

1:0

 

1:0

PBB

 

1:0.77

 

1:0.47

 

1:0.50

CPB

 

1:0.80

 

1:0.69

 

1:0.70

RBSI

 

1:0.85

 

1:0.42

 

1:0.49

NatWest Markets

 

1:0.73

 

1:0.65

 

1:0.65

Corporate Functions

 

1:0.89

 

1:0.53

 

1:0.58

Control Functions

 

1:0

 

1:0.52

 

1:0.52

Other Business Areas

 

1:0.71

 

1:0.52

 

1:0.65

Consolidated

 

1:0.80

 

1:0.60

 

1:0.62

 

7. Discount Rate

Under CRD IV regulations, a notional discount is available which allows variable pay to be awarded at a level that would otherwise exceed the 1:1 ratio, provided that at least 25% of variable pay is delivered ‘in instruments’ (shares) and deferred over five years or more. The discount rate was not used for remuneration awarded in respect of the 2018 performance year.

 

Total remuneration by band for all employees earning >1 million

 

€ million

 

Number of employees
2018

€1.0 - €1.5

 

45

€1.5 - €2.0

 

23

€2.0 - €2.5

 

5

€2.5 - €3.0

 

2

€3.0 - €3.5

 

1

€3.5 - €4.0

 

0

€4.0 - €4.5

 

1

€4.5 - €5.0

 

1

Total

 

78

 

Notes:

(1)     Total remuneration in the table above includes fixed pay, pension and benefit funding and variable pay.

(2)     Executive directors are included. The table is based on an exchange rate where applicable of 1.13 to £1 as at 31 December 2018.

 

Employees who earned total remuneration of over €1 million in 2018 represent just 0.1% of our employees. This number reduces to 67 employees if we exclude pension and benefit funding. These employees include those who manage major businesses and functions with responsibility for significant assets, earnings or areas of strategic activity and can be grouped as follows:

 

·   The Chief Executives responsible for each area and their direct reports.

 

·   Employees managing large businesses within a franchise.

 

·   Income generators responsible for high levels of income including those involved in managing trading activity and supporting clients with more complex financial transactions, including financial restructuring.

 

·   Those responsible for managing our balance sheet and liquidity and funding positions across the business.

 

94


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

Page

Presentation of information

 

101

Risk management framework

 

 

Introduction

 

101

Risk culture

 

102

Risk governance

 

103

Risk appetite

 

104

Risk controls and limits

 

104

Risk identification and measurement

 

104

Risk treatment and mitigation

 

104

Risk assurance

 

105

Model risk

 

105

Stress testing

 

105

Capital, liquidity and funding risk

 

 

Definitions, sources and key developments

 

109

Capital, liquidity and funding management

 

110

Minimum requirements

 

111

Measurement

 

112

Credit risk

 

 

Definition, sources and key developments

 

123

Risk governance, appetite and controls

 

123

Risk identification and measurement

 

123

Risk models

 

124

Risk mitigation

 

124

Risk assessment and monitoring

 

124

Banking activities

 

134

Trading activities

 

158

Key IFRS 9 terms and differences

 

161

Market risk

 

 

Non-traded market risk

 

163

Traded market risk

 

169

Pension risk

 

172

Compliance & conduct risk

 

172

Financial crime

 

173

Operational risk

 

173

Business risk

 

175

Reputational risk

 

176

 

 

Presentation of information

Where indicated in the section headers, information in the Capital and risk management section (pages 101 to 176) is within the scope of the Independent auditor’s report. Where a main section header, presented in bold, is marked as audited all sub sections are also audited.

 

Risk management framework

Introduction

RBS operates an integrated risk management framework, centred around the embedding of a strong risk culture, which is designed to achieve compliance with prudential and conduct obligations. Each element of the risk management framework functions both individually and as part of a larger continuum. The framework ensures the tools and capability are in place to facilitate risk management and decision-making across the organisation.

 

RBS’s strategy is informed and shaped by an understanding of the risk landscape, including a range of significant risks and uncertainties in the external economic, political and regulatory environment. Identifying these risks and understanding how they affect RBS informs risk appetite and risk management practice.

 

Risk appetite, which is supported by a robust set of principles, policies and practices, defines our levels of tolerance for a variety of risks. It is a key element of RBS’s risk management framework and culture, providing a structured approach to risk-taking within agreed boundaries.

 

Effective governance, underpinned by the three lines of defence model, is essential to ensure the right decisions are being made by the right people at the right time. Governance includes regular and transparent risk reporting as well as discussion and decision-making at senior management committees, which informs management strategies across the organisation.

 

RBS aims to have the right tools in place to support effective risk management. Having the appropriate capability, people and infrastructure is central. This is supported by a strong emphasis on systems, training and development to ensure threats are anticipated and managed appropriately within the boundaries determined by the agreed risk appetite.

 

Measurement, evaluation and transparency are also fundamental elements of the framework, providing robust analysis of the materiality and likelihood of specific threats as well as supporting understanding and communication of the financial and non-financial risks to which RBS is exposed.

 

RBS has a strong focus on defining the control environment to ensure the effective operation of policies and processes embedded in the customer-facing businesses, thus facilitating the management of the risks they take in the course of their day-to-day activities.

 

 

RBS also has a strong focus on continually improving the way risk is managed, particularly in terms of how threats are anticipated or responded to, but also in terms of simplifying or enhancing existing controls, policies and practice.

 

Essential to this is the ability to scan both the medium and long-term horizon for risks. Stress testing is used to quantify, evaluate and understand the potential impact that changes to risks may have on the financial strength of RBS, including its capital position. In turn, the results of stress tests can be used to inform and shape strategy.

 

Given the evolving landscape, including the structural reform required by the UK’s ring-fencing requirements, in 2018 there was an emphasis on enhancing both the risk culture and risk appetite elements of the framework – as well as the interconnectivity between framework components.

 

101


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

All RBS employees share ownership of the way risk is managed. The businesses, the control and support functions, and Internal Audit work together to make sure business activities and policies are consistent with risk appetite; following the three lines of defence model. RBS constantly monitors its risk profile against its defined risk appetite and limits, taking action when required to balance risk and return.

 

The methodology for setting, governing and embedding risk appetite across RBS is being further enhanced with the aim of simplifying current risk appetite processes and increasing alignment with strategic planning and external threat assessments.

 

Risk culture

A strong risk culture is essential if RBS is to achieve its ambition to build a truly customer-focused bank. RBS’s risk culture target is to make risk simply part of the way that employees work and think.

 

Such a culture must be built on strong risk practices and appropriate risk behaviours must be embedded throughout the organisation.

 

To achieve this, RBS is focusing on leaders as role models and taking action to build clarity, continuing to develop capability and motivate employees to reach the required standards of risk culture behaviour. This includes: taking personal responsibility for understanding and proactively managing the risks associated with individual roles; respecting risk management and the part it plays in daily work; understanding clearly the risks associated with individual roles; aligning decision-making to RBS’s risk appetite; considering risk in all actions and decisions; escalating risks and issues early; taking action to mitigate risks; learning from mistakes and near-misses; challenging others’ attitudes, ideas and actions; and reporting and communicating risks transparently.

 

RBS’s target risk culture behaviours are embedded in Our Standards and are clearly aligned to the core values of “serving customers”, “working together”, “doing the right thing” and “thinking long-term”. These act as an effective basis for a strong risk culture because Our Standards are used for performance management, recruitment and development.

 

A risk culture measurement and reporting approach has been developed, enabling RBS to benchmark both internally and externally. This allows RBS to assess progress in embedding its target risk culture where risk is simply part of the way staff work and think.

 

Training

Enabling employees to have the capabilities and confidence to manage risk is core to RBS’s learning strategy.

 

RBS offers a wide range of risk learning, both technical and behavioural, across the risk disciplines. This training can be mandatory, role-specific or for personal development.

 

Code of Conduct

Aligned to RBS’s values is the Code of Conduct. The code provides guidance on expected behaviour and sets out the standards of conduct that support the values. It explains the effect of decisions that are taken and describes the principles that must be followed.

 

These principles cover conduct-related issues as well as wider business activities. They focus on desired outcomes, with practical guidelines to align the values with commercial strategy and actions. The embedding of these principles facilitates sound decision-making and a clear focus on good customer outcomes.

 

A simple decision-making guide – the “YES check” – has been included in the Code of Conduct. It is a simple set of five questions, designed to ensure RBS values guide day-to-day decisions:

·       Does what I am doing keep our customers and RBS safe and secure?

·       Would customers and colleagues say I am acting with integrity?

·       Am I happy with how this would be perceived on the outside?

·       Is what I am doing meeting the standards of conduct required?

·       In five years’ time would others see this as a good way to work?

 

Each of the five questions is a prompt to think about how the situation fits with RBS Group’s values. It ensures that employees can think through decisions that do not have a clear answer, and guides their judgements.

 

If conduct falls short of RBS’s required standards, the accountability review process is used to assess how this should be reflected in pay outcomes for those individuals concerned. RBS-wide remuneration policy ensures that the remuneration arrangements for all employees reflect the principles and standards prescribed by the PRA rulebook and the FCA handbook. Any employee falling short of the expected standards would also be subject to internal disciplinary policies and procedures. If appropriate, the relevant authority would be notified.

 

102


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

Risk governance

Committee structure

The diagram illustrates RBS’s risk committee structure in 2018 and the main purposes of each committee.

 

 

Risk management structure

The diagram illustrates RBS’s risk management structure in 2018 and key risk management responsibilities.

 

 

Notes:

(1)             While separate roles, the individual undertaking the RBS Group Chief Executive role also performs the NatWest Holdings Chief Executive role.

(2)             The RBS Group Risk function is led by the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer. The RBS Group Chief Risk Officer reports directly to the RBS Group Chief Executive and has a secondary reporting line to the chair of the Group Board Risk Committee as well as a right of access to the committee.

(3)             The NatWest Holdings Chief Risk Officer (Chief Risk Officer, Ring-Fenced Bank) reports directly to the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer and the NatWest Holdings Chief Executive, along with a secondary reporting line to the NatWest Holdings Board Risk Committee chair and right of access to the committee including the Deputy Chairman.

(4)             The NatWest Holdings Risk function provides risk management services across the RBS Group, including to the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer and – where agreed – to the NatWest Markets and RBSI Chief Risk Officers. These services are managed, as appropriate, through service level agreements.

(5)             The NatWest Holdings Risk function is independent of the NatWest Holdings customer-facing franchises and support functions. It provides oversight of risk management ensuring that risk exposures arising from management and business activities are adequately monitored and controlled. The directors of Financial Risk & Analytics, Compliance & Conduct, Restructuring, Risk Policy & Frameworks and Operational Risk & Services as well as the Chief Financial Crime Officer, Chief Credit Officer, Deputy Chief Risk Officer and Head of Risk Strategy & Transformation report to the NatWest Holdings Chief Risk Officer. The Director of Risk, Ulster Bank Ireland DAC and the Director of Compliance, Ulster Bank Ireland DAC, report to the Ulster Bank Ireland DAC Chief Executive; they also have a reporting line to the NatWest Holdings Chief Risk Officer.

(6)             The Chief Risk Officers for NatWest Markets and RBSI have dual reporting lines into the RBS Group Chief Risk Officer and the respective chief executives of their entities. There are additional reporting lines to the NatWest Markets and RBSI Board Risk Committee chairs and a right of access to the committee.

 

103


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

Three lines of defence

RBS uses the three lines of defence model to articulate accountabilities and responsibilities for managing risk across the organisation. The three lines of defence model is adopted across the industry to support the embedding of effective risk management and is expressed through a set of principles as outlined below. All roles, regardless of level, sit within one of these three lines.

First line of defence – Management and supervision

The first line of defence encompasses most roles within RBS, including those in customer franchises, Technology and Services as well as support functions such as Human Resources, Communications & Marketing and Finance. Responsibilities include:

·       Owning, managing and supervising, within a defined risk appetite, the risks which exist in business areas and support functions.

·       Ensuring the business has effective mechanisms for identifying, reporting and managing risk and controls.

·       Ensuring appropriate controls are in place to mitigate risk, balancing control, customer service and competitive advantage.

·       Ensuring that the culture of the business supports balanced risk decisions and compliance with policy, laws and regulations.

Second line of defence – Oversight and control

The second line of defence is the Risk function as well as the policy and control elements of Human Resources, Legal and the Finance function. Responsibilities include:

·       Leading the articulation, design and development of risk culture and appetite.

·       Setting the standard for risk management across the Group.

·       Overseeing and challenging the management of risks and controls.

·       Analysing the aggregate risk profile and ensuring that risks are being managed within risk appetite.

·       Providing expert advice to the first line on risk management, including the application of effective risk and control frameworks and the consideration of risk in decision-making.

·       Providing senior executives with relevant management information and reports, and escalating concerns where appropriate.

Third line of defence – Internal Audit

Responsibilities include:

·       Providing assurance to the Group Audit Committee on the appropriateness of the design and operational effectiveness of governance, risk management and internal controls to monitor and mitigate material risks.

·       Engaging with management to provide perspectives, insights and challenge in order to influence the building of a sustainable bank.

·       Providing independent assurance to the Financial Conduct Authority, Prudential Regulation Authority, Central Bank of Ireland and other key jurisdictional regulators on specific risks and controls.

 

Risk appetite

Risk appetite defines the level and types of risk RBS is willing to accept, within risk capacity, in order to achieve strategic objectives and business plans. It links the goals and priorities to risk management in a way that guides and empowers staff to serve customers well and achieve financial targets.

 

For certain strategic risks, risk capacity defines the maximum level of risk the RBS Group can assume before breaching constraints determined by regulatory capital and liquidity needs, the operational environment, and from a conduct perspective. Articulating risk capacity helps determine where risk appetite should be set, ensuring there is a buffer between internal risk appetite and the Group’s ultimate capacity to absorb losses.

 

Risk appetite framework

The risk appetite framework bolsters effective risk management by promoting sound risk-taking through a structured approach, within agreed boundaries. It also ensures emerging risks and risk-taking activities that would be out of appetite are identified, assessed, escalated and addressed in a timely manner.

 

To facilitate this, a detailed annual review of the framework is carried out. The review includes:

·       Assessing the adequacy of the framework when compared to internal and external expectations.

·       Ensuring the framework remains effective as a strong control environment for risk appetite.

·       Assessing the level of embedding of risk appetite across the organisation.

 

The Board approves the risk appetite framework annually.

 

Establishing risk appetite

Risk appetite is communicated across RBS through risk appetite statements. The risk appetite statements provide clarity on the scale and type of activities that can be undertaken in a manner that is easily conveyed to staff.

 

Risk appetite statements consist of qualitative statements of appetite supported by risk limits and triggers that operate as a defence against excessive risk-taking. They are established at RBS-wide level for all strategic risks and material risks, and at legal entity, franchise, and function level for all other risks.

 

The annual process of establishing risk appetite statements is completed alongside the business and financial planning process. This ensures plans and risk appetite are appropriately aligned.

 

The Board sets risk appetite for the most material risks to help ensure RBS is well placed to meet its priorities and long-term targets even under challenging economic environments. It is the basis on which RBS remains safe and sound while implementing its strategic business objectives.

 

RBS’s risk profile is frequently reviewed and monitored to ensure it remains within appetite and that management focus is concentrated on all strategic risks, material risks and emerging risk issues. Risk profile relative to risk appetite is reported regularly to the Board and senior management.

 

Risk controls and limits

Risk controls and their associated limits are an integral part of the risk appetite approach and a key part of embedding risk appetite in day-to-day risk management decisions. A clear tolerance for material risk types is set in alignment with business activities.

 

RBS policies directly support the qualitative aspects of risk appetite, helping to rebuild and maintain stakeholder confidence in RBS’s risk control and governance. Its integrated approach is designed to ensure that appropriate controls, aligned to risk appetite, are set for each of the strategic and material risks it faces, with an effective assurance process put in place to monitor and report on performance.

 

Risk identification and measurement

Risk identification and measurement within the risk management process comprise:

·       Regular assessment of the overall risk profile, incorporating market developments and trends, as well as external and internal factors.

·       Monitoring of the risks associated with lending and credit exposures.

·       Assessment of trading and non-trading portfolios.

·       Review of potential risks in new business activities and processes.

·       Analysis of potential risks in any complex and unusual business transactions.

 

The financial and non-financial risks that RBS faces each day are detailed in the Risk Directory. This provides a common risk language to ensure consistent terminology is used across RBS. The Risk Directory is subject to annual review. This ensures that it continues to provide a comprehensive and meaningful list of the inherent risks within the businesses.

 

Risk treatment and mitigation

Risk treatment and mitigation is an important aspect of ensuring that risk profile remains within risk appetite. Risk mitigation strategies are discussed and agreed with the businesses. When evaluating possible strategies, costs and benefits, residual risks (risks that are retained) and secondary risks (those caused by the risk mitigation actions) are considered. Monitoring and review processes are in place to track results. Early identification and effective management of changes in legislation and regulation are critical to the successful mitigation of conduct risk. The effects of all changes are managed to ensure timely compliance readiness. Changes assessed as having a high or medium-high impact are managed closely.

 

104


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

Significant and emerging risks that may affect future results and performance are reviewed and monitored. Action is taken to mitigate potential risks as and when required. In depth analysis is carried out, including the stress testing of exposures relative to the risk.

 

Risk assurance

Assurance is carried out on targeted credit risk, market risk, compliance and conduct risk and financial crime risk activities to provide assurance to both internal and external stakeholders including the Board, senior management, the customer-facing franchises, Internal Audit and the Group’s regulators. Selected key controls are also reviewed. Qualitative reviews are carried out to assess various risk aspects as appropriate, including: the quality of risk portfolios, the accuracy of the Basel model inputs and related probability of default/loss given default classifications, the quality of risk management practices, policy compliance and adherence to risk appetite. This can include testing the Group’s credit portfolios and market risk exposures to assist in the early identification of emerging risks, as well as undertaking targeted reviews to examine specific issues.

 

The adequacy and effectiveness of selected key controls owned and operated by the second line of defence are also tested (with a particular focus on credit risk and market risk controls). Selected controls within the scope of Section 404 of the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 as well as selected controls supporting risk data aggregation and reporting are also reviewed. Assurance is carried out on Anti-Money Laundering, Sanctions, and Anti-Bribery & Corruption processes and controls. This helps inform whether or not the financial crime control environment is adequate and effective and whether financial crime risk is appropriately identified, managed and mitigated. The Risk Assurance Committee ensures a consistent and fair approach to all aspects of the second-line assurance review activities. The committee also monitors and validates the ongoing programme of reviews and tracks the remediation of the more material review actions.

 

Model risk

Model risk is the risk that a model is specified incorrectly (not achieving the objective for which it is designed), implemented incorrectly (an error in translating the model specification into the version actually used), or being used incorrectly (correctly specified but applied inappropriately).

 

RBS uses a variety of models as part of its risk management process and activities. Key examples include the use of model outputs to support risk assessments in the credit approval process, ongoing credit risk management, monitoring and reporting, as well as the calculation of risk-weighted assets. Other examples include the use of models to measure market risk exposures and calculate associated capital requirements, as well as for the valuation of positions. The models used for stress-testing purposes also play a key role in ensuring RBS holds sufficient capital, even in stressed market scenarios.

 

Key developments in 2018

In April 2018, the PRA set out its expectations on the model risk management practices that should be adopted when using stress test models. RBS has a strong focus on model risk management and, as a result, practices were reviewed and, where appropriate, work to enhance them in line with regulatory expectations continues.

 

RBS further invested in model risk management during 2018, particularly given business demand and the growing complexity of requirements, such as new regulation and AI. This included the specification of additional IT systems to enhance capability in this area.

 

Model Risk Governance

Model Risk Governance is responsible for setting policy and providing a governance framework for all of RBS’s models and related processes. It is also responsible for defining and monitoring model risk appetite in conjunction with model owners and model users, monitoring the model risk profile and reporting on the model population as well as escalating issues to senior management, through the Model Risk Forum, and the respective franchise and function risk committees.

 

Model Risk Management

Model Risk Management performs independent model validation for material models. It works with individual businesses and functions to monitor adherence to model risk standards, ensuring that models are developed and implemented appropriately and that their operational environment is fit for purpose.

 

Model Risk Management performs reviews of relevant risk and pricing models in two instances: (i) for new models or amendments to existing models and (ii) as part of its ongoing programme to assess the performance of these models. Model Risk Management reviews may test and challenge the logic and conceptual soundness of the methodology, or the assumptions underlying a model. Reviews may also test whether or not all appropriate risks have been sufficiently captured as well as checking the accuracy and robustness of calculations. Based on the review and findings from Model Risk Management, RBS’s model or risk committees consider whether a model can be approved for use. Models used for regulatory reporting may additionally require regulatory approval before implementation.

 

Model Risk Management reassesses the appropriateness of approved risk models on a periodic basis. Each periodic review begins with an initial assessment. Based on the initial assessment, an internal model governance committee will decide to re-ratify a model or to carry out additional work. In the initial assessment, Model Risk Management assesses factors such as a change in the size or composition of the portfolio, market changes, the performance of – or any amendments to – the model and the status of any outstanding issues or scheduled activities carried over from previous reviews. Model Risk Management also monitors the performance of RBS’s portfolio of models to ensure they appropriately capture underlying business rationale. For more information relating to market risk models and pricing models, refer to page 171.

 

Stress testing

Stress testing – capital management

Stress testing is a key risk management tool and a fundamental component of RBS’s approach to capital management. It is used to quantify, evaluate and understand the potential impact of specified changes to risk factors on the financial strength of RBS, including its capital position. Stress testing includes:

·       Scenario testing, which examines the impact of a hypothetical future state to define changes in risk factors.

·       Sensitivity testing, which examines the impact of an incremental change to one or more risk factors.

The process for stress testing consists of four broad stages:

 

Define scenarios

·          Identify RBS-specific vulnerabilities and risks.

·          Define and calibrate scenarios to examine risks and vulnerabilities.

·          Formal governance process to agree scenarios.

Assess impact

·          Translate scenarios into risk drivers.

·          Assess impact to positions, income and costs.

·          Impact assessment captures input from across RBS.

Calculate results and assess implications

·          Aggregate impacts into overall results.

·          Results form part of risk management process.

·          Scenario results are used to inform RBS’s business and capital plans.

Develop and agree management actions

·          Scenario results are analysed by subject matter experts and appropriate management actions are then developed.

·          Scenario results and management actions are reviewed and agreed by senior management through executive committees including Executive Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board.

 

105


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

Stress testing is used widely across RBS. The diagram below summarises key areas of focus:

 

 

Specific areas that involve capital management include:

·       Strategic financial and capital planning through assessing the impact of sensitivities and scenarios on the capital plan and capital ratios.

·       Risk appetite through gaining a better understanding of the drivers of – and the underlying risks associated with – risk appetite.

·       Risk identification through a better understanding of the risks that could potentially impact RBS’s financial strength and capital position.

·       Risk mitigation through identifying actions that can be taken to mitigate risks, or could be taken, in the event of adverse changes to the business or economic environment. Risk mitigation is substantially supplemented through RBS’s recovery plan.

 

Reverse stress testing is also carried out. This examines circumstances that can lead to specific, defined outcomes such as business failure. Reverse stress testing allows RBS to examine potential vulnerabilities in its business model more fully.

 

Capital sufficiency – going-concern forward-looking view

With a view to ensuring that RBS and its operating subsidiaries maintain sufficient CET1 capital, going-concern capital requirements are assessed on a forward-looking basis – including as part of the annual budgeting process. These assessments consider the resilience of capital adequacy and leverage ratios under a range of hypothetical future states. The assessments incorporate assumptions regarding a range of regulatory and accounting aspects such as IFRS 9, taking account of a number of factors including economic variables and impairments.

 

In particular, assessments of capital requirements rely on forecasts of:

·          Future business performance given expectations of economic and market conditions over the forecast period.

·          Future business performance under adverse economic and market conditions over the forecast period. A range of scenarios of different severity may be examined.

 

The examination of capital requirements under normal economic and market conditions enables RBS to demonstrate how its projected business performance allows it to meet all internal and regulatory capital requirements as they arise over the plan horizon. For example, RBS will assess its ability to issue loss-absorbing debt instruments in sufficient quantity to meet regulatory timelines. The cost of issuance will be factored into business performance metrics.

 

The examination of capital requirements under adverse economic and market conditions is assessed through stress testing.

 

The results of stress tests are not only used widely across RBS but also by the regulators to set specific capital buffers. RBS takes part in a number of stress tests run by regulatory authorities to test industry-wide vulnerabilities under crystallising global and domestic systemic risks. In 2018, RBS took part in the Bank of England and European Banking Authority stress tests. Details are set out on page 105.

 

Under stress testing, IFRS 9 volatility can have a more material impact. This is because the peak-to-trough change in CET1 may be affected by the transitions from Stage 1 to Stage 2 in stress conditions. RBS uses stress and the peak-to-trough movements to help assess the amount of CET1 capital it needs to hold in stress conditions, in accordance with the capital risk appetite framework.

 

Internal assessment of capital adequacy

An internal assessment of material risks is carried out annually to enable an evaluation of the amount, type and distribution of capital required to cover these risks. This is referred to as the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). The ICAAP consists of a point-in-time assessment of RBS’s exposures and risks at the end of the financial year together with a forward-looking stress capital assessment. The ICAAP is approved by the Board and submitted to the PRA.

 

The ICAAP is used to form a view of capital adequacy separately to the minimum regulatory requirements. The ICAAP is used by the PRA to make an assessment of RBS-specific capital requirements through the Pillar 2 framework.

 

Capital allocation

RBS has mechanisms to allocate capital across its legal entities and businesses which aim to optimise the utilisation of capital resources taking into account applicable regulatory requirements, strategic and business objectives and risk appetite. The framework for allocating capital is approved by the Asset & Liability Management Committee.

 

Governance

Capital management is subject to substantial review and governance. Formal approval of capital management policies is either by the Asset & Liability Management Committee or by the Board on the recommendation of the Board Risk Committee.

 

The Board approves the capital plans, including those for key legal entities and businesses as well as the results of the stress tests relating to those capital plans.

 

Stress testing – liquidity

Liquidity risk monitoring and contingency planning

In implementing the liquidity risk management framework, a suite of tools is used to monitor, limit and stress test the risks on the balance sheet. Limit frameworks are in place to control the level of liquidity risk, asset and liability mismatches and funding concentrations.

 

Liquidity risks are reviewed at significant legal entity and business levels daily, with performance reported to the Asset & Liability Management Committee at least monthly. Liquidity Condition Indicators are monitored daily which ensures any build-up of stress is detected early and the response escalated appropriately through recovery planning.

 

Internal assessment of liquidity

Under the liquidity risk management framework, RBS undertakes the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process. This includes assessment of net stressed liquidity outflows. RBS considers a range of extreme but plausible stress scenarios on its liquidity position over various time horizons, as outlined below.

 

106


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

Type

Description

Idiosyncratic scenario

The market perceives RBS to be suffering from a severe stress event, which results in an immediate assumption of increased credit risk or concerns over solvency.

Market-wide scenario

A market stress event affecting all participants in a market through contagion, counterparty failure and other market risks. RBS is affected under this scenario but no more severely than any other participants with equivalent exposure.

Combined scenario

This scenario models the combined impact of an idiosyncratic and market stress occurring at once. The combined scenario reflects the contingency that a severe name-specific event occurs at RBS in conjunction with a broader market stress, causing wider damage to the market and financial sector and severely affecting funding markets and assets.

 

RBS uses the most severe combination of these to set the internal stress testing scenario. The results of this enable RBS to set its internal liquidity risk appetite, which complements the regulatory liquidity coverage ratio requirement.

 

Stress testing – recovery and resolution planning

The RBS Group Recovery Plan explains how The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (RBSG) and its subsidiaries as a consolidated group would identify and respond to a financial stress event and restore its financial position to remain viable on an ongoing basis.

 

The Recovery Plan ensures that risks which could delay the implementation of a recovery strategy are highlighted and preparations are made to minimise the impact of these risks. Preparations RBS has taken include:

 

·          developing a series of recovery indicators to provide early warning of potential stress events

·          clarifying roles, responsibilities and escalation routes to minimise uncertainty or delay

·          developing a recovery playbook to provide a concise description of the actions required during recovery

·          detailing a range of options to address different stress conditions

·          appointing dedicated option owners to reduce the risk of delay and bandwidth concerns

 

The Recovery Plan is intended to enable RBS to maintain critical services and products it provides to its customers (its critical economic functions), maintain its important business lines (core business lines) and operate within risk appetite whilst restoring the bank’s financial condition.

 

The Recovery Plan is assessed for appropriateness on an ongoing basis and is updated annually, in line with regulatory requirements. It is reviewed and approved by the Board prior to submission to the PRA each year.

 

Individual Recovery Plans have been prepared for NatWest Holdings Limited, NatWest Markets Plc, RBS International Holdings Limited, Ulster Bank Ireland DAC and NatWest Markets N.V. These plans reflect the structure and operations of the post-ring-fenced group and detail the recovery options, recovery indicators and escalation routes for each entity to manage its own response to a financial stress.

 

If RBS was assessed by the UK authorities as failing or likely to fail the authorities have a wide range of powers to place RBS into Resolution. The UK’s Special Resolution Regime places an obligation on banks to ensure they are resolvable. Resolvability is a measure of how effectively a set of actions could be taken to manage the failure of RBS, through execution of a preferred resolution strategy which the Group is Single Point of Entry Bail-in of the Group Hold Co. The process of resolution is owned and implemented by the Bank of England (as UK Resolution Authority).

 

RBS has a multi-year programme of work through to 1 January 2022 to ensure impediments to resolvability are removed and the regulatory resolution strategy could be executed.

 

Stress testing – market risk

Non-traded market risk

Non-traded exposures are reported to the PRA on a quarterly basis as part of the Stress Testing Data Framework. The return provides the regulator with an overview of RBS’s banking book interest rate exposure, providing detailed product information analysed by interest rate driver and other characteristics – including accounting classification, currency and, counterparty type.

 

Scenario analysis based on hypothetical adverse scenarios is performed on non-traded exposures as part of the industry-wide Bank of England and European Banking Authority stress exercises. In addition, RBS produces its own internal scenario analysis as part of the financial planning cycles.

 

Non-traded market risk exposures which are not captured under Pillar 1 are capitalised through the ICAAP. The process covers the following risk types: gap risk, basis risk, credit spread risk, pipeline risk, structural foreign exchange risk, prepayment risk and accounting volatility risk. The ICAAP is completed with a combination of value and earnings measures. The total non-traded market risk capital requirement is determined by adding the different charges for each sub risk type. The ICAAP methodology captures at least ten years of historical volatility, produced with 99% confidence level. Methodologies are reviewed by RBS Model Risk and the results are approved by the Technical Asset & Liability Management Committee.

 

Traded market risk

RBS undertakes daily market risk stress testing to identify vulnerabilities and potential losses in excess of, or not captured in, value-at-risk. The calculated stresses measure the impact of changes in risk factors on the fair values of the trading and fair value through other comprehensive income portfolios.

 

RBS conducts historical, macroeconomic and vulnerability-based stress testing. Historical stress testing is a measure that is used for internal management. Using the historical simulation framework employed for value-at-risk, the current portfolio is stressed using historical data since 1 January 2005. This methodology simulates the impact of the 99.9 percentile loss that would be incurred by historical risk factor movements over the period, assuming variable holding periods specific to the risk factors and the businesses.

 

Historical stress tests form part of the market risk limit framework and their results are reported daily to senior management. Macroeconomic stress tests are carried out periodically as part of the bank-wide, cross-risk capital planning process. The scenario narratives are translated into risk factor shocks using historical events and insights by economists, risk managers and the first line.

 

Market risk stress results are combined with those for other risks into the capital plan presented to the Board. The cross-risk capital planning process is conducted once a year, with a planning horizon of five years. The scenario narratives cover both regulatory scenarios and macroeconomic scenarios identified by RBS.

 

Vulnerability-based stress testing begins with the analysis of a portfolio and expresses its key vulnerabilities in terms of plausible, vulnerability scenarios under which the portfolio would suffer material losses. These scenarios can be historical, macroeconomic or forward-looking/hypothetical. Vulnerability-based stress testing is used for internal management information and is not subject to limits. However, the results for relevant scenarios are reported to senior management

 

107


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Risk management framework continued

Regulatory stress testing

In 2018, RBS took part in regulatory stress tests conducted by the Bank of England and the European Banking Authority. The scenarios are hypothetical in nature and do not represent forecasts of RBS’s future business or profitability. The results of the regulatory stress tests are carefully assessed by RBS and form part of the wider risk management of RBS.

 

 

Bank of England stress test

European Banking Authority stress test

Scenario

 

·          Designed to assess the resilience of major UK banks to tail risk events. The severity of the test is related to policymakers’ assessments of risk levels across markets and regions.

·          The 2018 stress test examined the impact, over five years, of deep simultaneous recessions in the UK and global economies, large falls in asset prices and a separate stress of misconduct costs. The economic scenario in the test was more severe than the global financial crisis.

 

 

·          Designed to evaluate the impact, over three years, of a general macro financial downturn.

·          A static balance sheet assumption was made across the period of stress and therefore mitigating actions such as balance sheet reduction, business growth and cost savings are not factored into the stress outcomes.

Results

 

·                  On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, the CET1 ratio reached a low point of 9.6%, significantly above the hurdle rate of 7.3%.

·                  On an IFRS 9 non-transitional basis, the CET1 ratio reached a low point of 9.2%, significantly above the hurdle rate of 6.9%.

·                  On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, the Tier 1 leverage ratio low point was projected to be 5.1% under stress, significantly above the leverage ratio hurdle rate of 3.59%.

·                  On an IFRS 9 non- transitional basis, the Tier 1 leverage ratio low-point was projected to be 4.8% under stress, significantly above the leverage ratio hurdle rate of 3.25%.

·                  The stress was based on an end of 2017 balance sheet starting position. Since then, RBS has taken a number of actions to further improve its capital position stress resilience, including the continued reduction in certain credit portfolios and the resolution of various litigation cases and regulatory investigations.

 

 

·                  The 2018 EBA stress test did not contain a pass/fail threshold.

·                  On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, RBS’s CET1 ratio under the adverse scenario reached a low point of 9.9%

·                  On an IFRS 9 non-transitional (fully loaded) basis, RBS’s CET1 ratio under the adverse scenario reached a low point of 9.48%

·                  On an IFRS 9 transitional basis, RBS’s leverage ratio under the adverse scenario reached a low point of 4.83%.

·                  On an IFRS 9 non-transitional (fully loaded) basis the leverage ratio under the adverse scenario reaches a low point of 4.1%

·                  The stress was based on an end of 2017 balance sheet starting position. Since then, RBS has taken a number of actions to further improve its capital position stress resilience, including the continued reduction in certain credit portfolios and the resolution of various litigation cases and regulatory investigations.

What does this mean?

 

 

·          The 2018 Bank of England and European Banking Authority stress test results demonstrated that good progress has been made in transforming the balance sheet to a safe and sustainable position. 

 

108


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk

Definitions

Capital consists of reserves and instruments issued that are available, have a degree of permanency and are capable of absorbing losses. A number of strict conditions set by regulators must be satisfied to be eligible as capital.

 

Capital adequacy risk is the risk that there is or will be insufficient capital and other loss absorbing debt instruments to operate effectively including meeting minimum regulatory requirements, operating within Board approved risk appetite and supporting its strategic goals.

 

Liquidity consists of assets that can be readily converted to cash within a short timeframe at a reliable value. Liquidity risk is the risk of being unable to meet financial obligations as and when they fall due.

 

Funding consists of on-balance sheet liabilities that are used to provide cash to finance assets. Funding risk is the risk of not maintaining a diversified, stable and cost-effective funding base.

 

Liquidity and funding risks arise in a number of ways, including through the maturity transformation role that banks perform. The risks are dependent on factors such as:

·           Maturity profile;

·           Composition of sources and uses of funding;

·           The quality and size of the liquidity portfolio;

·           Wholesale market conditions; and

·           Depositor and investor behaviour.

 

Sources of risk

Capital

The eligibility of instruments and financial resources as regulatory capital is laid down by applicable regulation. Capital is categorised under two tiers (Tier 1 and Tier 2) according to the ability to absorb losses, degree of permanency and the ranking of absorbing losses on either a going or gone concern basis. There are three broad categories of capital across these two tiers:

·           CET1 capital. CET1 capital must be perpetual and capable of unrestricted and immediate use to cover risks or losses as soon as these occur. This includes ordinary shares issued and retained earnings.

·           Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital. This is the second type of loss absorbing capital and must be capable of absorbing losses on a going concern basis. These instruments are either written down or converted into CET1 capital when a pre-specified CET1 ratio is reached.

·           Tier 2 capital. Tier 2 capital is the Group’s supplementary capital and provides loss absorption on a gone concern basis. Tier 2 capital absorbs losses after Tier 1 capital. It typically consists of subordinated debt securities with a minimum maturity of five years.

 

Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)

In addition to capital, other specific loss absorbing instruments, including senior notes issued by the Group, may be used to cover certain gone concern capital requirements which, in the EU, is referred to as MREL. Gone concern refers to the situation in which resources must be available to enable an orderly resolution, in the event that the Bank of England (BoE) deems that the Group has failed, or is likely to fail.

 

Liquidity

RBS maintains a prudent approach to the definition of liquidity resources. RBS manages its liquidity to ensure it is always available when and where required, taking into account regulatory, legal and other constraints. Following ring-fencing legislation, liquidity is no longer considered fungible across the Group and the liquidity portfolio has been restructured during 2018 to reflect this. Principal liquidity portfolios are maintained in the UK Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group (UK DoLSub) (primarily in NatWest Bank Plc), UBI DAC, NatWest Markets Plc, RBS International and NWM N.V.. Some disclosures in this section where relevant are presented, on a consolidated basis, for RBS, the UK DoLSub and on a solo basis for NatWest Markets plc.

 

Liquidity resources are divided into primary and secondary liquidity as follows:

·           Primary liquid assets include cash and balances at central banks, Treasury bills and other high quality government and US agency bonds.

·           Secondary liquid assets are eligible as collateral for local central bank liquidity facilities. These assets include own-issued securitisations or whole loans that are retained on balance sheet and pre-positioned with a central bank so that they may be converted into additional sources of liquidity at very short notice.

 

Funding

RBS maintains a diversified set of funding sources, including customer deposits, wholesale deposits and term debt issuance. RBS also retains access to central bank funding facilities.

 

For further details on capital constituents and the regulatory framework covering capital, liquidity and funding requirements, please refer to the RBS Pillar 3 Report 2018 on page 6. For MREL refer to page 8.

 

Key developments in 2018

·           RBS continued to strengthen and de-risk its capital position; CET1 ratio remains ahead of the c14% target and increased by 30 basis points in the year to 16.2%. The directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share, which are both subject to shareholders’ approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019.

·           IFRS 9 adoption on 1 January 2018 favourably impacted CET1 by 30 basis points. RWAs reduced by £12.2 billion to £188.7 billion primarily driven by the legacy business in NatWest Markets, the impact of capital initiatives in Commercial Banking and the impact of the non-performing loan sale and improvement in credit metrics in Ulster Bank RoI.

·           CRR leverage ratio increased to 5.4% (2017 – 5.3%). UK leverage ratio improved to 6.2% (2017 – 6.1%) in line with the balance sheet reduction.

·           During the year the BOE published indicative data on the minimum amount of loss-absorbing resources for the larger UK banks comprising MREL plus buffers. RBS is expected to require loss-absorbing resources of 22.9% of RWAs by 1 January 2020, rising to 26.5% by 1 January 2022. Total loss absorbing capital, based on RBS’s interpretation of the rules and including the benefit of legacy securities, was 30.7% of RWAs at 31 December 2018.

·           In 2018, RBSG plc issued approximately £7 billion MREL compliant senior debt bringing the total MREL senior debt issues to approximately £16 billion relative to the end state (1 January 2022) requirements of approximately £24 billion. These funds enabled RBSG plc to invest in £4.8 billion of NatWest Holdings MREL eligible issuance and £5.1 billion NWM plc eligible issuance in December 2018.

·           During the year, RBS changed its approach to managing liquidity in preparation for ring-fencing. NatWest Markets left the UK DoLSub and now manages its liquidity on a stand-alone basis.

·           The liquidity portfolio increased by £11 billion in 2018 to £198 billion, with primary liquidity increasing by £4 billion to £128 billion. The increase in primary liquidity is driven by increased customer surplus within NatWest Holdings, reduced funding requirement in NatWest Markets and net term issuance, partially offset by settlement of the payment to the US Department of Justice, contribution to the Group pension fund and Term Funding Scheme (TFS) repayment. Increase in secondary liquidity is driven primarily by repayment of TFS, resulting in the return of previously encumbered assets.

·           The rise in primary liquidity resulted in higher liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) of 158% (2017 – 152%). The internal Stressed Outflow coverage ratio decreased to 154% (2017 – 168%) due to stress methodology changes and higher stressed behavioural outflows over the three month horizon.

·           The net stable funding ratio is 141% (2017 – 139% on estimated comparable basis) above the minimum target of 100%.

·           The regulatory agenda continues to rapidly evolve in the UK, Europe and internationally. RBS manages its capital, liquidity and funding to meet both current and future regulatory requirements whilst ensuring that we continue to serve customers well.

 

109


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Capital management

Capital management ensures that there is sufficient capital and other loss absorbing instruments to operate effectively including meeting minimum regulatory requirements, operating within Board approved risk appetite, maintaining its credit rating and supporting its strategic goals.

 

Capital management is critical in supporting the businesses and is enacted through an end to end framework across businesses and the legal entities. Capital is managed both on a Group consolidated level, as well as at NatWest Holdings Group, NatWest Markets Plc, NatWest Markets NV, and RBS International levels. In addition, NatWest Holdings banking subsidiaries are also subject to the same principles, processes and management as the Group of which it is a part. Note that although the aforementioned entities are regulated in line with Basel III principles, local implementation of the framework differs across geographies.

 

Capital planning is integrated into the Group’s wider annual budgeting process and is assessed and updated at least monthly. Regular returns are submitted to the PRA which include a two year rolling forward view. Other elements of capital management, including risk appetite and stress testing, are set out on pages 104 and 105.

 

Produce capital plans

 

i

·           Capital plans are produced for the Group, its key operating entities and its businesses over a five year planning horizon under expected and stress conditions. Stressed capital plans are produced to support internal stress testing in the ICAAP for regulatory purposes.

·           Shorter term forecasts are developed frequently in response to actual performance, changes in internal and external business environment and to manage risks and opportunities.

Assess capital adequacy

 

i

·           Capital plans are developed to maintain capital of sufficient quantity and quality to support the Group’s business, its subsidiaries and strategic plans over the planning horizon within approved risk appetite, as determined via stress testing, and minimum regulatory requirements.

·           Capital resources and capital requirements are assessed across a defined planning horizon.

·           Impact assessment captures input from across the Group including from businesses.

Inform capital actions

·           Capital planning informs potential capital actions including buy backs, redemptions, dividends and new issuance to external investors or via internal transactions.

·           Decisions on capital actions will be influenced by strategic and regulatory requirements, risk appetite, costs and prevailing market conditions.

·           As part of capital planning, RBS will monitor its portfolio of external capital securities and assess the optimal blend and most cost effective means of financing.

 

Capital planning is one of the tools that the Group uses to monitor and manage capital risk on a going and gone concern basis, including the risk of excessive leverage.

 

Liquidity risk management

RBS manages its liquidity risk taking into account regulatory, legal and other constraints to ensure sufficient liquidity is available where required to cover liquidity stresses. The principal levels at which liquidity risk is managed are:

 

·           NatWest Holdings Group

·           UK DoLSub

·           UBI DAC

·           NatWest Markets

·           NatWest Markets Securities Inc.

·           RBS International

·           NWM N.V.

 

The UK DoLSub is PRA regulated and comprises RBS’s four licensed deposit taking UK banks: National Westminster Bank Plc, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Coutts & Company and Ulster Bank Limited.

 

NatWest Markets Plc left the UK DoLSub during 2018 and now manages its own liquidity portfolio, as required by ring-fencing legislation.

 

RBS categorises its liquidity portfolio, including its locally managed liquidity portfolios, into primary and secondary liquid assets. The size of the liquidity portfolios are determined by referencing RBS’s liquidity risk appetite. RBS retains a prudent approach to setting the composition of the liquidity portfolios, which is subject to internal policies applicable to all entities and limits over quality of counterparty, maturity mix and currency mix.

 

RBS International, NWM N.V. and UBI DAC hold locally managed portfolios that comply with local regulations that may differ from PRA rules.

 

The liquidity value of the portfolio is determined by taking current market prices and applying a discount or haircut, to give a liquidity value that represents the amount of cash that can be generated by the asset.

 

Funding risk management

RBS manages funding risk through a comprehensive framework which measures and monitors the funding risk on the balance sheet.

 

Asset and liability types broadly match. Customer deposits provide more funding than customer loans utilise; repurchase agreements are largely covered by reverse repurchase agreements; derivative assets are broadly netted against derivative liabilities.

 

110


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Minimum requirements

Capital adequacy ratios

The Group is subject to minimum capital requirements relative to RWAs. The table below summarises the minimum ratios of capital to RWAs that the Group is expected to have to meet once CRR is fully implemented by 1 January 2019. These ratios apply at the consolidated group level. Different minimum capital requirements may apply to individual legal entities or sub-groups.

 

Minimum requirements

 

Type

 

CET1

 

Total Tier 1

 

Total capital

System wide

 

Pillar 1 minimum requirements

 

4.5%

 

6.0%

 

8.0%

 

 

Capital conservation buffer

 

2.5%

 

2.5%

 

2.5%

 

 

Countercyclical capital buffer (1)

 

0.7%

 

0.7%

 

0.7%

 

 

G-SIB buffer (2)

 

1.0%

 

1.0%

 

1.0%

Bank specific

 

Pillar 2A(4)

 

2.0%

 

2.7%

 

3.6%

Total (excluding PRA buffer)(5)

 

 

 

10.7%

 

12.9%

 

15.8%

 

Notes:

(1)            The countercyclical capital buffer (CCyB) applied to UK designated assets is set by the Financial Policy Committee (FPC). The UK CCyB is currently 1.0% (effective from November 2018). The rate had previously increased from 0.0% to 0.5% (effective June 2018). The Republic of Ireland CCyB is currently 0.0%, the CBI have announced an increase to 1.0% effective July 2019. Foreign exposures may be subject to different CCyB rates depending on the rate set in those jurisdictions. Firm specific CCyB is based on a weighted average at CCyB’s applicable to countries in which the Bank has exposures.

(2)            Globally systemically important banks (G-SIBs), as designated by the Financial Stability Board (FSB), are subject to an additional capital buffer of between 1% and 3.5%. In November 2018 the FSB announced that RBS is no longer a GSIB. From 1 January 2020, RBS will be released from this global buffer requirement.

(3)            The Group will be subject to a systemic risk buffer (SRB) of between 0% and 3%. The SRB will apply from 1 January 2019 and will apply at the ring-fenced bank sub-group level rather than at the consolidated group level. The RFB SRB may require the Group to hold a minimum amount of capital at the consolidated group level beyond the levels set out in the table above.

(4)            From 1 January 2015, UK banks have been required to meet at least 56% of its Pillar 2A capital requirement with CET1 capital and with balance with Additional Tier 1 and/or Tier 2 capital. Additional capital requirements under Pillar 2A may be specified by the PRA as a ratio or as an absolute value. The table sets out an implied ratio to cover the full value of Pillar 2A requirements. The PRA has recently determined that the Pillar 2A capital requirement for 2018 remains unchanged.

(5)            The Group may be subject to a PRA buffer requirement as set by the PRA. The PRA buffer consists of two components:

-     A risk management and governance buffer that is set as a scalar of the Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements. The scalar could range between 10% and 40%.

-     A buffer to cover stress risks informed by the results of the BoE concurrent stress testing results.

-     The PRA requires that the level of this buffer is not publicly disclosed.

(6)            The capital conservation buffer, the countercyclical capital buffer, the G-SIB buffer and systemic risk buffer (where applicable) make up the combined buffer. If the Group fails to meet the combined buffer requirement, it is subject to restrictions on distributions on CET1 instruments, discretionary coupons on AT1 instruments and on payment of variable remuneration or discretionary pension benefits. These restrictions are calculated by reference to the Group’s Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA). Where a PRA buffer is applicable, the MDA trigger is below the PRA buffer and MDA restrictions are not automatically triggered if the Group fails to meet its PRA buffer. The MDA is calculated as the amount of interim or year-end profits not yet incorporated into CET1 capital multiplied by a factor ranging from 0 to 0.6 depending on the size of the CET1 shortfall against the combined buffer.

 

Leverage ratios

 

The table below summarises the minimum ratios of capital to leverage exposure under the PRA UK leverage framework that the Group must meet. In November 2016, the European Commission published a package of legislative proposals (CRR 2) for the adoption of a legally binding 3% of Tier 1 capital minimum leverage ratio with consideration of a leverage buffer ratio for G-SIBs once a final international agreement had been reached. Different minimum requirements may apply to individual legal entities or sub-groups.

 

Type

 

CET1

 

Total Tier 1

Minimum ratio

 

2.4375%

 

3.2500%

Countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (1)

 

0.2500%

 

0.2500%

Additional leverage ratio buffer

 

0.3500%

 

0.3500%

Total

 

3.0375%

 

3.8500%

 

Note:

(1)           The countercyclical leverage ratio buffer is set at 35% of the Group’s CCyB. As noted above the UK CCyB is currently 1.0% (effective from November 2018). The rate had previously increased from 0.0% to 0.5% (effective June 2018). Foreign exposures may be subject to different CCyB rates depending on the rate set in those jurisdictions. On 3 October 2017 the PRA, via revised policy statement (PS21/17), increased the Tier 1 leverage ratio requirement for UK banks by 25 basis points  to 3.25% (CET1 requirement of 2.4375%). The PRA minimum leverage ratio requirement is supplemented with a G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer, currently 0.2625% under transitional arrangements (2017 – 0.175%) increasing to 0.35% from 1 January 2019.

 

Liquidity and funding ratios

 

The table below summarises the minimum requirements for key liquidity and funding metrics, under the relevant legislative framework.

 

Type

 

From 1 January 2018

 

From 1 January 2019

Liquidity coverage ratio (LCR)

 

100%

 

100%

Net stable funding ratio (NSFR) (1)

 

N/A

 

N/A

 

Note:

(1)           In November 2016, the European Commission published its proposal for NSFR rules within the EU as part of its CRR2 package of regulatory reforms. CRR2 NSFR is expected to become the regulatory requirement in future within the EU and the UK. RBS has changed its policy on the NSFR to align with its interpretation of the CRR2 proposals with effect from 1 January 2018.

 

111


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Measurement

Capital, risk-weighted assets and leverage: Key metrics

 

The table below sets out the key Capital and Leverage ratios.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

End-point

 

PRA transitional

 

End-point

 

PRA transitional

 

 

CRR basis (1)

 

basis

 

CRR basis (1)

 

basis

Capital

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

CET1

 

30.6

 

30.6

 

32.0

 

32.0

Tier1

 

34.7

 

36.2

 

36.0

 

39.6

Total

 

41.2

 

44.2

 

42.8

 

47.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RWAs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit risk

 

137.9

 

137.9

 

144.7

 

144.7

Counterparty credit risk

 

13.6

 

13.6

 

15.4

 

15.4

Market risk

 

14.8

 

14.8

 

17.0

 

17.0

Operational risk

 

22.4

 

22.4

 

23.8

 

23.8

Total RWAs

 

188.7

 

188.7

 

200.9

 

200.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Capital adequacy ratios

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

CET1

 

16.2

 

16.2

 

15.9

 

15.9

Tier 1

 

18.4

 

19.2

 

17.9

 

19.7

Total

 

21.8

 

23.4

 

21.3

 

23.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Leverage ratios

 

2018

 

2017

Tier 1 capital (£bn)

 

34.7

 

36.2

 

36.0

 

39.6

CRR leverage exposure (£bn)

 

644.5

 

644.5

 

679.1

 

679.1

CRR leverage ratio (%)

 

5.4%

 

5.6%

 

5.3%

 

5.8%

Average Tier 1 capital (£bn) (2)

 

35.7

 

37.9

 

36.4

 

40.0

Average leverage exposure (£bn) (2)

 

665.2

 

665.2

 

692.5

 

692.5

Average leverage ratio (%) (2)

 

5.4%

 

5.7%

 

5.3%

 

5.8%

UK leverage ratio

 

6.2%

 

6.5%

 

6.1%

 

6.7%

 

Notes:

(1)     CRR as implemented by the Prudential Regulation Authority in the UK, with effect from 1 January 2014. All regulatory adjustments and deductions to CET1 have been applied in full for both bases.

(2)     Based on the daily average of on-balance sheet items and three month-end average of off-balance sheet items (2017 – three month-end average of both on and off-balance sheet items).

 

Liquidity key metrics

The table below sets out the key liquidity and related metrics monitored by RBS.

 

2018 

 

RBS

 

UK DoLSub

Liquidity coverage ratio (1)

 

158%

 

153%

Stressed outflow coverage (2)

 

154%

 

147%

Net stable funding ratio (3)

 

141%

 

144%

2017

 

 

 

 

Liquidity coverage ratio (1)

 

152%

 

 

Stressed outflow coverage (2)

 

168%

 

 

Net stable funding ratio (3)

 

132%

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)        On 1 October 2015 the LCR became the PRA’s primary regulatory liquidity standard. It is a Pillar 1 metric to which the PRA apply Pillar 2 add-ons. The published LCR excludes Pillar 2 add-ons. RBS calculates the LCR using its own interpretations of the EU LCR Delegated Act, which may change over time and may not be fully comparable with those of other financial institutions.

(2)        RBS’s stressed outflow coverage (SOC) is an internal measure calculated by reference to liquid assets as a percentage of net stressed contractual and behavioural outflows over three months under the worst of three severe stress scenarios of a market-wide stress, an idiosyncratic stress and a combination of both as per ILAAP. This assessment is performed in accordance with PRA guidance.

(3)        In November 2016, the European Commission published its proposal for NSFR rules within the EU as part of its CRR2 package of regulatory reforms. CRR2 NSFR is expected to become the regulatory requirement in future within the EU and the UK. RBS has changed its policy on the NSFR to align with its interpretation of the CRR2 proposals with effect from 1 January 2018. The pro forma CRR2 NSFR at 31 December 2017 under CRR2 proposals is estimated to be 139%.

 

112


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Capital and leverage: Capital resources (audited)

 

Capital, RWAs and capital adequacy ratios, on the basis of end-point Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) and transitional rules, calculated in accordance with PRA definitions, are set out below.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

 

 

PRA

 

PRA

 

 

 

 

End-point

 

transitional

 

End-point

 

transitional

 

 

CRR basis

 

basis

 

CRR basis

 

basis

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Shareholders’ equity (excluding non-controlling interests)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Shareholders’ equity

 

45,736

 

45,736

 

48,330

 

48,330

Preference shares - equity

 

(496)

 

(496)

 

(2,565)

 

(2,565)

Other equity instruments

 

(4,058)

 

(4,058)

 

(4,058)

 

(4,058)

 

 

41,182

 

41,182

 

41,707

 

41,707

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Regulatory adjustments and deductions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Own credit

 

(405)

 

(405)

 

(90)

 

(90)

Defined benefit pension fund adjustment

 

(394)

 

(394)

 

(287)

 

(287)

Cash flow hedging reserve

 

191

 

191

 

(227)

 

(227)

Deferred tax assets

 

(740)

 

(740)

 

(849)

 

(849)

Prudential valuation adjustments

 

(494)

 

(494)

 

(496)

 

(496)

Goodwill and other intangible assets

 

(6,616)

 

(6,616)

 

(6,543)

 

(6,543)

Expected losses less impairments

 

(654)

 

(654)

 

(1,286)

 

(1,286)

Foreseeable ordinary and special dividends

 

(1,326)

 

(1,326)

 

 

Other regulatory adjustments

 

(105)

 

(105)

 

28

 

28

 

 

(10,543)

 

(10,543)

 

(9,750)

 

(9,750)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CET1 capital

 

30,639

 

30,639

 

31,957

 

31,957

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Qualifying instruments and related share premium

 

4,051

 

4,051

 

4,041

 

4,041

Qualifying instruments and related share premium subject to phase out

 

 

1,393

 

 

3,416

Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties subject to phase out

 

 

140

 

 

140

AT1 capital

 

4,051

 

5,584

 

4,041

 

7,597

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 1 capital

 

34,690

 

36,223

 

35,998

 

39,554

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Qualifying Tier 2 capital

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Qualifying instruments and related share premium

 

6,301

 

6,386

 

6,396

 

6,501

Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties

 

182

 

1,565

 

369

 

1,876

Tier 2 capital

 

6,483

 

7,951

 

6,765

 

8,377

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total regulatory capital

 

41,173

 

44,174

 

42,763

 

47,931

 

 

The table below analyses the movement in end-point CRR CET1, AT1 and Tier 2 capital for the year.

 

 

 

CET1

 

AT1

 

Tier 2

 

Total

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

At 1 January 2018

 

31,957

 

4,041

 

6,765

 

42,763

Profit for the year

 

1,381

 

 

 

 

 

1,381

Own credit

 

(315)

 

 

 

 

 

(315)

Share capital and reserve movements in respect of employee share schemes

 

77

 

 

 

 

 

77

Ordinary shares issued

 

135

 

 

 

 

 

135

Foreign exchange reserve

 

308

 

 

 

 

 

308

FVOCI reserves

 

88

 

 

 

 

 

88

Goodwill and intangibles deduction

 

(73)

 

 

 

 

 

(73)

Deferred tax assets

 

109

 

 

 

 

 

109

Prudential valuation adjustments

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

2

Expected loss less impairment

 

632

 

 

 

 

 

632

Pension contribution

 

(1,476)

 

 

 

 

 

(1,476)

Capital instruments issued

 

 

 

 

 

(89)

 

(89)

Net dated subordinated debt/grandfathered instruments

 

 

 

 

 

(537)

 

(537)

Foreign exchange movements

 

(734)

 

 

 

334

 

(400)

Foreseeable ordinary and special dividends

 

(1,326)

 

 

 

 

 

(1,326)

Other movements

 

(126)

 

10

 

10

 

(106)

At 31 December 2018

 

30,639

 

4,051

 

6,483

 

41,173

 

113


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Leverage exposure

The leverage exposure is based on the CRR Delegated Act.

 

 

 

End-point basis(1)

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

Leverage exposure

 

£bn

 

£bn

Cash and balances at central banks

 

88.9

 

98.3

Trading assets

 

75.1

 

86.0

Derivatives

 

133.3

 

160.8

Loans

 

318.0

 

321.6

Other assets

 

78.9

 

71.4

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

694.2

 

738.1

 

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

 

 

 

 

- netting and variation margin

 

(141.3)

 

(161.7)

- potential future exposures

 

42.1

 

49.4

Securities financing transactions gross up

 

2.1

 

2.3

Undrawn commitments (analysis below)

 

50.3

 

53.1

Regulatory deductions and other adjustments

 

(2.9)

 

(2.1)

 

 

 

 

 

CRR Leverage exposure

 

644.5

 

679.1

Claims on central banks

 

(85.0)

 

(92.0)

UK leverage exposure

 

559.5

 

587.1

 

Notes:

(1)           Based on end-point CRR Tier 1 leverage exposure under the CRR Delegated Act.

(2)           The UK leverage ratio excludes central bank claims from the leverage exposure where deposits held are denominated in the same currency and of contractual maturity that is equal or longer than that of the central bank claims.

 

Weighted undrawn commitments

The table below provides a breakdown of weighted undrawn commitments.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

£bn

 

£bn

Unconditionally cancellable credit cards

 

2.0

 

2.1

Other unconditionally cancellable items

 

7.1

 

4.7

Unconditionally cancellable items (1)

 

9.1

 

6.8

 

 

 

 

 

Undrawn commitments <1 year which may not be cancelled

 

1.7

 

1.8

Other off-balance sheet items with 20% credit conversion factor (CCF)

 

0.6

 

0.6

Items with a 20% CCF

 

2.3

 

2.4

 

 

 

 

 

Revolving credit risk facilities

 

27.1

 

27.0

Term loans

 

3.5

 

3.6

Mortgages

 

0.2

 

Other undrawn commitments >1 year which may not be cancelled & off-balance sheet

 

2.2

 

2.1

 

 

 

 

 

Items with a 50% CCF

 

33.0

 

32.7

Items with a 100% CCF

 

5.9

 

11.2

Total

 

50.3

 

53.1

 

Note:

(1)        Based on a 10% CCF.

 

114


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Loss absorbing capital

The following table illustrates the components of estimated loss absorbing capital (LAC) in RBSG plc and operating subsidiaries and includes external issuances only. The table is prepared on a transitional basis, including the benefit of regulatory capital instruments issued from operating companies, to the extent they meet MREL criteria. For further details regarding regulatory requirements in relation to MREL, refer to page 109.

 

The roll-off profile relating to senior debt and subordinated debt instruments is set out on the next page.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

 

 

Balance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Balance

 

 

 

 

 

 

Par

 

sheet

 

Regulatory

 

LAC

 

Par

 

sheet

 

Regulatory

 

LAC

 

 

value (1)

 

value

 

value (2)

 

value (3)

 

value (1)

 

value

 

value (2)

 

value (3)

 

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

CET1 capital (4)

 

30.6

 

30.6

 

30.6

 

30.6

 

32.0

 

32.0

 

32.0

 

32.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 1 capital: end-point CRR compliant AT1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

of which: RBSG (holdco)

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

of which: RBSG operating subsidiaries (opcos)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

4.0

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 1 capital: end-point CRR non compliant

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

of which: holdco

 

1.4

 

1.6

 

1.4

 

0.5

 

3.5

 

3.6

 

3.5

 

2.6

of which: opcos

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

 

1.5

 

1.7

 

1.5

 

0.6

 

3.6

 

3.7

 

3.6

 

2.7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 2 capital: end-point CRR compliant

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

of which: holdco

 

6.8

 

6.7

 

6.3

 

5.1

 

6.5

 

6.5

 

6.4

 

4.9

of which: opcos

 

0.5

 

0.5

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

2.3

 

2.4

 

0.5

 

0.5

 

 

7.3

 

7.2

 

6.6

 

5.6

 

8.8

 

8.9

 

6.9

 

5.4

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 2 capital: end-point CRR non compliant

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

of which: holdco

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.3

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

0.1

of which: opcos

 

1.9

 

2.0

 

1.4

 

1.6

 

2.1

 

2.3

 

1.5

 

2.0

 

 

2.0

 

2.1

 

1.5

 

1.7

 

2.4

 

2.7

 

1.6

 

2.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Senior unsecured debt securities issued by:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBSG holdco

 

16.8

 

16.8

 

 

15.5

 

9.3

 

9.2

 

 

8.3

RBS opcos

 

17.1

 

16.9

 

 

 

14.4

 

14.7

 

 

 

 

33.9

 

33.7

 

 

15.5

 

23.7

 

23.9

 

 

8.3

Total

 

79.3

 

79.3

 

44.2

 

58.0

 

74.5

 

75.2

 

48.1

 

54.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RWAs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

188.7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

200.9

CRR leverage exposure

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

644.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

679.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LAC as a ratio of RWAs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

30.7%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

27.1%

LAC as a ratio of CRR leverage exposure

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9.0%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

8.0%

 

Notes:

(1)             Par value reflects the nominal value of securities issued.

(2)             Regulatory capital instruments issued from operating companies are included in the transitional LAC calculation, to the extent they meet the MREL criteria.

(3)             LAC value reflects RBS’s interpretation of the Bank of England’s approach to setting a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL), published in June 2018. MREL policy and requirements remain subject to further potential development, as such RBS estimated position remains subject to potential change. Liabilities excluded from LAC include instruments with less than one year remaining to maturity, structured debt, operating company senior debt, and other instruments that do not meet the MREL criteria. Includes Tier 1 and Tier 2 securities prior to incentive to redeem.

(4)             Corresponding shareholders’ equity was £45.7 billion (2017 - £48.3 billion).

(5)             Regulatory amounts reported for AT1, Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments are before grandfathering restrictions imposed by CRR.

 

115


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Roll-off profile

The following table illustrates the roll-off profile and weighted average spreads of RBS’s major wholesale funding programmes.

 

 

 

As at and

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

for year ended

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Senior debt roll-off profile (1)

 

31 December

Roll-off profile

 

 

RBSG

 

2018

 

H1 2019

 

H2 2019

 

2020

 

2021

 

2022 & 2023

 

2024 & later

- amount (£m)

 

16,830

 

535

 

781

 

2

 

 

7,037

 

8,474

- weighted average rate spread (bps)

 

205

 

129

 

283

 

162

 

 

224

 

187

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NWM Plc

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- amount (£m)

 

16,523

 

3,186

 

3,239

 

4,704

 

2,066

 

2,022

 

1,306

- weighted average rate spread (bps)

 

102

 

13

 

177

 

123

 

91

 

80

 

117

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NatWest Plc

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- amount (£m)

 

329

 

253

 

77

 

 

 

 

- weighted average rate spread (bps)

 

7

 

4

 

15

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securitisation

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- amount (£m)

 

1,375

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,375

- weighted average rate spread (bps)

 

418

 

 

 

 

 

 

418

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Covered bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- amount (£m)

 

5,367

 

 

 

3,145

 

 

 

2,222

- weighted average rate spread (bps)

 

122

 

 

 

99

 

 

 

156

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total notes issued (£m)

 

40,424

 

3,974

 

4,097

 

7,852

 

2,066

 

9,059

 

13,377

Weighted average spread

 

158

 

27

 

194

 

113

 

91

 

192

 

200

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Subordinated debt instruments roll-off profile (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBSG (£m)

 

6,815

 

1,003

 

 

 

 

4,049

 

1,763

NWM Plc (£m)

 

658

 

 

36

 

99

 

 

450

 

73

NatWest Plc (£m)

 

1,159

 

727

 

 

 

343

 

90

 

NWM N.V. (£m)

 

668

 

147

 

65

 

11

 

 

106

 

339

UBI DAC (£m)

 

76

 

 

 

 

 

 

76

Total (£m)

 

9,377

 

1,876

 

101

 

110

 

343

 

4,695

 

2,252

 

Notes:

(1)             Based on final contractual instrument maturity.

(2)             Based on first call date of instrument, however this does not indicate RBS’s strategy on capital and funding management. The table above does not include debt accounted Tier 1 instruments although those instruments form part of the total subordinated debt balance.

(3)             The weighted average spread reflects the average net funding cost to RBS and is calculated on an indicative basis.

(4)             The roll-off table is based on sterling-equivalent balance sheet values.

 

Risk-weighted assets

The table below analyses the movement in credit risk RWAs on the end-point CRR basis during the year, by key drivers.

 

 

 

 

 

Counterparty

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit risk

 

credit risk

 

Market risk

 

Operational risk

 

Total RWAs

 

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

At 1 January 2018 (1)

 

144.6

 

15.4

 

17.0

 

23.8

 

200.8

Foreign exchange movement

 

1.0

 

(0.1)

 

 

 

0.9

Business movements

 

(11.3)

 

(0.9)

 

(1.4)

 

(1.4)

 

(15.0)

Risk parameter changes (2)

 

(0.9)

 

(0.1)

 

 

 

(1.0)

Methodology changes

 

 

 

(0.2)

 

 

(0.2)

Model updates

 

4.5

 

 

(0.6)

 

 

3.9

Other movements

 

 

(0.7)

 

 

 

(0.7)

At 31 December 2018

 

137.9

 

13.6

 

14.8

 

22.4

 

188.7

 

Notes:

(1)             There was a £0.1 billion reduction in RWAs from 31 December 2017 to 1 January 2018 reflecting the day one impact of the adoption of IFRS 9.

(2)             Risk parameter changes relate to changes in credit quality metrics of customers and counterparties (such as probability of default and loss given default) as well as IRB model changes relating to counterparty credit risk in line with EBA Pillar 3 Guidelines.

 

116


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

RWAs by segment (restated: see Note 4 for details)

The chart below illustrates the concentration of risk-weighted assets by segment.

 

 

The table below analyses the movement in end-point CRR RWAs by segment during the year.

 

 

 

 

 

Ulster

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Central

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank

 

Commercial

 

Private

 

 

 

NatWest

 

items

 

 

 

 

UK PB

 

RoI

 

Banking

 

Banking

 

RBSI

 

Markets

 

& other

 

Total

Total RWAs

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

At 1 January 2018 (1)

 

31.5

 

18.0

 

83.3

 

9.1

 

5.1

 

52.9

 

0.9

 

200.8

Foreign exchange movement

 

 

0.1

 

0.3

 

 

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

0.9

Business movements

 

0.7

 

(2.2)

 

(5.9)

 

0.3

 

0.3

 

(8.3)

 

0.1

 

(15.0)

Risk parameter changes (2)

 

0.7

 

(1.2)

 

(0.4)

 

 

 

 

(0.1)

 

(1.0)

Methodology changes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(0.2)

 

(0.2)

Model updates

 

1.5

 

 

3.1

 

 

(0.1)

 

(0.6)

 

 

3.9

Other movements

 

(0.1)

 

 

(2.0)

 

 

1.6

 

0.5

 

(0.7)

 

(0.7)

At 31 December 2018

 

34.3

 

14.7

 

78.4

 

9.4

 

6.9

 

44.9

 

0.1

 

188.7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit risk

 

26.7

 

13.8

 

70.1

 

8.3

 

6.2

 

12.7

 

0.1

 

137.9

Counterparty credit risk

 

 

 

 

 

 

13.6

 

 

13.6

Market risk

 

 

 

 

 

 

14.8

 

 

14.8

Operational risk

 

7.6

 

0.9

 

8.3

 

1.1

 

0.7

 

3.8

 

 

22.4

Total RWAs

 

34.3

 

14.7

 

78.4

 

9.4

 

6.9

 

44.9

 

0.1

 

188.7

 

Notes:

(1)             There was a £0.1 billion reduction in RWAs from 31 December 2017 to 1 January 2018 reflecting the day one impact of the adoption of IFRS 9.

(2)             Risk parameter changes relate to changes in credit quality metrics of customers and counterparties (such as probability of default and loss given default) as well as IRB model changes relating to counterparty credit risk in line with EBA Pillar 3 Guidelines.

 

Key points

 

·          RWAs decreased by £12.2 billion (excluding the day one impact of the adoption of IFRS 9) in 2018 primarily driven by the legacy business in NatWest Markets, the impact of capital initiatives in Commercial Banking and Ulster Bank RoI asset sale. These reductions were partially offset by increases in UK PB and RBSI.

 

·          The decrease in NatWest Markets primarily driven by the legacy business, in addition to reductions in the core business.

 

·          The reduction within Commercial Banking was due to active capital management, partially offset by the impact of model updates and underlying business growth.

 

·          Ulster Bank RoI RWAs reduced principally reflecting the impact of a non-performing loan sale and an improvement in credit metrics.

 

·          RWAs in UK PB increased mainly due to model updates and movements in risk parameters.

 

·          As part of the preparation for ICB ring-fencing, assets have transferred from UK PB, Commercial Banking and Treasury into RBSI and NatWest Markets which are shown in other movements. Other movements also reflects NWM Securities Inc. being granted the regulatory waiver to use the AIRB approach to calculate it’s counterparty credit risk capital requirements.

 

117


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Liquidity portfolio (audited)

The table below shows the liquidity portfolio by product, liquidity value and carrying value. Liquidity value is lower than carrying value as it is stated after discounts (or haircuts) applied to instruments by the Bank of England and other central banks. Secondary liquidity comprises assets eligible for discount at central Banks but these do not form part of the liquid asset portfolio reported for regulatory LCR purposes or internal stressed outflow coverage purposes.

 

 

 

Liquidity value

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS (1)

 

UK DoLSub (2)

 

NWM Plc

 

RBS

 

UK DoLSub (2)

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Cash and balances at central banks

 

83,781

 

59,745

 

11,005

 

93,657

 

91,377

Central and local government bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AAA rated governments

 

8,188

 

4,386

 

615

 

3,944

 

2,760

AA- to AA+ rated governments and US agencies

 

35,683

 

25,845

 

5,256

 

26,233

 

24,084

 

 

43,871

 

30,231

 

5,871

 

30,177

 

26,844

Primary liquidity

 

127,652

 

89,976

 

16,876

 

123,834

 

118,221

Secondary liquidity (3)

 

70,231

 

69,642

 

344

 

62,555

 

62,144

Total liquidity value

 

197,882

 

159,618

 

17,220

 

186,389

 

180,365

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total carrying value

 

225,039

 

186,340

 

17,388

 

209,892

 

203,733

Notes:

(1)             RBS includes UK DoLSub, NatWest Markets plc and other significant operating subsidiaries that hold liquidity portfolios. These include RBS International, NWM N.V. and Ulster Bank Ireland DAC who hold managed portfolios that comply with local regulations that may differ from PRA rules.

(2)             UK DoLSub comprises RBS’s four licensed deposit-taking UK banks within the ring-fenced bank: National Westminster Bank Plc The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Coutts & Co and Ulster Bank Limited. The reduction in the UK DoLSub liquidity balances during 2018 is driven by NatWest Markets and RBS International managing liquidity on a stand-alone basis, with NatWest Markets plc leaving the UK DoLSub during H2 2018 and RBS International building its own liquidity portfolio.

(3)             Comprises assets eligible for discounting at the Bank of England and other central banks.

 

118


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Funding sources (audited)

The table below shows the carrying values of the principal funding sources based on contractual maturity. Balance sheet captions include balances held at all classifications under IFRS 9/IAS 39 but excludes derivative cash collateral.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Short-term

 

Long-term

 

 

 

Short-term

 

Long-term

 

 

 

 

less than

 

more than

 

 

 

less than

 

more than

 

 

 

 

1 year

 

1 year

 

Total

 

1 year

 

1 year

 

Total

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Personal and corporate deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal (1)

 

178,293

 

1,499

 

179,792

 

173,314

 

1,497

 

174,811

Corporate (2)

 

131,575

 

142

 

131,717

 

127,708

 

861

 

128,569

 

 

309,868

 

1,641

 

311,509

 

301,022

 

2,358

 

303,380

Financial institutions deposits

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Banks (3)

 

6,758

 

15,865

 

22,623

 

7,480

 

19,595

 

27,075

Non-bank financial institutions (NBFI) (4)

 

46,800

 

564

 

47,364

 

52,284

 

1,091

 

53,375

 

 

53,558

 

16,429

 

69,987

 

59,764

 

20,686

 

80,450

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial papers (CP’s) and certificates of deposits (CD’S)

 

3,157

 

 

3,157

 

4,637

 

 

4,637

Medium-term notes

 

4,928

 

25,596

 

30,524

 

2,316

 

16,902

 

19,218

Covered bonds

 

 

5,367

 

5,367

 

987

 

5,321

 

6,308

Securitisations

 

 

1,375

 

1,375

 

 

396

 

396

 

 

8,085

 

32,338

 

40,423

 

7,940

 

22,619

 

30,559

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Subordinated liabilities

 

299

 

10,236

 

10,535

 

2,383

 

10,339

 

12,722

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Repos (5)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sovereign

 

405

 

 

405

 

5,243

 

 

5,243

Financial institutions

 

29,664

 

 

29,664

 

31,891

 

 

31,891

Corporate

 

291

 

 

291

 

1,287

 

 

1,287

 

 

30,360

 

 

30,360

 

38,421

 

 

38,421

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total funding

 

402,170

 

60,644

 

462,814

 

409,530

 

56,002

 

465,532

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Of which: available in resolution (6)

 

 

22,909

 

22,909

 

 

15,840

 

15,840

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CET 1 capital

 

 

 

 

 

30,639

 

 

 

 

 

31,957

CRR Leverage exposure

 

 

 

 

 

644,498

 

 

 

 

 

679,120

Funded assets

 

 

 

 

 

560,886

 

 

 

 

 

577,213

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Funding coverage of CET 1 capital

 

 

 

 

 

15

 

 

 

 

 

15

Funding as a % of leverage exposure

 

 

 

 

 

72%

 

 

 

 

 

69%

Funding as a % of funded assets

 

 

 

 

 

83%

 

 

 

 

 

81%

Funding available in resolution as a % of CET1 capital

 

 

 

 

 

75%

 

 

 

 

 

50%

Funding available in resolution as a % of leverage exposure

 

 

 

 

 

4%

 

 

 

 

 

2%

 

Notes:

(1)

Includes £206 million (2017 - £190 million) of DFV deposits included in other financial liabilities on the balance sheet.

(2)

Includes £428 million (2017 - £691 million) of HFT deposits included in trading liabilities and nil (2017 - £561 million) of DFV deposits included in other financial liabilities on the balance sheet.

(3)

Includes £267 million (2017 - £68 million) of HFT deposits included in trading liabilities on the balance sheet. Includes £14.0 billion (2017 - £19.0 billion) relating to Term Funding Scheme participation and £1.8 billion (2017 - £1.8 billion) relating to RBS’s participation in central bank financing operations under the European Central Bank’s Targeted Long-term refinancing operations.

(4)

Includes £1,093 million (2017 - £543 million) of HFT deposits included in trading liabilities and £7 million (2017 - £124 million) of DFV deposits included in other financial liabilities on the balance sheet.

(5)

Includes held-for-trading repos of £25,645 million (2017 - £28,363 million) and amortised cost repos of £4,715 million (2017 - £10,058 million).

(6)

Eligible liabilities (as defined in the Banking Act 2009 as amended from time to time) that meet the eligibility criteria set out in the regulations, rules, policies, guidelines, or statements of the Bank of England including the Statement of Policy published by the Bank of England in June 2018. The balance consist of £16 billion (2017 - £8 billion) under debt securities in issue (senior MREL) and £7 billion (2017 - £8 billion) under subordinated liabilities.

 

119


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Contractual maturity (audited)

This table shows the residual maturity of financial instruments, based on contractual date of maturity of RBS’s banking activities, including hedging derivatives. Trading activities comprising Mandatory fair value through profit or loss (MFVTPL) assets and held-for-trading (HFT) liabilities have been excluded from the maturity analysis due to their short-term nature and are shown in total in the table below.

 

 

 

Banking activities

 

 

 

 

 

 

Less than

 

 

 

 

 

6 months

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

More than

 

 

 

Trading

 

 

 

 

1 month

 

1-3 months

 

3-6 months

 

- 1 year

 

Subtotal

 

1-3 years

 

3-5 years

 

5 years

 

Total

 

activities

 

Total

2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Central bank balances

 

88,897

 

 

 

 

88,897

 

 

 

 

88,897

 

 

 

88,897

Trading assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

75,119

 

75,119

Derivatives

 

224

 

 

 

529

 

753

 

994

 

345

 

159

 

2,251

 

131,098

 

133,349

Settlement balances

 

2,928

 

 

 

 

2,928

 

 

 

 

2,928

 

 

 

2,928

Loans to banks

 

11,729

 

182

 

860

 

62

 

12,833

 

105

 

9

 

 

12,947

 

 

 

12,947

Loans to customers (1)

 

35,800

 

8,350

 

8,626

 

17,896

 

70,672

 

53,500

 

41,848

 

142,387

 

308,407

 

 

 

308,407

Personal

 

5,733

 

2,475

 

3,350

 

6,233

 

17,791

 

21,949

 

18,658

 

120,728

 

179,126

 

 

 

179,126

Corporate

 

26,260

 

4,499

 

4,118

 

7,868

 

42,745

 

27,413

 

21,159

 

20,417

 

111,734

 

 

 

111,734

NBFI

 

3,807

 

1,376

 

1,158

 

3,795

 

10,136

 

4,138

 

2,031

 

1,242

 

17,547

 

 

 

17,547

Other financial assets

 

1,252

 

3,165

 

2,473

 

4,754

 

11,644

 

13,904

 

10,630

 

21,669

 

57,847

 

1,638

 

59,485

Total financial assets

 

140,830

 

11,697

 

11,959

 

23,241

 

187,727

 

68,503

 

52,832

 

164,215

 

473,277

 

207,855

 

681,132

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total financial assets

 

149,774

 

12,333

 

11,190

 

22,517

 

195,814

 

64,939

 

52,064

 

168,380

 

481,197

 

243,867

 

725,064

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

4,585

 

1,891

 

16

 

5

 

6,497

 

13,799

 

2,000

 

60

 

22,356

 

 

 

22,356

Bank repos

 

517

 

424

 

 

 

941

 

 

 

 

941

 

 

 

941

Customer repos

 

3,774

 

 

 

 

3,774

 

 

 

 

3,774

 

 

 

3,774

Customer deposits

 

337,964

 

9,310

 

4,803

 

3,297

 

355,374

 

1,718

 

11

 

37

 

357,140

 

 

 

357,140

Personal

 

170,746

 

3,080

 

1,835

 

2,426

 

178,087

 

1,499

 

 

 

179,586

 

 

 

179,586

Corporate

 

132,994

 

3,056

 

1,842

 

631

 

138,523

 

83

 

1

 

35

 

138,642

 

 

 

138,642

NBFI

 

34,224

 

3,174

 

1,126

 

240

 

38,764

 

136

 

10

 

2

 

38,912

 

 

 

38,912

Settlement balances

 

3,066

 

 

 

 

3,066

 

 

 

 

3,066

 

 

 

3,066

Trading liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

72,350

 

72,350

Derivatives

 

 

181

 

306

 

 

487

 

1,062

 

416

 

978

 

2,943

 

125,954

 

128,897

Other financial liabilities

 

202

 

1,386

 

2,499

 

4,153

 

8,240

 

9,542

 

10,536

 

11,414

 

39,732

 

 

 

39,732

CPs and CDs

 

173

 

1,128

 

955

 

901

 

3,157

 

 

 

 

3,157

 

 

 

3,157

Medium-term notes

 

7

 

225

 

1,490

 

3,149

 

4,871

 

6,397

 

10,536

 

7,817

 

29,621

 

 

 

29,621

Covered bonds

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,145

 

 

2,222

 

5,367

 

 

 

5,367

Securitisations

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,375

 

1,375

 

 

 

1,375

Customer deposits DFV

 

22

 

33

 

54

 

103

 

212

 

 

 

 

212

 

 

 

212

Subordinated liabilities

 

16

 

39

 

164

 

80

 

299

 

450

 

4,534

 

5,252

 

10,535

 

 

 

10,535

Other liabilities (2)

 

2,152

 

 

 

 

2,152

 

 

 

 

2,152

 

 

 

2,152

Total financial liabilities

 

352,276

 

13,231

 

7,788

 

7,535

 

380,830

 

26,571

 

17,497

 

17,741

 

442,639

 

198,304

 

640,943

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

 

360,684

 

10,564

 

8,155

 

6,647

 

386,050

 

16,882

 

23,262

 

17,167

 

443,361

 

232,917

 

676,278

 

Note:

(1)

Loans to customers excludes £3,318 million (2017 - £3,814 million) of Impairment provisions.

(2)

Represents notes in circulation.

 

120


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Funding gap: maturity and segment analysis (restated: see Note 4 for details)

The contractual maturity of balance sheet assets and liabilities reflects the maturity transformation role banks perform, lending long-term but mainly obtaining funding through short-term liabilities such as customer deposits. In practice, the behavioural profiles of many liabilities show greater stability and longer maturity than the contractual maturity. This is particularly true of many types of retail and corporate deposits which, despite being repayable on demand or at short notice, have demonstrated very stable characteristics even in periods of acute stress.

 

In its analysis to assess and manage asset and liability maturity gaps, RBS determines the expected customer behaviour through qualitative and quantitative techniques. These incorporate observed customer behaviours over long periods of time. This analysis is subject to governance through RBS ALCo Technical committee down to a segment level.

 

The net behavioural funding surplus/(gap) and contractual maturity analysis is set out below.

 

 

 

Contractual maturity (1)

 

Behavioural maturity

 

 

Loans to customers

 

Customer accounts

 

Net surplus/(gap)

 

Net surplus/(gap)

 

 

Less than

 

1-5

 

Greater

than

 

 

 

Less than

 

1-5

 

Greater

than

 

 

 

Less than

 

1-5

 

Greater

than

 

 

 

Less than

 

1-5

 

Greater

than

 

 

 

 

1 year

 

years

 

5 years

 

Total

 

1 year

 

years

 

5 years

 

Total

 

1 year

 

years

 

5 years

 

Total

 

1 year

 

years

 

5 years

 

Total

2018

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

UK PB

 

11

 

34

 

104

 

149

 

145

 

1

 

 

146

 

134

 

(33)

 

(104)

 

(3)

 

(12)

 

1

 

8

 

(3)

UB RoI

 

2

 

6

 

11

 

19

 

18

 

 

 

18

 

16

 

(6)

 

(11)

 

(1)

 

1

 

(3)

 

1

 

(1)

CB

 

39

 

43

 

20

 

102

 

133

 

1

 

 

134

 

94

 

(42)

 

(20)

 

32

 

9

 

35

 

(12)

 

32

PB

 

5

 

5

 

4

 

14

 

28

 

 

 

28

 

23

 

(5)

 

(4)

 

14

 

2

 

1

 

11

 

14

RBSI

 

6

 

5

 

3

 

14

 

28

 

 

 

28

 

22

 

(5)

 

(3)

 

14

 

1

 

3

 

10

 

14

NWM

 

17

 

3

 

1

 

21

 

13

 

 

 

13

 

(4)

 

(3)

 

(1)

 

(8)

 

(2)

 

(4)

 

(2)

 

(8)

Centre

 

 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

 

 

1

 

1

 

 

 

1

Total

 

80

 

96

 

143

 

319

 

366

 

2

 

 

368

 

286

 

(94)

 

(143)

 

49

 

 

33

 

16

 

49

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

83

 

93

 

147

 

323

 

363

 

4

 

 

367

 

280

 

(89)

 

(147)

 

44

 

(6)

 

24

 

26

 

44

 

Note:

(1)

Loans to customers and customer accounts include trading assets and trading liabilities respectively and excludes reverse repos and repos.

 

Key points

 

·              The net customer funding surplus has increased by £5billion during 2018 to £49billion driven by £1billion deposit growth and £4billion lending reduction

 

·              Customer deposits and customer loans are broadly matched from a behavioural perspective.

 

·              The net funding surplus in 2018 is concentrated in the longer dated buckets, reflecting the stable characteristics of customer deposits and lending that is behaviourally shorter dated.

 

Encumbrance (audited)

 

RBS evaluates the extent to which assets can be financed in a secured form (encumbrance), but certain asset types lend themselves more readily to encumbrance. The typical characteristics that support encumbrance are an ability to pledge those assets to another counterparty or entity through operation of law without necessarily requiring prior notification, homogeneity, predictable and measurable cash flows, and a consistent and uniform underwriting and collection process. Retail assets including residential mortgages, credit card receivables and personal loans display many of these features.

 

RBS categorises its assets into three broad groups, those that are:

 

Already encumbered and used to support funding currently in place through own-asset securitisations, covered bonds and securities repurchase agreements.

 

Pre-positioned with central banks as part of funding schemes and those encumbered under such schemes.

 

Not currently encumbered. In this category, RBS has in place an enablement programme which seeks to identify assets capable of being encumbered and to identify the actions to facilitate such encumbrance whilst not affecting customer relationships or servicing.

 

Programmes to manage the use of assets to support funding actively are established within UK DoLSub, UBI DAC and NatWest Markets Plc.

 

121


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Capital, liquidity and funding risk continued

Balance sheet encumbrance (audited)

The table shows the retained encumbered assets of the Group. Derivatives and Reverse Repos are disclosed within the credit risk section on pages 159 and 160.

 

 

 

Encumbered as a result of transactions with

 

Pre-positioned

Unencumbered assets not pre-positioned

 

 

 

 

counterparties other than central banks

 

& encumbered

with central banks

 

 

 

 

Covered

 

SFT,

 

 

 

assets held

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

debts &

 

Derivatives

 

 

 

at central

Readily

 

Other

 

Cannot

 

 

 

 

 

 

securitisations

 

and similar (2)

 

Total (3)

 

banks (4)

available

 

available

 

be used

 

Total

 

Total

2018

 

(1) £bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

(5) £bn

 

(6) £bn

 

(7) £bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Cash and balances at central banks

 

 

6.7

 

6.7

 

82.2

 

 

 

82.2

 

88.9

Trading assets

 

 

49.1

 

49.1

 

 

1.3

 

24.7

 

26.0

 

75.1

Derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

 

133.3

 

133.3

 

133.3

Settlement balances

 

 

 

 

 

 

2.9

 

2.9

 

2.9

Loans to banks - amortised cost

 

0.4

 

1.0

 

1.4

 

6.6

 

0.4

 

4.5

 

11.5

 

12.9

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- residential mortgages

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- UK

 

7.1

 

 

7.1

 

110.1

20.9

 

11.5

 

 

32.4

 

149.6

- RoI

 

2.8

 

 

2.8

 

2.1

8.9

 

 

 

8.9

 

13.8

- credit cards

 

 

 

 

3.7

 

0.3

 

 

4.0

 

4.0

- personal loans

 

 

 

 

5.8

 

2.6

 

1.8

 

10.2

 

10.2

- other

 

2.4

 

2.4

 

4.8

 

4.9

2.3

 

91.0

 

24.5

 

117.8

 

127.5

Other financial assets

 

 

10.4

 

10.4

 

46.0

 

0.8

 

2.3

 

49.1

 

59.5

Intangible assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

6.6

 

6.6

 

6.6

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

2.3

 

7.6

 

9.9

 

9.9

Total assets

 

12.7

 

69.6

 

82.3

 

117.1

176.4

 

110.2

 

208.2

 

494.8

 

694.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

13.7

 

69.9

 

83.6

 

113.1

180.0

 

118.6

 

242.8

 

541.4

 

738.1

 

Notes:

(1)

Covered debts and securitisations include securitisations, conduits, covered bonds and secured notes.

(2)

Repos and other secured deposits, cash, coin and nostro balance held with the Bank of England as collateral against deposits and notes in circulation are included here rather than within those positioned at the central bank as they are part of normal banking operations. Securities financing transactions (SFT) include collateral given to secure derivative liabilities.

(3)

Total assets encumbered as a result of transactions with counterparties other than central banks are those that have been pledged to provide security and are therefore not available to secure funding or to meet other collateral needs.

(4)

Assets pre-positioned at the central banks include loans provided as security as part of funding schemes and those encumbered under such schemes.

(5)

Readily available for encumbrance: including assets that have been enabled for use with central banks but not pre-positioned; cash and high quality debt securities that form part of RBS’s liquidity portfolio and unencumbered debt securities.

(6)

Other assets that are capable of being encumbered are those assets on the balance sheet that are available for funding and collateral purposes but are not readily realisable in their current form. These assets include loans that could be prepositioned with central banks but have not been subject to internal and external documentation review and diligence work.

(7)

Cannot be used includes:

 

(a)

Derivatives, reverse repurchase agreements and trading related settlement balances.

 

(b)

Non-financial assets such as intangibles, prepayments and deferred tax.

 

(c)

Loans that cannot be pre-positioned with central banks based on criteria set by the central banks, including those relating to date of origination and level of documentation.

 

(d)

Non-recourse invoice financing balances and certain shipping loans whose terms and structure prohibit their use as collateral.

(8)

In accordance with market practice, RBS employs securities recognised on the balance sheet, and securities received under reverse repo transactions as collateral for repos.

 

122


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk

Definition

Credit risk is the risk that customers fail to meet their contractual obligation to settle outstanding amounts.

 

The following disclosures in this section are audited:

·       Forbearance.

·       Impairment, provisioning and write-offs.

·       Transition from IAS 39 to IFRS 9.

·       Key elements of IFRS 9 impairment provisions:

o                 Economic loss drivers (excluding economic parameters).

o                 IFRS 9 credit risk modelling.

o                 Significant increase in credit risk.

o                 Asset lifetimes.

·       Measurement uncertainty and ECL sensitivity analysis.

·       Banking activities (except PDs and additional Stage 2 and Stage 3 analysis).

·       Trading activities.

 

Sources of risk

The principal sources of credit risk for RBS are lending, off-balance sheet products, derivatives and securities financing, and debt securities. RBS is also exposed to settlement risk through foreign exchange, trade finance and payments activities.

 

Key developments in 2018

·       Asset quality (AQ) remained stable with 61% of the loan exposure and other financial assets rated AQ1-AQ4 (1 January 2018 – 62%) (equating to an indicative investment rating of BBB- or better).

·       New mortgage lending declined in 2018 (£32.8 billion compared to £33.9 billion in 2017). The overall personal portfolio increased by £1.7 billion (principally driven by growth of the mortgage portfolio).

·       While overall credit quality remained stable in the Wholesale portfolio, risk appetite was tightened in certain sectors where it was considered appropriate based on leading indicator information.

·       IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, which covers credit provisions, was implemented with effect from 1 January 2018. In line with expectations, the new accounting standard resulted in an overall increase in provisions compared with the previous accounting standard IAS 39. Further detail is provided later in the report.

·       Impairment provisions totalled £3.4 billion at the year end representing coverage on amortised cost loans excluding balances at central banks of 1.1%.

·       The ECL charge for the year was £398 million. This reflected the relatively stable external environment.

 

Risk governance

Credit risk management activities include:

·       Defining credit risk appetite for the management of concentration risk and credit policy to establish the key risks in the process of providing credit and the controls that must be in place to mitigate them.

·       Approving credit limits for customers.

·       Oversight of the first line of defence to ensure that credit risk remains within the risk appetite set by the Board and that credit policy controls are being operated adequately and effectively.

 

The Chief Credit Officer, Ring-Fenced Bank, chairs the Wholesale and Retail Credit Risk Committees. These committees provide oversight of the aggregated RBS credit risk profile and review, recommend or approve risk appetite limits (depending on their materiality) within the appetite set by the RBS Board.

 

The Chief Credit Officer, Ring-Fenced Bank, also chairs provisions committees in Personal and Ulster, and CPB. These committees review and approve individually assessed net expected credit losses (ECLs) above agreed approval thresholds and review and approve the adequacy of all portfolio level ECLs in the businesses. Similar provisions committees operate in Ulster Bank RoI, NatWest Markets and RBSI.

 

Risk appetite

RBS’s approach to lending is governed by comprehensive credit risk appetite frameworks. The frameworks are closely monitored and actions are taken to adapt lending criteria as appropriate. Credit risk appetite aligns to the strategic risk appetite set by the Board, which includes capital adequacy, earnings volatility, funding and liquidity, and stakeholder confidence. The credit risk appetite frameworks have been designed to reflect factors (for example, strategic and emerging risks) that influence the ability to operate within risk appetite. Tools such as stress testing and economic capital are used to measure credit risk volatility and develop links between the credit risk appetite frameworks and risk appetite limits. The frameworks are supported by a suite of transaction acceptance standards that set out the risk parameters within which franchises should operate.

 

The Personal credit risk appetite framework sets limits that measure and control the quality of both existing and new business for each relevant franchise or business segment. The actual performance of each portfolio is tracked relative to these limits and management action is taken where necessary. The limits apply to a range of credit risk-related measures including expected loss at both portfolio and product level, projected credit default rates across products and the loan-to-value (LTV) ratio of the Personal mortgage portfolios.

 

For Wholesale, the four formal frameworks used – and their basis for classification – are detailed in the following table.

 

Framework

Basis for classification

Measure

Other

Single name concentration

Exposure

Risk – based on loss given default for a given probability of default

Sector

Risk – based on economic capital and other qualitative factors

Country

Probability of default of a sovereign and average loss given default

Product and asset class

Risk – based on heightened risk characteristics

 

Risk controls

Credit policy standards are in place for both the Wholesale and Personal portfolios. They are expressed as a set of mandatory controls.

 

Risk identification and measurement

Credit stewardship

Risks are identified through relationship management and/or credit stewardship of portfolios or customers. Credit risk stewardship takes place throughout the customer relationship, beginning with the initial approval. It includes the application of credit assessment standards, credit risk mitigation and collateral, ensuring that credit documentation is complete and appropriate, carrying out regular portfolio or customer reviews and problem debt identification and management.

 

123


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Risk models

The output of credit risk models is used in the credit approval process – as well as for ongoing assessment, monitoring and reporting – to inform risk appetite decisions. These models are divided into different categories. Where the calculation method is on an individual counterparty or account level, the models used will be probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD), or exposure at default (EAD). The economic capital model is used for credit risk appetite setting.

 

Asset quality

All credit grades map to an asset quality scale, used for external financial reporting. For Wholesale customers, a master grading scale is used for internal management reporting across portfolios. Accordingly, measures of risk exposure may be aggregated and reported at differing levels of detail depending on stakeholder or business requirements. Performing loans are defined as AQ1-AQ9 (where the PD is less than 100%) and non-performing loans as AQ10 or Stage 3 under IFRS 9 (where the PD is 100%).

 

Risk mitigation

Risk mitigation techniques, as set out in the appropriate credit policies, are used in the management of credit portfolios across RBS. These techniques mitigate credit concentrations in relation to an individual customer, a borrower group or a collection of related borrowers. Where possible, customer credit balances are netted against obligations. Mitigation tools can include structuring a security interest in a physical or financial asset, the use of credit derivatives including credit default swaps, credit-linked debt instruments and securitisation structures, and the use of guarantees and similar instruments (for example, credit insurance) from related and third parties. Property is used to mitigate credit risk across a number of portfolios, in particular residential mortgage lending and commercial real estate (CRE).

 

The valuation methodologies for residential mortgage collateral and CRE are detailed below.

 

Residential mortgages RBS takes collateral in the form of residential property to mitigate the credit risk arising from mortgages. RBS values residential property during the loan underwriting process by either appraising properties individually or valuing them collectively using statistically valid models. RBS updates residential property values quarterly using the relevant residential property index namely:

 

Region

Index used

UK

Halifax quarterly regional house price index

Northern Ireland

UK House Price Index (published by the Land Registry)

Republic of Ireland

Central Statistics Office residential property price index

 

The current indexed value of the property is a component of the ECL provisioning calculation.

 

Commercial real estate valuations – RBS has a panel of chartered surveying firms that cover the spectrum of geography and property sectors in which RBS takes collateral. Suitable valuers for particular assets are contracted through a single service agreement to ensure consistency of quality and advice. Valuations are commissioned when an asset is taken as security; a material increase in a facility is requested; or a default event is anticipated or has occurred. In the UK, an independent third-party market indexation is applied to update external valuations once they are more than a year old and every three years a formal independent valuation is commissioned.

 

In the Republic of Ireland, assets are revalued in line with the Central Bank of Ireland threshold requirements, which permits indexation for lower value assets, but demands regular Red Book valuations for distressed higher value assets. The current indexed value of the property is a component of the ECL provisioning calculation.

 

Counterparty credit risk

In addition to the credit risk management practices set out in this section, RBS mitigates counterparty credit risk arising from both derivatives transactions and repurchase agreements through the use of market standard documentation, enabling netting (for credit risk management only and not for accounting purposes), and through collateralisation.

 

Amounts owed by RBS to a counterparty are netted against amounts the counterparty owes RBS, in accordance with relevant regulatory and internal policies. Netting is only applied if a netting agreement is in place.

 

Risk assessment and monitoring

Practices for credit stewardship – including credit assessment, approval and monitoring as well as the identification and management of problem debts – differ between the Personal and Wholesale portfolios.

 

Personal

Personal customers are served through a lending approach that entails making a large number of small-value loans. To ensure that these lending decisions are made consistently, RBS analyses internal credit information as well as external data supplied from credit reference agencies (including historical debt servicing behaviour of customers with respect to both RBS and other lenders). RBS then sets its lending rules accordingly, developing different rules for different products.

 

The process is then largely automated, with each customer receiving an individual credit score that reflects both internal and external behaviours and this score is compared with the lending rules set. For relatively high-value, complex personal loans, including some residential mortgage lending, specialist credit managers make the final lending decisions. These decisions are made within specified delegated authority limits that are issued dependent on the experience of the individual.

 

Underwriting standards and portfolio performance are monitored on an ongoing basis to ensure they remain adequate in the current market environment and are not weakened materially to sustain growth.

 

Wholesale

Wholesale customers – including corporates, banks and other financial institutions are grouped by industry sectors and geography as well as by product/asset class and are managed on an individual basis. Consideration is given to identifying groups of individual customers with sufficient inter-connectedness to merit assessment as a single risk.

 

A credit assessment is carried out before credit facilities are made available to customers. The assessment process is dependent on the complexity of the transaction.

 

For lower risk transactions below specific thresholds, credit decisions can be approved through self-sanctioning within the business. This process is facilitated through an auto-decision making system, which utilises scorecards, strategies and policy rules to provide a recommended credit decision. Such credit decisions must be within the approval authority of the relevant business sanctioner.

 

124


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

For all other transactions credit is only granted to customers following joint approval by an approver from the business and the credit risk function. The joint business and credit approvers act within a delegated approval authority under the Wholesale Credit Authorities Framework Policy. The level of delegated authority held by approvers is dependent on their experience and expertise with only a small number of senior executives holding the highest approval authority. Both business and credit approvers are accountable for the quality of each decision taken, although the credit risk approver holds ultimate sanctioning authority.

 

Transaction Acceptance Standards provide detailed transactional lending and risk acceptance metrics and structuring guidance. As such, these standards provide a mechanism to manage risk appetite at the customer/transaction level and are supplementary to the established credit risk appetite.

 

Credit grades (PD and LGD) are reviewed and if appropriate re-approved annually. The review process assesses borrower performance, including reconfirmation or adjustment of risk parameter estimates; the adequacy of security; compliance with terms and conditions; and refinancing risk.

 

A key aspect of credit risk stewardship is ensuring that, when signs of customer stress are identified, appropriate debt management actions are applied.

 

Problem debt management

Personal

Early problem identification

Pre-emptive triggers are in place to help identify customers that may be at risk of being in financial difficulty. These triggers are both internal, using RBS data and external information from credit reference agencies. Pro-active contact is then made with the customer to establish if they require help with managing their finances. By adopting this approach the aim is to prevent a customer’s financial position deteriorating which may then require intervention from the Collections and Recoveries teams.

 

Personal customers experiencing financial difficulty are managed by the Collections team. If the Collections team is unable to provide appropriate support after discussing suitable options with the customer, management of that customer moves to the Recoveries team. If at any point in the Collections and Recoveries process, the customer is identified as being potentially vulnerable, the customer will be separated from the regular process and supported by a specialist team to ensure the customer receives appropriate support for their circumstances.

 

Collections

When a customer exceeds an agreed limit or misses a regular monthly payment the customer is contacted by RBS and requested to remedy the position. If the situation is not regularised then, where appropriate, the Collections team will become more fully involved and the customer will be supported by skilled debt management staff who endeavour to provide customers with bespoke solutions. Solutions include short-term account restructuring, refinance loans and forbearance which can include interest suspension and ‘breathing space’. In the event that an affordable/sustainable agreement with a customer cannot be reached, the debt will transition to the Recoveries team. For provisioning purposes, under IFRS 9, exposure to customers managed by the Collections team is categorised as Stage 2 and subject to a lifetime loss assessment.

 

In the Republic of Ireland, the relationship may pass to a specialist support team prior to any transfer to recoveries, depending on the outcome of customer financial assessment.

 

Recoveries

The Recoveries team will issue a notice of intention to default to the customer and, if appropriate, a formal demand, while also registering the account with credit reference agencies where appropriate. Following this, the customer’s debt may then be placed with a third-party debt collection agency, or alternatively a solicitor, in order to agree an affordable repayment plan with the customer. Exposures subject to formal debt recovery are defaulted and categorised as Stage 3 impaired.

 

Wholesale

Early problem identification

Each segment and sector has defined early warning indicators to identify customers experiencing financial difficulty, and to increase monitoring if needed. Early warning indicators may be internal, such as a customer’s bank account activity, or external, such as a publicly-listed customer’s share price. If early warning indicators show a customer is experiencing potential or actual difficulty, or if relationship managers or credit officers identify other signs of financial difficulty they may decide to classify the customer within the Risk of Credit Loss framework.

 

Risk of Credit Loss framework

The framework focuses on Wholesale customers whose credit profiles have deteriorated since origination. Expert judgement is applied by experienced credit risk officers to classify cases into categories that reflect progressively deteriorating credit risk to RBS. There are two classifications which apply to non-defaulted customers within the framework – Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss. For the purposes of provisioning, all exposures subject to the framework are categorised as Stage 2 and subject to a lifetime loss assessment. The framework also applies to those customers that have met RBS’s default criteria (AQ10 exposures). Defaulted exposures are categorised as Stage 3 impaired for provisioning purposes.

 

Heightened Monitoring customers are performing customers that have met certain characteristics, which have led to significant credit deterioration. Collectively, characteristics reflect circumstances that may affect the customer’s ability to meet repayment obligations. Characteristics include trading issues, covenant breaches, material PD downgrades and past due facilities.

 

Heightened Monitoring customers require pre-emptive actions (outside the customer’s normal trading patterns) to return or maintain their facilities within RBS’s current risk appetite prior to maturity.

 

Risk of Credit Loss customers are performing customers that have met the criteria for Heightened Monitoring and also pose a risk of credit loss to RBS in the next 12 months (should mitigating action not be taken or not be successful).

 

Once classified as either Heightened Monitoring or Risk of Credit Loss, a number of mandatory actions are taken in accordance with policies. Actions include a review of the customer’s credit grade, facility and security documentation and the valuation of security. Depending on the severity of the financial difficulty and the size of the exposure, the customer relationship strategy is reassessed by credit officers, by specialist credit risk or relationship management units in the relevant business, or by Restructuring.

 

Agreed customer management strategies are regularly monitored by both the business and credit teams. The largest Risk of Credit Loss exposures are regularly reviewed by a Risk of Credit Loss Committee. The committee members are experienced credit, business and restructuring specialists. The purpose of the committee is to review and challenge the strategies undertaken for customers that pose the largest risk of credit loss to RBS.

 

125


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Appropriate corrective action is taken when circumstances emerge that may affect the customer’s ability to service its debt (refer to Heightened Monitoring characteristics). Corrective actions may include granting a customer various types of concessions. Any decision to approve a concession will be a function of specific appetite, the credit quality of the customer, the market environment and the loan structure and security. All customers granted forbearance are classified Heightened Monitoring as a minimum.

 

Other potential outcomes of the relationship review are to: remove the customer from the Risk of Credit Loss framework, offer additional lending and continue monitoring, transfer the relationship to Restructuring if appropriate, or exit the relationship.

 

The Risk of Credit Loss framework does not apply to problem debt management for Business Banking customers in UK PBB. These customers are, where necessary, managed by specialist problem debt management teams, depending on the size of exposure or by the Business Banking recoveries team where a loan has been impaired.

 

Restructuring

For the Wholesale problem debt portfolio, customer relationships are mainly managed by the Restructuring team (excluding customers managed by UK PBB). The purpose of Restructuring is to protect RBS’s capital. Where practicable, Restructuring does this by working with corporate and commercial customers to support their turnaround and recovery strategies and enable them to return to mainstream banking. Restructuring will always aim to recover capital in a fair and efficient manner.

 

Specialists in Restructuring work with customers experiencing financial difficulties and showing signs of financial stress. Throughout Restructuring’s involvement the mainstream relationship manager will remain an integral part of the customer relationship, unless an exit strategy is deemed appropriate. The objective is to find a mutually acceptable solution, including restructuring of existing facilities, repayment or refinancing.

 

Where a solvent outcome is not possible, insolvency may be considered as a last resort. However, helping the customer return to financial health and restoring a normal banking relationship is always the preferred outcome.

 

Forbearance (audited)

Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a loan/debt in response to a customer’s financial difficulties.

 

The aim of forbearance is to support and restore the customer to financial health while minimising risk. To ensure that forbearance is appropriate for the needs of the customer, minimum standards are applied when assessing, recording, monitoring and reporting forbearance.

 

A loan/debt may be forborne more than once, generally where a temporary concession has been granted and circumstances warrant another temporary or permanent revision of the loan’s terms.

 

In the Personal portfolio, loans are considered forborne until they meet the exit criteria set out by the European Banking Authority. These include being classified as performing for two years since the last forbearance event, making regular repayments and the loan/debt being less than 30 days past due. Exit criteria are not currently applied for Wholesale portfolios.

 

Types of forbearance

Personal

In the Personal portfolio, forbearance may involve payment concessions and loan rescheduling (including extensions in contractual maturity), capitalisation of arrears and, in the Republic of Ireland only, temporary interest-only conversions. Forbearance is granted principally to customers with mortgages and less frequently to customers with unsecured loans. This includes instances where forbearance may be provided to customers with highly flexible mortgages.

 

Wholesale

In the Wholesale portfolio, forbearance may involve covenant waivers, amendments to margins, payment concessions and loan rescheduling (including extensions in contractual maturity), capitalisation of arrears, and debt forgiveness or debt-for-equity swaps.

 

Monitoring of forbearance

Personal

For Personal portfolios, forborne loans are separated and regularly monitored and reported while the forbearance strategy is implemented, until they exit forbearance.

 

Wholesale

In the Wholesale portfolio, customer PDs and facility LGDs are re-assessed prior to finalising any forbearance arrangement. The ultimate outcome of a forbearance strategy is highly dependent on the cooperation of the borrower and a viable business or repayment outcome. Where forbearance is no longer appropriate, RBS will consider other options such as the enforcement of security, insolvency proceedings or both, although these are options of last resort.

 

Provisioning for forbearance

Personal

The methodology used for provisioning in respect of Personal forborne loans will differ depending on whether the loans are performing or non-performing and which business is managing them due to local market conditions.

 

Granting forbearance will only change the arrears status of the loan in specific circumstances, which can include capitalisation of principal and interest in arrears, where the loan may be returned to the performing book if the customer has demonstrated an ability to meet regular payments and is likely to continue to do so.

 

The loan would remain in forbearance for the defined probation period and be subject to performance criteria. These include making regular repayments and being less than 30 days past due.

 

Additionally for some forbearance types a loan may be transferred to the performing book if a customer makes payments that reduce loan arrears below 90 days (UK PBB collections function).

 

For ECL provisioning, all forborne but performing exposures are categorised as Stage 2 and are subject to a lifetime loss provisioning assessment.

 

For non-performing forborne loans, the Stage 3 loss assessment process is the same as for non-forborne loans with the exception of Ulster Bank RoI, where forborne loans which result in an economic loss form a separate risk pool and are subjected to specific provisioning treatments.

 

126


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Wholesale

Provisions for forborne loans are assessed in accordance with normal provisioning policies. The customer’s financial position and prospects – as well as the likely effect of the forbearance, including any concessions granted, and revised PD or LGD gradings – are considered in order to establish whether an impairment provision is required.

 

Wholesale loans granted forbearance are individually assessed in most cases. Performing loans subject to forbearance treatment are categorised as Stage 2 and subject to a lifetime loss assessment.

 

Forbearance may result in the value of the outstanding debt exceeding the present value of the estimated future cash flows. This difference will lead to a customer being classified as non-performing.

 

In the case of non-performing forborne loans, an individual loan impairment provision assessment generally takes place prior to forbearance being granted. The amount of the loan impairment provision may change once the terms of the forbearance are known, resulting in an additional provision charge or a release of the provision in the period the forbearance is granted.

 

The transfer of Wholesale loans from impaired to performing status follows assessment by relationship managers and credit. When no further losses are anticipated and the customer is expected to meet the loan’s revised terms, any provision is written-off or released and the balance of the loan returned to performing status. This is not dependent on a specified time period and follows the credit risk manager’s assessment.

 

Impairment, provisioning and write-offs (audited)

In the overall assessment of credit risk, impairment, provisioning and write-offs are used as key indicators of credit quality.

 

The new IFRS 9 impairment provisions accounting standard was implemented with effect from 1 January 2018. Set out below is further detail regarding the impact of the transition from IAS 39 to IFRS 9 impairment provisioning, how key credit risk management activities link to IFRS 9 impairment provisioning and the key policy and modelling decisions that have been made in implementing IFRS 9 (refer also to Accounting policy 14 and Note 14 on the consolidated accounts).

 

Transition from IAS 39 to IFRS 9 (audited)

RBS implemented IFRS 9 with effect from 1 January 2018 with no restatement of comparatives other than the Day One impact on implementation reflected in opening equity.

 

Cash flows and cash losses are unchanged by the change in impairment framework from IAS 39 to IFRS 9. IFRS 9 has changed the basis of loss calculation to expected loss (forward-looking), as opposed to the incurred loss model under IAS 39, which focused only on losses that had already occurred. There are a number of changes as well as judgements involved in measuring ECL. New elements include:

 

·           Move from incurred loss model to expected loss model, including all performing assets having 12-month ECL on origination – £513 million increase in provision partly offset by the IAS 39 latent loss provision of £390 million.

 

·           Determination of significant increase in credit risk – this moves a subset of assets from a 12-month ECL (Stage 1) to lifetime ECL (Stage 2) when credit risk has significantly increased since origination – £356 million increase in provision.

 

·           Change in scope of impaired assets (Stage 3) – £73 million increase in provision primarily reflecting assets that have defaulted but with expectation of full recovery under IAS 39.

 

·           Incorporation of forward-looking information, including multiple economic scenarios (MES). MES are assessed in order to identify non-linearity of losses in the portfolio – £64 million increase in provision.

 

Key differences in moving from IAS 39 to IFRS 9 on impairment loss (audited)

 

Total

 

£m

31 December 2017 - IAS 39 impairment provision (1)

 

3,832

Removal of IAS 39 latent provision

 

(390)

IFRS 9 12 month ECL on Stage 1 and Stage 2

 

513

Increase in Stage 2 ECL to lifetime (discounted)

 

356

Stage 3 loss estimation (EAD and LGD)

 

73

Impact of MES

 

64

1 January 2018 - IFRS 9 ECL

 

4,448

 

Note:

(1)

Includes £3,814 million relating to loans, less £10 million on loans that were carried at fair value and £28 million relating to FVOCI and LAR debt securities.

 

Key points

·       Overall provisionsThe overall provisioning requirement under IFRS 9 increased by £616 million a 16% increase relative to IAS 39. The main driver of the increase was the requirement to hold a minimum of 12 months of ECL on performing assets, increasing to lifetime loss for assets that have exhibited a significant increase in credit risk.

·       Performing assetsCompared with the latent loss provision held under IAS 39 of £390 million, the ECL requirement on performing assets (Stage 1 and Stage 2) more than doubled, increasing by £479 million to £869 million.

·       Non-performing assetsThe IFRS 9 provisioning requirement on non-performing assets in Stage 3 was less affected. The ECL requirement of £3.6 billion was £123 million (4%) higher compared with IAS 39 impaired portfolio provisions of £3.4 billion principally on defaulted assets that did not carry a provision, reflecting the expectation of full recovery under IAS 39.

·       UK PBB and Ulster Bank RoI combined The exposures in these two segments are primarily Personal. The ECL provisioning requirement was £2.4 billion. The uplift was driven by the higher provisioning requirement on performing assets, principally on the UK credit card portfolio.

·       CPB and NatWest Markets – The assets are mainly Wholesale. The ECL provisioning requirement was £2.0 billion. The uplift in Stage 3 assets was principally driven by assets defaulted but with expectation of full recovery under IAS 39.

 

127


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Key elements of IFRS 9 impairment provisions (audited)

IFRS 9 introduced additional complexity into the determination of credit impairment provisioning requirements. However, the building blocks that deliver an ECL calculation already existed in RBS. Existing Basel models were used as a starting point in the construction of IFRS 9 models, which also incorporate term extension and forward-looking information.

 

Five key areas may materially influence the measurement of credit impairment under IFRS 9 – two of these relate to model build and three relate to their application:

·       Model build:

o                 The determination of economic indicators that have most influence on credit loss for each portfolio and the severity of impact (this leverages existing stress testing mechanisms).

o                 The build of term structures to extend the determination of the risk of loss beyond 12 months that will influence the impact of lifetime loss for assets in Stage 2.

·       Model application:

o                 The assessment of the significant increase in credit risk and the formation of a framework capable of consistent application.

o                 The determination of asset lifetimes that reflect behavioural characteristics while also representing management actions and processes (using historical data and experience).

o                 The determination of a base case (or central) economic scenario which has the most material impact (of all forward-looking scenarios) on the measurement of loss (RBS uses consensus forecasts to remove management bias).

 

Policy elections and simplifications relating to IFRS 9

In addition to the five key areas above, which are relevant from period to period, there was one further significant judgment that was made as a one-off exercise to support the Day One implementation: this was the application of the new IFRS 9 models to the determination of origination date metrics. Since it is not possible to determine the economic forecasts and alternative scenarios going backwards in time it is necessary to use a series of assumptions to enable this process. RBS assumed a flat economic forecast, for all dates historically. There were some other less significant judgments, elections and simplification assumptions that informed the ECL process; these were not seen as ‘critical’ in determining the appropriate level of impairment but represented choices taken by management across areas of estimation uncertainty. The main examples of these are:

·       Models – for example in the case of some low default portfolios, Basel parameter estimates have been applied for IFRS 9.

·       Non-modelled portfolios – certain portfolios have their Basel II capital requirement calculated under the standardised framework for regulatory purposes and do not have systematically modelled PDs, EADs and LGDs. Under IFRS 9, they have bespoke treatments for the identification of significant increase in credit risk and ECL provisions. With respect to the latter, benchmark PDs, EADs and LGDs are used with the benchmarks being reviewed annually for appropriateness. The main non-modelled portfolios are Private Banking, RBSI personal and Lombard.

·       Discounting of future losses – the ECL calculation is based on expected future cash-flows. These are discounted using the effective interest rate – for practical purposes, this is typically applied at a portfolio level rather than being established and operated at an individual asset level.

·       Multiple economic scenarios (MES) – it is the selection of the central (or base) scenario that is most critical to the ECL calculation, independent of the method used to generate a range of alternative outcomes and their probabilities. Different approaches to model MES around the central scenario have all been found of low significance for the overall ECL impact.

 

Economic loss drivers

Introduction (audited)

The portfolio segmentation and selection of economic loss drivers for IFRS 9 follow closely the approach already used in stress testing. To enable robust modelling the forecasting models for each portfolio segment (defined by asset class and where relevant industry sector and region) are based on a selected, small number of economic factors, (typically two to four) that best explain the temporal variations in portfolio loss rates. The process to select economic loss drivers involves empirical analysis and expert judgment.

 

The most material primary economic loss drivers for Personal portfolios include national GDP, unemployment rate, House Price Index, and base rate for UK and Irish portfolios as relevant. In addition to some of these loss drivers, for Wholesale portfolios, world GDP is a primary loss driver.

 

Central base case economic scenario (audited)

The internal base case scenario is the primary forward-looking economic information driving the calculation of ECL The same base case scenario is used for RBS’s financial planning. The key elements of the current economic base case, which includes forecasts over a five year forecast horizon, are summarised as follows:

·       United Kingdom – The central scenario projects modest growth in the UK economy, in line with the consensus outlook. Brexit related uncertainty results in subdued confidence in the near term, placing it in the lower quartile of advanced economies. Business investment is weak at the start of the forecast, improving only gradually. Consumer spending rises steadily as households benefit from falling inflation and rising wage growth, though it is a modest upturn. The central scenario assumes slower job growth than seen in recent years, meaning unemployment edges up from its current historic lows. House price growth slows, extending the current slowdown, before picking up to low single digit growth in later years. Monetary policy follows the market implied path for Bank of England base rate at the time the scenarios were set, therefore it is assumed only two further base rate increases over the next five years.

·       Republic of Ireland – The economy is expected to continue on its positive trajectory with growth expected to revert closer to long run averages in the medium term. Job growth is expected to moderate with the unemployment remaining around 5%. Meanwhile house price growth continues to moderate to a low single-digit pace. As always, a small open economy such as RoI remains very sensitive to the global economic environment and expectations can change at short notice.

 

Use of the central base case in Personal

In Personal the internal base case is directly used as the central scenario for the ECL calculations by feeding the forecasted economic loss drivers into the respective PD and LGD models

 

Use of the central base case in Wholesale

As in Personal the primary input is the central base case scenario but a further adjustment is applied to explicitly enforce a gradual reversion to long run average credit cycle conditions from the first projected year onwards.

 

This adjustment process leverages the existing Wholesale credit models framework that utilises Credit Cycle Indices (CCI) to measure the point-in-time default rate conditions in a comprehensive set of region/industry groupings. The CCI are constructed by summarising market data based point-in-time PDs for all publicly listed entities in the respective region/industry grouping on a monthly frequency. Positive CCI values indicate better than average conditions, i.e. low default rates and a CCI value of zero indicates default rate conditions at long run average levels. The CCI can be interpreted as an aggregation of the primary economic loss drivers most relevant for each portfolio segment into a single measure. The central base case scenario forecasts provided at the level of economic loss drivers are fed into the ECL calculations by first translating them into corresponding CCI forecasts for each portfolio segment and subsequently applying the aforementioned mean-reversion adjustment.

 

128


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Initially at transition, mean reversion was applied from year five onwards. Since H1 2018, mean reversion is applied from the first year onwards. The earlier application of the mean reversion adjustment was introduced to account for two empirical observations. Firstly historic credit loss rates in Wholesale portfolios show pronounced mean reversion behaviour and secondly, the accuracy of economic forecasts tends to drop significantly for horizons beyond one or two years.

 

Approach for MES (audited)

The response of portfolio loss rates to changes in economic conditions is typically non-linear and asymmetric. Therefore in order to appropriately take account of the uncertainty in economic forecasts a range of MES are considered when calculating ECL.

 

·           Personal – the approach to MES is based on using a set of discrete scenarios. In addition to the central base case a further four bespoke scenarios are taken into account – a base case upside and downside – and an additional upside and downside. The overall MES ECL is calculated as a probability weighted average across all five scenarios. (Refer to the Probability weightings of scenarios section below).

 

The ECL impact on the Personal portfolio arising from the application of MES over the single, central base case is relatively low, and following review by the Provisions Committee, overlays were agreed to ensure the expected effect of non-linearity of losses was appropriately recognised. As at 31 December 2018, the value of the overlays was £26 million for UK PB and £26 million for Ulster Bank RoI.

 

·           Wholesale – the approach to MES is a Monte Carlo method that involves simulating a large number of alternative scenarios around the central scenario (adjusted for mean reversion) and averaging the losses and PD values for each individual scenario into unbiased expectations of losses (ECL) and PD.

 

The simulation of alternative scenarios does not occur on the level of the individual economic loss drivers but operates on the aggregate CCI described earlier. Since the existing Wholesale credit models for PD and LGD were already built within the CCI framework the chosen Monte Carlo method provided a conceptually rigorous but still efficient approach to implement the MES requirement.

 

The Monte Carlo MES approach increases Wholesale ECL for Stage 1 and Stage 2 by approximately 5% above the single, central scenario outcomes. No additional MES overlay was applied for Wholesale.

 

For both Personal and Wholesale, the impact from MES is factored in to account level PDs through scalars. These MES-adjusted PDs are used to assess whether a significant increase in credit risk has occurred.

 

Key economic loss drivers – average over the five year planning horizon (2019 to 2023 for 31 December 2018 and 2018 to 2022 for 1 January 2018) – in the most relevant planning cycle for the central base case and two upside and downside scenarios used for ECL modelling are set out below.

 

Economic parameters

 

 

31 December 2018

 

1 January 2018

UK

 

Upside 2

 

Upside 1

 

Base case

 

Downside 1

 

Downside 2

 

Upside 2

 

Upside 1

 

Base case

 

Downside 1

 

Downside 2

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

GDP - change

 

2.6

 

2.3

 

1.7

 

1.5

 

1.1

 

2.2

 

1.9

 

1.7

 

1.5

 

1.3

Unemployment

 

3.3

 

3.8

 

5.0

 

5.6

 

6.9

 

5.0

 

5.2

 

5.3

 

5.4

 

5.5

House Price Inflation - change

 

4.3

 

3.3

 

1.7

 

1.1

 

(0.5)

 

4.2

 

3.4

 

3.1

 

2.9

 

2.7

Bank of England base rate

 

1.7

 

1.3

 

1.1

 

0.5

 

 

1.7

 

1.2

 

0.8

 

0.4

 

0.2

Republic of Ireland

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GDP - change

 

4.3

 

3.6

 

3.0

 

3.1

 

2.8

 

3.6

 

3.2

 

2.9

 

2.6

 

2.3

Unemployment

 

4.2

 

4.6

 

5.2

 

6.0

 

6.8

 

5.0

 

5.4

 

5.7

 

5.9

 

6.1

House Price Inflation - change

 

9.2

 

6.8

 

4.0

 

3.2

 

0.8

 

6.7

 

5.4

 

4.4

 

3.7

 

3.0

European Central Bank base rate

 

1.3

 

0.8

 

0.3

 

 

 

0.6

 

0.4

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

World GDP - change

 

3.6

 

3.2

 

2.7

 

2.5

 

2.3

 

2.9

 

2.7

 

2.6

 

2.5

 

2.4

Probability weight

 

12.8

 

17.0

 

30.0

 

25.6

 

14.6

 

5.0

 

15.0

 

60.0

 

15.0

 

5.0

 

Probability weightings of scenarios (audited)

RBS’s approach to IFRS 9 MES in Personal involves selecting a suitable set of discrete scenarios to characterise the distribution of risks in the economic outlook and assigning appropriate probability weights to those scenarios. This has the following basic steps:

·       Scenario selection – for 2018 two upside and two downside scenarios from Moody’s inventory of scenarios were chosen. The aim is to obtain downside scenarios that are not as severe as stress tests, so typically have a severity of around one in ten and one in five of approximate likelihood, along with corresponding upsides.

·       Severity assessment – having selected the most appropriate scenarios their severity is then assessed based on the behaviour of UK GDP by calculating a variety of measures such as average GDP growth deviation from base and peak to trough falls in GDP. These measures are compared against a set of 1,000 model runs and it is established what percentile in the distribution most closely corresponds with each scenario.

·       Probability assignment – having established the relevant percentile points, probability weights are assigned to ensure that the scenarios produce an unbiased result. If the severity assessment step shows the scenarios to be broadly symmetric, then this will result in a symmetric probability weighting (same probability weight above and below the base case, as was used in the first half of 2018). However if the downsides are not as extreme as the upsides, then more probability weight is allocated to the downsides to ensure the unbiasedness requirement is satisfied (as was the case in the second half of 2018). This adjustment is made purely to restore unbiasedness, not to address any relative skew in the distribution of risks in the economic outlook, which is dealt with through overlays and covered in the section on UK economic uncertainty.

 

129


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

UK economic uncertainty (audited)

RBS’s 2018 results were prepared during the run up to the UK leaving the European Union, a period of elevated uncertainty over the UK economic outlook. RBS’s approach to capturing that elevated uncertainty is to apply an overlay to ECL. Information is used from the earnings volatility scenario that is part of the 2018 planning process and credit risk appetite setting. Key elements include an alternative path the economy could take, being characterised as more severe than the Bank of England’s “Disruptive Brexit” scenario (ACS) but less severe than the “Disorderly Brexit” scenario and then applying management judgement as to its likelihood. The RBS-wide overlay of £101 million booked in the third quarter of 2018 remained in place at the year end.

 

IFRS 9 credit risk modelling (audited)

IFRS 9 introduced lifetime ECL for the measurement of credit impairment. This required the development of new models or the enhancement of existing Basel models. IFRS 9 ECLs are calculated using a combination of:

·       Probability of default.

·       Loss given default.

·       Exposure at default.

 

In addition, lifetime PDs (as at reporting date and at date of initial recognition) are used in the assessment of a significant increase in credit risk (SICR) criteria.

 

IFRS 9 ECL model design principles

To meet IFRS 9 requirements for ECL estimation, PD, LGD and EAD used in the calculations must be:

·       Unbiased – material regulatory conservatism has been removed to produce unbiased model estimates.

·       Point-in-time – recognise current economic conditions.

·       Forward-looking – incorporated into PD estimates and, where appropriate, EAD and LGD estimates.

·       For the life of the loan – all models produce a term structure to allow a lifetime calculation for assets in Stage 2 and Stage 3.

 

IFRS 9 requires that at each reporting date, an entity shall assess whether the credit risk on an account has increased significantly since initial recognition. Part of this assessment requires a comparison to be made between the current lifetime PD (i.e. the current probability of default over the remaining lifetime) with the equivalent lifetime PD as determined at the date of initial recognition.

 

For assets originated before IFRS 9 was introduced, comparable lifetime origination PDs did not exist. These have been retrospectively created using the relevant model inputs applicable at initial recognition. Due to data availability, two practical measures have been taken:

·       Where model inputs were not available at the point of initial recognition the earliest available robust metrics were used. For instance, since Basel II was introduced in 2008, the earliest available and reliable production Basel PDs range from between December 2007 and April 2008 depending on the portfolio.

·       Economic conditions at the date of initial recognition have been assumed to remain constant from that point forward.

 

PD estimates

Personal models

Personal PD models use an Exogenous, Maturity and Vintage (EMV) approach to model default rates by taking into account EMV effects. The EMV approach separates portfolio default risk trends into three components: vintage effects (quality of new business over time), maturity effects (changes in risk relating to time on book) and exogenous effects (changes in risk relating to changes in macro economic conditions). This EMV methodology has been widely adopted across the industry because it enables forward-looking information to be modelled separately by isolating exogenous or macroeconomic effects. Forward-looking information is incorporated by fitting an appropriate macroeconomic model, such as the relevant stress testing model to the exogenous component and utilising forecasts of the relevant macro-economic factors.

 

Wholesale models

Wholesale PD models use the existing CCI based point-in-time/through-the-cycle framework to convert one-year regulatory PDs into point-in-time estimates that reflect current economic conditions across a comprehensive set of region/industry segments.

 

One year point-in-time PDs are then extrapolated to multi-year PDs using a conditional transition matrix approach. The conditional transition matrix approach allows the incorporation of forward-looking information, provided in the form of yearly CCI projections, by adjusting the credit state transition probabilities according to projected, forward-looking changes of credit conditions in each region/industry segment.

 

This results in forward-looking point-in-time PD term structures for each obligor from which the lifetime PD for a specific exposure can be calculated according to the exposure’s residual contractual maturity.

 

LGD estimates

The general approach for the IFRS 9 LGD models was to leverage the Basel LGD models with bespoke IFRS 9 adjustments to ensure unbiased estimates, that is, the use of effective interest rate as the discount rate and the removal of downturn calibration, indirect costs, other conservatism and regulatory floors.

 

Personal

Forward-looking information has only been incorporated for the secured portfolios, where changes in property prices can be readily accommodated. Analysis has indicated minimal impact for the other Personal portfolios. For UBIDAC, a bespoke IFRS 9 LGD model is used, reflecting its specific regional market.

 

Wholesale

Current and forward-looking economic information is incorporated into the LGD estimates using the existing CCI framework. For low default portfolios (for example, sovereigns) loss data is too scarce to substantiate estimates that vary with systematic conditions. Consequently, for these portfolios, LGD estimates are assumed to be constant throughout the projection horizon.

 

EAD estimates

Retail

The IFRS 9 Personal modelling approach for EAD is dependent on product type.

·       Revolving products use the existing Basel models as a basis, with appropriate adjustments incorporating a term structure based on time to default.

·       Amortising products use an amortising schedule, where a formula is used to calculate the expected balance based on remaining terms and interest rates.

·       There is no EAD model for Personal loans. Instead, debt flow (i.e. combined PD x EAD) is directly modelled.

 

Analysis has indicated that there is minimal impact on EAD arising from changes in the economy for all Retail portfolios except mortgages. Therefore, forward-looking information is only incorporated in the mortgage EAD model (through forecast changes in interest rates).

 

Wholesale

For Wholesale, EAD values are estimated on the basis of credit conversion factor (CCF) models. RBS have observed historic, realised CCF values to vary over time but there is no clear relationship between the temporal changes in CCF and economic conditions. RBS attribute changes in CCFs to changes in exposure management practices.

 

Therefore RBS does not include forward-looking economic information into projected CCF/EAD. To ensure CCF values reflect most recent exposure management practices, RBS update CCF coefficients in the model frequently (typically annually) using the last five years of observed data.

 

130


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Governance and post model adjustments

The IFRS 9 PD, EAD and LGD models are subject to RBS’s model monitoring and governance frameworks, which include approving post model adjustments (PMAs) calculated to incorporate the most recent data available and made on a temporary basis ahead of the underlying model parameter changes being implemented. These PMAs totalled approximately £60 million at the year end primarily in respect of PD under-predictions. In addition, as at 31 December 2018, judgemental ECL overlays on the UK PB mortgage portfolio totalled £30 million, including £15 million in respect of the repayment risk not captured in the models that a proportion of customers on interest only mortgages will not be able to repay the capital element of their loan at end of term. The overlay for interest only mortgages was based on an analysis of recent experience on customer repayments pre and post end of term, and modelling that forward for maturities over the next ten years. These adjustments were over and above those covering economic uncertainty and non-linearity of losses discussed above and are also subject to over-sight and governance by the Provisions Committee.

 

Significant increase in credit risk (audited)

Exposures that are considered significantly credit deteriorated since initial recognition are classified in Stage 2 and assessed for lifetime ECL measurement (exposures not considered deteriorated carry a 12 month ECL). RBS has adopted a framework to identify deterioration based primarily on movements in probability of default supported by additional backstops. The principles applied are consistent across RBS and align to credit risk management practices.

 

The framework comprises the following elements:

·       IFRS 9 lifetime PD assessment (the primary driver) – on modelled portfolios the assessment is based on the relative deterioration in forward-looking lifetime PD and is assessed monthly. To assess whether credit deterioration has occurred, the residual lifetime PD at balance sheet date (which PD is established at date of initial recognition (DOIR)) is compared to the current PD. If the current lifetime PD exceeds the residual origination PD by more than a threshold amount deterioration is assumed to have occurred and the exposure transferred to Stage 2 for a lifetime loss assessment. For Wholesale, a doubling of PD would indicate a significant increase in credit risk subject to a minimum PD uplift of 0.1%. For Personal portfolios, the criteria varies by risk band, with lower risk exposures needing to deteriorate more than higher risk exposures, as outlined in the following table:

 

Personal
risk bands

Risk bandings (based
on residual lifetime
PD calculated at DOIR)

PD deterioration
threshold criteria

Risk band A

<0.762%

PD@DOIR + 1%

Risk band B

<4.306%

PD@DOIR + 3%

Risk band C

>=4.306%

1.7 x PD@DOIR

 

 

·       Qualitative high-risk backstops – the PD assessment is complemented with the use of qualitative high-risk backstops to further inform whether significant deterioration in lifetime risk of default has occurred. The qualitative high-risk backstop assessment includes the use of the mandatory 30+ days past due backstop, as prescribed by IFRS 9 guidance, and other features such as forbearance support, Wholesale exposures managed within the Risk of Credit Loss framework, and for Personal, adverse credit bureau results.

·       Persistence (Personal and Business Banking only) – the persistence rule ensures that accounts which have met the criteria for PD driven deterioration are still considered to be significantly deteriorated for three months thereafter. This additional rule enhances the timeliness of capture in Stage 2. It is a Personal methodology feature and is applied to PD driven deterioration only.

 

The criteria are based on a significant amount of empirical analysis and seek to meet three key objectives:

·       Criteria effectiveness – the criteria should be effective in identifying significant credit deterioration and prospective default population.

·       Stage 2 stability – the criteria should not introduce unnecessary volatility in the Stage 2 population.

·       Portfolio analysis – the criteria should produce results which are intuitive when reported as part of the wider credit portfolio.

 

Asset lifetimes (audited)

The choice of initial recognition and asset duration is another critical judgement in determining the quantum of lifetime losses that apply.

·       The date of initial recognition reflects the date that a transaction (or account) was first recognised on the balance sheet; the PD recorded at that time provides the baseline used for subsequent determination of SICR.

·       For asset duration, the approach applied (in line with IFRS 9 requirements) is:

o        Term lending – the contractual maturity date, reduced for behavioural trends where appropriate (such as, expected pre-payment and amortisation).

o        Revolving facilities – for Personal portfolios (except credit cards), asset duration is based on behavioural life and this is normally greater than contractual life (which would typically be overnight). For Wholesale portfolios, asset duration is based on annual counterparty review schedules and will be set to the next review date.

 

In the case of credit cards, the most significant judgement is to reflect the operational practice of card reissuance and the associated credit assessment as enabling a formal re-origination trigger. As a consequence a capped lifetime approach of up to 36 months is used on credit card balances. If the approach was uncapped the ECL impact is estimated at less than £90 million, compared to £75 million at transition, with the increase primarily reflecting refinements to criteria used to identify a significant increase in credit risk during the year.

 

The approach reflects RBS practice of a credit-based review of customers prior to credit card issuance and complies with IFRS 9. Benchmarking information indicates that peer UK banks use behavioural approaches in the main for credit card portfolios with average durations between three and ten years. Across Europe durations are shorter and are, in some cases, as low as one year.

 

Measurement uncertainty and ECL sensitivity analysis (audited)

The recognition and measurement of ECL is highly complex and involves the use of significant judgement and estimation. This includes the formulation and incorporation of multiple forward-looking economic conditions into ECL to meet the measurement objective of IFRS 9. The ECL provision is sensitive to the model inputs and economic assumptions underlying the estimate. Set out below is the impact of some of the material sensitivities considered for 2018 year end reporting. These ECL simulations are separate to the impact arising from MES as described earlier in this disclosure, which impacts are embedded in the reported ECL. Given the current benign environment for impairments the focus is on downsides to the existing ECL provision levels.

 

The focus of the simulations is on ECL provisioning requirements on performing exposures in Stage 1 and Stage 2. The simulations are run on a stand-alone basis and are independent of each other; the potential ECL uplifts reflect the simulated impact as at the year end balance sheet date. As default is an observed event as at the balance sheet date, Stage 3 provisions are not subject to the same level of measurement uncertainty, and therefore have not been considered in this analysis. The following common scenarios have been applied across the key Personal and Wholesale portfolios:

 

131


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

·          Economic uncertainty – simulating the impact arising from the Downside 2 scenario, which is one of the five discrete scenarios used in the methodology for Personal MES. In the simulation RBS have assumed that the economic macro variables associated with the Downside 2 scenario replace the existing base case economic assumptions, giving them a 100% probability weighting for Personal and using the Monte Carlo approach in Wholesale to simulate the impact of MES around the base case economic scenario.

 

·          As reflected in the economic metrics in the following table, the Downside 2 scenario assumes a significant economic downturn in the UK in 2019 running in to 2020 with recovery in the later years. UK GDP turns negative in 2019 compared to the base case assumption of continued growth, unemployment increases and peaks at the end of 2020. House prices fall in both 2019 and 2020 before starting to recover, and interest rates are assumed to be lower for longer. An economic slowdown is also assumed in the Republic of Ireland in 2019 and 2020.

 

 

 

Base case economic parameters

 

Downside 2 economic parameters

 

 

2019 Q4

 

2020 Q4

 

2021 Q4

 

2022 Q4

 

2023 Q4

 

2019 Q4

 

2020 Q4

 

2021 Q4

 

2022 Q4

 

2023 Q4

UK

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

GDP (year-on-year)

 

1.7

 

1.5

 

1.9

 

1.8

 

1.8

 

(1.2)

 

1.2

 

2.7

 

2.0

 

2.1

Unemployment rate

 

4.8

 

5.0

 

5.1

 

5.1

 

5.1

 

6.7

 

7.4

 

7.3

 

6.9

 

6.4

House Price Inflation (year-on-year)

 

1.1

 

0.7

 

1.5

 

2.3

 

3.4

 

(7.0)

 

(4.5)

 

1.0

 

4.1

 

6.3

Bank of England rate

 

1.0

 

1.0

 

1.3

 

1.3

 

1.3

 

 

 

 

 

Republic of Ireland

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GDP (year-on-year)

 

4.2

 

2.9

 

2.8

 

2.8

 

2.5

 

0.7

 

3.5

 

4.4

 

4.5

 

4.0

Unemployment rate

 

5.2

 

5.1

 

5.1

 

5.2

 

5.3

 

7.6

 

7.7

 

6.5

 

5.9

 

5.7

House Price Inflation (year-on-year)

 

5.8

 

2.7

 

3.0

 

3.4

 

3.5

 

(6.7)

 

(5.4)

 

2.2

 

7.2

 

8.8

European Central Bank rate

 

 

 

0.3

 

0.5

 

0.8

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

World GDP (year-on-year)

 

2.7

 

2.4

 

2.9

 

2.7

 

2.5

 

(0.8)

 

3.1

 

4.4

 

3.2

 

2.8

 

This scenario has been applied to all modelled portfolios in the analysis below, with the simulation impacting both PDs and LGDs. For some portfolios this creates a significant impact on ECL, for others less so but on balance the impact is deemed reasonable. In this simulation, it is assumed the existing modelled relationship between key economic variables and loss drivers holds good.

·          Portfolio risk – evaluation of the impact of a movement in one of the key metrics, PD, simulating a relative 25% upward shift in PDs.

 

These common scenarios were complemented with two specific portfolio simulations:

·          Wholesale portfolios simulating the impact of PDs moving upwards to the through-the-cycle (TTC) average from their current point-in-time (PIT) estimate. This simulation looks solely at PD movements, potential movements in LGD rates have not been considered. With the current benign economic conditions wholesale IFRS 9 PIT PDs are significantly lower than TTC PD. This scenario shows the increase to ECL by immediately switching to TTC PDs providing an indication of long run average expectations. IFRS 9 PDs have been used so there remains some differences to Basel TTC PDs where conservative assumptions are required, such as caps or floors, not permitted under the IFRS 9 best estimate approach.

·          Mortgages House Price Inflation (HPI) is a key economic driver and RBS have simulated a univariate scenario of a 5% decrease in HPI across the main mortgage portfolios. A univariate analysis using only HPI does not allow for the interdependence across the other key primary loss drivers to be reflected in any ECL estimate. The simulated impact is based on 100% probability weighting to demonstrate the sensitivity of HPI on the central base case. The Downside 2 scenario above has house prices falling by a more material amount, and also includes the impact of PD increases which are not captured under the HPI univariate simulation.

 

RBS’s core criterion to identify a significant increase in credit risk is founded on PD deterioration, as discussed above. Under the simulations, PDs increase and result in exposures moving from Stage 1 to Stage 2 contributing to the ECL uplift.

 

132


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Economic sensitivity analysis (restated: see Note 4 for details)

 

 

Actual position at 31 December 2018

 

Common scenarios (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1 and Stage 2 (1)

 

Downside 2

 

25% PD increase

 

Discrete scenarios (3)

 

 

 

 

of which in

 

ECL

 

 

 

 

 

Exposure in

 

 

 

 

 

Exposure in

 

HPI (4)/TTC PD (5)

 

Exposure in

 

 

Exposure

 

Stage 2

 

provision(2)

 

Potential ECL uplift

 

Stage 2

 

Potential ECL uplift

 

Stage 2

 

potential ECL uplift

 

Stage 2

 

 

£bn

 

%

 

£m

 

£m

 

%

 

%

 

£m

 

%

 

%

 

£m

 

%

 

%

UK PB

 

148.6

 

9.0

 

528.4

 

171.0

 

32.4

 

11.4

 

156.2

 

29.6

 

10.3

 

 

 

 

 

 

Of which: mortgages

 

137.7

 

7.3

 

80.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5.5

 

6.8

 

7.3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ulster Bank RoI Personal and business banking

 

12.8

 

11.9

 

100.0

 

60.5

 

60.5

 

24.5

 

24.4

 

24.4

 

17.3

 

 

 

 

 

 

Of which: mortgages

 

12.2

 

11.4

 

85.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6.1

 

7.2

 

11.7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Wholesale

 

268.8

 

4.3

 

394.4

 

94.6

 

24.0

 

8.2

 

104.4

 

26.5

 

5.5

 

106.3

 

31.9

 

7.5

Total

 

430.2

 

6.1

 

1,022.8

 

326.1

 

31.9

 

9.8

 

285.0

 

27.9

 

7.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)    Reflects drawn exposure and ECL for all modelled exposure in scope for IFRS 9; in addition to loans this includes bonds, and cash. For Personal exposures, this includes UK PB, and also Ulster Bank RoI personal and business banking, the analysis excludes Personal exposures such as Private Banking and RBSI.

(2)    The ECL provision includes the ECL overlay taken in quarter 3 to recognise the elevated economic uncertainty in the UK in the period running up to the UK leaving the European Union.

(3)    All simulations are run on a stand-alone basis and are independent of each other, with the potential ECL uplift reflecting the simulated impact at the year end balance sheet date.

(4)    HPI is applied to the most material mortgage portfolios only, UK PB and Ulster Bank RoI.

(5)    TTC or long-run average PDs are applied to Wholesale portfolios only, excluding business banking exposures.

 

Key points

·       In the downside 2 scenario, the ECL requirement overall was simulated to increase by £326 million on stage 1 and 2 exposures from the current level of £1,023 million. The simulation estimates the balance sheet ECL requirement as at 31 December 2018 and assumes that the economic variables associated with the Downside 2 scenario had been RBS’s base case economic assumption at that time.

·       For the UK PB franchise, the simulated ECL uplift observed in the Downside 2 scenario was a little higher than under the 25% PD increase, with similar seen in the percentage of exposures simulated to move to Stage 2.

·       In the Downside 2 scenario, the Ulster Bank RoI simulated uplift was more marked than on the other simulations reflecting the weight of mortgage assets in their personal lending portfolio, with the adverse movement in house prices increasing the LGD. A similar affect was observed on the UK PB mortgage portfolio where the mortgage ECL was simulated to increase by just over 50%, and which impact is included within the overall PB simulated result. The percentage of exposures simulated to move into Stage 2 in the Downside 2 scenario is notably higher than under the 25% PD increase for the Ulster Bank RoI due to the combined impact of the macro-economic variables utilised for the simulation.

·       On the univariate HPI scenario, the impact of a 5% fall in house prices was relatively modest, the simulated impact was similar in both UK PB and Ulster Bank RoI. The relationship between the required ECL and house price movements is expected to be non-linear should the level of house prices reduce by more material amounts, with the rate of loss accelerating when prices fall by more than 10%. Ulster Bank RoI also observed a modest increase in the percentage of exposures in Stage 2 reflecting small PD movements, whereas the UK PB simulation was restricted to the LGD effect alone hence the percentage of assets in Stage 2 remained unchanged.

·       Wholesale, the TTC PD scenario has the most significant impact on ECL highlighting that reverting to long run average PDs is more severe than a 25% increase in PDs or a switch to a downside scenario. Moving to TTC PDs requires an average PD uplift of almost 40%.

·       The TTC PD and 25% PD increase scenarios see a significant ECL uplift in the property portfolio which is not observed under the Downside 2 scenario as under the Downside 2 scenario the Wholesale PDs begin to revert to long run averages (mean reversion) after 12 months so do not fully capture the further deterioration expected in the property portfolio in years 2 and 3.

·       Downside 2 scenario results in more corporate exposure moving to Stage 2 than either the TTC PD or 25% PD increase scenarios. The impact is more concentrated on shorter dated exposure, reflecting the year 1 downturn, which has less of an impact on total ECL.

 

133


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities

All the disclosures in this section are audited with the exception of Stage 2 analysis and Stage 3 vintage analysis.

 

Introduction

This section covers the credit risk profile of RBS’s banking activities. Exposures and credit risk measures presented as of and for year ended 31 December 2018 and at 1 January 2018 are on an IFRS 9 basis. Exposures and credit risk measures as of and for the year ended 31 December 2017 are on an IAS 39 basis.

 

Refer to Accounting policy 14 and Note 14 on the consolidated accounts for revisions to policies and critical judgements relating to impairment loss determination.

 

Banking activities include a small number of portfolios that were carried at fair value, the most significant of which was the lender-option/buyer-option portfolio of £0.5 billion (1 January 2018 – £2.0 billion). The decrease in the portfolio reflected disposals and valuation changes.

 

Financial instruments within the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework (audited)

Refer to Note 11 on the consolidated accounts for balance sheet analysis of financial assets that are classified as amortised cost (AC) or fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI), the starting point for IFRS 9 ECL framework assessment.

 

Financial assets

Of the total third party £471 billion AC and FVOCI balance (gross of ECL), £463.9 billion or 98% was within the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework and comprised by stage: Stage 1 £430.1 billion; Stage 2 £26.1 billion and Stage 3 £7.7 billion (1 January 2018 – £468.8 billion of which Stage 1 £430.5 billion; Stage 2 £27.0 billion and Stage 3 £11.3 billion). Total assets within IFRS 9 ECL scope comprised the following by balance sheet caption and stage:

·       Loans: £319.8 billion of which Stage 1 £286.0 billion; Stage 2 £26.1 billion and Stage 3 £7.7 billion (1 January 2018 – £321.3 billion of which Stage 1 £283.3 billion; Stage 2 £26.8 billion and Stage 3 £11.2 billion).

·       Other financial assets: £144.1 billion of which Stage 1 £144.1 billion; Stage 2 nil and Stage 3 nil (1 January 2018 – £147.4 billion of which Stage 1 £147.2 billion; Stage 2 £0.2 billion and Stage 3 nil).

 

Those assets outside the IFRS 9 ECL framework were as follows:

·       Settlement balances, items in the course of collection, cash balances and other non-credit risk assets of £4.9 billion. These were assessed as having no ECL unless there was evidence that they were credit impaired.

·       Equity shares of £0.5 billion as not within the IFRS 9 ECL framework by definition.

·       Fair value adjustments on loans hedged by interest rate swaps, where the underlying loan was within the IFRS 9 ECL scope – £0.9 billion.

·       Group-originated securitisations, where ECL was captured on the underlying loans of £0.4 billion.

·       Commercial cards which operate in a similar manner to charge cards, with balances repaid monthly via mandated direct debit with the underlying risk of loss captured within the customer’s linked current account of £0.4 billion.

 

Contingent liabilities and commitments

In addition to contingent liabilities and commitments disclosed in Note 27 on the consolidated accounts – reputationally-committed limits, are also included in the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework. These are offset by £3.6 billion out of scope balances primarily related to facilities that, if drawn, would not be classified as AC or FVOCI, or undrawn limits relating to financial assets exclusions. Total contingent liabilities (including financial guarantees) and commitments within IFRS 9 ECL scope of £168.9 billion comprised Stage 1 £161.4 billion; Stage 2 £6.9 billion and Stage 3 £0.6 billion.

 

134


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – segment analysis (audited) (restated: see Note 4 for details)

The table below summarises gross loans and ECL, by segment and stage, within the scope of the IFRS 9 ECL framework.

 

 

 

 

 

Ulster

 

Commercial

 

Private

 

 

 

 

 

Central items

 

 

 

 

UK PB

 

Bank RoI

 

Banking

 

Banking

 

RBSI

 

NWM

 

& other

 

Total

31 December 2018 (1)

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Loans - amortised cost

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

 

134,836

 

17,822

 

91,034

 

13,750

 

13,383

 

8,196

 

6,964

 

285,985

Stage 2

 

13,245

 

2,080

 

9,518

 

531

 

289

 

407

 

27

 

26,097

Stage 3

 

1,908

 

2,308

 

2,448

 

225

 

101

 

728

 

 

7,718

 

 

149,989

 

22,210

 

103,000

 

14,506

 

13,773

 

9,331

 

6,991

 

319,800

ECL provisions (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

 

101

 

35

 

124

 

13

 

6

 

6

 

 

285

Stage 2

 

430

 

114

 

194

 

10

 

3

 

12

 

 

763

Stage 3

 

597

 

638

 

942

 

20

 

17

 

106

 

 

2,320

 

 

1,128

 

787

 

1,260

 

43

 

26

 

124

 

 

3,368

ECL provisions coverage (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1 (%)

 

0.07

 

0.20

 

0.14

 

0.09

 

0.04

 

0.07

 

 

0.10

Stage 2 (%)

 

3.25

 

5.48

 

2.04

 

1.88

 

1.04

 

2.95

 

 

2.92

Stage 3 (%)

 

31.29

 

27.64

 

38.48

 

8.89

 

16.83

 

14.56

 

 

30.06

 

 

0.75

 

3.54

 

1.22

 

0.30

 

0.19

 

1.33

 

 

1.05

Impairment losses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ECL charge (4)

 

339

 

15

 

147

 

(6

)

(2

)

(92

)

(3

)

398

ECL loss rate - annualised (basis points)

 

22.60

 

6.75

 

14.27

 

(4.14

)

(1.45

)

(98.60

)

(4.29

)

12.45

Amounts written-off

 

445

 

372

 

572

 

7

 

9

 

89

 

 

1,494

 

 

 

 

 

Ulster

 

Commercial

 

Private

 

 

 

 

 

Central
items

 

 

 

Balances at

 

 

 

 

UK PB

 

Bank RoI

 

Banking

 

Banking

 

RBSI

 

NWM

 

& other

 

Total

 

central banks

 

Total

1 January 2018 (1)

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

 

132,418

 

19,055

 

97,625

 

12,755

 

7,791

 

11,762

 

52,523

 

333,929

 

96,566

 

430,495

Stage 2

 

13,204

 

2,347

 

9,776

 

333

 

307

 

995

 

10

 

26,972

 

5

 

26,977

Stage 3

 

2,406

 

3,669

 

4,264

 

324

 

119

 

501

 

 

11,283

 

 

11,283

 

 

148,028

 

25,071

 

111,665

 

13,412

 

8,217

 

13,258

 

52,533

 

372,184

 

96,571

 

468,755

ECL provisions (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

 

110

 

29

 

92

 

18

 

5

 

2

 

5

 

261

 

1

 

262

Stage 2

 

315

 

106

 

143

 

9

 

5

 

42

 

1

 

621

 

 

621

Stage 3

 

825

 

1,054

 

1,441

 

27

 

28

 

190

 

 

3,565

 

 

3,565

 

 

1,250

 

1,189

 

1,676

 

54

 

38

 

234

 

6

 

4,447

 

1

 

4,448

ECL provisions coverage (3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1 (%)

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

0.1

 

 

 

0.1

 

 

0.1

Stage 2 (%)

 

2.4

 

4.5

 

1.5

 

2.7

 

1.6

 

4.2

 

10.0

 

2.3

 

 

2.3

Stage 3 (%)

 

34.3

 

28.7

 

33.8

 

8.3

 

23.5

 

37.9

 

 

31.6

 

 

31.6

 

 

0.8

 

4.7

 

1.5

 

0.4

 

0.5

 

1.8

 

 

1.2

 

 

0.9

 

Notes:

(1)           The segment analysis tables as at 31 December 2018 include all loans – amortised cost within the scope of IFRS 9. The comparative tables at 1 January 2018 include all financial assets within the scope of IFRS 9, including debt securities of £50.4 billion, of which £42.7 billion related to debt securities classified as FVOCI. ECL on these debt securities at 1 January 2018 was £28 million, of which £4 million related to those classified as FVOCI.

(2)           ECL provisions are provisions on loan assets only. Other ECL provisions not included, relate to cash, debt securities and contingent liabilities, and amount to £28 million, of which £5 million was FVOCI.

(3)           ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by loans – amortised cost.

(4)           ECL charge balances in the above table include a £3 million charge related to other financial assets, of which a £1 million charge related to assets at FVOCI; and a £31 million release related to contingent liabilities.

 

The table below shows gross loans (excluding reverse repos) and related credit metrics by segment on an IAS 39 basis.

 

 

 

 

 

Ulster

 

Commercial

 

Private

 

 

 

 

 

Central items

 

 

 

 

UK PB

 

Bank RoI

 

Banking

 

Banking

 

RBSI

 

NWM

 

& other

 

Total

2017 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Gross loans to banks

 

500

 

2,447

 

697

 

109

 

29

 

7,490

 

4,992

 

16,264

Gross loans to customers

 

147,837

 

20,623

 

113,302

 

13,514

 

8,743

 

22,902

 

77

 

321,633

Risk elements in lending (REIL)

 

1,543

 

3,282

 

3,628

 

95

 

103

 

253

 

 

8,904

Provisions

 

986

 

1,131

 

1,456

 

32

 

35

 

174

 

 

3,814

REIL as a % of gross loans to customers

 

1.0

 

15.9

 

3.2

 

0.7

 

1.2

 

1.1

 

 

2.7

Provisions as a % of REIL

 

64

 

34

 

40

 

34

 

34

 

69

 

 

43

Provisions as a % of gross loans to customers

 

0.7

 

5.5

 

1.3

 

0.2

 

0.4

 

0.8

 

 

1.2

Impairment losses/(releases)

 

207

 

60

 

390

 

6

 

3

 

(137

)

1

 

530

Amounts written-off

 

424

 

124

 

483

 

4

 

6

 

167

 

2

 

1,210

 

135


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – segment analysis (audited)

Key points

·       Total ECL provisions have reduced since transition as a result of reduced provisioning requirements on Stage 3 impaired assets, which reflected ongoing write-offs and debt sales, partially offset by increases in Stage 1 and Stage 2.

·       Stage 3 ECL provisions – The reductions in the UK PB business reflected a combination of business-as-usual write-offs and debt sale activity. For Ulster Bank RoI the significant reduction since transition was due to the sale of legacy impaired mortgage portfolio debt. In Commercial Banking and NatWest Markets the reductions were mainly attributable to write-offs.

·       Stage 1 and Stage 2 – The increase in Stage 1 and Stage 2 ECL was driven by a number of factors. These included an ECL uplift for economic uncertainty, which affected all businesses, model refinements, asset migrations from Stage 3 impaired and portfolio growth.

·       Provision coverage remained stable in the Stage 1 population and increased in Stage 2, with the uplift including the effect of methodology refinements. The Stage 3 provision coverage reduced slightly including the effect of debt sales and underlying business as usual movements.

·       The impairment charge for the year was £398 million. This reflected the relatively stable external environment.

·       The reduction in the Commercial Banking portfolio reflected the transfer of customers to RBSI and NWM as well as the continued exit from legacy assets.

 

Segmental loans and impairment metrics (audited) (restated: see Note 4 for details)

The table below summarises gross loans and ECL provisions, by days past due, by segment and stage, within the scope of the ECL framework.

 

 

 

Gross loans

 

ECL provisions (3)

 

 

 

 

Stage 2 (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 2 (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

 

<30 DPD

 

>30 DPD

 

Total

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Stage 1

 

<30 DPD

 

>30 DPD

 

Total

 

Stage 3

 

Total

31 December 2018 (1)

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

UK PB

 

134,836

 

12,521

 

725

 

13,245

 

1,908

 

149,989

 

101

 

382

 

48

 

430

 

597

 

1,128

Ulster Bank RoI

 

17,822

 

1,968

 

112

 

2,080

 

2,308

 

22,210

 

35

 

103

 

11

 

114

 

638

 

787

Personal (4)

 

11,059

 

1,353

 

105

 

1,458

 

2,153

 

14,670

 

13

 

73

 

11

 

84

 

530

 

627

Wholesale

 

6,763

 

615

 

7

 

622

 

155

 

7,540

 

22

 

30

 

 

30

 

108

 

160

Commercial Banking

 

91,034

 

9,087

 

430

 

9,518

 

2,448

 

103,000

 

124

 

186

 

8

 

194

 

942

 

1,260

Private Banking

 

13,750

 

380

 

151

 

531

 

225

 

14,506

 

13

 

5

 

5

 

10

 

20

 

43

Personal

 

10,803

 

183

 

25

 

208

 

203

 

11,214

 

5

 

3

 

 

3

 

17

 

25

Wholesale

 

2,947

 

197

 

126

 

323

 

22

 

3,292

 

8

 

2

 

5

 

7

 

3

 

18

RBS International

 

13,383

 

274

 

15

 

289

 

101

 

13,773

 

6

 

3

 

 

3

 

17

 

26

NatWest Markets

 

8,196

 

407

 

 

407

 

728

 

9,331

 

6

 

12

 

 

12

 

106

 

124

Central items & other

 

6,964

 

27

 

 

27

 

 

6,991

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total loans excluding balances at central banks

 

285,985

 

24,664

 

1,433

 

26,097

 

7,718

 

319,800

 

285

 

691

 

72

 

763

 

2,320

 

3,368

Personal

 

159,553

 

14,106

 

865

 

14,971

 

4,351

 

178,875

 

122

 

458

 

59

 

517

 

1,158

 

1,797

Wholesale

 

126,432

 

10,558

 

568

 

11,126

 

3,367

 

140,925

 

163

 

233

 

13

 

246

 

1,162

 

1,571

Balances at central banks

 

87,181

 

 

 

 

 

87,181

 

2

 

 

 

 

 

2

Total loans

 

373,166

 

24,664

 

1,433

 

26,097

 

7,718

 

406,981

 

287

 

691

 

72

 

763

 

2,320

 

3,370

 

 

 

Financial assets

 

ECL provisions (3)

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

1 January 2018 (1)

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

UK PB

 

132,418

 

13,204

 

2,406

 

148,028

 

110

 

315

 

825

 

1,250

Ulster Bank RoI

 

19,055

 

2,347

 

3,669

 

25,071

 

29

 

106

 

1,054

 

1,189

Commercial Banking

 

97,625

 

9,776

 

4,264

 

111,665

 

92

 

143

 

1,441

 

1,676

Private Banking

 

12,755

 

333

 

324

 

13,412

 

18

 

9

 

27

 

54

RBS International

 

7,791

 

307

 

119

 

8,217

 

5

 

5

 

28

 

38

NatWest Markets

 

11,762

 

995

 

501

 

13,258

 

2

 

42

 

190

 

234

Central items & other

 

52,523

 

10

 

 

52,533

 

5

 

1

 

 

6

Total financial assets excluding balances at central banks

 

333,929

 

26,972

 

11,283

 

372,184

 

261

 

621

 

3,565

 

4,447

Balances at central banks

 

96,566

 

5

 

 

96,571

 

1

 

 

 

1

Total financial assets

 

430,495

 

26,977

 

11,283

 

468,755

 

262

 

621

 

3,565

 

4,448

 

For the notes to this table refer to the following page.

 

136


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Segmental loans and impairment metrics (audited) (restated: see Note 4 for details)

The table below summarises gross loans and ECL provisions coverage, by days past due, by segment and stage, within the scope of the ECL framework.

 

 

 

ECL provisions coverage

 

ECL

 

 

 

Stage 2 (2,3)

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

 

 

Amounts

 

 

Stage 1

 

<30 DPD

 

>30 DPD

 

Total

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

charge

 

Loss rate

 

written-off

31 December 2018 (1)

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

£m

 

basis points

 

£m

UK PB

 

0.07

 

3.05

 

6.62

 

3.25

 

31.29

 

0.75

 

339

 

22.6

 

445

Ulster Bank RoI

 

0.20

 

5.23

 

9.82

 

5.48

 

27.64

 

3.54

 

15

 

6.8

 

372

Personal (4)

 

0.12

 

5.40

 

10.48

 

5.76

 

24.62

 

4.27

 

20

 

13.6

 

343

Wholesale

 

0.33

 

4.88

 

 

4.82

 

69.68

 

2.12

 

(5

)

(6.6

)

29

Commercial Banking

 

0.14

 

2.05

 

1.86

 

2.04

 

38.48

 

1.22

 

147

 

14.3

 

572

Private Banking

 

0.09

 

1.32

 

3.31

 

1.88

 

8.89

 

0.30

 

(6

)

(4.1

)

7

Personal

 

0.05

 

1.64

 

 

1.44

 

8.37

 

0.22

 

(6

)

(5.4

)

5

Wholesale

 

0.27

 

1.02

 

3.97

 

2.17

 

13.64

 

0.55

 

 

 

2

RBS International

 

0.04

 

1.09

 

 

1.04

 

16.83

 

0.19

 

(2

)

(1.5

)

9

NatWest Markets

 

0.07

 

2.95

 

 

2.95

 

14.56

 

1.33

 

(92

)

(98.6

)

89

Central items and other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(3

)

(4.3

)

Total loans excluding balances at central banks

 

0.10

 

2.80

 

5.02

 

2.92

 

30.06

 

1.05

 

398

 

12.5

 

1,494

Personal

 

0.08

 

3.25

 

6.82

 

3.45

 

26.61

 

1.00

 

354

 

19.8

 

776

Wholesale

 

0.13

 

2.21

 

2.29

 

2.21

 

34.51

 

1.11

 

44

 

3.1

 

718

Total loans

 

0.08

 

2.80

 

5.02

 

2.92

 

30.06

 

0.83

 

398

 

9.8

 

1,494

 

 

 

ECL provisions coverage

 

 

 

Stage 2 (2,3)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

 

<30 DPD

 

>30 DPD

 

Total

 

Stage 3

 

Total

1 January 2018 (1)

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

Personal

 

0.09

 

2.54

 

4.80

 

2.63

 

28.46

 

1.31

- UK mortgages

 

0.01

 

0.56

 

1.62

 

0.61

 

11.23

 

0.18

- RoI mortgages

 

0.07

 

4.44

 

7.09

 

4.67

 

26.02

 

6.18

- Credit cards

 

1.71

 

9.11

 

27.27

 

9.31

 

53.57

 

5.23

- Other

 

0.80

 

7.99

 

19.64

 

8.30

 

59.44

 

8.03

Wholesale

 

0.07

 

1.88

 

2.07

 

1.88

 

35.51

 

1.09

- Property

 

0.07

 

1.13

 

1.15

 

1.13

 

32.43

 

1.81

- Corporate

 

0.14

 

1.90

 

2.86

 

1.92

 

36.50

 

1.80

- Financial institutions

 

0.03

 

3.57

 

 

3.38

 

65.71

 

0.34

- Other

 

0.01

 

0.85

 

 

0.85

 

 

0.01

Total financial assets

 

0.06

 

2.25

 

3.75

 

2.30

 

31.60

 

0.95

 

Notes:

(1)      The segment analysis tables at 31 December 2018 include all loans – amortised cost within the scope of IFRS 9. The comparative tables at 1 January 2018 include all financial assets within the scope of IFRS 9, including debt securities of £50.4 billion, of which £42.7 billion related to debt securities classified as FVOCI. ECL on these debt securities at 1 January 2018 was £28 million, of which £4 million related to those classified as FVOCI.

(2)      30 DPD – 30 days past due, the mandatory 30 days past due backstop is prescribed by IFRS 9 for significant increase in credit risk.

(3)      ECL provisions on contingent liabilities and commitments are included within the Financial assets section so as not to distort ECL coverage ratios.

(4)      31 December 2018, £3 million of the write offs related to business banking portfolio in Ulster Bank RoI.

 

Key points

·       The UK PB and Ulster Bank RoI franchises accounted for the vast majority of Personal provisions. In Ulster Bank RoI, Personal provisions were primarily driven by Stage 3 impairments on the legacy mortgage book.

·       The Commercial Banking business accounted for the majority of Wholesale exposures. Wholesale provisions in UK PB reflected exposures to business banking customers and also the commercial businesses in RBS England & Wales/NatWest Scotland.

·       On performing exposures (Stage 1 and Stage 2), materially higher ECL provision was held in credit deteriorated Stage 2 exposures than in Stage 1, in line with expectations. This was also reflected in provision coverage levels.

·       Also in line with expectations, the majority of Stage 2 exposures were less than 30 days past due, since PD deterioration is the primary driver of credit deterioration.

·       The differing cover rates between the Personal and Wholesale portfolios – and across the business – largely reflected differences in asset mix, including security cover, and the differing impacts of external environment events.

 

137


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – sector analysis (audited)

The table below summarises financial assets and off-balance sheet exposures gross of ECL and related ECL provisions, impairment and past due by sector, asset quality and geographical region based on the country of operation of the customer.

 

 

 

Personal

 

Wholesale

 

Total

 

 

 

 

Credit

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mortgages (1)

 

cards

 

personal

 

Total

 

Property

 

Corporate

 

FI

 

Sovereign

 

Total

 

 

31 December 2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Loans by geography

 

165,081

 

4,216

 

9,578

 

178,875

 

36,707

 

72,240

 

25,011

 

6,967

 

140,925

 

319,800

- UK

 

150,233

 

4,112

 

9,117

 

163,462

 

33,855

 

60,657

 

11,611

 

3,089

 

109,212

 

272,674

- RoI

 

14,350

 

104

 

233

 

14,687

 

1,114

 

3,733

 

392

 

2,497

 

7,736

 

22,423

- Other Europe

 

102

 

 

67

 

169

 

1,395

 

3,760

 

5,903

 

1,088

 

12,146

 

12,315

- RoW

 

396

 

 

161

 

557

 

343

 

4,090

 

7,105

 

293

 

11,831

 

12,388

Loans by asset quality (2,3)

 

165,081

 

4,216

 

9,578

 

178,875

 

36,707

 

72,240

 

25,011

 

6,967

 

140,925

 

319,800

- AQ1-AQ4

 

104,989

 

35

 

1,040

 

106,064

 

16,133

 

22,587

 

22,397

 

6,802

 

67,919

 

173,983

- AQ5-AQ8

 

55,139

 

3,990

 

7,736

 

66,865

 

18,815

 

47,651

 

2,574

 

161

 

69,201

 

136,066

- AQ9

 

1,287

 

69

 

239

 

1,595

 

74

 

359

 

5

 

 

438

 

2,033

- AQ10

 

3,666

 

122

 

563

 

4,351

 

1,685

 

1,643

 

35

 

4

 

3,367

 

7,718

Loans by stage

 

165,081

 

4,216

 

9,578

 

178,875

 

36,707

 

72,240

 

25,011

 

6,967

 

140,925

 

319,800

- Stage 1

 

149,760

 

2,851

 

6,942

 

159,553

 

33,145

 

61,844

 

24,502

 

6,941

 

126,432

 

285,985

- Stage 2

 

11,655

 

1,243

 

2,073

 

14,971

 

1,877

 

8,753

 

474

 

22

 

11,126

 

26,097

- Stage 3

 

3,666

 

122

 

563

 

4,351

 

1,685

 

1,643

 

35

 

4

 

3,367

 

7,718

Loans - past due analysis (4,5)

 

165,081

 

4,216

 

9,578

 

178,875

 

36,707

 

72,240

 

25,011

 

6,967

 

140,925

 

319,800

- Not past due

 

160,165

 

4,027

 

8,749

 

172,941

 

35,420

 

69,782

 

24,388

 

6,923

 

136,513

 

309,454

- Past due 1-29 days

 

1,714

 

69

 

180

 

1,963

 

270

 

1,397

 

604

 

42

 

2,313

 

4,276

- Past due 30-89 days

 

1,048

 

40

 

105

 

1,193

 

271

 

344

 

11

 

2

 

628

 

1,821

- Past due 90-180 days

 

632

 

29

 

69

 

730

 

56

 

83

 

1

 

 

140

 

870

- Past due >180 days

 

1,522

 

51

 

475

 

2,048

 

690

 

634

 

7

 

 

1,331

 

3,379

Loans - Stage 2

 

11,655

 

1,243

 

2,073

 

14,971

 

1,877

 

8,753

 

474

 

22

 

11,126

 

26,097

- Not past due

 

9,788

 

1,172

 

1,843

 

12,803

 

1,556

 

8,196

 

472

 

22

 

10,246

 

23,049

- Past due 1-29 days

 

1,126

 

43

 

133

 

1,302

 

68

 

244

 

1

 

 

313

 

1,615

- Past due 30-89 days

 

741

 

28

 

97

 

866

 

253

 

313

 

1

 

 

567

 

1,433

Weighted average life *

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- ECL measurement (years)

 

8

 

2

 

3

 

5

 

3

 

3

 

4

 

3

 

3

 

4

Weighted average 12 months PDs *

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- IFRS 9 (%)

 

0.32

 

4.03

 

2.77

 

0.54

 

0.75

 

0.97

 

0.14

 

0.06

 

0.75

 

0.62

- Basel (%)

 

0.84

 

3.52

 

3.50

 

1.04

 

0.95

 

1.43

 

0.23

 

0.06

 

1.01

 

1.03

ECL provisions by geography

 

839

 

230

 

728

 

1,797

 

588

 

941

 

41

 

1

 

1,571

 

3,368

- UK

 

237

 

227

 

707

 

1,171

 

518

 

615

 

27

 

1

 

1,161

 

2,332

- RoI

 

602

 

3

 

21

 

626

 

43

 

125

 

2

 

 

170

 

796

- Other Europe

 

 

 

 

 

22

 

53

 

10

 

 

85

 

85

- RoW

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

148

 

2

 

 

155

 

155

ECL provisions by stage

 

839

 

230

 

728

 

1,797

 

588

 

941

 

41

 

1

 

1,571

 

3,368

- Stage 1

 

23

 

38

 

61

 

122

 

43

 

107

 

12

 

1

 

163

 

285

- Stage 2

 

150

 

120

 

247

 

517

 

39

 

200

 

7

 

 

246

 

763

- Stage 3

 

666

 

72

 

420

 

1,158

 

506

 

634

 

22

 

 

1,162

 

2,320

ECL provisions coverage (%)

 

0.51

 

5.46

 

7.60

 

1.00

 

1.60

 

1.30

 

0.16

 

0.01

 

1.11

 

1.05

- Stage 1 (%)

 

0.02

 

1.33

 

0.88

 

0.08

 

0.13

 

0.17

 

0.05

 

0.01

 

0.13

 

0.10

- Stage 2 (%)

 

1.29

 

9.65

 

11.92

 

3.45

 

2.08

 

2.28

 

1.48

 

 

2.21

 

2.92

- Stage 3 (%)

 

18.17

 

59.02

 

74.60

 

26.61

 

30.03

 

38.59

 

62.86

 

 

34.51

 

30.06

ECL charge

 

57

 

87

 

210

 

354

 

30

 

13

 

3

 

(2

)

44

 

398

- UK

 

38

 

88

 

207

 

333

 

31

 

9

 

6

 

(2

)

44

 

377

- RoI

 

19

 

(1

)

3

 

21

 

(1

)

(3

)

(1

)

 

(5

)

16

- Other Europe

 

 

 

 

 

 

8

 

(2

)

 

6

 

6

- RoW

 

 

 

 

 

 

(1

)

 

 

(1

)

(1)

ECL loss rate (%)

 

0.03

 

2.06

 

2.19

 

0.20

 

0.08

 

0.02

 

0.01

 

(0.03

)

0.03

 

0.12

Amounts written-off

 

368

 

79

 

329

 

776

 

292

 

395

 

31

 

 

718

 

1,494

 

* Not within audit scope.

 

For the notes to this table refer to the following page.

 

138


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – sector analysis (audited)

 

 

 

Personal

 

Wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Mortgages

 

cards

 

personal

 

Total

 

Property

 

Corporate

 

FI

 

Sovereign

 

Total

 

Total

 

Fixed

 

Variable

31 December 2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Loans by residual maturity

 

165,081

 

4,216

 

9,578

 

178,875

 

36,707

 

72,240

 

25,011

 

6,967

 

140,925

 

319,800

 

152,557

 

167,243

- <1yr

 

11,244

 

919

 

4,960

 

17,123

 

9,533

 

29,788

 

17,602

 

6,362

 

63,285

 

80,408

 

20,534

 

59,874

- 1-5yr

 

35,184

 

3,297

 

3,816

 

42,297

 

18,797

 

30,772

 

6,167

 

245

 

55,981

 

98,278

 

34,250

 

64,028

- 5yr

 

118,653

 

 

802

 

119,455

 

8,377

 

11,680

 

1,242

 

360

 

21,659

 

141,114

 

97,773

 

43,341

Other financial assets by asset quality (2)

 

 

 

 

 

105

 

652

 

8,838

 

134,546

 

144,141

 

144,141

 

 

 

 

- AQ1-AQ4

 

 

 

 

 

105

 

10

 

8,110

 

134,546

 

142,771

 

142,771

 

 

 

 

- AQ5-AQ8

 

 

 

 

 

 

642

 

721

 

 

1,363

 

1,363

 

 

 

 

- AQ9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4

 

 

4

 

4

 

 

 

 

- AQ10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3

 

 

3

 

3

 

 

 

 

Off-balance sheet

 

13,228

 

16,613

 

12,229

 

42,070

 

16,044

 

52,730

 

28,761

 

29,277

 

126,812

 

168,882

 

 

 

 

- Loan commitments

 

13,228

 

16,613

 

12,229

 

42,070

 

15,335

 

48,569

 

26,684

 

29,276

 

119,864

 

161,934

 

 

 

 

- Financial guarantees

 

 

 

 

 

709

 

4,161

 

2,077

 

1

 

6,948

 

6,948

 

 

 

 

Off-balance sheet by asset quality (2)

 

13,228

 

16,613

 

12,229

 

42,070

 

16,044

 

52,730

 

28,761

 

29,277

 

126,812

 

168,882

 

 

 

 

- AQ1-AQ4

 

12,116

 

422

 

9,103

 

21,641

 

11,945

 

36,134

 

27,364

 

29,262

 

104,705

 

126,346

 

 

 

 

- AQ5-AQ8

 

1,101

 

15,900

 

3,116

 

20,117

 

3,928

 

16,390

 

1,397

 

15

 

21,730

 

41,847

 

 

 

 

- AQ9

 

1

 

8

 

10

 

19

 

6

 

46

 

 

 

52

 

71

 

 

 

 

- AQ10

 

10

 

283

 

 

293

 

165

 

160

 

 

 

325

 

618

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total IFRS 9 credit risk exposure by stage

 

 

 

 

Total credit

 

 

 

Stage 2 (2,3)

 

 

 

ECL

 

 

exposure

 

Stage 1

 

<30 DPD

 

>30 DPD

 

Total

 

Stage 3

 

provisions

1 January 2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Personal

 

177,196

 

155,843

 

14,460

 

625

 

15,085

 

6,268

 

2,316

UK mortgages

 

146,556

 

134,350

 

10,119

 

431

 

10,550

 

1,656

 

262

RoI mortgages

 

15,549

 

10,674

 

1,351

 

127

 

1,478

 

3,397

 

961

Credit cards

 

4,247

 

3,097

 

999

 

11

 

1,010

 

140

 

222

Other personal (6)

 

10,844

 

7,722

 

1,991

 

56

 

2,047

 

1,075

 

871

Wholesale

 

194,988

 

178,086

 

11,500

 

387

 

11,887

 

5,015

 

2,131

Property

 

37,877

 

33,884

 

1,942

 

87

 

2,029

 

1,964

 

685

Corporate

 

73,667

 

62,253

 

8,224

 

245

 

8,469

 

2,945

 

1,325

Financial institutions

 

34,064

 

32,923

 

981

 

55

 

1,036

 

105

 

115

Sovereign

 

49,380

 

49,026

 

353

 

 

353

 

1

 

6

Total financial assets excluding balances at central banks

 

372,184

 

333,929

 

25,960

 

1,012

 

26,972

 

11,283

 

4,447

Balances at central banks

 

96,571

 

96,566

 

5

 

 

5

 

 

1

Total financial assets

 

468,755

 

430,495

 

25,965

 

1,012

 

26,977

 

11,283

 

4,448

Total contingent liabilities and commitments

 

146,800

 

139,550

 

6,388

 

113

 

6,501

 

749

 

 

Total exposure

 

615,555

 

570,045

 

32,353

 

1,125

 

33,478

 

12,032

 

 

Financial assets - asset quality (2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- AQ1-AQ4

 

230,773

 

223,789

 

6,883

 

101

 

6,984

 

 

 

- AQ5-AQ8

 

128,814

 

109,962

 

17,449

 

660

 

18,109

 

743

 

 

- AQ9

 

2,912

 

178

 

1,628

 

251

 

1,879

 

855

 

 

- AQ10 (3)

 

9,685

 

 

 

 

 

9,685

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)           At 31 December 2018, Mortgages include £0.7 billion secured lending in Private Banking, in line with ECL calculation methodology.

(2)           AQ bandings are based on Basel PDs.

(3)           At 31 December 2018, AQ10 includes £0.6 billion (31 December 2017 – £0.7 billion) RoI mortgages which are not currently considered defaulted for capital calculation purposes for RoI but included in Stage 3.

(4)           30 DPD – 30 days past due, the mandatory 30 days past due backstop as prescribed by the IFRS 9 guidance for significant increase in credit risk.

(5)           Days past due – Personal products: at a high level, for amortising products, the number of days past due is derived from the arrears amount outstanding and the monthly repayment instalment. For credit cards, it is based on payments missed, and for current accounts the number of continual days in excess of borrowing limit. Wholesale products: the number of days past due for all products is the number of continual days in excess of borrowing limit.

(6)           At 1 January 2018, mortgages other than UK and RoI were reported within other personal but at 31 December 2018 they are reported separately.

 

139


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – sector analysis (audited)

Wholesale forbearance

The table below summarises Wholesale forbearance, Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss by sector. Personal forbearance is disclosed on page 144.

 

 

FI

Property

Sovereigns

Other corporate

Total

2018 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Forbearance (flow)

14

305

2,247

2,566

Forbearance (stock)

15

477

2,756

3,248

Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss

100

503

16

4,145

4,764

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

Forbearance (flow)

11

417

1,473

1,901

Forbearance (stock)

14

764

3,067

3,845

Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss

144

739

4,183

5,066

 

Risk elements in lending (restated: see Note 4 for details)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The table below summarises risk elements in lending by segment on an IAS 39 basis.

 

 

 

 

Ulster

 

 

 

 

Central

 

 

UK

Bank

Commercial

Private

RBS

NatWest

items

 

 

PB

RoI

Banking

Banking

International

Markets

& other

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

At 1 January 2017

1,975

3,513

2,343

105

109

2,264

1

10,310

Inter segment transfers

(163)

1,547

(1,384)

Currency translation and other adjustments

123

5

(86)

1

43

Additions

945

550

1,872

28

62

98

14

3,569

Transfers between REIL and potential problem loans

(153)

11

(2)

7

8

(129)

Transfer to performing book

(263)

(336)

(314)

(33)

(12)

(1)

(959)

Repayments and disposals

(373)

(444)

(1,349)

(32)

(41)

(468)

(13)

(2,720)

Amounts written-off

(425)

(124)

(482)

(4)

(6)

(167)

(2)

(1,210)

At 31 December 2017

1,543

3,282

3,628

95

103

253

8,904

 

 

Provisions (restated: see Note 4 for details)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The table below summarises provisions by segment on an IAS 39 basis.

 

 

Ulster

 

 

 

 

Central

 

 

UK

Bank

Commercial

Private

RBS

NatWest

items

 

 

PB

RoI

Banking

Banking

International

Markets

& other

Total

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

£m 

At 1 January 2017

1,230

1,200

1,152

31

38

803

1

4,455

Inter segment transfers

(110)

403

(293)

Currency translation and other adjustments

8

(7)

(27)

(26)

Repayments and disposals

(5)

(5)

Amounts written-off

(424)

(124)

(483)

(4)

(6)

(167)

(2)

(1,210)

Recoveries of amounts previously written-off

114

12

19

1

10

156

Charges/(releases) to income statement

207

60

390

6

3

(137)

1

530

Unwind of discount

(31)

(25)

(18)

(1)

(1)

(10)

(86)

At 31 December 2017

986

1,131

1,456

32

35

174

3,814

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

140


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – sector analysis (audited)

Key points

·       Geography – The majority of exposures in both the Personal and Wholesale portfolios were in the UK and the Republic of Ireland. Other exposures in Europe and the Rest of the World were mainly Wholesale. Mortgages, the vast majority of which are in the UK, accounted for more than half of the total exposure.

·       Asset quality – Measured against RBS’s asset quality scale, 54% of lending exposure was rated in the AQ1-AQ4 bands at 31 December 2018. This equated to an indicative investment rating of BBB- or above. Specifically 59% of Personal and 48% of Wholesale lending exposure were in the AQ1-AQ4 category respectively.

·       Loans by stage – 90% of exposures were in Stage 1, with 8% in Stage 2 significantly credit deteriorated. Stage 3 assets, which align to AQ10, represented 2% of total exposures. In line with expectations, the Personal portfolio had a higher proportion of unsecured lending assets in Stage 2 than the mortgage portfolio. In the Wholesale portfolio, the proportion of assets in Stage 2 was slightly lower than in Personal overall.

·       Loans – Past due analysis – Stage 2: the vast majority of assets overall were not past due, with the Stage 2 classification driven primarily by changes in lifetime PD. (For further detail, refer to the Significant increase in credit risk section). In mortgages, the majority of assets past due by more than 180 days were in Ulster Bank RoI reflecting the legacy mortgage portfolio and the residual effects from the financial crisis. In other personal, the relatively high rate of exposures past due by more than 90 days reflected the fact that impaired assets can be held on balance sheet with commensurate ECL provision for up to six years after default. Similarly in the Wholesale portfolio, impaired assets can be held on the balance sheet for a significant period of time while restructuring and recovery processes are concluded.

·       Weighted average 12 months PDs – In Wholesale, Basel PDs, which are based on a through-the-cycle approach, tend to be higher than point-in-time best estimate IFRS 9 PDs, reflecting the current state in the economic cycle, and also an element of conservatism in the regulatory capital framework. In Personal, the Basel PDs, which are point-in-time estimates, tend to be higher also reflecting conservatism, higher in mortgages than other products, and an element of default rate under-prediction in the IFRS 9 PD models. This has been mitigated by ECL overlays of approximately £60 million at the year end, pending model calibrations being implemented. The IFRS 9 PD for credit cards was higher than the Basel equivalent and reflected the relative sensitivity of the IFRS 9 model to forward-looking economic drivers.

·       ECL provision by geography – In line with exposures by geography, the weight of ECL related to exposures in the UK and the Republic of Ireland. The ECL in RoI was mainly Stage 3 provisions in the legacy Ulster Bank RoI mortgage portfolio.

·       ECL provision by stage and coverage – The weight of ECL by value was in Stage 3 impaired, with similar seen in both Personal and Wholesale. Provision coverage was progressively higher by stage reflecting the lifetime nature of losses in both Stage 2 and Stage 3. In the Personal portfolio, provision coverage was materially lower in mortgages relative to credit cards and other personal reflecting the secured nature of the facilities. For Wholesale exposures, security and enterprise value mitigated against losses in Stage 3.

·       The ECL charge for the year was £398 million. This reflected the relatively stable external environment.

·       Other financial assets by asset qualityConsisting almost entirely of cash and balances at central banks and debt securities, these assets were mainly within the AQ1-AQ4 category.

·       Off-balance sheet exposures by asset quality – For Personal exposures, undrawn exposures are reflective of available credit lines in credit cards and current accounts. Additionally, the mortgage portfolio had undrawn exposure, where a formal offer has been made to a customer but has not yet been drawn down. There is also a legacy portfolio of flexible mortgages where a customer has the right and ability to draw down further funds. The asset quality distribution in mortgages is heavily weighted to the highest quality bands AQ1-AQ4, with credit card concentrated in the risk bands AQ5-AQ8. In Wholesale, 83% of undrawn exposure, relating mainly to loan commitments, was in the AQ1-AQ4 category.

·       Forbearance – Completed forbearance flow in 2018 for Wholesale was £2.6 billion compared to £1.9 billion in 2017. Forbearance granted in the transport sector increased to £493 million from £54 million, mainly driven by a customer which has been restructured and moved to Stage 2 from Stage 3 during the year. Forbearance across the diverse services sector increased from £347 million to £763 million. Of the forbearance that completed during the year, £1.1 billion related to payment concessions (2017 – £1.4 billion) and £1.4 billion related to non-payment concessions (2017 – £0.5 billion). Forbearance stock reduced by £0.6 billion, from £3.8 billion to £3.2 billion, driven by a decrease in forborne exposure in the energy and resources, property and retail and leisure sectors.

·       Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss – Exposure decreased from £5.1 billion at 31 December 2017, to £4.8 billion at 31 December 2018. There was also a decrease in the number of customers classified as Heightened Monitoring and Risk of Credit Loss during the year. Despite the current economic uncertainty in the UK, the portfolio has remained stable.

 

141


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Portfolio summary – sector analysis (audited)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The table below summarises both current and potential exposure by geographical region on an IAS 39 basis.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Wholesale (1)

 

 

 

Wholesale (1)

 

 

 

Banks and

 

 

Current

 

 

Banks and

 

 

 

Total

 

Personal

other FI’s

Sovereigns (2)

Other

exposure

 

Personal

other FI’s

Sovereigns (2)

Other

Total

exposure

2017 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

%

%

%

%

%

£m

UK

158,965

17,992

91,161

94,896

363,014

 

33

4

19

20

76

413,378

RoI

15,319

751

2,416

4,612

23,098

 

3

1

1

5

24,502

Other Western Europe

514

7,504

43,414

8,559

59,991

 

2

9

2

13

86,866

US

377

6,987

8,430

2,580

18,374

 

1

2

1

4

31,497

RoW (3)

1,461

4,575

2,155

3,144

11,335

 

1

1

2

14,602

 

176,636

37,809

147,576

113,791

475,812

 

36

8

31

25

100

570,845

 

Notes:

(1)      Includes SME customers managed in Commercial Banking who are assigned a sector under RBS’s sector concentration framework.

(2)      Includes exposures to central governments, central banks and sub-sovereigns such as local authorities.

(3)  Rest of world (RoW) also includes supranationals such as the World Bank and exposure relating to ocean-going vessels which cannot be meaningfully assigned to specific countries from a country risk perspective.

 

Loan asset quality

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The table below summarises asset quality and impairments by banks and customers on an IAS 39 basis.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Impairment

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

AQ5-AQ8

AQ9

AQ10

Past due

Impaired

provision

Total

2017 

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

Banks

27.7

2.6

30.3

Customers

226.8

109.6

2.8

0.7

6.4

7.4

(3.8)

349.9

 

Loan sector concentration

The table below summarises gross loans to banks and customers (excluding reverse repos) and related credit metrics by sector, on an IAS 39 basis.

 

 

 

 

 

Credit metrics

 

 

 

 

 

REIL

Provisions

Provisions

Impairment

 

 

Gross

 

 

as a % of

as a %

as a % of

losses/

Amounts

2017 

loans

REIL

Provisions

gross loans

of REIL

gross loans

(releases)

written-off

£m

£m

£m

%

%

%

£m

£m

Central and local government

4,684

Finance

30,832

54

44

0.2

81

0.1

3

7

Personal - mortgage (1)

163,010

3,876

994

2.4

26

0.6

50

87

               - unsecured

14,587

937

763

6.4

81

5.2

235

424

Property

33,381

1,119

283

3.4

25

0.8

(82)

133

Construction

3,798

426

298

11.2

70

7.8

196

36

Of which: commercial real estate

24,784

1,189

293

4.8

25

1.2

(76)

139

Manufacturing

8,862

147

64

1.7

44

0.7

4

25

Finance leases and instalment credit

12,019

170

88

1.4

52

0.7

23

14

Retail, wholesale and repairs

12,300

446

193

3.6

43

1.6

93

81

Transport and storage

4,241

700

195

16.5

28

4.6

(32)

165

Health, education and leisure

11,337

330

145

2.9

44

1.3

65

48

Hotels and restaurants

6,049

193

80

3.2

41

1.3

17

46

Utilities

4,172

35

21

0.8

60

0.5

(18)

13

Other

17,726

471

256

2.7

54

1.4

(10)

131

Latent

390

(14)

Total customer

326,998

8,904

3,814

2.7

43

1.2

530

1,210

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total banks

16,264

 

Note:

(1)             Mortgages are reported in sectors other than personal mortgages by certain businesses based on the nature of the relationship with the customer.

 

Past due analysis

 

 

 

 

 

The table below summarises loans – amortised cost to customers that were past due at the balance sheet date but were not considered impaired.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

2017 

Number of days

 

£m

 

By sector

£m

Past due 1-29 days

 

3,535

 

Personal

3,731

Past due 30-59 days

 

902

 

Property and construction

667

Past due 60-89 days

 

456

 

Financial institution

24

Past due 90 days or more

 

1,481

 

Other corporate

1,952

 

 

6,374

 

 

6,374

 

142


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Credit risk enhancement and mitigation (audited)

The table below summarises exposures of modelled portfolios within the scope of the ECL framework and related credit risk enhancement and mitigation (CREM). Excluded from this analysis are the non modelled portfolios, primarily Private Banking and RBSI mortgage portfolios, which are discussed in the Personal – portfolio section, including loan-to-value ratios. Refer to Policy elections and simplifications relating to IFRS 9 section for details on non-modelled portfolios.

 

 

 

Gross

 

Maximum credit risk

 

CREM by type

 

CREM coverage

 

Exposure post CREM

 

exposure

ECL

Total

 Stage 3

 

Financial (1)

Property

Other (2)

 

Total

Stage 3

 

Total

Stage 3

2018 

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

 

£bn

£bn

£bn

 

£bn

£bn

 

£bn

£bn

Financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

87.2

87.2

 

 

 

87.2

Loans - amortised cost (3)

302.6

3.2

299.4

5.0

 

4.1

188.1

19.7

 

211.9

4.5

 

87.5

0.5

  Personal (4)

164.6

1.7

162.9

2.9

 

151.7

 

151.7

2.7

 

11.2

0.2

  Wholesale (5)

138.0

1.5

136.5

2.1

 

4.1

36.4

19.7

 

60.2

1.8

 

76.3

0.3

Debt securities

57.0

57.0

 

 

 

57.0

Total financial assets

446.8

3.2

443.6

5.0

 

4.1

188.1

19.7

 

211.9

4.5

 

231.7

0.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Personal (6)

31.0

31.0

0.3

 

4.9

 

4.9

 

26.1

0.3

  Wholesale

126.2

126.2

0.3

 

0.6

5.9

6.1

 

12.6

 

113.6

0.3

Total off balance sheet

157.2

157.2

0.6

 

0.6

10.8

6.1

 

17.5

 

139.7

0.6

Total exposure

604.0

3.2

600.8

5.6

 

4.7

198.9

25.8

 

229.4

4.5

 

371.4

1.1

 

Notes:

(1)     Financial collateral includes cash and securities collateral.

(2)     Other collateral includes guarantees, charges over trade debtors as well as the amount by which credit risk exposure is reduced through netting arrangements, mainly cash management pooling, which give RBS a legal right to set off the financial asset against a financial liability due to the same counterparty.

(3)     RBS holds collateral in respect of individual loans – amortised cost to banks and customers. This collateral includes mortgages over property (both personal and commercial); charges over business assets such as plant and equipment, inventories and trade debtors; and guarantees of lending from parties other than the borrower. RBS obtains collateral in the form of securities in reverse repurchase agreements. Collateral values are capped at the value of the loan.

(4)     On personal, Stage 3 mortgage exposures have relatively limited uncovered exposure reflecting the security held. On unsecured credit cards and other personal borrowing, the residual uncovered amount reflects historical experience of continued cash recovery post default through on-going engagement with customers.

(5)     Stage 3 exposures post credit risk enhancement and mitigation in wholesale mainly represent enterprise value and the impact of written down collateral values; an individual assessment to determine ECL will consider multiple scenarios and in some instances allocate a probability weighting to a collateral value in excess of the written down value.

(6)     At 31 December 2018, £0.3 billion personal Stage 3 balances primarily relate to loan commitments, the draw down of which is effectively prohibited.

 

The table below summarises financial asset exposures, both gross and net of offset arrangements, as well as credit mitigation and enhancement.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Exposure

 

 

 

 

 

Collateral (1)

 

 

post credit

 

Gross

IFRS

Carrying

Balance sheet

 

 

Real estate and other

Credit

 

mitigation and

 

exposure

offset (5)

value (6)

offset (7)

Cash (2)

Securities (3)

Residential (4)

Commercial (4)

enhancement (8)

 

enhancement

2017 

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

 

£bn

Cash and balances at central banks

98.4

98.4

 

98.4

Trading assets

118.6

(32.6)

86.0

(0.3)

(32.5)

 

53.2

Derivatives

177.9

(17.1)

160.8

(128.3)

(20.3)

(5.9)

(6.3)

 

Settlement balances

3.2

(0.7)

2.5

 

2.5

Loans - amortised cost

334.1

(12.5)

321.6

(27.9)

(0.9)

(11.2)

(174.2)

(45.0)

(2.1)

 

60.3

Other financial assets

52.0

52.0

(0.1)

 

51.9

Total third party gross of short positions

784.2

(62.9)

721.3

(156.5)

(21.2)

(49.6)

(174.2)

(45.1)

(8.4)

 

266.3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Short positions

(28.5)

(28.5)

 

(28.5)

Net of short positions

755.7

(62.9)

692.8

(156.5)

(21.2)

(49.6)

(174.2)

(45.1)

(8.4)

 

237.8

 

Notes:

(1)             RBS holds collateral in respect of individual loans. This collateral includes mortgages over property (both personal and commercial); charges over business assets such as plant, inventories and trade debtors; and guarantees of lending from parties other than the borrower. RBS obtains collateral in the form of securities in reverse repurchase agreements. Cash and securities are received as collateral in respect of derivative transactions.

(2)             Includes cash collateral pledged by counterparties based on daily mark-to-market movements of net derivative positions with the counterparty.

(3)             Represent the fair value of securities received from counterparties, mainly relating to reverse repo transactions as part of netting arrangements.

(4)             Property valuations are capped at the loan value and reflect the application of haircuts in line with regulatory rules to indexed valuations. Commercial collateral includes ships and plan and equipment collateral.

(5)             Relates to offset arrangements that comply with IFRS criteria and transactions cleared through and novated to central clearing houses, primarily London Clearing House (LCH) and US Government Securities Clearing Corporation. During 2017 changes in the legal contracts with LCH and CME led to many derivatives cleared through that counterparty being settled to market each day rather than being collateralised as previously. This led to the derecognition of the associated assets and liabilities.

(6)             The carrying value on the balance sheet represents the maximum exposure to credit risk by class of financial instrument.

(7)             The amount by which credit risk exposure is reduced through arrangements, such as master netting agreements and cash management pooling, which give RBS a legal right to set off the financial asset against a financial liability due to the same counterparty.

(8)             Comprises credit derivatives (bought protection) and guarantees against exposures.

 

143


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Personal portfolio (audited)

Disclosures in the Personal portfolio section include drawn exposure (gross of provisions). Loan-to-value (LTV) ratios are split by stage under IFRS 9 at 31 December 2018 and by performing and non-performing status under IAS 39 at 31 December 2017.

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

UK

Ulster

Private

 

 

 

UK

Ulster

Private

 

 

Personal lending

PB

Bank RoI

Banking

RBSI

Total

 

PB

Bank RoI

Banking

RBSI

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Mortgages

138,250

14,361

9,082

2,684

164,377

 

136,625

15,352

8,421

2,745

163,143

Of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Owner occupied

122,642

13,105

7,953

1,781

145,481

 

118,764

13,455

7,275

1,821

141,315

  Buy-to-let

15,608

1,256

1,129

903

18,896

 

17,861

1,897

1,146

924

21,828

  Interest only - variable

8,358

188

3,871

489

12,906

 

11,245

260

4,076

636

16,217

  Interest only - fixed

12,229

12

3,636

187

16,064

 

12,584

8

2,866

96

15,554

  Mixed (1)

6,036

68

2

18

6,124

 

6,039

79

2

20

6,140

  Impairment provisions (2)

212

602

5

16

835

 

153

909

7

27

1,096

Other personal lending (3)

11,633

330

1,676

55

13,694

 

11,080

348

1,701

65

13,194

Impairment provisions (2)

909

25

19

1

954

 

833

44

19

2

898

Total personal lending

149,883

14,691

10,758

2,739

178,071

 

147,705

15,700

10,122

2,810

176,337

Mortgage LTV ratios

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - Total portfolio

56%

62%

56%

58%

57%

 

56%

69%

55%

58%

57%

    - Stage 1

56%

58%

56%

57%

56%

 

56%

65%

55%

56%

57%

    - Stage 2

58%

67%

58%

55%

59%

 

    - Stage 3

55%

77%

58%

99%

69%

 

57%

88%

59%

122%

78%

  - Buy-to-let

53%

64%

53%

53%

54%

 

54%

75%

54%

50%

56%

    - Stage 1

53%

58%

53%

52%

53%

 

 

 

 

 

 

    - Stage 2

57%

72%

53%

57%

60%

 

 

 

 

 

 

    - Stage 3

58%

78%

68%

75%

71%

 

 

 

 

 

 

Gross new mortgage lending

29,555

1,015

1,846

353

32,769

 

30,314

890

2,243

481

33,928

of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Owner occupied

28,608

1,004

1,689

241

31,542

 

28,504

875

1,904

319

31,602

Weighted average LTV

69%

73%

62%

68%

69%

 

70%

75%

63%

70%

70%

Buy-to-let

947

11

157

112

1,227

 

1,810

15

339

162

2,326

Weighted average LTV

61%

57%

55%

61%

60%

 

62%

57%

56%

62%

61%

Interest only - variable rate

43

697

13

753

 

335

6

902

39

1,282

Interest only - fixed rate

1,189

764

43

1,996

 

1,835

1

874

48

2,758

Mixed (1)

912

1

913

 

893

893

Mortgage forbearance (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Forbearance flow

446

210

11

 

667

 

440

201

31

5

677

Forbearance stock

1,338

2,645

8

 

3,991

 

1,384

3,893

7

25

5,309

  Current

724

1,291

6

 

2,021

 

834

1,779

6

12

2,631

  1-3 months in arrears

350

261

 

611

 

304

466

2

772

  > 3 months in arrears

264

1,093

2

 

1,359

 

246

1,648

1

11

1,906

 

Notes:

(1)             Includes accounts which have an interest only sub-account and a capital and interest sub-account to provide a more comprehensive view of interest only exposures.

(2)             31 December 2018 data was prepared under IFRS 9. 31 December 2017 data was prepared under IAS 39. For UK PB this excludes a non-material amount of provisions held on relatively small legacy portfolios.

(3)             Excludes loans that are commercial in nature, for example loans guaranteed by a company and commercial real estate lending to Personal customers.

(4)             The reduction in RBSI forbearance is due to reclassification.

 

144


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Key points

 

·          OverallThe overall credit risk profile of the Personal portfolio, and its performance against credit risk appetite, remained stable during 2018.

 

·          Total lendingTotal mortgage lending grew by £1.2 billion with new lending partly offset by redemptions and repayments.

 

·          New mortgage lending was lower than 2017. Existing mortgage stock and new business were closely monitored against agreed risk appetite parameters. These included loan-to-value ratios, buy-to-let concentrations, new-build concentrations and credit quality. Underwriting standards were maintained during the period.

 

·          Owner occupied and buy-to-letMost of the mortgage growth was in the owner-occupied portfolio. New mortgages in the buy-to-let portfolio remained subdued.

 

·          LTVs The mortgage portfolio loan-to-value ratio remained stable. The improvement in Ulster Bank RoI reflected house price recovery and the disposal of a portfolio of mortgages during the year, which also contributed to the reduction in the level of exposures in Stage 3.

 

·          Interest onlyBy value, the proportion of mortgages on interest only and mixed terms (capital and interest only) reduced, driven by fewer buy-to-let mortgages.

 

·          Regional mortgage analysis – For UK PB, 42% of mortgage lending was in Greater London and the South East (31 December 2017 – 43%). The level of exposure in this region remained broadly unchanged, reflecting lower demand for buy-to-let properties as well as mortgage redemptions. The weighted average loan-to-value for these regions was 52% (31 December 2017 — 51%) compared to an average of 56%.

 

·          Interest rate profile As at 31 December 2018, 81% of customers in the UK PB mortgage portfolio were on fixed rates (42% on five-year deals). In addition, 97% of all new mortgage completions in 2018 were fixed rate mortgages (62% of which were five-year mortgages), as customers sought to minimise the impact of potential rate rises.

 

·          Provisions – As expected, total ECL – including ECL for unsecured lending – generally increased under the IFRS 9 methodology compared to provisions calculated under IAS 39. The reduction in Ulster Bank RoI mortgage provisions was driven by a sale of legacy impaired debt.

 

·          Other lending Total unsecured lending grew modestly in 2018, driven by growth in the PB personal loan portfolio. Overdraft balances have shown a modest decline year-on-year.

 

·          Other lending asset quality Unsecured credit quality remained stable, reflecting active portfolio management. Credit standards and controls were tightened across all three unsecured products to ensure that higher risk customer performance remained within risk appetite.

 

Personal portfolio (audited)

Mortgage LTV distribution by stage

The table below summarises gross mortgage lending and related ECL by LTV band. Mortgage lending not within the scope of IFRS 9 ECL reflected portfolios carried at fair value.

 

 

Mortgages

 

ECL

 

ECL provisions coverage (2)

 

 

 

 

Not within

 

Of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK PB

 

 

 

IFRS 9 ECL

 

gross new

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

scope

Total

lending

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total (1)

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

2018 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

%

%

%

%

≤50%

47,111

3,423

516

153

51,203

4,779

 

2

16

64

82

 

0.5

12.4

0.2

>50% and ≤70%

44,037

3,632

459

49

48,177

8,535

 

2

23

39

64

 

0.6

8.5

0.1

>70% and ≤80%

20,345

1,490

135

15

21,985

7,434

 

1

11

11

23

 

0.7

8.1

0.1

>80% and ≤90%

12,733

1,118

81

12

13,944

7,524

 

2

12

8

22

 

1.1

10.0

0.2

>90% and ≤100%

2,343

178

24

7

2,552

1,104

 

1

4

3

8

 

2.4

12.1

0.3

>100% and ≤110%

57

35

8

1

101

 

2

1

3

 

0.1

4.6

14.1

2.8

>110% and ≤130%

53

41

9

2

105

 

2

1

3

 

0.1

5.4

14.6

3.4

>130% and ≤150%

23

23

6

52

 

1

1

2

 

0.1

6.2

13.4

4.3

>150%

3

9

3

15

 

1

1

2

 

0.1

6.2

17.3

7.2

Total with LTVs

126,705

9,949

1,241

239

138,134

29,376

 

8

72

129

209

 

0.7

10.4

0.2

Other

96

13

4

3

116

179

 

1

2

3

 

4.7

53.5

2.6

Total

126,801

9,962

1,245

242

138,250

29,555

 

8

73

131

212

 

0.7

10.5

0.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non-

 

gross new

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performing

performing

Total

lending

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

≤50%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

50,583

527

51,110

4,593

>50% and ≤70%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

47,361

505

47,866

8,310

>70% and ≤80%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

20,514

150

20,664

7,709

>80% and ≤90%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

13,409

87

13,496

8,239

>90% and ≤100%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,559

36

2,595

1,285

>100% and ≤110%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

130

14

144

1

>110% and ≤130%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

114

10

124

1

>130% and ≤150%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

58

5

63

>150%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

25

8

33

1

Total with LTVs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

134,753

1,342

136,095

30,139

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

512

18

530

175

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

135,265

1,360

136,625

30,314

 

For the notes to this table refer to the following page.

 

145


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Personal portfolio (audited)

Mortgage LTV distribution by stage

 

 

Mortgages

 

 

 

ECL provisions

 

ECL provisions coverage (2)

Ulster Bank RoI

 

 

 

Not within

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

IFRS 9 ECL

Total

 

 

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

2018 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

 

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

%

%

%

%

≤50%

3,818

374

463

4,655

 

 

 

1

5

40

46

 

1.4

8.6

1.0

>50% and ≤70%

3,567

365

459

4,391

 

 

 

2

10

47

59

 

2.7

10.3

1.3

>70% and ≤80%

1,564

190

241

1,995

 

 

 

1

11

52

64

 

0.1

5.5

21.5

3.2

>80% and ≤90%

1,059

184

272

1,515

 

 

 

2

15

82

99

 

0.2

8.3

30.2

6.5

>90% and ≤100%

570

154

261

985

 

 

 

2

17

99

118

 

0.4

11.1

37.7

11.9

>100% and ≤110%

197

80

207

484

 

 

 

2

10

85

97

 

0.9

12.8

41.1

20.1

>110% and ≤130%

51

35

179

265

 

 

 

6

84

90

 

0.8

16.6

47.0

34.0

>130% and ≤150%

5

5

37

47

 

 

 

1

20

21

 

0.3

19.1

54.7

45.2

>150%

10

1

13

24

 

 

 

1

7

8

 

2.1

27.2

58.9

33.5

Total with LTVs

10,841

1,388

2,132

14,361

 

 

 

10

76

516

602

 

0.1

5.4

24.2

4.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Performing

Non-performing

Total

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

£m

 

£m

£m

≤50%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,743

 

333

4,076

>50% and ≤70%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,600

 

382

3,982

>70% and ≤80%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,858

 

233

2,091

>80% and ≤90%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,420

 

273

1,693

>90% and ≤100%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,070

 

309

1,379

>100% and ≤110%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

814

 

317

1,131

>110% and ≤130%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

378

 

414

792

>130% and ≤150%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

20

 

126

146

>150%

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

23

 

39

62

Total with LTVs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12,926

 

2,426

15,352

 

Notes:

(1)

Excludes a non-material amount of provisions held on relatively small legacy portfolios.

(2)

ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by drawn exposure.

 

 

Key point

·          ECL coverage rates increase through the LTV bands with both UK PB and Ulster Bank RoI having only limited exposures in the highest LTV bands. The relatively high coverage level in the lowest LTV band for UK PB included the effect of time-discounting on expected recoveries. Additionally, this also reflected the modelling approach that recognised an element of expected loss on mortgages that are not subject to formal repossession activity.

 

146


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk Banking activities continued

Personal portfolio (audited)

UK PB Mortgage LTV distribution by region

 

 

 

50%

80%

100%

 

 

Weighted

 

 

 

 

<50%

<80%

<100%

<150%

>150%

Total

average LTV

Other

Total

Total

2018 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

%

£m

£m

%

South East

14,699 

17,147 

2,843 

— 

34,697 

53 

27 

34,724 

25 

Greater London

12,928 

9,614 

1,298 

— 

23,843 

48 

19 

23,862 

17 

Scotland

3,205 

5,612 

1,844 

11 

— 

10,672 

60 

10,680 

North West

4,163 

7,756 

1,970 

— 

13,895 

59 

12 

13,907 

10 

South West

4,231 

6,843 

1,292 

— 

12,374 

57 

12,383 

West Midlands

3,036 

5,642 

1,192 

— 

9,874 

58 

9,881 

Rest of the UK

8,942 

17,548 

6,056 

217 

16 

32,779 

62 

34 

32,813 

24 

Total

51,204 

70,162 

16,495 

257 

16 

138,134 

56 

116 

138,250 

100 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

South East

14,606 

16,908 

2,729 

10 

— 

34,253 

53 

96 

34,349 

25 

Greater London

13,592 

9,900 

1,322 

— 

24,817 

48 

112 

24,929 

18 

Scotland

2,850 

5,341 

2,423 

45 

— 

10,659 

63 

34 

10,693 

North West

4,125 

7,510 

2,131 

11 

— 

13,777 

59 

63 

13,840 

10 

South West

4,181 

6,572 

1,055 

— 

11,817 

56 

40 

11,857 

West Midlands

2,578 

5,264 

1,503 

— 

9,351 

61 

42 

9,393 

Rest of the UK

9,175 

17,037 

4,929 

247 

33 

31,421 

60 

143 

31,564 

23 

Total

51,107 

68,532 

16,092 

331 

33 

136,095 

56 

530 

136,625 

100 

 

Commercial real estate (CRE)

The CRE portfolio comprises exposures to entities involved in the development of, or investment in, commercial and residential properties (including house builders but excluding housing associations, construction and building materials). The sector is reviewed regularly at senior executive committees. Reviews include portfolio credit quality, capital consumption and control frameworks. All disclosures in the CRE section are based on current exposure (gross of provisions and risk transfer). Current exposure is defined as: loans; the amount drawn under a credit facility plus accrued interest; contingent obligations; the issued amount of the guarantee or letter of credit; derivatives - the mark to market value, netted where netting agreements exist and net of legally enforceable collateral.

 

 

2018

 

2017

By geography and sub sector (1)

UK

RoI

Other

Total

 

UK

RoI

Other

Total

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

Investment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Residential (2)

4,426 

363 

54 

4,843 

 

4,319 

227 

39 

4,585 

Office (3)

2,889 

164 

651 

3,704 

 

3,055 

235 

600 

3,890 

Retail (4)

5,168 

40 

92 

5,300 

 

5,401 

42 

132 

5,575 

Industrial (5)

2,270 

51 

176 

2,497 

 

2,438 

36 

14 

2,488 

Mixed/other (6)

3,221 

180 

123 

3,524 

 

4,609 

203 

228 

5,040 

 

17,974 

798 

1,096 

19,868 

 

19,822 

743 

1,013 

21,578 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Development

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Residential (2)

2,715 

122 

124 

2,961 

 

3,107 

145 

154 

3,406 

Office (3)

192 

— 

— 

192 

 

169 

— 

— 

169 

Retail (4)

94 

102 

 

187 

194 

Industrial (5)

119 

12 

133 

 

49 

— 

— 

49 

Mixed/other (6)

32 

— 

34 

 

59 

— 

62 

 

3,152 

133 

137 

3,422 

 

3,571 

153 

156 

3,880 

Total

21,126 

931 

1,233 

23,290 

 

23,393 

896 

1,169 

25,458 

 

Notes:

(1)       Geographical splits are based on country of collateral risk.

(2)       Residential properties including houses, flats and student accommodation.

(3)       Office properties including offices in central business districts, regional headquarters and business parks.

(4)       Retail properties including high street retail, shopping centres, restaurants, bars and gyms.

(5)       Industrial properties including distribution centres, manufacturing and warehouses.

(6)       Mixed usage or other properties that do not fall within the other categories above. Mixed generally relates to a mixture of retail/office with residential.

 

147


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk Banking activities continued

Commercial real estate (CRE)

CRE LTV distribution by stage (audited)

The table below summarises CRE current exposure and related ECL by LTV band.

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

Current exposure (gross of provisions) (1,2)

 

ECL provisions

 

ECL provisions coverage (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Not within

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IFRS 9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non-

 

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

scope (3)

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

 

Performing

performing

Total

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

%

%

%

%

 

£m

£m

£m

<50%

8,229 

245 

52 

795 

9,321 

 

14 

25 

 

0.1 

1.7 

26.4 

0.3 

 

9,622 

66 

9,688 

>50% and <70%

4,769 

297 

78 

703 

5,847 

 

14 

26 

 

0.1 

2.0 

17.8 

0.5 

 

6,621 

119 

6,740 

>70% and <80%

394 

43 

33 

476 

 

10 

 

0.3 

2.6 

23.4 

2.1 

 

405 

52 

457 

>80% and <90%

55 

11 

24 

92 

 

— 

— 

 

0.3 

3.4 

20.9 

6.1 

 

158 

42 

200 

>90% and <100%

31 

20 

59 

 

— 

— 

 

0.6 

5.1 

34.9 

12.9 

 

89 

31 

120 

>100% and <110%

53 

15 

— 

72 

 

— 

— 

 

0.3 

4.2 

34.6 

7.6 

 

34 

21 

55 

>110% and <130%

22 

111 

140 

 

— 

— 

22 

22 

 

0.4 

5.4 

19.4 

16.0 

 

60 

421 

481 

>130% and <150%

10 

10 

— 

26 

 

— 

 

0.9 

6.3 

40.6 

18.1 

 

44 

29 

73 

>150%

30 

42 

— 

78 

 

— 

29 

30 

 

0.5 

9.8 

69.6 

38.1 

 

149 

72 

221 

Total with LTVs

13,589 

626 

385 

1,511 

16,111 

 

14 

13 

108 

135 

 

0.1 

2.1 

27.9 

0.9 

 

17,182 

853 

18,035 

Total portfolio  average LTV%

45 

56 

114 

48 

47 

 

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

 

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

 

48 

119 

51 

Other (5)

2,655 

133 

784 

185 

3,757 

 

50 

59 

 

0.2 

4.0 

6.3 

1.7 

 

3,112 

431 

3,543 

Development (6)

2,865 

205 

178 

174 

3,422 

 

11 

80 

94 

 

0.4 

1.6 

44.8 

2.9 

 

3,634 

246 

3,880 

Total

19,109 

964 

1,347 

1,870 

23,290 

 

29 

21 

238 

288 

 

0.2 

2.3 

17.6 

1.3 

 

23,928 

1,530 

25,458 

 

Notes:

(1)            CRE current exposure comprises gross lending, interest rate hedging derivatives and other assets carried at fair value that are managed as part of the overall CRE portfolio.

(2)            The exposure in Stage 3 mainly related to legacy assets.

(3)            Includes exposures relating to non-modelled portfolios and other exposures carried at fair value, including derivatives.

(4)            ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by current exposure.

(5)            Relates mainly to business banking, rate risk management products and unsecured corporate lending. The low Stage 3 ECL provisions coverage was driven by a single large exposure, which has been written down to the expected recoverable amount.

(6)            Relates to the development of commercial and residential properties. LTV is not a meaningful measure for this type of lending activity.

 

Key points (audited)

·       Overall – The majority of the CRE portfolio was managed in the UK within Commercial Banking, Private Banking and UK PB. The remainder was managed in Ulster Bank RoI and NatWest Markets. Business appetite and strategy remain aligned across the segments.

·       2018 trends – Growth in the commercial property market slowed during 2018.

·       Performance varied widely by sub-sector with strong growth from industrials contrasting with material decline in parts of the retail sector.

·       Credit quality – The CRE retail portfolio had a low default rate, with a limited number of new defaults. The sub-sector was monitored on a regular basis and credit quality was in line with the wider CRE portfolio.

·       Economics – Fundamentals such as rental incomes, property values and investor/occupier demand for other commercial sub-sectors appeared more robust, however, all are exposed to some degree to the risk of a disorderly exit from the EU. Conditions for the mainstream residential sector remained resilient, supported by mortgage availability and high levels of employment. However, the higher value end of the market was characterised by low transaction volumes.

·       Risk appetite – Lending criteria for commercial real estate were at conservative levels, contributing to materially reduced leverage for new origination in London offices and parts of the retail sector.

 

148


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk Banking activities continued

Flow statements (audited)

The ECL flow statements analyse the key elements that drive the movement of ECL and related income statement over the reporting period. The key themes are:

 

·          The flow statements capture the changes in ECL as well as the changes in related financial assets used in determining ECL. Exposures in this section may therefore differ from those reported in other tables in the credit risk section, principally in relation to exposures in Stage 1 and Stage 2. These differences do not have a material ECL impact.

 

·          Financial assets presented in the flow statements include treasury liquidity portfolios, comprising balances at central banks and debt securities, as well as loans. Both modelled and non-modelled portfolios are included.

 

·          Inter-Group transfers were a feature of the ECL flows during 2018 as a result of ring-fencing related changes. These transfers had no impact at a RBS Group-wide level.

 

·          Stage transfers (for example, exposures moving from Stage 1 to Stage 2) – these transfers are a key feature of the ECL movements, with the net re-measurement cost of transitioning to a worse stage being a primary driver of income statement charges for the period (likewise there is an ECL benefit for accounts improving stage).

 

·          Changes in risk parameters – captures the reassessment of the ECL within a given stage, including any ECL overlays and residual income statement gains or losses at the point of write-off or accounting write-down.

 

·          Other (P&L only items) – includes any subsequent changes in the value of written-down assets (for example, fortuitous recoveries) along with other direct write-off items such as direct recovery costs. Note: other (P&L only items) only affects the income statement and does not impact the balance sheet ECL movements.

 

·          Amounts written-off – represent the gross asset written-down against accounts with ECL, including the net asset write-down for debt sale activity.

 

·          There were small amounts of ECL flows from Stage 3 to Stage 1 during the year. This does not however indicate that accounts can return from Stage 3 to Stage 1 directly. On a similar basis, flows from Stage 1 to Stage 3 were observed, however this also included legitimate transfers due to unexpected default events. The small number of write-offs in Stage 1 and 2 reflect the effect of portfolio debt sales and also staging at the start of the analysis period.

 

·          The impact of model changes during 2018 were not material at a RBS Group-wide level or on the portfolios disclosed below.

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

Group total

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

At 1 January 2018

419,038 

262 

 

29,637 

621 

 

10,595 

3,565 

 

459,270 

4,448 

Currency translation and other adjustments

1,820 

(6)

 

88 

17 

 

50 

(11)

 

1,958 

— 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(18,416)

(52)

 

18,416 

52 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

13,723 

228 

 

(13,723)

(228)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(1,205)

(3)

 

(1,837)

(108)

 

3,042 

111 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

1,272 

16 

 

1,523 

163 

 

(2,795)

(179)

 

— 

— 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(207)

 

 

247 

 

 

447 

 

 

487 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

34 

 

 

74 

 

 

36 

 

 

144 

  Other changes in net exposure

6,312 

29 

 

(6,716)

(32)

 

(1,633)

(85)

 

(2,037)

(88)

  Other (P&L only items - primarily fortuitous recoveries)

 

 

 

 

 

(149)

 

 

(145)

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(143)

 

 

292 

 

 

249 

 

 

398 

Amounts written-off

(3)

(3)

 

(28)

(28)

 

(1,463)

(1,463)

 

(1,494)

(1,494)

Other movements

 

(1)

 

 

(6)

 

 

(94)

 

 

(101)

At 31 December 2018

422,541 

297 

 

27,360 

772 

 

7,796 

2,327 

 

457,697 

3,396 

Net carrying amount

422,244 

 

 

26,588 

 

 

5,469 

 

 

454,301 

 

 

The following flow statements provide insight into the material portfolios underpinning the Group flow statements.

Personal

The following flow statements are at a portfolio level.

 

UK PB - mortgages

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At 1 January 2018

124,180 

11 

 

10,621 

64 

 

1,353 

157 

 

136,154 

232 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(4,928)

(1)

 

4,928 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

4,245 

15 

 

(4,245)

(15)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(61)

— 

 

(327)

(5)

 

388 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

— 

 

235 

23 

 

(242)

(23)

 

— 

— 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(15)

 

 

11 

 

 

17 

 

 

13 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

— 

 

 

 

 

51 

 

 

55 

  Other changes in net exposure

4,228 

— 

 

(970)

(6)

 

(257)

(14)

 

3,001 

(20)

  Other (P&L only items)

 

 

 

— 

 

 

(6)

 

 

(5)

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(14)

 

 

 

 

48 

 

 

43 

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

(1)

(1)

 

(26)

(26)

 

(27)

(27)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

(2)

 

 

(35)

 

 

(37)

At 31 December 2018

127,671 

10 

 

10,241 

74 

 

1,216 

132 

 

139,128 

216 

Net carrying amount

127,661 

 

 

10,167 

 

 

1,084 

 

 

138,912 

 

 

Key points

 

·          Overall ECL reduction was primarily driven by business-as-usual write-offs in Stage 3.

 

·          Stage 1 ECL levels remained steady despite portfolio growth during 2018 as a result of modest PD reduction, with Stage 2 ECL showing an increase as a result of some additional forward-looking provisions being taken during the year.

 

·          Transfers from Stage 3 back to the performing book were higher than those in Personal unsecured lending, due to the higher cure activity typically seen in mortgages.

 

·          The increase in Stage 3 ECL changes in risk parameters reflected the monthly assessment of the loss requirement, capturing underlying changes in risk and forward-looking assessments.

 

·          Write-off of any residual shortfall following the sale of a repossessed property typically occurs within five years, although this period can be longer, reflecting the ongoing support for customers who engage constructively with RBS.

 

149


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Flow statements (audited)

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

UK PB - credit cards

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

At 1 January 2018

2,841 

52 

 

997 

94 

 

105 

75 

 

3,943 

221 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(739)

(15)

 

739 

15 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

763 

50 

 

(763)

(50)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(42)

(1)

 

(88)

(20)

 

130 

21 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

 

 

(3)

(2)

 

— 

— 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(38)

 

 

66 

 

 

68 

 

 

96 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

(15)

 

 

— 

 

 

(4)

 

 

(19)

  Other changes in net exposure

(192)

 

343 

17 

 

(45)

— 

 

106 

19 

  Other (P&L only items)

 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(11)

 

 

(9)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(48)

 

 

82 

 

 

53 

 

 

87 

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

(4)

(4)

 

(81)

(81)

 

(85)

(85)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(6)

 

 

(7)

At 31 December 2018

2,632 

36 

 

1,226 

118 

 

106 

71 

 

3,964 

225 

Net carrying amount

2,596 

 

 

1,108 

 

 

35 

 

 

3,739 

 

 

Key points

 

·         Overall ECL increased primarily due to increased levels of Stage 2 inflows in the first half of the year. This was the result of activity to calibrate and refine the criteria used to identify significant increase in credit risk, with underlying performance stable.

 

·         Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1 were higher than in other personal portfolios, primarily due to the ECL assessment period being reset when cards are re-issued.

 

·         ECL transfers from Stage 3 back to the performing book were relatively small as expected.

 

·         The amounts in other (P&L only items) mainly reflected cash recoveries after write-off. These benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.

 

·         Amounts written-off primarily represented charge-offs (analogous to write-off) which typically occurs after 12 missed payments, and also 2018 debt sale activity.

 

UK PB - other personal unsecured

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At 1 January 2018

4,518 

46 

 

1,790 

164 

 

705 

582 

 

7,013 

792 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(1,452)

(18)

 

1,452 

18 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

733 

42 

 

(733)

(42)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(51)

(1)

 

(182)

(50)

 

233 

51 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

— 

 

15 

 

(17)

(4)

 

— 

— 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(34)

 

 

110 

 

 

114 

 

 

190 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

 

 

58 

 

 

(1)

 

 

59 

  Other changes in net exposure

1,325 

19 

 

(363)

(11)

 

(104)

(7)

 

858 

  Other (P&L only items - primarily fortuitous recoveries)

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(42)

 

 

(42)

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(13)

 

 

157 

 

 

64 

 

 

208 

Amounts written-off

(2)

(2)

 

(9)

(9)

 

(322)

(322)

 

(333)

(333)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

(3)

 

 

(19)

 

 

(22)

At 31 December 2018

5,073 

54 

 

1,970 

239 

 

495 

394 

 

7,538 

687 

Net carrying amount

5,019 

 

 

1,731 

 

 

101 

 

 

6,851 

 

 

Key points

 

·         Overall ECL reduction was mainly driven by debt sale activity and business-as-usual write-offs in Stage 3, both reflected in amounts written-off.

 

·         Increases in Stage 2 reflected the underlying performance of recent new business growth maturing. Additionally, the ECL overlay for economic uncertainty contributed to the uplift captured in changes in risk parameters.

 

·         The portfolio continued to experience cash recoveries after write-off, reported in other (P&L only items – primarily fortuitous recoveries). This benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.

 

·         Write-off occurs once recovery activity with the customer has been concluded and there are no further recoveries expected, but no later than six years after default.

 

150


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Flow statements (audited)

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

Commercial Banking - business banking

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

At 1 January 2018

6,505 

29 

 

684 

29 

 

268 

224 

 

7,457 

282 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(691)

(4)

 

691 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

366 

12 

 

(366)

(12)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(35)

(1)

 

(63)

(8)

 

98 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

 

 

(11)

(4)

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(12)

 

 

24 

 

 

43 

 

 

55 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

(6)

 

 

 

 

(11)

 

 

(15)

  Other changes in net exposure

156 

 

(57)

 

(36)

(23)

 

63 

(17)

  Other (P&L only items)

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(31)

 

 

(31)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(15)

 

 

29 

 

 

(22)

 

 

(8)

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

(1)

(1)

 

(84)

(84)

 

(85)

(85)

Other movements

 

(1)

 

 

— 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(2)

At 31 December 2018

6,303 

22 

 

897 

43 

 

235 

153 

 

7,435 

218 

Net carrying amount

6,281 

 

 

854 

 

 

82 

 

 

7,217 

 

 

 

Key points

 

·          Overall ECL reduction was mainly driven by business-as-usual write-offs in Stage 3.

 

·          Stage 2 ECL did increase during the year as a result of net Stage 2 inflows from Stage 1, partly driven by PD model refinements throughout the year.

 

·          The portfolio continued to experience cash recoveries after write-off, reported in other (P&L only items). This benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.

 

·          Write-off occurs once recovery activity with the customer has been concluded and there are no further recoveries expected, but no later than five years after default.

 

Commercial Banking – Other commercial

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At 1 January 2018

6,771 

 

595 

11 

 

126 

57 

 

7,492 

74 

Currency translation and other adjustments

— 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

Inter-Group transfers

(71)

— 

 

(1)

— 

 

(5)

— 

 

(77)

— 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(781)

(2)

 

781 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

389 

 

(389)

(6)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(16)

— 

 

(70)

(1)

 

86 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

— 

 

25 

— 

 

(26)

— 

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(4)

 

 

10 

 

 

19 

 

 

25 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

 

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

  Other changes in net exposure

(886)

(1)

 

(123)

(1)

 

(62)

(6)

 

(1,071)

(8)

  Other (P&L only items)

 

(2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(3)

 

 

10 

 

 

14 

 

 

21 

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

(27)

(27)

 

(27)

(27)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(1)

At 31 December 2018

5,408 

 

818 

15 

 

92 

43 

 

6,318 

67 

Net carrying amount

5,399 

 

 

803 

 

 

49 

 

 

6,251 

 

 

Key point

 

·          Overall ECL reduced slightly during the year, with some modest Stage 1 and Stage 2 ECL increases being more than offset by Stage 3 write-offs, which was the key driver of the overall income statement charge for 2018.

 

151


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Flow statements (audited)

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

Ulster Bank RoI - mortgages

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

At 1 January 2018

10,650 

 

1,532 

72 

 

3,167 

881 

 

15,349 

961 

Currency translation and other adjustments

94 

— 

 

12 

 

15 

 

121 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(344)

(1)

 

344 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

414 

 

(414)

(7)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(32)

— 

 

(124)

(8)

 

156 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

— 

 

245 

36 

 

(249)

(36)

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(6)

 

 

(4)

 

 

11 

 

 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(23)

 

 

(21)

  Other changes in net exposure

(4)

— 

 

(188)

(2)

 

(630)

14 

 

(822)

12 

  Other (P&L only items)

 

(2)

 

 

 

 

28 

 

 

28 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(5)

 

 

(5)

 

 

30 

 

 

20 

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

(13)

(13)

 

(322)

(322)

 

(335)

(335)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(20)

 

 

(20)

At 31 December 2018

10,782 

11 

 

1,394 

75 

 

2,137 

516 

 

14,313 

602 

Net carrying amount

10,771 

 

 

1,319 

 

 

1,621 

 

 

13,711 

 

 

Key points

 

·                  The overall ECL reduction was driven by reduced ECL in Stage 3, which was subject to significant debt sale activity in 2018 (approximately £0.9 billion of gross exposures were sold during the year).

 

·                  In addition to the debt sale activity, the reduction in ECL in Stage 3 reflected ongoing improvements in underlying portfolio performance.

 

·                  The reduction in Stage 2 exposures resulted from the portfolio debt sale and decreasing stock of exposures meeting the high-risk backstop criteria. This reflected ongoing improvements in the underlying portfolio performance.

 

·                  Write-off generally occurs once the repossessed property has been sold and there is a residual shortfall balance remaining outstanding which has been deemed irrecoverable.

 

Wholesale

 

Commercial Banking

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At 1 January 2018

84,228 

58 

 

9,056 

106 

 

3,735 

1,156 

 

97,019 

1,320 

Currency translation and other adjustments

367 

— 

 

47 

(1)

 

29 

(4)

 

443 

(5)

Inter-Group transfers

(2,106)

(1)

 

(92)

— 

 

(375)

(14)

 

(2,573)

(15)

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(8,224)

(9)

 

8,224 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

5,911 

52 

 

(5,911)

(52)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(881)

— 

 

(938)

(13)

 

1,819 

13 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

1,056 

11 

 

937 

89 

 

(1,993)

(100)

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(57)

 

 

13 

 

 

160 

 

 

116 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

46 

 

 

 

 

41 

 

 

95 

  Other changes in net exposure

(4,274)

(1)

 

(2,748)

(19)

 

(489)

(40)

 

(7,511)

(60)

  Other (P&L only items)

 

— 

 

 

 

 

(8)

 

 

(7)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(12)

 

 

 

 

153 

 

 

144 

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

(460)

(460)

 

(460)

(460)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(10)

 

 

(10)

At 31 December 2018

76,077 

99 

 

8,575 

140 

 

2,266 

742 

 

86,918 

981 

Net carrying amount

75,978 

 

 

8,435 

 

 

1,524 

 

 

85,937 

 

 

 

Key points

 

·                  ECL reduced over the course of 2018 as write-offs outweighed ECL charges.

 

·                  Stage 3 charges were mainly driven by a charge on new to default exposures where the ECL can increase significantly following an individual assessment.

 

·                  Stage 1 and Stage 2 changes to risk parameters largely reflected the increase in ECL for economic uncertainty and a change to the forward-looking modelling approach for point-in-time PDs, where PDs now revert to long-run average after one year rather than five years.

 

·                  Inter-Group transfers reflected the impact of transfers completed in preparation of ring-fencing. The reductions in net exposure were also related to ring-fencing changes, where short-term borrowing was renewed in other franchises.

 

·                  Release in Stage 1 was driven by a reduction in ECL for exposures transferring from Stage 2 and Stage 3, which previously had a lifetime ECL but are now assessed for 12 month ECL.

 

152


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Flow statements (audited)

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

NatWest Markets (1) 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

At 1 January 2018

9,089 

 

1,276 

42 

 

456 

190 

 

10,821 

234 

Currency translation and other adjustments

252 

— 

 

22 

(2)

 

 

277 

Inter-Group transfers

3,590 

— 

 

(4)

 

374 

14 

 

3,960 

15 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(393)

— 

 

393 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

318 

28 

 

(318)

(28)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

— 

— 

 

(3)

— 

 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

— 

— 

 

35 

— 

 

(35)

— 

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(26)

 

 

 

 

— 

 

 

(21)

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

(5)

 

 

 

 

— 

 

 

(1)

  Other changes in net exposure

19,902 

 

(669)

(8)

 

(4)

(6)

 

19,229 

(6)

  Other (P&L only items - primarily fortuitous recoveries)

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(64)

 

 

(64)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(23)

 

 

 

 

(70)

 

 

(92)

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

(89)

(89)

 

(89)

(89)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

— 

At 31 December 2018

32,758 

 

732 

14 

 

708 

112 

 

34,198 

133 

Net carrying amount

32,751 

 

 

718 

 

 

596 

 

 

34,065 

 

 

Note:

(1)             Reflects NatWest Markets segments and include NWM N.V..

 

Key points

 

·                  Stage 3 financial assets include £166 million (1 January 2018 – £105 million) purchased or originated credit impaired (POCI) assets. No ECL impairment was held on these positions and a £61 million impairment recovery was recognised on these POCI assets during 2018 (included in other (P&L only items – primarily fortuitous recoveries)).

 

·                  Stage 1 and Stage 2 changes to risk parameters largely reflected the increase in ECL for economic uncertainty, and a change to the forward-looking modelling approach for point-in-time PDs, where PDs now revert to long run average after one year rather than five years.

 

·                  The release in Stage 1 was driven by a reduction in ECL on exposures transferring from Stage 2, which previously had a lifetime ECL but are now assessed for 12 month ECL.

 

·                  The increase in Stage 1 exposure was due to a combination of transfers and short-term borrowing to governments and central banks which are now in NatWest Markets following changes in preparation for ring-fencing.

 

·                  The portfolio experienced fortuitous recoveries, reported in other (P&L only items – primarily fortuitous recoveries). This benefited the income statement without affecting ECL.

 

 

Private Banking

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

At 1 January 2018

13,046 

18 

 

412 

 

300 

27 

 

13,758 

54 

Currency translation and other adjustments

12 

— 

 

 

— 

— 

 

13 

Inter-Group transfers

23 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

23 

— 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(270)

(1)

 

270 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

92 

 

(92)

(2)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(60)

— 

 

(8)

— 

 

68 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

— 

 

— 

 

(8)

— 

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(2)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

(3)

 

 

(2)

 

 

 

 

(4)

  Other changes in net exposure

1,100 

— 

 

(65)

(1)

 

(121)

(2)

 

914 

(3)

  Other (P&L only items)

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement releases

 

(5)

 

 

— 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(6)

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

(7)

(7)

 

(7)

(7)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(1)

At 31 December 2018

13,950 

14 

 

519 

10 

 

232 

19 

 

14,701 

43 

Net carrying amount

13,936 

 

 

509 

 

 

213 

 

 

14,658 

 

 

 

Key points

 

·          ECL reduced due to a combination of write-offs and impairment releases.

 

·          The majority of the release was in Stage 1, due to a reduction in loss rates for Retail exposures.

 

·          Exposure increased in Stage 1 reflecting growth in the portfolio (primarily mortgages driven) with minimal ECL impact due to high credit quality.

 

153


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Flow statements (audited)

 

 

Stage 1

 

Stage 2

 

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

 

Financial

 

RBS International

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

 

assets

ECL

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

At 1 January 2018

8,652 

 

385 

 

118 

28 

 

9,155 

38 

Currency translation and other adjustments

98 

(2)

 

— 

 

— 

(1)

 

98 

(1)

Inter-Group transfers

1,834 

— 

 

95 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

1,929 

— 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2

(299)

— 

 

299 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1

340 

 

(340)

(5)

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers to Stage 3

(14)

— 

 

(11)

— 

 

25 

— 

 

— 

— 

Transfers from Stage 3

190 

— 

 

— 

 

(194)

— 

 

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Net re-measurement of ECL on stage transfer

 

(4)

 

 

 

 

— 

 

 

(2)

  Changes in risk parameters (model inputs)

 

 

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

  Other changes in net exposure

15,948 

— 

 

(156)

— 

 

155 

(1)

 

15,947 

(1)

  Other (P&L only items)

 

(1)

 

 

 

 

(1)

 

 

(1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Income statement (releases)/charges

 

(3)

 

 

 

 

(2)

 

 

(2)

Amounts written-off

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

(9)

(9)

 

(9)

(9)

Other movements

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

— 

 

 

— 

At 31 December 2018

26,749 

 

276 

 

95 

17 

 

27,120 

27 

Net carrying amount

26,743 

 

 

272 

 

 

78 

 

 

27,093 

 

 

 

Key points

 

·                  The reduction in ECL was driven by write-offs and Stage 3 impairment releases, both of which are primarily in the Spanish mortgage portfolio.

 

·                  The increases in exposure were partly due to new lending, but mainly due to the establishment of a liquidity portfolio across central and correspondent banks and sovereign bond holdings. These exposures were in Stage 1 with very low credit risk and contribute minimal ECL.

 

154


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Stage 2 decomposition – arrears status and contributing factors

The tables below summarise Stage 2 decomposition for the Personal and Wholesale portfolios.

 

 

UK mortgages

 

RoI mortgages

 

Other mortgages

 

Credit cards

 

Other

 

Total

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

31 December 2018

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

Personal

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Currently in arrears (>30 DPD)

658 

10 

 

90 

10 

 

3

 

17 

 

88 

22 

 

856 

48 

Currently up-to-date

9,612 

64 

 

1,292 

66 

 

 

1,226 

114 

 

1,985 

225 

 

14,115 

469 

 - PD deterioration

3,855 

54 

 

680 

44 

 

 

778 

85 

 

1,255 

176 

 

6,568 

359 

 - Up-to-date, PD persistence

1,448 

 

54 

 

 

337 

17 

 

440 

26 

 

2,279 

49 

 - Other driver (adverse credit, forbearance etc)

4,309 

 

558 

21 

 

 

111 

12 

 

290 

23 

 

5,268 

61 

Total Stage 2

10,270 

74 

 

1,382 

76 

 

3

 

1,243 

120 

 

2,073 

247 

 

14,971 

517 

 

Key point

 

·          In Personal exposures, as expected, ECL coverage was higher on accounts that are more than 30 days past due. Also in line with expectations, accounts exhibiting PD deterioration have a higher ECL coverage than accounts in Stage 2 for other reasons.

 

 

Property

 

Corporate

 

FI

 

Other

 

Total

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

 

Loans

ECL

31 December 2018

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

Wholesale

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Currently in arrears (>30 DPD)

255 

 

315 

 

— 

 

— 

 

571 

12

Currently up-to-date

1,622 

32 

 

8,438 

195 

 

473 

 

22 

 

10,555 

234

 - PD deterioration

924 

23 

 

5,564 

138 

 

281 

 

 

6,777 

167

 - Up-to-date, PD persistence

57 

 

170 

 

— 

 

— 

 

231 

6

 - Other driver (forbearance, RoCL etc.)

641 

 

2,704 

52 

 

188 

 

14 

 

3,547 

61

Total Stage 2

1,877 

39 

 

8,753 

200 

 

474 

 

22 

 

11,126 

246

 

 

Key point

 

·          In Wholesale exposures, the ECL coverage was broadly consistent in total. Coverage can vary across categories or sectors reflecting the individual characteristics of the customer and exposure type.

 

Stage 2 decomposition by SICR trigger

 

 

UK mortgages

 

RoI mortgages

 

Other mortgages

 

Credit cards

 

Other

 

Total

31 December 2018

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

Personal trigger (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PD movement

4,273 

41.6 

 

767 

55.6 

 

— 

— 

 

793 

63.8 

 

1,307 

63.0 

 

7,140 

47.7 

PD persistence

1,450 

14.1 

 

54 

3.9 

 

— 

— 

 

338 

27.2 

 

440 

21.2 

 

2,282 

15.2 

Adverse credit bureau recorded with credit reference agency

2,996 

29.2 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

61 

4.9 

 

101 

4.9 

 

3,158 

21.1 

Forbearance support provided

206 

2.0 

 

0.1 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

13 

0.6 

 

221 

1.5 

Customers in collections

144 

1.4 

 

57 

4.1 

 

— 

— 

 

0.4 

 

36 

1.7 

 

242 

1.6 

Other reasons (2)

982 

9.6 

 

502 

36.3 

 

— 

— 

 

46 

3.7 

 

151 

7.3 

 

1,681 

11.2 

Days past due >30

219 

2.1 

 

— 

— 

 

100.0 

 

— 

— 

 

25 

1.2 

 

247 

1.6 

 

10,270 

100 

 

1,382 

100 

 

100 

 

1,243 

100 

 

2,073 

100 

 

14,971 

100 

 

Key point

 

·          The primary driver of credit deterioration was PD, which including persistence, accounted for the majority of movements to Stage 2. High risk back-stops, for example, forbearance, adverse credit bureau, provide additional valuable discrimination particularly on mortgages.

 

 

Property

 

Corporate

 

FI

 

Other

 

Total

31 December 2018

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

 

£m

%

Wholesale trigger (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PD movement

940 

50.1 

 

5,617 

64.2 

 

281 

59.3 

 

36.4 

 

6,845 

61.5 

PD persistence

57 

3.0 

 

171 

2.0 

 

0.8 

 

— 

— 

 

232 

2.1 

Risk of Credit Loss

321 

17.1 

 

1,964 

22.4 

 

103 

21.7 

 

— 

— 

 

2,388 

21.5 

Forbearance support provided

65 

3.5 

 

209 

2.4 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

274 

2.5 

Customers in collections

0.5 

 

43 

0.5 

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

52 

0.5 

Other reasons (3)

251 

13.4 

 

525 

6.0 

 

85 

17.9 

 

14 

63.6 

 

875 

7.9 

Days past due >30

234 

12.5 

 

224 

2.6 

 

0.2 

 

— 

— 

 

460 

4.1 

 

1,877 

100 

 

8,753 

100 

 

474 

100 

 

22 

100 

 

11,126 

100 

 

Notes:

(1)            The data table is built on a hierarchical basis from top to bottom, for example, accounts with PD deterioration may also trigger backstop(s) but are only reported under PD deterioration.

(2)            Includes customers who have accessed payday lending, interest only mortgages past end of term, a small number of mortgage customers on a highly flexible mortgage significantly behind their outline repayment plan and customers breaching risk appetite thresholds for new business acquisition. On the RoI mortgage portfolio, this reflected customers who remained in probation following the conclusion of forbearance support, exposures breaching risk appetite thresholds for new business acquisition and exposures classified as non-performing exposures under EBA requirements.

(3)            Includes customers where a PD assessment cannot be undertaken due to missing PDs.

 

Key point

 

·          The primary driver of credit deterioration was PD, which including persistence, accounted for 62% of Stage 2. The Risk of Credit Loss framework accounted for a further 21% highlighting the importance of expert judgement being used to identify deterioration.

 

155


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Stage 3 vintage analysis

The table below provides estimated vintage analysis of the material Stage 3 portfolios totalling 87% of the Stage 3 loans of £7.7 billion.

 

 

UK PB

Ulster RoI

 

2018

mortgages

mortgages

Wholesale

Stage 3 loans (£bn)

1.2 

2.1 

3.4 

Vintage (time in default):

 

 

 

<1 year

26%

7%

22%

1-3 years

21%

12%

19%

3-5 years

14%

14%

9%

5-10 years

35%

63%

50%

>10 years

4%

4%

— 

 

100%

100%

100%

 

Key points

 

·          Mortgages – The proportion of the Stage 3 defaulted population who have been in default for over five years reflected RBS’s support for customers in financial difficulty. When customers continue to engage constructively with RBS making regular payments, RBS continues to support them. RBS’s provisioning approach retains customers in Stage 3 for a life-time loss provisioning calculation even when their arrears status reverts to below 90 days past due.

 

·          Wholesale – The value of Stage 3 loans that have been impaired for 5-10 years was mainly due to customers being in a protracted formal insolvency process or subject to litigation or a complaints process.

 

Asset quality (audited)

 

Asset quality analysis is based on internal asset quality ratings which have ranges for the probability of default. Customers are assigned credit grades, based on various credit grading models that reflect the key drivers of default for the customer type. All credit grades across RBS map to both an asset quality scale, used for external financial reporting, and a master grading scale for wholesale exposures used for internal management reporting across portfolios. The table that follows details the relationship between internal asset quality (AQ) bands and external ratings published by Standard & Poor’s (S&P), for illustrative purposes only. This relationship is established by observing S&P’s default study statistics, notably the one year default rates for each S&P rating grade. A degree of judgement is required to relate the probability of default ranges associated with the master grading scale to these default rates given that, for example, the S&P published default rates do not increase uniformly by grade and the historical default rate is nil for the highest rating categories.

 

Internal asset
quality band

Probability of default range

Indicative S&P rating

AQ1

0% - 0.034%

AAA to AA

AQ2

0.034% - 0.048%

AA to AA-

AQ3

0.048% - 0.095%

A+ to A

AQ4

0.095% - 0.381%

BBB+ to BBB-

AQ5

0.381% - 1.076%

BB+ to BB

AQ6

1.076% - 2.153%

BB- to B+

AQ7

2.153% - 6.089%

B+ to B

AQ8

6.089% - 17.222%

B- to CCC+

AQ9

17.222% - 100%

CCC to C

AQ10

100%

D

 

The mapping to the S&P ratings is used by RBS as one of several benchmarks for its wholesale portfolios, depending on customer type and the purpose of the benchmark. The mapping is based on all issuer types rated by S&P. It should therefore be considered illustrative and does not, for instance, indicate that exposures reported against S&P ratings either have been or would be assigned those ratings if assessed by S&P. In addition, the relationship is not relevant for retail portfolios, smaller corporate exposures or specialist corporate segments given that S&P does not typically assign ratings to such entities.

 

156


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Asset quality (audited)

The table below summarises asset quality bands of gross loans and ECL by stage for the Personal portfolio.

 

 

 

Gross loans

 

ECL provisions

 

ECL provisions coverage

 

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Total

2018

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

%

%

%

%

UK mortgages

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

95,618

3,621

 

99,239

 

6

11

 

17

 

0.01

0.30

 

0.02

AQ5-AQ8

 

42,771

5,845

 

48,616

 

6

46

 

52

 

0.01

0.79

 

0.11

AQ9

 

32

804

 

836

 

17

 

17

 

2.11

 

2.03

AQ10

 

 

 

1,541

1,541

 

 

 

151

151

 

 

 

9.80

9.80

 

 

138,421

10,270

1,541

150,232

 

12

74

151

237

 

0.01

0.72

9.80

0.16

RoI mortgages

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

5,164

226

 

5,390

 

4

5

 

9

 

0.08

2.21

 

0.17

AQ5-AQ8

 

5,668

717

 

6,385

 

7

32

 

39

 

0.12

4.46

 

0.61

AQ9

 

12

439

 

451

 

39

 

39

 

8.88

 

8.65

AQ10 (1)

 

 

 

2,124

2,124

 

 

 

515

515

 

 

 

24.25

24.25

 

 

10,844

1,382

2,124

14,350

 

11

76

515

602

 

0.10

5.50

24.25

4.20

Other mortgages

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

359

1

 

360

 

 

 

 

AQ5-AQ8

 

136

2

 

138

 

 

 

 

AQ10

 

 

 

1

1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

495

3

1

499

 

 

Credit cards

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

34

1

 

35

 

 

 

 

AQ5-AQ8

 

2,810

1,180

 

3,990

 

38

103

 

141

 

1.35

8.73

 

3.53

AQ9

 

7

62

 

69

 

17

 

17

 

27.42

 

24.64

AQ10

 

 

 

122

122

 

 

 

72

72

 

 

 

59.02

59.02

 

 

2,851

1,243

122

4,216

 

38

120

72

230

 

1.33

9.65

59.02

5.46

Other

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

997

43

 

1,040

 

4

5

 

9

 

0.40

11.63

 

0.87

AQ5-AQ8

 

5,889

1,847

 

7,736

 

55

186

 

241

 

0.93

10.07

 

3.12

AQ9

 

56

183

 

239

 

2

56

 

58

 

3.57

30.60

 

24.27

AQ10

 

 

 

563

563

 

 

 

420

420

 

 

 

74.60

74.60

 

 

6,942

2,073

563

9,578

 

61

247

420

728

 

0.88

11.92

74.60

7.60

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

102,172

3,892

 

106,064

 

14

21

 

35

 

0.01

0.54

 

0.03

AQ5-AQ8

 

57,274

9,591

 

66,865

 

106

367

 

473

 

0.19

3.83

 

0.71

AQ9

 

107

1,488

 

1,595

 

2

129

 

131

 

1.87

8.67

 

8.21

AQ10

 

 

 

4,351

4,351

 

 

 

1,158

1,158

 

 

 

26.61

26.61

 

 

159,553

14,971

4,351

178,875

 

122

517

1,158

1,797

 

0.08

3.45

26.61

1.00

 

Note:

(1)             At 31 December 2018, AQ10 includes £0.6 billion RoI mortgages which are not currently considered defaulted for capital calculation purposes for RoI but included in Stage 3.

 

 

Key points

 

·             The majority of exposures were in AQ1-AQ4, with a significant proportion in AQ5-AQ8. As expected, mortgage exposures have a higher proportion in AQ1-AQ4 than unsecured borrowing.

 

·             The relatively high level of Stage 3 impaired assets (AQ10) in RoI mortgages reflected their legacy mortgage portfolio and the residual effects from the financial crisis. In other personal, the relatively high level of exposures in AQ10 reflected the fact that impaired assets can be held on balance sheet with commensurate ECL provision for up to six years after default.

 

·             ECL provisions coverage shows the expected trend with increased coverage in the poorer asset quality bands, and also by stage.

 

157


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Banking activities continued

Asset quality (audited)

The table below summarises asset quality bands of gross loans and ECL by stage for the Wholesale portfolio.

 

 

 

Gross loans

 

ECL provisions

 

ECL provisions coverage

 

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

 

Total

 

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

 

Total

2018

 

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

 

%

%

%

 

%

Property

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

15,740 

393 

 

 

16,133 

 

 

 

17 

 

0.05 

2.29 

 

 

0.11 

AQ5-AQ8

 

17,397 

1,418 

 

 

18,815 

 

35 

26 

 

 

61 

 

0.20 

1.83 

 

 

0.32 

AQ9

 

66 

 

 

74 

 

— 

 

 

 

— 

6.06 

 

 

5.41 

AQ10

 

 

 

1,685 

 

1,685 

 

 

 

506 

 

506 

 

 

 

30.03 

 

30.03 

 

 

33,145 

1,877 

1,685 

 

36,707 

 

43 

39 

506 

 

588 

 

0.13 

2.08 

30.03 

 

1.60 

Corporate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

21,814 

773 

 

 

22,587 

 

13 

14 

 

 

27 

 

0.06 

1.81 

 

 

0.12 

AQ5-AQ8

 

40,004 

7,647 

 

 

47,651 

 

93 

171 

 

 

264 

 

0.23 

2.24 

 

 

0.55 

AQ9

 

26 

333 

 

 

359 

 

15 

 

 

16 

 

3.85 

4.50 

 

 

4.46 

AQ10

 

 

 

1,643 

 

1,643 

 

 

 

634 

 

634 

 

 

 

38.59 

 

38.59 

 

 

61,844 

8,753 

1,643 

 

72,240 

 

107 

200 

634 

 

941 

 

0.17 

2.28 

38.59 

 

1.30 

Financial institutions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

22,150 

247 

 

 

22,397 

 

 

 

10 

 

0.02 

2.02 

 

 

0.04 

AQ5-AQ8

 

2,352 

222 

 

 

2,574 

 

 

 

 

0.30 

0.90 

 

 

0.35 

AQ9

 

— 

 

 

 

— 

— 

 

 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

 

— 

AQ10

 

 

 

35 

 

35 

 

 

 

22 

 

22 

 

 

 

62.86 

 

62.86 

 

 

24,502 

474 

35 

 

25,011 

 

12 

22 

 

41 

 

0.05 

1.48 

62.86 

 

0.16 

Sovereign

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

6,780 

22 

 

 

6,802 

 

— 

 

 

 

0.01 

— 

 

 

0.01 

AQ5-AQ8

 

161 

— 

 

 

161 

 

— 

— 

 

 

— 

 

— 

— 

 

 

— 

AQ10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

— 

 

— 

 

 

 

— 

 

— 

 

 

6,941 

22 

 

6,967 

 

— 

— 

 

 

0.01 

— 

— 

 

0.01 

Total

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

66,484 

1,435 

 

 

67,919 

 

27 

28 

 

 

55 

 

0.04 

1.95 

 

 

0.08 

AQ5-AQ8

 

59,914 

9,287 

 

 

69,201 

 

135 

199 

 

 

334 

 

0.23 

2.14 

 

 

0.48 

AQ9

 

34 

404 

 

 

438 

 

19 

 

 

20 

 

2.94 

4.70 

 

 

4.57 

AQ10

 

 

 

3,367 

 

3,367 

 

 

 

1,162 

 

1,162 

 

 

 

34.51 

 

34.51 

 

 

126,432 

11,126 

3,367 

 

140,925 

 

163 

246 

1,162 

 

1,571 

 

0.13 

2.21 

34.51 

 

1.11 

 

Key points

·        Across the Wholesale portfolio, the asset quality band distribution differed reflecting the diverse nature of differing sectors. 48% of Wholesale lending exposure was in the AQ1-AQ4 band.

 

·        The relatively low provision coverage for Stage 3 loans in the property sector reflected the secured nature of the exposures.

 

Credit risk – Trading activities

 

This section covers the credit risk profile of RBS’s trading activities. All disclosures are audited.

 

Security funding transactions and collateral (audited)

 

The table below captures securities funding transactions in NWM and Treasury. All transactions that are outside netting arrangements are in NWM.

 

 

Reverse repos

 

Repos

 

 

 

Outside

 

 

 

Outside

 

 

Of which:

netting

 

 

Of which:

netting

 

Total

can be offset

arrangements

 

Total

can be offset

arrangements

2018

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

Gross

68,044 

65,057 

2,987 

 

70,097 

68,940 

1,157 

IFRS offset

(39,737)

(39,737)

— 

 

(39,737)

(39,737)

— 

Carrying value

28,307 

25,320 

2,987 

 

30,360 

29,203 

1,157 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Master netting arrangements

(762)

(762)

— 

 

(762)

(762)

— 

Securities collateral

(24,548)

(24,548)

— 

 

(28,441)

(28,441)

— 

Potential for offset not recognised under IFRS

(25,310)

(25,310)

— 

 

(29,203)

(29,203)

— 

Net

2,997 

10 

2,987 

 

1,157 

— 

1,157 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Gross

84,706 

78,991 

5,715 

 

82,395 

80,088 

2,307 

IFRS offset

(43,974)

(43,974)

— 

 

(43,974)

(43,974)

— 

Carrying value

40,732 

35,017 

5,715 

 

38,421 

36,114 

2,307 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Master netting arrangements

(329)

(329)

— 

 

(329)

(329)

— 

Securities collateral

(34,646)

(34,646)

— 

 

(35,785)

(35,785)

— 

Potential for offset not recognised under IFRS

(34,975)

(34,975)

— 

 

(36,114)

(36,114)

— 

Net

5,757 

42 

5,715 

 

2,307 

— 

2,307 

 

158


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk – Trading activities continued

Derivatives (audited)

The table below summarises derivatives by type of contract. The master netting agreements and collateral shown below do not result in a net presentation on the balance sheet under IFRS 9. A significant proportion (more than 90%) of the derivatives relate to trading activities in NatWest Markets, the table below also includes hedging derivatives in Treasury.

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

Notional

 

 

 

 

 

 

GBP

USD

Euro

Other

Total

Assets

Liabilities

Notional

Assets

Liabilities

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£m

£m

£bn

£m

£m

Gross exposure

 

 

 

 

 

138,390 

135,673 

 

 

177,931 

172,063 

IFRS offset

 

 

 

 

 

(5,041)

(6,776)

 

 

(17,088)

(17,557)

Carrying value

2,895 

5,129 

4,323 

1,632 

13,979 

133,349 

128,897 

 

15,482 

160,843 

154,506 

Of which:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Interest rate swaps

 

 

 

 

 

81,855 

74,004 

 

 

99,065 

91,025 

  Options purchased

 

 

 

 

 

14,481 

— 

 

 

21,733 

— 

  Options written

 

 

 

 

 

— 

16,371 

 

 

— 

21,021 

  Futures and forwards

 

 

 

 

 

74 

69 

 

 

147 

114 

Total

2,521 

3,589 

3,686 

740 

10,536 

96,410 

90,444 

 

12,016 

120,945 

112,160 

Exchange rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Spot, forwards and futures

 

 

 

 

 

17,904 

18,610 

 

 

19,283 

19,172 

  Currency swaps

 

 

 

 

 

11,322 

12,062 

 

 

11,163 

13,534 

  Options purchased

 

 

 

 

 

7,319 

— 

 

 

8,765 

— 

  Options written

 

 

 

 

 

— 

7,558 

 

 

— 

8,975 

Total

373 

1,532 

629 

892 

3,426 

36,545 

38,230 

 

3,425 

39,211 

41,681 

Credit

— 

16 

346 

208 

 

38 

531 

558 

Equity and commodity

— 

— 

— 

48 

15 

 

156 

107 

Carrying value

 

 

 

 

13,979 

133,349 

128,897 

 

15,482 

160,843 

154,506 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Counterparty mark-to-market netting

 

 

 

 

 

(106,762)

(106,762)

 

 

(128,287)

(128,287)

Cash collateral

 

 

 

 

 

(17,937)

(15,227)

 

 

(20,311)

(18,035)

Securities collateral

 

 

 

 

 

(4,469)

(3,466)

 

 

(5,850)

(3,952)

Net exposure

 

 

 

 

 

4,181 

3,442 

 

 

6,395 

4,232 

Of which outside netting arrangements

 

 

 

 

2,061 

1,708 

 

 

2,261 

1,658 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Banks (2)

 

 

 

 

 

362 

443 

 

 

461 

466 

Other financial institutions (3)

 

 

 

 

 

1,054 

1,144 

 

 

1,608 

1,625 

Corporate (4)

 

 

 

 

 

2,510 

1,817 

 

 

3,843 

2,065 

Government (5)

 

 

 

 

 

255 

38 

 

 

483 

76 

Net exposure

 

 

 

 

 

4,181 

3,442 

 

 

6,395 

4,232 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK

 

 

 

 

 

1,935 

1,304 

 

 

4,079 

1,853 

Europe

 

 

 

 

 

1,308 

1,465 

 

 

1,643 

1,777 

US

 

 

 

 

 

588 

298 

 

 

346 

317 

RoW

 

 

 

 

 

350 

375 

 

 

327 

285 

Net exposure

 

 

 

 

 

4,181 

3,442 

 

 

6,395 

4,232 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Asset quality of uncollateralised derivative assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ1-AQ4

 

 

 

 

 

3,384 

 

 

 

5,173 

 

AQ5-AQ8

 

 

 

 

 

773 

 

 

 

1,216 

 

AQ9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AQ10

 

 

 

 

 

21 

 

 

 

 

Net exposure

 

 

 

 

 

4,181 

 

 

 

6,395 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)      The notional amount of interest rate derivatives include £5,952 billion (2017 £7,400 billion) in respect of contracts cleared through central clearing counterparties.

(2)      Transactions with certain counterparties with whom RBS has netting arrangements but collateral is not posted on a daily basis; certain transactions with specific terms that may not fall within netting and collateral arrangements; derivative positions in certain jurisdictions for example China where the collateral agreements are not deemed to be legally enforceable.

(3)      Transactions with securitisation vehicles and funds where collateral posting is contingent on RBS’s external rating.

(4)      Mainly large corporates with whom RBS may have netting arrangements in place, but operational capability does not support collateral posting.

(5)      Sovereigns and supranational entities with one-way collateral agreements in their favour.

 

159


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk Trading activities continued

Derivatives: settlement basis and central counterparties (audited)

The table below summarises the derivative notional and fair value by trading and settlement method.

 

 

Notional

 

Asset

 

Liability

 

 

Traded over the counter

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Traded on

Settled

Not settled

 

 

Traded on

Traded

 

Traded on

Traded

 

recognised

by central

 by central

 

 

 recognised

 over the

 

 recognised

 over the

 

exchanges

counterparties

counterparties

Total

 

 exchanges

 counter

 

 exchanges

 counter

2018

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

 

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

Interest rate

1,642 

5,952 

2,942 

10,536 

 

— 

96,410 

 

— 

90,444 

Exchange rate

— 

3,422 

3,426 

 

— 

36,545 

 

— 

38,230 

Credit

— 

— 

16 

16 

 

— 

346 

 

— 

208 

Equity and commodity

— 

— 

 

— 

48 

 

— 

15 

Total

1,646 

5,952 

6,381 

13,979 

 

— 

133,349 

 

— 

128,897 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate

1,506 

7,400 

3,110 

12,016 

 

— 

120,945 

 

— 

112,160 

Exchange rate

— 

3,421 

3,425 

 

— 

39,211 

 

— 

41,681 

Credit

— 

— 

38 

38 

 

— 

531 

 

— 

558 

Equity and commodity

— 

— 

 

— 

156 

 

106 

Total

1,510 

7,400 

6,572 

15,482 

 

— 

160,843 

 

154,505 

 

Debt securities (audited)

The table below summarises debt securities held at mandatory fair value through profit or loss by issuer as well as ratings based on the lowest of Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s and Fitch. A significant proportion (more than 95%) of these positions are trading securities in NatWest Markets.

 

 

Central and local government

Financial

 

 

 

UK

US

Other

institutions

Corporate

Total

2018

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

AAA

— 

— 

2,093 

1,459 

3,559 

AA to AA+

6,834 

4,689 

3,161 

773 

120 

15,577 

A to AA-

— 

— 

4,571 

482 

51 

5,104 

BBB- to A-

— 

— 

3,592 

802 

285 

4,679 

Non-investment grade

— 

— 

81 

832 

237 

1,150 

Unrated

— 

— 

— 

572 

580 

Total

6,834 

4,689 

13,498 

4,920 

708 

30,649 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Short positions

(6,394)

(2,008)

(13,500)

(1,724)

(201)

(23,827)

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AAA

— 

— 

1,474 

1,576 

21 

3,071 

AA to AA+

3,514 

3,667 

2,386 

984 

168 

10,719 

A to AA-

— 

— 

7,224 

427 

78 

7,729 

BBB- to A-

— 

— 

3,267 

796 

493 

4,556 

Non-investment grade

— 

— 

385 

552 

171 

1,108 

Unrated

— 

— 

— 

255 

43 

298 

Total

3,514 

3,667 

14,736 

4,590 

974 

27,481 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Short positions

(3,490)

(2,501)

(20,390)

(1,945)

(201)

(28,527)

 

Credit risk Cross border exposure

 

Cross border exposures comprise both banking and trading activities, including reverse repurchase agreements. Exposures comprise loans and advances, including finance leases and instalment credit receivables, and other monetary assets, such as debt securities. The geographical breakdown is based on the country of domicile of the borrower or guarantor of ultimate risk. Cross border exposures include non-local currency claims of overseas offices on local residents but exclude exposures to local residents in local currencies. The table below sets out cross border exposures greater than 0.5% of RBS’s total assets.

 

 

Government

Banks

Other

Total

 Short positions

Net of short positions

2018 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Western Europe

21,121 

19,003 

16,741 

56,865 

14,103 

42,762 

  Of which: France

3,396 

10,209 

1,579 

15,184 

1,626 

13,558 

  Of which: Germany

8,023 

3,086 

1,145 

12,254 

5,397 

6,857 

  Of which: Netherlands

1,142 

675 

3,739 

5,556 

985 

4,571 

United States

13,558 

5,458 

8,379 

27,395 

2,103 

25,292 

Japan

4,857 

2,327 

405 

7,589 

11 

7,578 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

France

4,721 

11,739 

2,320 

18,780 

3,324 

15,456 

Germany

7,643 

5,819 

2,165 

15,627 

9,957 

5,670 

Netherlands

1,897 

798 

5,395 

8,090 

986 

7,104 

United States

8,697 

4,494 

8,048 

21,239 

2,607 

18,632 

Japan

7,533 

4,879 

197 

12,609 

15 

12,594 

2016 

 

 

 

 

 

 

France

4,275 

7,045 

2,003 

13,323 

2,392 

10,931 

Germany

8,868 

4,836 

2,138 

15,842 

4,207 

11,635 

Netherlands

2,809 

563 

6,699 

10,071 

1,061 

9,010 

United States

7,677 

6,012 

8,138 

21,827 

5,099 

16,728 

Japan

8,291 

5,441 

375 

14,107 

14,106 

 

160


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Key IFRS 9 terms and differences to the prior IAS accounting standard and regulatory framework (audited)

 

Attribute

IFRS 9

IAS 39

Regulatory (CRR)

Default/credit impairment

To determine the risk of a default occurring, management applies a default definition that is consistent with the Basel/regulatory definition of default.

 

Assets that are defaulted are shown as credit impaired. RBS uses 90 days past due as a consistent measure for default across all product classes. The population of credit impaired assets is broadly consistent with IAS 39, though measurement differs because of the application of MES. Assets that were categorised as potential problems with no impairment provision are now categorised as Stage 3.

Default aligned to loss events, all financial assets where an impairment event had taken place – 100% probability of default and an internal asset quality grade of AQ10 – were classed as non-performing.

 

Impaired financial assets were those for which there was objective evidence that the amount or timing of future cash flows had been adversely impacted since initial recognition.

A default shall be considered to have occurred with regard to a particular financial asset when either or both of the following have taken place:
RBS considers that the customer is unlikely to pay its credit obligations without recourse by the institution to actions such as realising security;
The customer is past due more than 90 days.


For Personal exposures, the definition of default may be applied at the level of an individual credit facility rather than in relation to the total obligations of a borrower.

Probability of default (PD)

PD is the likelihood of default assessed on the prevailing economic conditions at the reporting date (point in time), adjusted to take into account estimates of future economic conditions that are likely to impact the risk of default; it will not equate to a long run average.  

Regulatory PDs adjusted to point in time metrics were used in the latent provision calculation.

The likelihood that a customer will fail to make full and timely repayment of credit obligations over a one year time horizon.

 

For Wholesale, PD models reflect losses that would arise through-the-cycle; this represents a long run average view of default levels.

 

For Personal, the prevailing economic conditions at the reporting date (point-in-time) are used.

Significant increase in credit risk (SICR)

A framework incorporating both quantitative and qualitative measures aligned to the Group’s current risk management framework has been established. Credit deterioration will be a management decision, subject to approval by governing bodies such as the Provisions Committee.

 

The staging assessment requires a definition of when a SICR has occurred; this moves the loss calculation for financial assets from a 12 month horizon to a lifetime horizon. Management has established an approach that is primarily informed by the increase in lifetime probability of default, with additional qualitative measures to account for assets where PD does not move, but a high risk factor is determined.

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

Forward-looking and multiple scenarios

The evaluation of future cash flows, the risk of default and impairment loss should take into account expectations of economic changes that are reasonable.

 

More than one outcome should be considered to ensure that the resulting estimation of impairment is not biased towards a particular expectation of economic growth.

Financial asset carrying values based upon the expectation of future cash flows.

Not applicable.

 

161


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Credit risk continued

Key IFRS 9 terms and differences to the prior IAS accounting standard and regulatory framework (audited)

 

Attribute

IFRS 9

IAS 39

Regulatory (CRR)

Loss given default (LGD)

LGD is a current assessment of the amount that will be recovered in the event of default, taking account of future conditions. It may occasionally equate to the regulatory view albeit with conservatism and downturn assumptions generally removed.

Regulatory LGD values were often used for calculating collective and latent provisions; bespoke LGDs were also used.

An estimate of the amount that will not be recovered in the event of default, plus the cost of debt collection activities and the delay in cash recovery. LGD is a downturn based metric, representing a prudent view of recovery in adverse economic conditions.

Exposure at default (EAD)

Expected balance sheet exposure at default. It differs from the regulatory method as follows:
It includes the effect of amortisation; and

It caps exposure at the contractual limit.

Based on the current drawn balance plus future committed drawdowns.

Models are used to provide estimates of credit facility utilisation at the time of a customer default, recognising that customers may make further drawings on unused credit facilities prior to default or that exposures may increase due to market movements. EAD cannot be lower than the reported balance sheet, but can be reduced by a legally enforceable netting agreement.

Date of initial recognition

The reference date used to assess a significant increase in credit risk is as follows. Term lending: the date the facility became available to the customer. Wholesale revolving products: the date of the last substantive credit review (typically annual) or, if later, the date facility became available to the customer. Retail Cards:  the account opening date or, if later, the date the card was subject to a regular three year review or the date of any subsequent limit increases. Current accounts/overdrafts: the account opening date or, if later, the date of initial granting of overdraft facility or of limit increases. 

Not applicable for impairment but defined as the date when the entity becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.

Not applicable.

Modification

A modification occurs when the contractual cash flows of a financial asset are renegotiated or otherwise modified and the renegotiation or modification does not result in derecognition. A modification requires immediate recognition in the income statement of any impact on the carrying value and effective interest rate (EIR) or examples of modification events include forbearance and distressed restructuring. The financial impact is recognised in the income statement as an impairment release/(loss).

Modification was not separately defined but accounting impact arose as an EIR adjustment on changes that were not derecognition or impairment events.

Not applicable.

 

162


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Market risk

RBS is exposed to non-traded market risk through its banking activities and to traded market risk through its trading activities. Non-traded and traded market risk exposures are managed separately. As a result, each type of market risk is discussed separately. The non-traded market risk section begins below. The traded market risk section begins on page 169.

 

Pension-related activities also give rise to market risk. Refer to page 172 for more information on risk related to pensions.

 

Non-traded market risk

Definition

Non-traded market risk is the risk to the value of assets or liabilities outside the trading book, or the risk to income, that arises from changes in market prices such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates and equity prices, or from changes in managed rates.

 

The following disclosures in this section are audited:

·       Internal banking book VaR.

·       Foreign exchange risk.

·       Equity risk.

 

Sources of risk

RBS’s non-traded market risk exposure is largely managed in line with the following key categories: interest rate risk; credit spread risk; foreign exchange risk; equity risk; and accounting volatility risk.

 

Interest rate risk

Non-traded interest rate risk (NTIRR) arises from the provision to customers of a range of banking products with differing interest rate characteristics. When aggregated, these products form portfolios of assets and liabilities with varying degrees of sensitivity to changes in market interest rates. Mismatches can give rise to volatility in net interest income as interest rates vary. NTIRR comprises three primary risk types: gap risk, basis risk and option risk.

 

Credit spread risk

Credit spread risk arises from the potential adverse economic impact of a change in the spread between bond yields and swap rates, where the bond portfolios are accounted at fair value through equity.

 

Foreign exchange risk

Non-traded foreign exchange risk arises from two main sources:

·       Structural foreign exchange risk – arises from the capital deployed in foreign subsidiaries, branches and joint arrangements and related currency funding where it differs from sterling.

·       Non-trading book foreign exchange risk – arises from customer transactions and profits and losses that are in a currency other than the functional currency of the transacting operation.

 

Equity risk

Non-traded equity risk is the potential variation in income and reserves arising from changes in the values of equity positions. Equity exposures may arise through strategic acquisitions, venture capital investments and certain restructuring arrangements.

 

Accounting volatility risk

Accounting volatility risk arises when an exposure is accounted for at amortised cost but economically hedged by a derivative that is accounted for at fair value. Although this is not an economic risk, the difference in accounting between the exposure and the hedge creates volatility in the income statement.

 

Key developments in 2018

·       Interest rates rose in 2018 but remained low by historical standards. The UK base rate rose from 0.5% to 0.75% in August 2018. The five-year swap rate was 1.22% at 31 December 2018 compared to 0.98% at 31 December 2017.

·       Sterling weakened against the US dollar and slightly against the euro over the year.

·       The persistence of low interest rates and weaker sterling partly reflected uncertainty over Brexit.

·       Compliance with ring-fencing regulations resulted in the split of non-traded market risk management responsibility for NatWest Holdings and its subsidiaries from non-ring-fenced companies.

·       Changes in accounting treatment under IFRS 9, which took effect from 1 January 2018, had an impact on the way certain non-traded market risk exposures are calculated. Some structured loans were recognised at fair value through the profit and loss on transition to IFRS 9. However, this exposure had declined by the end of the year, mainly due to asset disposals.

 

Risk governance

Responsibility for identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling market risk arising from non-trading activities lies with the relevant business. Oversight is provided by the independent Risk function.

 

Risk positions are reported monthly to the Executive Risk Committee and quarterly to the Board Risk Committee, as well as to the Asset & Liability Management Committee (monthly in the case of interest rate, credit spread and accounting volatility risks and quarterly in the case of foreign exchange and equity risks).

 

Market risk policy statements set out the governance and risk management framework.

 

Risk appetite

RBS’s qualitative appetite is set out in the non-traded market risk appetite statement.

 

Its quantitative appetite is expressed in terms of value-at-risk (VaR), stressed value-at-risk (SVaR), sensitivity and stress limits, and earnings-at-risk limits. These limits comprise both board risk measures (which are approved by the RBS Board on the recommendation of the Board Risk Committee) and key risk measures, which are approved by the Asset & Liability Management Committee.

 

The limits are reviewed to reflect changes in risk appetite, business plans, portfolio composition and the market and economic environments.

 

To ensure approved limits are not breached and that RBS remains within its risk appetite, triggers at RBS and lower levels have been set and are actively managed.

 

For further information on risk appetite, refer to page 104.

 

Risk controls

For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.

 

Risk monitoring and mitigation

Interest rate risk

NTIRR factors are grouped into the following categories:

·       Gap risk – arises from the timing of rate changes in non-trading book instruments. The extent of gap risk depends on whether changes to the term structure of interest rates occur consistently across the yield curve (parallel risk) or differentially by period (non-parallel risk).

·       Basis risk – captures the impact of relative changes in interest rates for financial instruments that have similar tenors but are priced using different interest rate indices, or on the same interest rate indices but with different tenors.

·       Option risk – arises from option derivative positions or from optional elements embedded in assets, liabilities and/or off-balance sheet items, where RBS or its customer can alter the level and timing of their cash flows. Option risk also includes pipeline risk.

 

Due to the long-term nature of many retail and commercial portfolios – and their varied interest rate repricing characteristics and maturities – net interest income is likely to vary from period to period, even if interest rates remain the same. New business originated in any period will alter RBS’s interest rate sensitivity if the resulting portfolio differs

 

163


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Non-traded market risk continued

from portfolios originated in prior periods, depending on the extent to which exposure has been hedged. To manage exposures within appetite, RBS aggregates its interest rate positions and hedges these externally using cash and derivatives (primarily interest rate swaps).

 

Credit spread risk

RBS’s bond portfolios primarily comprise high-quality securities maintained as a liquidity buffer to ensure RBS can continue to meet its obligations in the event that access to wholesale funding markets is restricted. Additionally other high-quality bond portfolios are held for collateral purposes and to support payment systems.

 

Credit spread risk is monitored daily through sensitivities and VaR measures. The dealing authorities in place for the bond portfolios further mitigate the risk by imposing constraints by duration, asset class and credit rating. Exposures and limit utilisations are reported to senior management on a daily basis.

 

Foreign exchange risk

The only material non-traded open currency positions are the structural foreign exchange exposures arising from investments in foreign subsidiaries, branches and associates and their related currency funding. These exposures are assessed and managed to predefined risk appetite levels under delegated authority from the Asset & Liability Management Committee. RBS seeks to limit the potential volatility impact on its CET1 ratio from exchange rate movements by maintaining a structural open currency position. Gains or losses arising from the retranslation of net investments in overseas operations are recognised in equity reserves and reduce the sensitivity of capital ratios to foreign exchange rate movements primarily arising from the retranslation of non-sterling-denominated RWAs. Sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to RWAs equals the CET1 ratio.

 

The sensitivity of this ratio to exchange rates is monitored monthly and reported to the Asset & Liability Management Committee at least quarterly. Foreign exchange exposures arising from customer transactions are sold down by businesses on a regular basis in line with RBS policy.

 

Equity risk

Non-traded equity risk is the potential variation in the income and reserves arising from changes in equity valuations. Any such risk is identified prior to any investments and then mitigated through a framework of controls.

 

Investments, acquisitions or disposals of a strategic nature are referred to the Acquisitions & Disposals Committee. Once approved by the Acquisitions & Disposals Committee for execution, such transactions are referred for approval to the Board, the Executive Committee, the Chief Executive, the Chief Financial Officer or as otherwise required. Decisions to acquire or hold equity positions in the non-trading book that are not of a strategic nature, such as customer restructurings, are taken by authorised persons with delegated authority under the credit approval framework.

 

Accounting volatility risk

Accounting volatility can be mitigated through hedge accounting. The profit and loss impact of the derivatives can be mitigated by marking the exposure to market. However, volatility will remain in cases where accounting rules mean that hedge accounting is not an option. Accounting volatility risk is reported to the Asset & Liability Management Committee monthly and capitalised as part of the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process.

 

Risk measurement

The market risk exposures arising as a result of RBS’s retail and commercial banking activities are measured using a combination of value-based metrics (VaR and sensitivities) and earnings-based metrics, as explained in greater detail for each of the exposure types discussed in this section. The following table presents one-day internal banking book VaR at a 99% confidence level, split by risk type.

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

Average

Maximum

Minimum

Period end

 

Average

Maximum

Minimum

Period end

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

Interest rate

14.4 

28.2 

7.3 

11.6 

 

9.1 

15.3 

5.6 

5.6 

Euro

2.1 

3.9 

1.0 

1.0 

 

3.3 

4.3 

2.3 

3.3 

Sterling

14.5 

26.0 

7.9 

13.3 

 

6.3 

13.8 

1.8 

2.8 

US dollar

4.7 

8.7 

1.4 

8.7 

 

5.5 

8.8 

2.1 

7.7 

Other

0.5 

0.7 

0.3 

0.7 

 

1.0 

1.1 

0.8 

0.8 

Credit spread

59.7 

77.8 

49.4 

77.8 

 

60.6 

82.4 

47.4 

49.7 

Structural foreign exchange rate

13.4 

32.7 

5.9 

13.0 

 

12.4 

17.2 

9.3 

15.4 

Pipeline risk (1)

0.6 

1.3 

0.3 

0.4 

 

0.9 

1.7 

0.2 

1.0 

Diversification (2)

(24.9)

 

 

(20.5)

 

(19.2)

 

 

(17.3)

Total

63.0 

82.3 

54.9 

82.3 

 

63.8 

83.1 

54.4 

54.4 

 

 

Notes:

(1)     Pipeline risk is the risk of loss arising from personal customers owning an option to draw down a loan – typically a mortgage – at a committed rate, where interest rate changes may result in greater or fewer customers than anticipated taking up the committed offer.

(2)     RBS benefits from diversification across various financial instrument types, currencies and markets. The extent of the diversification benefit depends on the correlation between the assets and risk factors in the portfolio at a particular time. The diversification factor is the sum of the VaR on individual risk types less the total portfolio VaR.

 

Key points (audited)

·          On average, non-traded VaR remained broadly unchanged year on year.

·          The main component of the VaR is credit spread risk. VaR peaked at year-end, mainly driven by higher volatility in credit spreads due to economic uncertainty that affected the UK Gilts portfolio.

·          Interest rate VaR peaked in January driven by the impact of transition to IFRS 9 on interest rate exposure in the structured loan portfolio. It subsequently declined, driven by additional hedging put in place during H1 2018 and asset disposals during H2 2018.

·          Structural foreign exchange rate VaR peaked in H1 2018. The VaR measures the residual spot sensitivity of the CET1 ratio to exchange rate movements. CET1 ratio sensitivity to the sterling/US dollar exchange rate increased in May when foreign exchange rate options were exercised to hedge additional US dollar liabilities that were recognised when the agreement in principle with the US Department of Justice was reached.

 

164


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Non-traded market risk continued

Structural hedging

RBS has the benefit of a significant pool of stable, non and low interest-bearing liabilities, principally comprising equity and money transmission accounts. These balances are usually hedged, either by investing directly in longer-term fixed-rate assets (such as fixed-rate mortgages or UK government Gilts) or by using interest rate swaps, which are generally booked as cash flow hedges of floating-rate assets, in order to provide a consistent and predictable revenue stream.

 

After hedging the net interest rate exposure externally, RBS allocates income to equity or products in structural hedges by reference to the relevant interest rate swap curve. Over time, this approach has provided a basis for stable income attribution to products and interest rate returns. The programme aims to track a time series of medium-term swap rates, but the yield will be affected by changes in product volumes and RBS’s capital composition.

 

The table below presents the incremental income allocation (above three-month LIBOR), total income allocation (including three-month LIBOR), the period end and average notional balances and the total yield (including three-month LIBOR) associated with the structural hedges managed by RBS.

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

Incremental

Total

Period end

Average

Total

 

Incremental

Total

Period end

Average

Total

 

income

income

notional

notional

yield

 

income

income

notional

notional

yield

 

£m

£m

£bn

£bn

%

 

£m

£m

£bn

£bn

%

Equity structural hedging

469 

672 

29 

29 

2.33 

 

628 

703 

28 

28 

2.48 

Product structural hedging

368 

1,104 

110 

108 

1.02 

 

680 

1,027 

107 

101 

1.02 

Other structural hedges

89 

167 

22 

22 

0.77 

 

147 

165 

21 

20 

0.83 

Total

926 

1,943 

161 

159 

1.22 

 

1,455 

1,895 

156 

149 

1.27 

 

Equity structural hedges refer to income allocated primarily to equity and reserves. This includes NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Holdings.  Product structural hedges refer to income allocated to customer products, for example current accounts, in NatWest Holdings. Other structural hedges refer to hedges managed by the subsidiaries (Private Banking, Ulster Bank Limited, UBIDAC and RBSI). A significant proportion of Other structural hedges are euro-denominated.

 

The table below presents the incremental income associated with product structural hedges at segment level. (Restated: see Note 4 for details)

 

 

2018 

2017 

£m 

£m 

UK Personal Banking

166 

303 

Commercial Banking

200 

372 

Other

Total

368 

680 

 

Key points

·       The incremental income from the structural hedge was lower than that in 2017 primarily due to the increase in three-month LIBOR during 2018. The overall yield of the hedge was relatively stable.

·       Five-year and ten-year sterling swap rates at 31 December 2018 were 1.22% and 1.35%, respectively. Equity structural hedges amortise over ten years whilst product hedges amortise over five years. Other structural hedges also amortise over five years except a small proportion of RBSI’s hedge which amortises over ten years.

·       Compliance with ring-fencing regulations during H2 2018 resulted in a split of the equity structural hedge between NatWest Holdings and NatWest Markets. Approximately £6 billion of the equity hedge was allocated to NWM Plc in 2018.

·       Additionally, as a result of ring-fencing legislation, RBSI is not able to hedge with NatWest Holdings. Instead of placing hedges with NatWest Holdings Treasury, RBSI now hedges its structural exposure with bonds, primarily UK government Gilts.

 

165


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Non-traded market risk continued

Interest rate risk

NTIRR can be measured from either an economic value-based or earnings-based perspective, or a combination of the two. Value-based approaches measure the change in value of the balance sheet assets and liabilities over a longer timeframe, including all cash flows. Earnings-based approaches measure the potential short-term (generally one-year) impact on the income statement of changes in interest rates.

 

RBS uses VaR as its value-based approach and sensitivity of net interest income (NII) as its earnings-based approach.

 

These two approaches provide different yet complementary views of the impact of interest rate risk on the balance sheet at a point in time. The scenarios employed in the NII sensitivity approach incorporate business assumptions and simulated modifications in customer behaviour as interest rates change. In contrast, the VaR approach assumes static underlying positions and therefore does not provide a dynamic measurement of interest rate risk. In addition, while NII sensitivity calculations are measured to a 12-month horizon and thus provide a shorter-term view of the risks on the balance sheet, the VaR approach can identify risks not captured in the sensitivity analysis, in particular the impact of duration and repricing risk on earnings beyond 12 months.

 

Value-at-risk

VaR is a statistical estimate of the potential change in the market value of a portfolio (and, thus, the impact on the income statement) over a specified time horizon at a given confidence level.

 

RBS’s standard VaR metrics – which assume a time horizon of one trading day and a confidence level of 99% – are based on interest rate repricing gaps at the reporting date. Daily rate moves are modelled using observations from the last 500 business days. These incorporate customer products plus associated funding and hedging transactions as well as non-financial assets and liabilities. Behavioural assumptions are applied as appropriate.

 

The non-traded interest rate risk VaR metrics for RBS’s retail and commercial banking activities are included in the banking book VaR table on page 165. The VaR captures the risk resulting from mismatches in the repricing dates of assets and liabilities.

 

It includes any mismatch between structural hedges and stable non and low interest-bearing liabilities such as equity and money transmission accounts as regards their interest rate repricing behavioural profile.

 

Sensitivity of net interest earnings

Net interest earnings are sensitive to changes in the level of interest rates because changes to coupons on some customer products do not always match changes in market rates of interest or central bank policy rates.

 

Earnings sensitivity to rate movements is derived from a central forecast over a 12-month period. A simplified scenario is shown below based on the period-end balance sheet (assuming that non-interest rate variables remain constant). Market-implied forward rates are used to generate the base case earnings forecast, which is then subject to interest rate shocks. The variance between the central forecast and the shock gives an indication of underlying sensitivity to interest rate movements.

 

The sensitivity of net interest earnings table shows the expected impact, over 12 months, to an immediate upward or downward change of 25 and 100 basis points to all interest rates. Yield curves are expected to move in parallel though interest rates are assumed to floor at zero per cent or, for euro rates, at the current negative rate.

 

The main driver of earnings sensitivity relates to interest rate pass-through assumptions on customer products. The scenario also captures the impact of the reinvestment of maturing structural hedges at higher or lower rates than the base-case earnings sensitivity and mismatches in the repricing dates of loans and deposits.

 

However, reported sensitivities should not be considered a guide to future performance. They do not capture potential management action in response to sudden changes in the interest rate environment. Actions that could reduce NII sensitivity and mitigate adverse impacts are changes in pricing strategies on customer loans and deposits as well as hedging. Management action may also be targeted at stabilising total income taking into account non-interest income in addition to NII.

 

 

 

Parallel shifts in yield curve

 

 

 

+25 basis points

 

-25 basis points

 

+100 basis points

 

-100 basis points

 

2018 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

Euro

 

29 

 

(3)

 

114 

 

(1)

 

Sterling

 

152 

 

(201)

 

651 

 

(717)

 

US dollar

 

15 

 

(8)

 

63 

 

(42)

 

Other

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

197 

 

(210)

 

830 

 

(757)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Euro

 

13 

 

(8)

 

53 

 

(11)

 

Sterling

 

151 

 

(218)

 

664 

 

(504)

 

US dollar

 

14 

 

(13)

 

58 

 

(49)

 

Other

 

— 

 

(4)

 

— 

 

(7)

 

Total

 

178 

 

(243)

 

775 

 

(571)

 

 

Key point

·                  Net interest earnings sensitivity to a 100-basis-point downward shift in yield curves rose in 2018 compared to 2017. In the shock scenarios, rates fell further at 31 December 2018 than at 31 December 2017 before hitting an assumed zero per cent floor on interest rates. This was mainly due to rises in short-term cash rates since December 2017, which increased the impact of the rate shock. This effect was not seen in the 25-basis-point downward shift as most rates remain above zero per cent after the interest rate shock.

 

166


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Non-traded market risk continued

The tables below show the net interest earnings sensitivity on a one-year, two-year and three-year forward-looking basis to a parallel upward or downward shift in interest rates of 25 basis points. The projection is a simplified sensitivity in which the balance sheet is assumed to be constant, with no change in customer behaviour or margin management strategy as a result of rate changes. The benefit of structural hedges increases (or decreases) as maturing hedges are reinvested over the three-year period.

 

 

 

+25 basis points parallel upward shift

 

-25 basis points parallel downward shift

 

 

Year 1

 

Year 2 (1)

 

Year 3 (1)

 

Year 1

 

Year 2 (1)

 

Year 3 (1)

2018

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Structural hedges

 

32 

 

98 

 

170 

 

(32)

 

(98)

 

(167)

Managed margin (2)

 

150 

 

171 

 

170 

 

(177)

 

(189)

 

(163)

Other

 

15 

 

— 

 

— 

 

(2)

 

— 

 

— 

Total

 

197 

 

269 

 

340 

 

(210)

 

(287)

 

(330)

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Structural hedges

 

33 

 

100 

 

171 

 

(33)

 

(99)

 

(171)

Managed margin (2)

 

153 

 

170 

 

178 

 

(220)

 

(137)

 

(121)

Other

 

(8)

 

— 

 

— 

 

10 

 

— 

 

— 

Total

 

178 

 

270 

 

349 

 

(243)

 

(236)

 

(292)

 

Notes:

(1)

 

The projections for Year 2 and Year 3 consider only the main drivers of earnings sensitivity, namely structural hedging and margin management.

(2)

 

Primarily current accounts and savings accounts.

 

 

Sensitivity of fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) and cash flow hedging reserves to interest rate movements.

RBS holds most of the bonds in its liquidity portfolio at fair value. Valuation changes that are not hedged (or not in effective hedge accounting relationships) are recognised in FVOCI reserves. This is a component of credit spread risk.

 

Interest rate swaps are used to implement the structural hedging programme and also hedging of some personal and commercial lending portfolios, primarily fixed rate mortgages. Generally these swaps are booked in hedge accounting relationships. Changes in the valuation of swaps that are in effective cash flow hedge accounting relationships are recognised in cash flow hedge reserves.

 

The table below shows the sensitivity of FVOCI reserves and cash flow hedge reserves to a parallel shift in all rates. In this analysis, interest rates have not been floored at zero. Hedges are assumed to be fully effective. Hedge ineffectiveness would be expected to result in a portion of the reserve gains or losses shown below being recognised in P&L instead of reserves. Hedge ineffectiveness P&L is monitored and the effectiveness of cash flow and fair value hedge relationships are regularly tested in accordance with IFRS requirements. Note that a movement in the FVOCI reserve would have an impact on CET1 capital but a movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not be expected to do so. Volatility in both reserves affects tangible net asset value.

 

 

 

 

+25 basis points

 

-25 basis points

 

+100 basis points

 

-100 basis points

 

2018 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

FVOCI reserves

 

(55)

 

55 

 

(220)

 

216 

 

Cash flow hedge reserves

 

(318)

 

323 

 

(1,250)

 

1,315 

 

Total

 

(373)

 

378 

 

(1,470)

 

1,531 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FVOCI reserves

 

(41)

 

42 

 

(164)

 

167 

 

Cash flow hedge reserves

 

(443)

 

448 

 

(1,744)

 

1,819 

 

Total

 

(484)

 

490 

 

(1,908)

 

1,986 

 

 

Key points

·          The sensitivity of the cash flow hedge reserve to interest rate movements fell in 2018. In part this reflected an increase in customer demand for longer fixed rates on mortgage products. Customers increasingly opted to fix mortgage rates for five years. This reduced the requirement for five-year interest rate swaps.

 

·          The increase in FVOCI reserve sensitivity was driven by the increase in the bonds held in liquidity portfolios due to the establishment of the NatWest Markets Plc liquid asset buffer as a result of ring-fencing implementation.

 

167


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Non-traded market risk continued

Foreign exchange risk (audited)

The table below shows structural foreign currency exposures.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net investments in

 

Net

 

Structural foreign

 

 

 

Residual structural

 

 

 

Net investments in

 

Non-controlling

 

foreign operations

 

investment

 

currency exposures

 

Economic

 

foreign currency

 

 

 

foreign operations

 

interests (NCI) (1)

 

excluding NCI

 

hedges

 

pre-economic hedges

 

hedges (2)

 

exposures

 

2018 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

US dollar

 

553 

 

— 

 

553 

 

(4)

 

549 

 

(549)

 

— 

 

Euro

 

6,428 

 

33 

 

6,395 

 

(853)

 

5,542 

 

— 

 

5,542 

 

Other non-sterling

 

2,600 

 

710 

 

1,890 

 

(1,249)

 

641 

 

(81)

 

560 

 

Total

 

9,581 

 

743 

 

8,838 

 

(2,106)

 

6,732 

 

(630)

 

6,102 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

US dollar

 

766 

 

— 

 

766 

 

(14)

 

752 

 

(752)

 

— 

 

Euro

 

7,160 

 

61 

 

7,099 

 

(342)

 

6,757 

 

(2,224)

 

4,533 

 

Other non-sterling

 

2,493 

 

645 

 

1,848 

 

(930)

 

918 

 

(453)

 

465 

 

Total

 

10,419 

 

706 

 

9,713 

 

(1,286)

 

8,427 

 

(3,429)

 

4,998 

 

 

Notes:

(1)      Non-controlling interests (NCI) represents the structural foreign exchange exposure not attributable to owners’ equity.

(2)      Economic hedges of US dollar net investments in foreign operations represent US dollar equity securities that do not qualify as net investment hedges for accounting purposes. They provide an offset to structural foreign exchange exposures to the extent that there are net assets in overseas operations available. Economic hedges of other currency net investments in foreign operations represent monetary liabilities that are not booked as net investment hedges.

 

Key points

·       The main driver of the reduction in structural foreign currency exposures was lower net investment in eurozone subsidiaries as a result of the 1.5 billion dividend paid by UBI DAC to NatWest Holdings Limited during Q1 2018. The reduction in US dollar exposures reflected the impact of the agreement with the US Department of Justice in relation to RMBS conduct fines.

·       Euro economic hedges reduced as a result of the redemption of equity securities.

·       Changes in exchange rates affect equity in proportion to structural foreign currency exposures. At 31 December 2018, a 5% strengthening in all foreign currencies against sterling results in a £0.4 billion increase in equity reserves, while a 5% weakening in all foreign currencies against sterling results in a £0.3 billion reduction in equity reserves.

 

Equity risk (audited)

Equity positions are carried at fair value on the balance sheet based on available market prices where possible. If market prices are not available, fair value is based on appropriate valuation techniques or management estimates.

 

The table below shows the balance sheet carrying value of non-traded book equity positions.

 

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Exchange-traded equity

 

41 

 

41 

Private equity

 

303 

 

243 

Other

 

87 

 

136 

 

 

431 

 

420 

 

The exposures may take the form of (i) equity shares listed on a recognised exchange, (ii) private equity shares defined as unlisted equity shares with no observable market parameters or (iii) other unlisted equity shares.

 

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Net realised gains arising from disposals

 

23 

 

82 

Unrealised gains included in Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital

 

153 

 

60 

 

Note:

(1)      Includes gains or losses on FVOCI instruments only.

 

168


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Traded market risk

Definition

Traded market risk is the risk arising from changes in fair value on positions, assets, liabilities or commitments in trading portfolios as a result of fluctuations in market prices.

 

The following disclosures in this section are audited:

·       Traded VaR (1-day 99%)

 

Sources of risk

Traded market risk mainly arises from RBS’s trading activities. These activities provide a range of financing, risk management and investment services to clients – including corporations and financial institutions – around the world. From a market risk perspective, activities are focused on rates; currencies; securitised products; and traded credit. RBS undertakes transactions in financial instruments including debt securities, as well as securities financing and derivatives.

 

All material traded market risk resides in NatWest Markets. The key categories are interest rate risk, credit spread risk and foreign currency price risk.

 

Trading activities may also give rise to counterparty credit risk. For further detail refer to the Credit risk section on page 123.

 

Key developments in 2018

·       Geopolitical risk resulted in periods of market volatility during the year. This mainly related to threats of a trade war between China and the US, elections in Italy and negotiations on a Brexit deal. European interest rates remained at low levels, although the Bank of England and US Federal Reserve continued raising rates.

·       Traded VaR fluctuated throughout 2018, reflecting political developments and geopolitical risk, but remained broadly unchanged on an average basis compared to 2017.

 

Risk governance

Responsibility for identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling market risk arising from trading activities lies with the relevant trading business. Oversight is provided by the Market Risk function. Traded market risk positions are reported monthly to the Executive Risk Committee and quarterly to the Board Risk Committee. Market risk policy statements set out the governance and risk management framework.

 

Risk appetite

RBS’s qualitative appetite for traded market risk is set out in the traded market risk appetite statement. Quantitative appetite is expressed in terms of exposure limits. The limit framework at RBS level comprises value-at-risk (VaR) and stressed value-at-risk (SVaR). More details on these are provided on the following pages.

 

The limit framework at trading unit level also comprises additional metrics specific to the market risk exposures within its scope. These additional metrics aim to control various risk dimensions such as product type, exposure size, aged inventory, currency and tenor. For each trading business, a document known as a dealing authority compiles details of all applicable limits and trading restrictions.

 

The limits are reviewed to reflect changes in risk appetite, business plans, portfolio composition and the market and economic environments. To ensure approved limits are not breached and that RBS remains within its risk appetite, triggers at RBS and lower levels have been set such that if exposures exceed a specified level, action plans are developed by the relevant business and the Market Risk function and implemented.

 

For more detail on risk appetite, refer to page 104.

 

Risk controls

For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.

 

Risk monitoring and mitigation

Traded market risk is identified and assessed by gathering, analysing, monitoring and reporting market risk information at desk, business, franchise and RBS-wide levels. Industry expertise, continued system developments and techniques such as stress testing are also used to enhance the effectiveness of the identification and assessment of all material market risks.

 

Traded market risk exposures are monitored against limits and analysed daily by market risk reporting and control functions. A daily report summarising the position of exposures against limits at RBS, franchise, business and desk levels is provided to senior management and market risk managers across the function. Limit reporting is supplemented with regulatory capital and stress testing information as well as ad hoc reporting.

 

A risk review of trading businesses is undertaken weekly with senior risk and front office staff. This includes a review of profit and loss drivers, notable position concentrations and other positions of concern.

 

Business profit and loss performance is monitored automatically through loss triggers which, if breached, require a remedial action plan to be agreed between the Market Risk function and the business. The loss triggers are set using both a fall-from-peak approach and an absolute loss level. In addition, regular updates on traded market risk positions are provided to the Executive Risk Committee and Board Risk Committee.

 

Risk measurement (audited)

RBS uses VaR, SVaR and the incremental risk charge to measure traded market risk. Risks that are not adequately captured by VaR or SVaR are captured by the Risks Not In VaR (RNIV) framework to ensure that RBS is adequately capitalised for market risk. In addition, stress testing is used to identify any vulnerabilities and potential losses in excess of VaR and SVaR.

 

The key inputs into these measurement methods are market data and risk factor sensitivities. Sensitivities refer to the changes in trade or portfolio value that result from small changes in market parameters that are subject to the market risk limit framework. Revaluation ladders are used in place of sensitivities to capture the impact of large moves in risk factors or the joint impact of two risk factors.

 

These methods have been designed to capture correlation effects and allow RBS to form an aggregated view of its traded market risk across risk types, markets and business lines while also taking into account the characteristics of each risk type.

 

Value-at-risk

For internal risk management purposes, VaR assumes a time horizon of one trading day and a confidence level of 99%.

 

The internal VaR model – which captures all trading book positions including those products approved by the regulator – is based on a historical simulation, utilising market data from the previous 500 days on an equally-weighted basis.

 

The model also captures the potential impact of interest rate risk; credit spread risk; foreign currency price risk; equity price risk; and commodity price risk.

 

When simulating potential movements in such risk factors, a combination of absolute, relative and rescaled returns is used.

 

Testing of the performance and adequacy of the VaR model is done on a regular basis through the following processes:

·       Back-testing – Internal and regulatory back-testing is conducted on a daily basis. (For information on internal back-testing, refer to page 171.)

·       Ongoing model validation – VaR model performance is assessed both regularly and on an ad-hoc basis if market conditions or portfolio profile change significantly.

·       Model Risk Management review – As part of the model lifecycle, all risk models (including the VaR model) are independently reviewed to ensure the model is still fit for purpose given current market conditions and portfolio profile.

 

169


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Traded market risk continued

One-day 99% traded internal VaR

 

 

Traded VaR (1-day 99%)

The table below shows one-day 99% internal VaR for RBS’s trading portfolios, split by exposure type.

 

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Average

 

Maximum

 

Minimum

 

Period end

 

Average

 

Maximum

 

Minimum

 

Period end

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Interest rate

 

14.3 

 

27.3 

 

9.2 

 

13.0 

 

14.1 

 

24.5 

 

8.8 

 

15.3 

Credit spread

 

11.0 

 

24.2 

 

6.9 

 

8.2 

 

12.1 

 

19.4 

 

8.8 

 

16.7 

Currency

 

3.1 

 

7.6 

 

1.4 

 

5.3 

 

4.9 

 

10.0 

 

2.3 

 

3.5 

Equity

 

0.8 

 

1.6 

 

0.3 

 

0.8 

 

1.2 

 

2.1 

 

0.4 

 

0.4 

Commodity

 

0.3 

 

1.0 

 

0.1 

 

0.1 

 

0.4 

 

1.3 

 

— 

 

0.2 

Diversification (1)

 

(10.5)

 

 

 

 

 

(8.8)

 

(12.8)

 

 

 

 

 

(15.3)

Total

 

19.0 

 

35.6 

 

11.7 

 

18.6 

 

19.9 

 

29.5 

 

13.2 

 

20.8 

 

Note:

(1)      RBS benefits from diversification since it reduces risk by allocating positions across various financial instrument types, currencies and markets. The extent of the diversification benefit depends on the correlation between the assets and risk factors in the portfolio at a particular time. The diversification factor is the sum of the VaR on individual risk types less the total portfolio VaR.

 

Key points

·          Although traded VaR fluctuated throughout 2018 as explained earlier, it remained broadly unchanged year-on-year on both an average and period-end basis.

·          The peaks in January, May and July were largely related to bond syndication activity and, in the case of January, long euro rates.

 

170


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Traded market risk continued

VaR back-testing

The main approach employed to assess the VaR model’s ongoing performance is back-testing, which counts the number of days when a loss exceeds the corresponding daily VaR estimate, measured at a 99% confidence level.

 

Two types of profit and loss (P&L) are used in back-testing comparisons: Actual P&L and Hypothetical (Hypo) P&L.

 

The Actual P&L for a particular business day is the firm’s actual P&L in respect of trading activities, including intraday activities, adjusted by stripping out fees and commissions, brokerage, and additions to and releases from reserves not directly related to market risk.

 

The Hypo P&L reflects the firm’s Actual P&L excluding any intra-day activities.

 

A portfolio is said to produce a back-testing exception when the Actual or Hypo P&L exceeds the VaR level on a given day. Such an event may be caused by a large market movement or may highlight issues such as missing risk factors or inappropriate time series. Any such issues identified are analysed and addressed through appropriate remediation or development action. Both Actual and Hypo back-testing exceptions are monitored.

 

The table below shows internal back-testing exceptions for the 250-business-day period to 31 December 2018 for one-day 99% traded internal VaR compared with Actual and Hypo P&L for the major NatWest Markets businesses.

 

 

 

Back-testing exceptions

 

 

 

Actual

 

Hypo

 

Rates

 

4

 

8

 

Currencies

 

 

4

 

Credit

 

 

 

 

Key points

·       Statistically RBS would expect to see back-testing exceptions 1% of the time over the 250-day period.

·       The exceptions in the Rates business were mainly driven by the increased volatility connected with large market movements due to political uncertainty in Italy and Spain.

·       The exceptions in the Currencies business were mainly due to market movements.

 

Stressed VaR (SVaR)

As with VaR, the SVaR methodology produces estimates of the potential change in the market value of a portfolio, over a specified time horizon, at a given confidence level. SVaR is a VaR-based measure using historical data from a one-year period of stressed market conditions.

 

A simulation of 99% VaR is run on the current portfolio for each 250-day period from 2005 to the current VaR date, moving forward one day at a time. The SVaR is the worst VaR outcome of the simulated results.

 

This is in contrast with VaR, which is based on a rolling 500-day historical data set. A time horizon of ten trading days is assumed with a confidence level of 99%.

 

The internal traded SVaR model captures all trading book positions.

 

 

 

Period-end 2018
£m

 

Period-end 2017
£m

 

10-day 99% traded internal SVaR

 

161

 

172

 

 

Key point

·       Traded SVaR remained broadly unchanged.

 

Risks not in VaR (RNIVs)

The RNIV framework is used to identify and quantify market risks that are not fully captured by the internal VaR and SVaR models.

 

RNIV calculations form an integral part of ongoing model and data improvement efforts to capture all market risks in scope for model approval in VaR and SVaR.

 

For quantitative disclosures on RNIVs, refer to the Market Risk section of the Pillar 3 Report.

 

Stress testing

For information on stress testing, refer to page 105.

 

Incremental risk charge (IRC)

The IRC model quantifies the impact of rating migration and default events on the market value of instruments with embedded credit risk (in particular, bonds and credit default swaps) held in the trading book. It further captures basis risk between different instruments, maturities and reference entities.

 

Model validation

RBS uses a variety of models to manage and measure market risk. These include pricing models (used for valuation of positions) and risk models (for risk measurement and capital calculation purposes). They are developed and approved in NatWest Markets, with material models subject to independent review by Model Risk Management. For further detail on the independent model validation carried out by Model Risk Management refer to page 105. Information relating to pricing and market risk models is presented below.

 

Pricing models

Pricing models are developed by a dedicated first line team, in conjunction with the trading desk. The models are used to value positions for which prices are not directly observable as well as for the risk management of the portfolio. Any pricing models that are used as the basis for valuing portfolios and records are subject to approval and oversight by asset-level modelled product review committees. These committees comprise representatives of the trading, finance, market risk, model development and model review functions. Approval requires review and approval by these stakeholders as well as Model Risk Management.

 

The review process includes the following steps:

·       The committees prioritise models for review by Model Risk Management, considering the materiality of the risk booked against the model and an assessment of the degree of model risk, which is the valuation uncertainty arising from the choice of modelling assumptions.

·       Model Risk Management quantifies the model risk, which may include comparing the model outputs with those of alternative models developed by Model Risk Management.

·       The sensitivities derived from the pricing models are validated.

·       The conclusions of the review are used to inform risk limits and by the Finance function to inform model reserves.

 

Risk models

All model changes are approved through model governance committees at franchise level. Changes to existing models are subject to Model Risk Management review. RBS follows regulatory guidance for assessing the materiality of extensions and changes to the internal model approach for market risk. In addition to Model Risk Management’s independent oversight – which provides additional assurance that RBS holds appropriate capital for the market risk to which it is exposed – the model testing team monitors the model performance for market risk through back-testing and other processes.

 

171


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Pension risk

Definition

Pension obligation risk is the risk to RBS caused by its contractual or other liabilities to, or with respect to, a pension scheme (whether established for its employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It is also the risk that RBS will make payments or other contributions to, or with respect to, a pension scheme because of a moral obligation or because RBS considers that it needs to do so for some other reason.

 

Sources of risk

RBS has exposure to pension risk through its defined benefit schemes worldwide. The Main section of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (the Main section) is the largest source of pension risk with £43.8 billion of assets and £35.5 of liabilities at 31 December 2018 (2017 – £44.7 billion assets and £37.9 billion liabilities). Further detail on RBS’s pension obligations, including sensitivities to the main risk factors, can be found in Note 5 on the consolidated accounts.

 

Pension scheme liabilities vary with changes in long-term interest rates and inflation as well as with pensionable salaries, the longevity of scheme members and legislation. Pension scheme assets vary with changes in interest rates, inflation expectations, credit spreads, exchange rates, and equity and property prices. RBS is exposed to the risk that the schemes’ assets, together with future returns and additional future contributions, are insufficient to meet liabilities as they fall due. In such circumstances, RBS could be obliged (or might choose) to make additional contributions to the schemes, or be required to hold additional capital to mitigate this risk.

 

Key developments in 2018

·       A Memorandum of Understanding between RBS and the Trustee of the Main section was reached in April 2018, which enabled RBS to bring the pension scheme into alignment with ring-fencing rules and reduce exposure to pension risk.

·       RBS made a £2 billion contribution to the Main section in H2 2018 and it was agreed this could be followed by up to a further £1.5 billion of dividend linked contributions to be paid from 2020, capped at £500 million per year.

·       The contribution to the scheme facilitated a reduction in the risk profile of the fund, principally the sale of approximately £6 billion of quoted equity exposure and the purchase of further interest rate and inflation hedging.

 

Risk governance

The Pension Committee is chaired by the RBS Chief Financial Officer. It receives its authority from the Group Executive Committee and formulates RBS’s view of pension risk. The Pension Committee is a key component of RBS’s approach to managing pension risk and it reviews and monitors risk management, asset strategy and financing issues on behalf of RBS. It also considers investment strategy proposals from the Trustee.

 

For further information on Risk governance, refer to page 103.

 

Risk appetite

RBS maintains an independent view of the risk inherent in its pension funds. RBS has an annually reviewed pension risk appetite statement incorporating defined metrics against which risk is measured. RBS undertakes regular pension risk monitoring and reporting to the Board, the Board Risk Committee and the Pension Committee on the material pension schemes that RBS has an obligation to support.

 

Risk controls

A pension risk management framework is in place to provide formal controls for pension risk reporting, modelling, governance and stress testing. A pension risk policy, which sits within the RBS policy framework, is also in place and is subject to associated framework controls.

 

Risk monitoring and measurement

Pension risk reports are submitted to the Executive Risk Committee and the Board Risk Committee four times a year in the Risk Management Quarterly Report.

 

RBS also undertakes stress tests and scenario analyses on its material defined benefit pension schemes each year. These tests are also used to satisfy the requests of regulatory bodies such as the Bank of England. The stress testing framework includes pension risk capital calculations for the purposes of the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process as well as additional stress tests for a number of internal management purposes.

 

The results of the stress tests and their consequential impact on RBS’s balance sheet, income statement and capital position are incorporated into the overall RBS stress test results.

 

Risk mitigation

The trustee has taken measures to mitigate inflation and interest rate risks, both by investing in suitable financial assets and by entering into inflation and interest rate swaps. The Main section also uses derivatives to manage the allocation of the portfolio to different asset classes and to manage risk within asset classes. The contribution made to the Main section also facilitated a £6 billion reduction in quoted equity exposure and an increase in interest rates and inflation hedging in 2018.

 

Compliance & conduct risk

Definition

Compliance risk is the risk that the behaviour of RBS towards customers fails to comply with laws, regulations, rules, standards and codes of conduct. Such a failure may lead to breaches of regulatory requirements, organisational standards or customer expectations and could result in legal or regulatory sanctions, material financial loss or reputational damage.

 

Conduct risk is the risk that the conduct of RBS and its subsidiaries and its staff towards customers – or in the markets in which it operates – leads to unfair or inappropriate customer outcomes and results in reputational damage, financial loss or both.

 

Sources of risk

Compliance and conduct risks exist across all stages of RBS’s relationships with its customers and arise from a variety of activities including product design, marketing and sales, complaint handling, staff training, and handling of confidential insider information. As set out in Note 27 on the consolidated accounts, RBS and certain members of staff are party to legal proceedings and are subject to investigation and other regulatory action in the UK, the US and other jurisdictions.

 

Key developments in 2018

·       An enhanced compliance and conduct risk framework was developed, setting minimum standards for the management and measurement of compliance and conduct risks across RBS.

·       Enhanced product monitoring and reporting was introduced.

·       Controls, systems and processes were revised to ensure compliance with the UK’s ring-fencing rules.

·       PPI remediation continued in advance of the FCA’s August 2019 deadline for claims (refer to Note 20 on the consolidated accounts).

·       Work to address legacy GRG complaints continued. The process closed to new complaints in the UK on 22 October 2018.

·       Product and pricing continued to be simplified for new and existing customers.

 

Risk governance

RBS defines appropriate standards of compliance and conduct and ensures adherence to those standards through its risk management framework.

 

172


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Compliance & conduct risk continued

Risk appetite

Risk appetite for compliance and conduct risks is set at Board level. RBS Risk appetite statements articulate the levels of risk that legal entities, franchises and functions work within when pursuing their strategic objectives and business plans.

 

Risk controls

RBS operates a range of controls to ensure its business is conducted in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements, as well as delivering good customer outcomes. A suite of policies addressing compliance and conduct risks set appropriate standards across RBS. Examples of these include the Complaints Management Policy, Client Assets & Money Policy, and Product Lifecycle Policy as well as policies relating to customers in vulnerable situations, cross-border activities and market abuse. Continuous monitoring and targeted assurance is undertaken, as appropriate.

 

Risk monitoring and measurement

Compliance and conduct risks are measured and managed through continuous assessment and reporting to RBS’s senior risk committees and at Board level.

 

The compliance and conduct risk framework facilitates the consistent monitoring and measurement of compliance with laws and regulations and the delivery of consistently good customer outcomes.

 

The first line of defence is responsible for effective risk identification, reporting and monitoring, with oversight, challenge and review by the second line. Compliance and conduct risk management is also integrated into RBS’s strategic planning cycle.

 

Risk mitigation

Activity to mitigate the most-material compliance and conduct risks is carried out across RBS with specific areas of focus in the customer-facing franchises and legal entities. Examples of mitigation include consideration of customer needs in business and product planning, targeted training, complaints management, as well as independent assurance activity. Internal policies help support a strong customer focus across RBS. Independent assessments of compliance with applicable regulations are also carried out at a legal entity level.

 

Financial crime

Definition

Financial crime risk is the risk presented by criminal activity in the form of money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption, sanctions and tax evasion. It does not include fraud risk management.

 

Sources of risk

Financial crime risk may be presented if RBS’s employees, customers or third parties undertake or facilitate financial crime, or if RBS’s products or services are used to facilitate such crime. Financial crime risk is an inherent risk across all of RBS’s lines of business.

 

Key developments in 2018

·       In March 2018, the Federal Reserve Board terminated a Cease & Desist Order originally imposed in July 2011 for financial crime compliance weaknesses identified across RBS’s US businesses and concerns about the level of oversight that the RBS Board of Directors had over large and complex US operations. The termination of the Order followed a multi-year programme of work to establish an enhanced governance and oversight framework, risk management programme and compliance programme.

·       In October 2018, the Federal Reserve Board terminated a Cease & Desist Order originally imposed in December 2013. The Order, which related to RBS Group and RBS plc’s historical compliance with Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) economic sanctions regulations, was terminated following a multi-year programme of work to establish a robust, sustainable OFAC Sanctions compliance framework.

·       While the financial crime governance framework was strengthened during 2018 – along with the introduction of enhanced control effectiveness assurance processes, enhancements to existing risk assessment models, the introduction of a new Anti-Tax Evasion risk assessment; and improved monitoring controls and enhanced investigation processes – the journey of improvement continues.

 

Risk governance

Financial crime risk is principally governed through the Financial Crime Risk Executive Committee, which is chaired by the Chief Financial Crime Officer. The committee reviews and, where appropriate, escalates material risks and issues to the Group Executive Risk Committee and the Group Board Risk Committee.

 

Risk appetite

RBS has no appetite to operate in an environment where systems and controls do not enable RBS to identify, assess, monitor, manage and mitigate financial crime risk. RBS’s systems and controls must be comprehensive and proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of its businesses. RBS has no tolerance to systematically or repeatedly breach relevant financial crime regulations and laws.

 

Risk controls

RBS operates a framework of preventative and detective controls designed to ensure RBS mitigates the risk that it could facilitate financial crime. These controls are supported by a suite of policies, procedures and detailed instructions to ensure they operate effectively.

 

Risk monitoring and measurement

Financial crime risks are identified and reported through continuous risk management and regular monthly reporting to RBS’s senior risk committees and the Board. Quantitative and qualitative data is reviewed and assessed to measure whether financial crime risk is within the Group’s risk appetite.

 

Risk mitigation

Through the financial crime framework, RBS employs relevant policies, systems, processes and controls to mitigate financial crime risk. This would include the use of dedicated screening and monitoring controls to identify people, organisations, transactions and behaviours which might require further investigation or other actions. RBS ensures that centralised expertise is available to detect and disrupt threats to the Group and its customers. Intelligence is shared with law enforcement, regulators and government bodies to strengthen national and international defences against those who would misuse the financial system for criminal motives.

 

Operational risk

Definition

Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events. It arises from day-to-day operations and is relevant to every aspect of the business.

 

Sources of risk

Operational risk may arise from a failure to manage operations, systems, transactions and assets appropriately. This can take the form of human error, an inability to deliver change adequately or on time, the non-availability of technology services, or the loss of customer data. Fraud and theft – as well as the increasing threat of cyber attacks – are sources of operational risk, as is the impact of natural and man-made disasters. Operational risk can also arise from a failure to account for changes in law or regulations or to take appropriate measures to protect assets.

 

173


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Operational risk continued

Key developments in 2018

·       Risk provided oversight of several bank-wide programmes including the Transformation portfolio, structural reform, European Commission (EC) State Aid obligations and Brexit preparations.

·       Key corporate structural reform milestones were delivered, including the implementation of the Financial Services Markets Act Part VII and migration activities to separate the ring-fence bank from the non ring-fenced bank.

·       RBS is well positioned to deliver the activities required to support the Business Banking Switch Scheme that is due to commence in 2019, as part of the Group’s final EC State Aid obligation.

·       RBS has established an Innovation Risk Oversight team to provide bank-wide oversight of its innovation portfolio to help deliver safely and at pace.

·       RBS continued to review its well established incident management and coordination procedures to manage the persistent and evolving nature of information and cyber security risks.

·       Internal security improvement programmes and controls were developed and strengthened to protect RBS and its customers. RBS uses proactive threat management and intelligence processes to identify, manage and mitigate credible threats.

·       RBS continued to reduce and simplify its technology estate through strategic investment and Technology transformation initiatives to limit opportunities for hackers and fraudsters. Improvements in capability were also made to the Security Operations Centre, strengthening controls to prevent data leakage, enhance malware defences and management of user access to key systems.

·       The number of critical customer impacting incidents that RBS experiences continues to reduce year-on-year. There were 17 such incidents in 2018 compared to 20 in 2017.

·       Internal training programmes ensure all employees are aware of the threats facing RBS and remain vigilant to unauthorised attempts to access systems and data.

 

Risk governance

A strong operational risk management function is vital to support RBS’s ambitions to serve its customers better. Improved management of operational risk against defined appetite directly supports the strategic risk objective of improving stakeholder confidence and is vital for stability and reputational integrity.

 

The Operational Risk function, which is the second line of defence, delivers a robust operational risk management framework and culture across RBS.

 

The Operational Risk function is responsible for the execution and continuous improvement of the operational risk management framework.

 

The Operational Risk Executive Committee (OREC) is responsible for reviewing operational risk exposure; identifying and assessing both current and emerging material operational risks; reviewing and monitoring the operational risk profile; and reviewing and approving material operational risk policy changes.

 

Risk appetite

Operational risk appetite supports effective management of material operational risks. It expresses the level and types of operational risk RBS is willing to accept to achieve its strategic objectives and business plans.

 

The Group-wide operational risk appetite statement encompasses the full range of operational risks faced by its legal entities, franchises and functions. A subset of the most material risk appetite measures are defined as board risk measures, which are those that, should the limit be breached, would impact on the ability to achieve business plans and threaten stakeholder confidence.

 

Risk controls

The Control Environment Certification (CEC) process is a half yearly self-assessment by the CEOs of RBS’s franchises and business units, as well as the heads of the support and control functions, providing a view on the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal control environment in a consistent and comparable manner. In line with ring-fencing requirements, from H2 2018 certificates were also produced for the following legal entities: NatWest Holdings Limited; NatWest Markets Plc; The Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited; Ulster Bank Ireland DAC; and Coutts and Co.

 

CEC covers material risks and the underlying key controls, including financial, operational and compliance controls, as well as supporting risk management frameworks. The CEC outcomes, including forward-looking assessments for the next two half-yearly cycles and progress on control environment improvements, are reported to the Board, Group Audit Committee and Board Risk Committee. They are also shared with external auditors.

 

The CEC process helps to ensure compliance with the RBS Policy Framework, Sarbanes-Oxley 404 requirements concerning internal control over financial reporting (as referenced in the Compliance report on page 95), and certain requirements of the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

Risk monitoring and measurement

Risk and control assessments are used across all business areas and support functions to identify and assess material operational and conduct risks and key controls. All risks and controls are mapped to RBS’s Risk Directory. Risk assessments are refreshed at least annually to ensure they remain relevant and capture any emerging risks, with associated trigger processes to ensure risks are reassessed at key periods of change.

 

The process is designed to confirm that risks are effectively managed and prioritised in line with risk appetite. Controls are tested at the appropriate frequency to verify that they remain fit-for-purpose and operate effectively.

 

RBS uses the standardised approach to calculate its Pillar 1 operational risk capital requirement. This is based on multiplying three years’ average historical gross income by coefficients set by the regulator based on business line. As part of the wider Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process an operational risk economic capital model is used to assess Pillar 2A, which is a risk-sensitive add-on to Pillar 1.The model uses historical loss data (internal and external) and forward-looking scenario analysis that is provided by Operational Risk to provide a risk-sensitive view of RBS’s P2A capital requirement.

 

Scenario analysis is used to assess how extreme but plausible operational risks will affect RBS. It provides a forward-looking basis for evaluating and managing operational risk exposures.

 

Refer to the Capital, liquidity and funding risk section for operational risk capital requirement figures.

 

Event and loss data management

The operational risk event and loss data management process ensures RBS captures and records operational risk financial and non financial events that meet defined criteria. Loss data is used for regulatory and industry reporting and is included in capital modelling when calculating economic capital for operational risk. The most serious events are escalated in a simple, standardised process to all senior management, by way of a Group Notifiable Event Process.

 

174


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Operational risk continued

All financial impacts associated with an operational risk event are reported against the date they were recorded in RBS’s financial accounts. A single event can result in multiple losses (or recoveries) that may take time to crystallise. Losses and recoveries with a financial accounting date in 2018 may relate to events that occurred, or were identified in, prior years. RBS purchases insurance against specific losses and to comply with statutory or contractual requirements.

 

Percentage and value of events

At 31 December 2018, events aligned to the clients, products and business practices event category accounted for 98% of RBS’s operational risk losses (compared to 93% in 2017). The increase reflected new or additional conduct-related provisions recorded during 2018, most notably the US Department of Justice mortgage-backed securities-related settlement.

 

 

 

Value of events

 

Volume of events (1)

 

 

£m

 

Proportion

 

Proportion

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2018

 

2017

 

2018

 

2017

Fraud

 

19

 

28

 

1%

 

2%

 

74%

 

74%

Clients, products and business practices (2)

 

1,552

 

1,264

 

98%

 

93%

 

15%

 

12%

Execution, delivery and process management

 

12

 

58

 

1%

 

4%

 

10%

 

9%

Employment practices and workplace safety

 

1

 

5

 

 

1%

 

1%

 

5%

 

 

1,584

 

1,355

 

100%

 

100%

 

100%

 

100%

Notes:

(1)             The calculation in the table above is based on the volume and value of events (the proportion and cost of operational risk events to RBS) where the associated loss is more than or equal to £10,000.

(2)             2017 losses have been restated from £732 million following finalisation of material MBS-related settlements.

 

 

Operational resilience

RBS manages and monitors operational resilience through its risk and control assessments methodology. As challenges to operational resilience become more demanding, given a hostile cyber environment and a greater focus on serving customers through digital platforms, RBS is working with supervisory authorities in the UK to ensure the provision of its products and services can be maintained regardless of the cause of disruption.

 

This is underpinned by setting, monitoring and testing tolerances for key business services, which define the amount of disruption that could be tolerated.

 

Risk mitigation

Risks are mitigated by applying key preventative and detective controls, an integral step in the risk assessment methodology which determines residual risk exposure. Control owners are accountable for the design, execution, performance and maintenance of key controls. Key controls are regularly assessed for adequacy and tested for effectiveness. The results are monitored and, where a material change in performance is identified, the associated risk is re-evaluated.

 

Business risk

Definition

Business risk is the risk that RBS does not have a strategy that is sufficiently well defined to provide clarity on its long-term ambitions to key internal and external stakeholders, or that it is not able to execute upon its chosen strategy as communicated to the market, regulators and other key stakeholders. The risk is that RBS does not deliver its expected business performance which could give rise to a deterioration in stakeholder trust and confidence and/or a breach of regulatory thresholds. RBS may not be able to execute its chosen strategy if there are material changes to RBS’s internal or external operating environment.

 

Sources of risk

Business risk arises as a result of RBS’s exposure to the macro-economy (including economic and political factors), the competitive environment, regulatory and technological changes. In addition, internal factors such as the ability to deliver complex change, volatility in sales volumes, input costs, and other operational risks affect RBS’s ability to execute its chosen strategic business plan as intended and thus contribute to business risk.

 

Key developments in 2018

·          As part of its requirement by UK law to separate its everyday banking services from its investment banking by 1 January 2019 – known as ring-fencing – RBS made a number of changes to the way its business was structured. Certain Personal Banking businesses and Commercial Banking businesses of The Royal Bank of Scotland plc transferred to Adam & Company PLC and National Westminster Bank Plc. The role of issuer under the covered bond programme transferred to National Westminster Bank Plc. Adam & Company PLC was renamed “The Royal Bank of Scotland plc”, and The Royal Bank of Scotland plc was renamed “NatWest Markets Plc”. The Royal Bank of Scotland plc superseded the prior issuer (former RBS plc) in respect of banknotes.

 

·          RBS also restructured the NatWest Markets Plc (former RBS plc) capital structure. The shares in NatWest Holdings Limited, which owns the ring-fenced sub-group, were distributed to RBS. This separated the ring-fenced sub-group from the non-ring-fenced entities, as required by ring-fencing legislation. RBS also transferred the customer interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives business of National Westminster Bank Plc to NatWest Markets Plc.

·          RBS reached a civil settlement in principle with the US Department of Justice in relation its investigation into RBS’s issuance and underwriting of US Residential Mortgage Backed Securities (RMBS) between 2005 and 2007, resulting in a £1.0 billion additional provision.

·          UK Government Investments Limited announced the successful completion of the disposal of part of HM Treasury’s shareholding in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, representing approximately 7.7% of the ordinary share capital of the Group. HM Treasury’s shareholding in RBS now represents 62.3% of the Group’s ordinary share capital.

·          On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in covenant.

 

175


 

Capital and risk management

 

 

 

 

Business risk  continued

·          RBS declared an interim ordinary dividend of 2 pence per share – the first since September 2008.

 

Risk governance

The Board has ultimate responsibility for business risk and for approving strategic plans, initiatives and changes to strategic direction.

 

RBS’s strategic planning process is managed by Strategy and Corporate Development. The Risk and Finance functions are key contributors to strategic planning.

 

Responsibility for the day-to-day management of business risk lies primarily with the franchises, with oversight by the Finance function. The franchises are responsible for delivery of their business plans and the management of such factors as pricing, sales volumes, marketing expenditure and other factors that can introduce volatility into earnings.

 

Risk appetite

Risk Appetite defines the level and types of risk it is willing to accept in order to achieve its strategic objectives and business plans. RBS articulates its appetite for business risk through the implementation of qualitative risk appetite statements and quantitative risk measures at franchise and function level. These statements and measures help determine the level and types of business risk RBS is willing to accept.

 

Risk controls

For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.

 

Risk monitoring and measurement

Business risk is identified and managed at the product and transaction level. Estimated revenue, costs and capital are key considerations in the design of any new product or in any new investment decision. Business risk is reported, assessed and challenged at every governance level within the organisation. Each franchise monitors its financial performance relative to plans and reports this on a regular basis to the finance directors of each franchise.

 

Risk mitigation

RBS operates a monthly rolling forecasting process to identify projected changes in, or risks to, key financial metrics, and ensures appropriate actions are taken.

 

Reputational risk

Definition

Reputational risk is the risk to RBS’s public image from a failure to meet stakeholders’ expectations in relation to performance, conduct or business profile. Stakeholders include customers, investors, employees, suppliers, government, regulators, special interest and consumer groups, media and the general public.

 

Sources of risk

Reputational risk can arise from the conduct of employees; customer activities and the sectors and countries in which they operate; provision of products and transactions; as well as operations and infrastructure.

 

Key developments in 2018

·          Metrics were reviewed and enhanced to help measure reputational risk across the Group.

·          Risk appetite positions for countries and sectors identified as presenting heightened reputational risk continued to be reviewed and strengthened.

 

Risk governance

A reputational risk policy supports reputational risk management across RBS. Reputational risk committees in PB, CPB, RBSI, Ulster Bank RoI and NatWest Markets review relevant issues at an individual franchise or entity level, while the Group Reputational Risk Committee – which has delegated authority from the Executive Risk Committee – opines on cases, issues, sectors and themes that represent a material reputational risk to the Group. The Board Risk Committee oversees the identification and reporting of reputational risk. The Sustainable Banking Committee has a specific focus on environmental, social and ethical issues.

 

Risk appetite

RBS manages and articulates its appetite for reputational risk through a qualitative reputational risk appetite statement and quantitative measures. RBS seeks a continued improvement in the identification, assessment and management of customers, transactions, products and issues that present a material reputational risk.

 

Risk controls

For information on risk controls, refer to page 104.

 

Risk monitoring and measurement

Primary reputational risk measures are in place to assess internal activity relating to the management of reputational risk, including training. A number of secondary risk measures – including measures also used in the management of operational, conduct and financial risks – are used to assess relevant external factors. Quarterly reports on performance against these measures are provided to the Executive Risk Committee and Board Risk Committee.

 

Risk mitigation

Reputational risk is mitigated through the policy and governance framework, with ongoing staff training to ensure early identification, assessment and escalation of material issues.

 

The most material threats to RBS’s reputation continued to originate from historical and more recent conduct issues. As a result, RBS has been the subject of investigations and reviews by a number of regulators and governmental authorities, some of which have resulted in fines, settlements and public censure. Refer to the Litigation, investigations and reviews section of Note 27 on the consolidated accounts.

 

176


 

Financial statements

 

 

 

Page

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

178

Consolidated income statement

180

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

181

Consolidated balance sheet

182

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

183

Consolidated cash flow statement

185

Accounting policies

186

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

1

Net interest income

191

2

Non-interest income

191

3

Operating expenses

192

4

Segmental analysis

195

5

Pensions

199

6

Auditor’s remuneration

203

7

Tax

204

8

Earnings per share

206

9

Trading assets and liabilities

206

10

Derivatives

207

11

Financial instruments - classification

209

12

Financial instruments - valuation

211

13

Financial instruments - maturity analysis

218

14

Loan impairment provisions

221

15

Other financial assets

222

16

Intangible assets

223

17

Other assets

224

18

Other financial liabilities

224

19

Subordinated liabilities

224

20

Other liabilities

226

21

Non-controlling interests

227

22

Share capital and other equity

227

23

Leases

229

24

Structured entities

230

25

Asset transfers

231

26

Capital resources

232

27

Memorandum items

233

28

Analysis of the net investment in business interests and intangible assets

239

29

Analysis of changes in financing during the year

239

30

Analysis of cash and cash equivalents

240

31

Directors’ and key management remuneration

240

32

Transactions with directors and key management

240

33

Adoption of IFRS 9

241

34

Related parties

242

35

Post balance sheet events

242

36

Consolidating financial information

243

 

177


 

Financial statements

 

 

 

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 

To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

 

Opinion on the Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (the “Group”) as of 31 December 2018 and 2017, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, the related Accounting policies and Notes 1 to 36, and the information identified as audited in the Annual Report on Remuneration in the Directors’ Remuneration Report and in the Capital and risk management section (collectively referred to as the “financial statements”). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Group at 31 December 2018 and 2017 and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as adopted for use in the European Union and IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Group’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (2013 framework), and our report dated 14 February 2019 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.

 

Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standard 9 Financial Instruments

As discussed in section 1. Presentation of accounts of the Accounting policies to the financial statements, the Group changed its method of accounting for the classification, measurement and impairment of financial instruments in 2018 due to the adoption of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments.

 

Basis for Opinion

These financial statements are the responsibility of the Group’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Group’s financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Group in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

As disclosed in Note 4 to the consolidated financial statements, the accompanying 2018, 2017 and 2016 consolidated financial statements have been represented to reflect a change in reportable segments.

 

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

We have served as the Group’s auditors since 2016.

London, United Kingdom

14 February 2019 (30 April 2019 as to the representation for the change in reportable segments as disclosed in Note 4)

 

178


 

Financial statements

 

 

 

 

To the Shareholders and the Board of Directors of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

 

Opinion on the Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (the “Group”) as of 31 December 2018 and 2017, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, the related Accounting policies and Notes 1 to 36, and the information identified as audited in the Annual Report on Remuneration in the Directors’ Remuneration Report and in the Capital and risk management section (collectively referred to as the “financial statements”).  In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Group at 31 December 2018 and 2017 and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) as adopted for use in the European Union and IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

 

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Group’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2018, based on criteria established in Internal Control-Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (2013 framework), and our report dated 14 February 2019 expressed an unqualified opinion thereon.

 

Adoption of International Financial Reporting Standard 9 Financial Instruments

As discussed in section 1. Presentation of accounts of the Accounting policies to the financial statements, the Group changed its method of accounting for the classification, measurement and impairment of financial instruments in 2018 due to the adoption of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments.

 

Basis for Opinion

These financial statements are the responsibility of the Group’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Group’s financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Group in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

 

 

 

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP

We have served as the Group’s auditors since 2016.

London, United Kingdom

14 February 2019 (except for the retrospective revisions to the reportable segments as discussed in Note 4 and changes in reporting standard as discussed in Note 7, as to which the date is 30 April 2019)

 

179


 

Consolidated income statement for the year ended 31 December 2018

 

 

 

 

 

Note 

2018 

2017 

2016 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Interest receivable

 

11,049 

11,034 

11,258 

Interest payable

 

(2,393)

(2,047)

(2,550)

Net interest income

1

8,656 

8,987 

8,708 

Fees and commissions receivable

 

3,218 

3,338 

3,340 

Fees and commissions payable

 

(861)

(883)

(805)

Income from trading activities

 

1,507 

634 

974 

Loss on redemption of own debt

 

— 

(7)

(126)

Other operating income

 

882 

1,064 

499 

Non-interest income

2

4,746 

4,146 

3,882 

Total income

 

13,402 

13,133 

12,590 

Staff costs

 

(4,122)

(4,676)

(5,124)

Premises and equipment

 

(1,383)

(1,565)

(1,388)

Other administrative expenses

 

(3,372)

(3,323)

(8,745)

Depreciation and amortisation

 

(731)

(808)

(778)

Write down of goodwill and other intangible assets

 

(37)

(29)

(159)

Operating expenses

3

(9,645)

(10,401)

(16,194)

Profit/(loss) before impairment losses

 

3,757 

2,732 

(3,604)

Impairment losses

14

(398)

(493)

(478)

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

 

3,359 

2,239 

(4,082)

Tax charge

7

(1,208)

(731)

(1,107)

Profit/(loss) for the year

 

2,151 

1,508 

(5,189)

 

 

 

 

 

Attributable to:

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shareholders

 

1,622 

752 

(6,955)

Preference shareholders

 

182 

234 

260 

Dividend access share

 

— 

— 

1,193 

Paid-in equity holders

 

355 

487 

303 

Non-controlling interests

 

(8)

35 

10 

 

 

2,151 

1,508 

(5,189)

 

 

 

 

 

Earnings/(loss) per ordinary share

8

13.5p

6.3p

(59.5p)

Earnings/(loss) per ordinary share - fully diluted

8

13.4p

6.3p

(59.5p)

 

The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.

 

180


 

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

Note

£m 

£m 

£m 

Profit/(loss) for the year

 

2,151 

1,508 

(5,189)

Items that do not qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

Remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes

5

 

 

 

 - contributions in preparation for ring-fencing (1)

 

(2,053)

— 

— 

 - other movements

 

86 

90 

(1,049)

Profit/(loss) on fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at fair value

 

 

 

 

  through profit or loss due to own credit risk

 

200 

(126)

— 

Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) financial assets (2)

 

48 

— 

— 

Tax

 

502 

(10)

288 

 

 

(1,217)

(46)

(761)

Items that do qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) financial assets (2)

 

26 

(94)

Cash flow hedges

 

(581)

(1,069)

765 

Currency translation

 

310 

100 

1,263 

Tax

 

189 

256 

(106)

 

 

(75)

(687)

1,828 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income after tax

 

(1,292)

(733)

1,067 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

 

859 

775 

(4,122)

Attributable to:

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shareholders

 

305 

(5,999)

Preference shareholders

 

182 

234 

260 

Dividend access share

 

— 

— 

1,193 

Paid-in equity holders

 

355 

487 

303 

Non-controlling interests

 

17 

52 

121 

 

 

859 

775 

(4,122)

 

Notes:

(1)

On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees.  Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in covenant. Also under the MoU, NatWest Markets Plc is required to make a £53 million contribution to the NWM section in Q1 2019.

(2)

Refer to Note 33 for further information on the impact of IFRS 9 on classification and basis of preparation, year ended 31 December 2018 prepared under IFRS 9 and prior years under IAS 39.

 

The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.

 

181


 

Consolidated balance sheet as at 31 December 2018

 

 

 

 

 

Note 

2018 

2017 

£m 

£m 

Assets

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

11

88,897 

98,337 

Trading assets

9

75,119 

85,991 

Derivatives

10

133,349 

160,843 

Settlement balances

 

2,928 

2,517 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

11

12,947 

11,517 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

11

305,089 

310,116 

Securities subject to repurchase agreements

 

9,890 

13,717 

Other financial assets excluding securities subject to repurchase agreements

 

49,595 

38,212 

Other financial assets

15

59,485 

51,929 

Intangible assets

16

6,616 

6,543 

Other assets

17

9,805 

10,263 

Total assets

 

694,235 

738,056 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

Bank deposits

11

23,297 

30,396 

Customer deposits

11

360,914 

361,316 

Settlement balances

 

3,066 

2,844 

Trading liabilities

9

72,350 

81,982 

Derivatives

10

128,897 

154,506 

Other financial liabilities

18

39,732 

30,326 

Subordinated liabilities

19

10,535 

12,722 

Other liabilities

20

8,954 

14,871 

Total liabilities

 

647,745 

688,963 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shareholders’ interests

 

41,182 

41,707 

Other owners’ interests

 

4,554 

6,623 

Owners’ equity

22

45,736 

48,330 

Non-controlling interests

21

754 

763 

Total equity

 

46,490 

49,093 

Total liabilities and equity

 

694,235 

738,056 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.

 

The accounts were approved by the Board of directors on 14 February 2019 and signed on its behalf by:

 

 

 

 

 

Howard Davies
Chairman

Ross McEwan
Chief Executive

Katie Murray
Chief Financial Officer

 

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Registered No. SC45551

 

182


 

Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018

 

 

 

 

 

2018

2017

2016

 

£m

£m

£m

Called-up share capital - at 1 January

11,965

11,823

11,625

Ordinary shares issued

84

142

198

At 31 December

12,049

11,965

11,823

 

 

 

 

Paid-in equity - at 1 January

4,058

4,582

2,646

Redeemed/reclassified (1)

(524)

(110)

Securities issued during the year (2)

2,046

At 31 December

4,058

4,058

4,582

 

 

 

 

Share premium account - at 1 January

887

25,693

25,425

Ordinary shares issued

140

235

268

Redemption of debt preference shares (3)

748

Capital reduction (4)

(25,789)

At 31 December

1,027

887

25,693

 

 

 

 

Merger reserve - at 1 January and 31 December

10,881

10,881

10,881

 

 

 

 

FVOCI reserve – at 1 January (5)

255

238

307

Implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018

34

Unrealised gains

97

202

282

Realised gains

(42)

(176)

(376)

Tax

(1)

(9)

25

At 31 December

343

255

238

 

 

 

 

Cash flow hedging reserve - at 1 January

227

1,030

458

Amount recognised in equity (6)

(63)

(277)

1,867

Amount transferred from equity to earnings (7)

(518)

(792)

(1,102)

Tax

163

266

(193)

At 31 December (8)

(191)

227

1,030

 

 

 

 

Foreign exchange reserve - at 1 January

2,970

2,888

1,674

Retranslation of net assets

195

111

1,470

Foreign currency losses on hedges of net assets

(33)

(6)

(278)

Tax

23

(1)

62

Recycled to profit or loss on disposal of businesses (9)

123

(22)

(40)

At 31 December (8)

3,278

2,970

2,888

 

 

 

 

Capital redemption reserve - at 1 January

4,542

4,542

Capital reduction (4)

(4,542)

At 31 December

4,542

Retained earnings - at 1 January

17,130

(12,936)

(4,020)

Implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018 (5)

(105)

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders and other equity owners

2,159

1,473

(5,199)

Equity preference dividends paid

(182)

(234)

(260)

Paid-in equity dividends paid

(355)

(487)

(303)

Ordinary dividends paid

(241)

Capital reduction (4)

30,331

Dividend access share dividend

(1,193)

Redemption of debt preference shares (3)

(748)

Redemption of equity preference shares (10)

(2,805)

(1,160)

Redemption/reclassification of paid-in equity

(196)

(21)

Realised gains in period on FVOCI equity shares, net of tax

6

Remeasurement of the retirement benefit schemes

 

 

 

  - contributions in preparation for ring-fencing (11)

(2,053)

  - other movements

86

90

(1,049)

  - tax

539

(28)

288

Changes in fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss

 

 

 

  - gross

200

(126)

  - tax

(33)

18

Shares issued under employee share schemes

(2)

(5)

(10)

Share-based payments

(32)

(22)

(9)

At 31 December

14,312

17,130

(12,936)

 

 

 

 

Own shares held - at 1 January

(43)

(132)

(107)

Shares issued under employee share schemes

87

161

41

Own shares acquired

(65)

(72)

(66)

At 31 December

(21)

(43)

(132)

 

 

 

 

Owners’ equity at 31 December

45,736

48,330

48,609

 

183


 

Consolidated statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018

 

 

 

 

 

2018

2017

2016

 

£m

£m

£m

Non-controlling interests (see Note 21) - at 1 January

763

795

716

Currency translation adjustments and other movements

25

17

111

(Loss)/profit attributable to non-controlling interests

(8)

35

10

Dividends paid

(5)

(25)

Equity withdrawn and disposals

(21)

(59)

(42)

At 31 December

754

763

795

 

 

 

 

Total equity at 31 December

46,490

49,093

49,404

 

 

 

 

Total equity is attributable to:

 

 

 

Ordinary shareholders

41,182

41,707

41,462

Preference shareholders

496

2,565

2,565

Paid-in equity holders

4,058

4,058

4,582

Non-controlling interests

754

763

795

 

46,490

49,093

49,404

 

 

Notes:

(1)

Paid-in equity reclassified to liabilities as a result of the call of US$564 million and CAD321 million EMTN notes in August 2017 (redeemed in October 2017), the call of RBS Capital Trust D in March 2017 (redeemed in June 2017), the call of RBS Capital Trust C in May 2016 (redeemed in July 2016).

(2)

AT1 capital notes totalling £2.0 billion issued in August 2016.

(3)

During 2017, non-cumulative US dollar preference shares were redeemed at their original issue price of US$1.1 billion. The nominal value of £0.3 million was credited to the capital redemption reserve; share premium increased by £0.7 billion in respect of the premium received on issue, with a corresponding decrease in retained earnings. During 2016, non-cumulative US dollar preference shares were redeemed at their original issue price of US$1.5 billion. The nominal value of £0.3 million was transferred from share capital to capital redemption reserve and ordinary owners equity was reduced by £0.4 billion in respect of the movement in exchange rates since issue.

(4)

On 15 June 2017, the Court of Session approved a reduction of RBSG plc capital so that the amounts which stood to the credit of share premium, account and capital redemption reserve were transferred to retained earnings.

(5)

Refer to Note 33 for further information on the impact of IFRS 9 on classification and basis of preparation, year ended 31 December 2018 prepared under IFRS 9 prior years under IAS 39.

(6)

The amount debited direct to the cash flow hedging reserve comprised £166 million in relation to interest rate hedges less a credit of £103 million in relation to foreign exchange hedges.

(7)

The cash flow hedging reserve was reduced by £25 million in relation to foreign exchange hedges and £493 million in relation to interest rate hedges which were credited in aggregate to net interest income.

(8)

The hedging element of the cash flow hedging reserve and foreign exchange reserve relate mainly to de-designated hedges.

(9)

No tax impact.

(10)

During 2018, non-cumulative US dollar, Euro and Sterling preference shares were redeemed.

(11)

On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in covenant Also under the MoU, NatWest Markets Plc is required to make a £53 million contribution to the NWM section in Q1 2019.

 

 

The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.

 

184


 

Consolidated cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 2018

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2018

2017

2016

 

Note

 

£m

£m

£m

Cash flows from operating activities

 

 

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

 

 

3,359

2,239

(4,082)

Interest on subordinated liabilities

 

 

461

572

845

Impairment releases on loans to banks and customers

 

 

(1,197)

(647)

(3,221)

Profit on sale of subsidiaries and associates

 

 

(155)

(22)

Profit on sale of securities

 

 

(34)

(226)

(71)

Defined benefit pension schemes

 

 

(2,055)

(252)

(4,518)

Provisions: expenditure in excess of charges

 

 

(5,016)

(4,546)

4,517

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment, goodwill and intangibles

 

 

718

762

919

Loss on redemption of own debt

 

 

7

126

Elimination of foreign exchange differences

 

 

(160)

(426)

(6,518)

Other non-cash items

 

 

767

(214)

133

Net cash outflow from trading activities

 

 

(3,157)

(2,886)

(11,892)

Decrease/(increase) in net loans to banks and customers

 

 

2,627

2,466

(12,960)

(Increase)/decrease in securities

 

 

(47)

(1,319)

16,741

Decrease/(increase) in other assets

 

 

258

(221)

1,195

Increase in trading assets and liabilities

 

 

(2,087)

Decrease/(increase) in derivative assets and liabilities

 

 

1,885

4,169

(2,696)

(Decrease)/increase in settlement balance assets and liabilities and short positions

 

 

(189)

8,658

104

(Decrease)/increase in banks and customers deposits

 

 

(8,164)

25,449

10,418

Increase/(decrease) in debt securities in issue

 

 

10,068

3,326

(3,967)

Decrease in other liabilities

 

 

(956)

(381)

(422)

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

 

 

3,395

42,147

8,413

Income taxes paid

 

 

(466)

(520)

(171)

Net cash flows from operating activities (1)

 

 

(228)

38,741

(3,650)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash flows from investing activities

 

 

 

 

 

Sale and maturity of securities

 

 

9,062

11,656

8,599

Purchase of securities

 

 

(16,181)

(17,212)

(11,607)

Sale of property, plant and equipment

 

 

264

405

447

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

 

 

(619)

(1,132)

(912)

Net investment in business interests and intangible assets

28

 

(481)

(199)

(886)

Net cash flows from investing activities

 

 

(7,955)

(6,482)

(4,359)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash flows from financing activities

 

 

 

 

 

Issue of ordinary shares

 

 

144

306

300

Issue of other equity instruments: Additional Tier 1 capital notes

 

 

2,046

Redemption of other equity instruments

 

 

(2,826)

(779)

(1,312)

Redemption of debt preference shares

 

 

(748)

Own shares disposed/(acquired)

 

 

22

89

(25)

Redemption of subordinated liabilities

 

 

(2,258)

(5,747)

(3,606)

Service cost of other equity instruments

 

 

(803)

(612)

(1,697)

Interest on subordinated liabilities

 

 

(566)

(717)

(813)

Net cash flows from financing activities

 

 

(6,287)

(8,208)

(5,107)

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

 

 

676

(16)

8,094

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

 

 

(13,794)

24,035

(5,022)

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January

 

 

122,605

98,570

103,592

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December

30

 

108,811

122,605

98,570

 

Note:

(1)

Includes interest received of £10,927 million (2017 - £10,946 million, 2016 - £11,321 million) and interest paid of £2,511 million (2017 - £2,300 million, 2016 - £2,638 million).

 

The accompanying notes on pages 191 to 249, the accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Business review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176 form an integral part of these financial statements.

 

185


 

Accounting policies

 

 

 

 

1. Presentation of accounts

The accounts, set out on pages 180 to 249 including these accounting policies on pages 186 to 190 and the audited sections of the Financial review: Capital and risk management on pages 101 to 176, are prepared on a going concern basis (see the Report of the directors, page 98) and in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and interpretations as issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee of the IASB and adopted by the European Union (EU) (together IFRS). ).

 

The company is incorporated in the UK and registered in Scotland. Its accounts are presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

 

With the exception of investment property and certain financial instruments as described in Accounting policies 8, 13, and 21, the accounts are presented on an historical cost basis.

 

Adoption of IFRS 9

Refer to Note 33 for details of the adoption of IFRS 9.

 

Other amendments to IFRS

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ has been adopted with effect from 1 January 2018. The Accounting policy is updated to reflect the terminology in the new standard but it has had no effect on financial information reported in the current or comparative periods. Interest income and expense continues to be recognised using the effective interest rate method for financial instruments measured at historical cost. There has been no restatement of profit or loss for comparative periods.

 

Other amendments to IFRS effective for 2018, including IFRS 2 ‘Share-based payments’ and IAS 40 ‘Investment Property’ have not had a material effect on the Group’s financial statements.

 

2. Basis of consolidation

The consolidated accounts incorporate the financial statements of the company and entities (including certain structured entities) that are controlled by the Group. The Group controls another entity (a subsidiary) when it is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with that entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the other entity; power generally arises from holding a majority of voting rights. On acquisition of a subsidiary, its identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are included in the consolidated accounts at their fair value. A subsidiary is included in the consolidated financial statements from the date it is controlled by the Group until the date the Group ceases to control it through a sale or a significant change in circumstances.

 

Changes in the Group’s interest in a subsidiary that do not result in the Group ceasing to control that subsidiary are accounted for as equity transactions. All intergroup balances, transactions, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. The consolidated accounts are prepared under uniform accounting policies.

 

3. Revenue recognition

Interest income or expense on financial instruments that are measured at amortised cost and fair value through comprehensive income is determined using the effective interest rate method. The effective interest rate allocates the interest income or interest expense over the expected life of the asset or liability at the rate that exactly discounts all estimated future cash flows to equal the instrument’s initial carrying amount. Calculation of the effective interest rate takes into account fees payable or receivable that are an integral part of the instrument’s yield, premiums or discounts on acquisition or issue, early redemption fees and transaction costs. All contractual terms of a financial instrument are considered when estimating future cash flows. Negative effective interest accruing to financial assets is presented in interest payable.

 

Net interest income in the income statement only relates to financial instruments measured at amortised cost; the interest on debt instruments classified as fair value through OCI; and the effective part of any related accounting hedging instruments. Other interest relating to financial instruments measured at fair value is recognised as part of the movement in fair value.

 

Fees in respect of services are recognised as the right to consideration accrues through the performance of each distinct service obligation to the customer. The arrangements are generally contractual and the cost of providing the service is incurred as each service is performed. The price is usually fixed and always determinable.

 

4. Assets held for sale and discontinued operations

A non-current asset (or disposal group) is classified as held for sale if the Group will recover its carrying amount principally through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. A non-current asset (or disposal group) classified as held for sale is measured at the lower of its carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.

 

5. Employee benefits

Short-term employee benefits, such as salaries, paid absences, and other benefits are accounted for on an accruals basis over the period in which the employees provide the related services. Employees may receive variable compensation satisfied by cash, by debt instruments issued by the Group or by RBSG shares. The treatment of share-based compensation is set out in Accounting policy 23. Variable compensation that is settled in cash or debt instruments is charged to profit or loss over the period from the start of the year to which the variable compensation relates to the expected settlement date taking account of forfeiture and clawback criteria.

 

Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are recognised in profit or loss when payable.

 

For defined benefit schemes, the defined benefit obligation is measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit credit method and discounted at a rate determined by reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds of equivalent term and currency to the scheme liabilities. Scheme assets are measured at their fair value. The difference between scheme assets and scheme liabilities, the net defined benefit asset or liability, is recognised in the balance sheet. A defined benefit asset is limited to the present value of any economic benefits available to the Group in the form of refunds from the plan or reduced contributions to it.

 

The charge to profit or loss for pension costs (recorded in operating expenses) comprises:

 

·                   the current service cost

·                   interest, computed at the rate used to discount scheme liabilities, on the net defined benefit liability or asset

·                   past service cost resulting from a scheme amendment or curtailment

·                   gains or losses on settlement.

 

A curtailment occurs when the Group significantly reduces the number of employees covered by a plan. A plan amendment occurs when the Group introduces, or withdraws, a defined benefit plan or changes the benefits payable under an existing defined benefit plan. Past service cost may be either positive (when benefits are introduced or changed so that the present value of the defined benefit obligation increases) or negative (when benefits are withdrawn or changed so that the present value of the defined benefit obligation decreases). A settlement is a transaction that eliminates all further obligation for part or all of the benefits.

 

Actuarial gains and losses (i.e. gains or and losses on re-measuring the net defined benefit asset or liability) are recognised in other comprehensive income in full in the period in which they arise.

 

6. Intangible assets and goodwill

Intangible assets acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is charged to profit or loss over the assets’ estimated economic lives using methods that best reflect the pattern of economic benefits and is included in Depreciation and amortisation. These estimated useful economic lives are:

 

Computer software

3 to 12 years

Other acquired intangibles

5 to 10 years

 

Expenditure on internally generated goodwill and brands is written-off as incurred. Direct costs relating to the development of internal-use computer software are capitalised once technical feasibility and economic viability have been established. These costs include payroll, the costs of materials and services, and directly attributable overheads. Capitalisation of costs ceases when the software is capable of operating as intended. During and after development, accumulated costs are reviewed for impairment against the benefits that the software is expected to generate. Costs incurred prior to the establishment of technical feasibility and

 

186


 

Accounting policies

 

 

 

 

economic viability are expensed as incurred as are all training costs and general overheads. The costs of licences to use computer software that are expected to generate economic benefits beyond one year are also capitalised.

 

Intangible assets include goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries and joint ventures. Goodwill on the acquisition of a subsidiary is the excess of the fair value of the consideration transferred, the fair value of any existing interest in the subsidiary and the amount of any non-controlling interest measured either at fair value or at its share of the subsidiary’s net assets over net fair value of the subsidiary’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities.

 

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of a joint venture when the cost of investment exceeds the Group’s share of the net fair value of the joint venture’s identifiable assets and liabilities. Goodwill is measured at initial cost less any subsequent impairment losses. Goodwill arising on the acquisition of associates is included within their carrying amounts. The gain or loss on the disposal of a subsidiary, associate or joint venture includes the carrying value of any related goodwill.

 

7. Impairment of intangible assets and property, plant and equipment

At each balance sheet date, the Group assesses whether there is any indication that its intangible assets, or property, plant and equipment are impaired. If any such indication exists, the Group estimates the recoverable amount of the asset and the impairment loss if any. Goodwill is tested for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might be impaired.

 

If an asset does not generate cash flows that are independent from those of other assets or groups of assets, the recoverable amount is determined for the cash-generating unit to which the asset belongs. A cash-generating unit is the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. For the purposes of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is allocated to each of the Group’s cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units expected to benefit from the combination. The recoverable amount of an asset or cash-generating unit is the higher of its fair value less cost to sell and its value in use. Value in use is the present value of future cash flows from the asset or cash-generating unit discounted at a rate that reflects market interest rates adjusted for risks specific to the asset or cash-generating unit that have not been taken into account in estimating future cash flows. If the recoverable amount of an intangible or tangible asset is less than its carrying value, an impairment loss is recognised immediately in profit or loss and the carrying value of the asset reduced by the amount of the loss. A reversal of an impairment loss on intangible assets (excluding goodwill) or property, plant and equipment can be recognised when an increase in service potential arises provided the increased carrying value is not greater than it would have been had no impairment loss been recognised. Impairment losses on goodwill are not reversed.

 

8. Investment property

Investment property comprises freehold and leasehold properties that are held to earn rentals or for capital appreciation or both. Investment property is not depreciated but is stated at fair value. Fair value is based on current prices for similar properties in the same location and condition. Any gain or loss arising from a change in fair value is recognised in profit or loss. Rental income from investment property is recognised on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease in Other operating income. Lease incentives granted are recognised as an integral part of the total rental income.

 

9. Foreign currencies

The Group’s consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling which is the functional currency of the company.

 

Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded in the functional currency at the foreign exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into the relevant functional currency at the foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Foreign exchange differences arising on the settlement of foreign currency transactions and from the translation of monetary assets and liabilities are reported in income from trading activities except for differences arising on cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations (see Accounting policy 21).

 

Non-monetary items denominated in foreign currencies that are stated at fair value are translated into the relevant functional currency at the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates the values are determined. Translation differences arising on non-monetary items measured at fair value are recognised in profit or loss except for differences arising on non-monetary financial assets classified as available for sale, for example equity shares, which are recognised in other comprehensive income unless the asset is the hedged item in a fair value hedge.

 

Assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on acquisition, are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Income and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at average exchange rates unless these do not approximate to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of a foreign operation are recognised in other comprehensive income. The amount accumulated in equity is reclassified from equity to profit or loss on disposal of a foreign operation.

 

10. Leases

As lessor

Contracts with customers to lease assets are classified as finance leases if they transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset to the customer; all other contracts with customers to lease assets are classified as operating leases.

 

Finance lease receivables are included in the balance sheet, within net loans to customers, at the amount of the net investment in the lease being the minimum lease payments and any unguaranteed residual value discounted at the interest rate implicit in the lease. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods so as to give a constant periodic rate of return before tax on the net investment and included in Interest receivable. Unguaranteed residual values are subject to regular review; if there is a reduction in their value, income allocation is revised and any reduction in respect of amounts accrued is recognised immediately.

 

Rental income from operating leases is recognised in income on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis better represents the time pattern of the asset’s use. Operating lease assets are included within Property, plant and equipment and depreciated over their useful lives. Operating lease rentals receivable are included in Other operating income.

 

As lessee

The Group’s contracts to lease assets are principally operating leases. Operating lease rental expense is included in Premises and equipment costs and recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis better represents the benefit to the Group.

 

11. Provisions

The Group recognises a provision for a present obligation resulting from a past event when it is more likely than not that it will be required to transfer economic benefits to settle the obligation and the amount of the obligation can be estimated reliably.

 

Provision is made for restructuring costs, including the costs of redundancy, when the Group has a constructive obligation to restructure. An obligation exists when the Group has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring and has raised a valid expectation in those affected by starting to implement the plan or by announcing its main features.

 

If the Group has a contract that is onerous, it recognises the present obligation under the contract as a provision. An onerous contract is one where the unavoidable costs of meeting the Group’s contractual obligations exceed the expected economic benefits. When the Group vacates a leasehold property, a provision is recognised for the costs under the lease less any expected economic benefits (such as rental income).

 

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations arising from past events, whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events, or present obligations arising from past events that are not recognised because either an outflow of economic benefits is not probable or the amount of the obligation cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised but information about them is disclosed unless the possibility of any outflow of economic benefits in settlement is remote.

 

187


 

Accounting policies

 

 

 

 

12. Tax

Income tax expense or income, comprising current tax and deferred tax, is recorded in the income statement except income tax on items recognised outside profit or loss which is credited or charged to other comprehensive income or to equity as appropriate.

 

Current tax is income tax payable or recoverable in respect of the taxable profit or loss for the year arising in profit or loss, other comprehensive income or equity. Provision is made for current tax at rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

 

Deferred tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability for accounting purposes and its carrying amount for tax purposes. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that the asset will be recovered.

 

Deferred tax is not recognised on temporary differences that arise from initial recognition of an asset or a liability in a transaction (other than a business combination) that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred tax is calculated using tax rates expected to apply in the periods when the assets will be realised or the liabilities settled, based on tax rates and laws enacted, or substantively enacted, at the balance sheet date.

 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset where the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset and where they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority either on an individual Group company or on Group companies in the same tax group that intend, in future periods, to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis or on a gross basis simultaneously.

 

13. Financial instruments

On initial recognition, financial instruments are measured at fair value. Subsequently they are classified as follows: designated at fair value through profit or loss; amortised cost, the default class for liabilities; fair value through profit or loss, the default class for assets; or financial assets may be designated as at fair value through other comprehensive income. Regular way purchases of financial assets classified as amortised cost are recognised on the settlement date; all other regular way transactions in financial assets are recognised on the trade date.

 

Designated as at fair value through profit or loss – a financial instrument may be designated as at fair value through profit or loss only if such designation (a) eliminates or significantly reduces a measurement or recognition inconsistency; or (b) applies to a group of financial assets, financial liabilities or both, that the Group manages and evaluates on a fair value basis; or (c) relates to a financial liability that contains an embedded derivative which is not evidently closely related to the host contract. Financial assets that the Group designates on initial recognition as being at fair value through profit or loss are recognised at fair value, with transaction costs being recognised in profit or loss, and are subsequently measured at fair value. Gains and losses are recognised in profit or loss as they arise.

 

Amortised cost assets – have to meet both the following criteria:

 

(a)          the asset is held within a business model whose objective is solely to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows; and

(b)          the contractual terms of the financial asset are solely payments of principal and interest on the outstanding balance.

 

Amortised cost liabilities – all liabilities that are not subsequently measured at fair value are measured at amortised cost.

 

Assets designated at fair value through other comprehensive income – An equity instrument may be designated irrevocably at fair value through other comprehensive income. Other assets have to meet both the following criteria:

 

(a)          the asset is held within a business model whose objective is both to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows and selling financial assets; and

(b)          the contractual terms of the financial asset are solely payments of principal and interest on the outstanding balance.

 

Fair value through profit or loss - a financial liability is measured at fair value if it arises from: a financial guarantee contract; a commitment to lend at below market rates; an obligation arising from the failed sale of an asset; or a contingent consideration for a business acquisition. Fair value through profit or loss is the default classification for a financial asset.

 

Reclassifications – financial liabilities cannot be reclassified. Financial assets are only reclassified where there has been a change in the business model.

 

Fair value – the fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

 

Business model assessment – business models are assessed at portfolio level, being the level at which they are managed. This is expected to result in the most consistent classification of assets because it aligns with the stated objectives of the portfolio, its risk management, manager’s remuneration and the ability to monitor sales of assets from a portfolio. The criteria for classifying cash flows as solely principal and interest are assessed against the contractual terms of a facility, with attention to leverage features; prepayment and extension terms; and triggers that might reset the effective rate of interest.

 

14. Impairments

At each balance sheet date each financial asset or portfolio of loans measured at amortised cost or at fair value through other comprehensive income, issued financial guarantee and loan commitment is assessed for impairment. Loss allowances are forward-looking, based on 12 month expected credit losses where there has not been a significant increase in credit risk rating, otherwise allowances are based on lifetime expected losses. Loss allowances for lease receivables are always made on a lifetime basis.

 

Expected credit losses are a probability-weighted estimate of credit losses. The probability is determined by the risk of default which is applied to the cash flow estimates. In the absence of a change in credit rating, allowances are recognised when there is reduction in the net present value of expected cash flows. On a significant increase in credit risk, allowances are recognised without a change in the expected cash flows, although typically expected cash flows do also change; and expected credit losses are rebased from 12 month to lifetime expectations.

 

On restructuring a financial asset without causing derecognition of the original asset the revised cash flows are used in re-estimating the credit loss. Where restructuring causes derecognition of the original financial asset, the fair value of the replacement asset is used as the closing cash flow of the original asset.

 

Where, in the course of the orderly realisation of a loan, it is exchanged for equity shares or property, the exchange is accounted for as the sale of the loan and the acquisition of equity securities or investment property. Where the Group’s interest in equity shares following the exchange is such that the Group controls an entity, that entity is consolidated.

 

The costs of loss allowances on assets held at amortised cost are presented as impairments in the income statement. Allowances in respect financial guarantees and loan commitments are presented in administrative expenses.

 

Impaired loans and receivables are written off, when the Group concludes that there is no longer any realistic prospect of recovery of part or all of the loan. For loans that are individually assessed for impairment, the timing of write off is determined on a case-by-case basis. Such loans are reviewed regularly and write off will be prompted by bankruptcy, insolvency, renegotiation and similar events.

 

The typical time frames from initial impairment to write off for the Group’s collectively-assessed portfolios are:

 

·          Retail mortgages: write off usually occurs within five years, or when an account is closed if earlier.

·          Credit cards: the irrecoverable amount is written off after 12 months; three years later any remaining amounts outstanding are written off. Overdrafts and other unsecured loans: write off occurs within six years.

·          Overdrafts and other unsecured loans: write off occurs within six years

·          Commercial loans: write offs are determined in the light of individual circumstances; the period does not exceed five years.

·          Business loans are generally written off within five years.

 

15. Financial guarantee contracts

Under a financial guarantee contract, the Group, in return for a fee, undertakes to meet a customer’s obligations under the terms of a debt instrument if the customer fails to do so.

 

188


 

Accounting policies

 

 

 

 

A financial guarantee is recognised as a liability; initially at fair value and, if not designated as at fair value through profit or loss, subsequently at the higher of its initial value less cumulative amortisation and any provision under the contract measured in accordance with Accounting policy 13. Amortisation is calculated so as to recognise fees receivable in profit or loss over the period of the guarantee.

 

16. Loan commitments

Provision is made for expected credit loss on loan commitments, other than those classified as held-for-trading. Syndicated loan commitments in excess of the level of lending under the commitment approved for retention by the Group are classified as held-for-trading and measured at fair value.

 

17. Derecognition

A financial asset is derecognised when the contractual right to receive cash flows from the asset has expired or when it has been transferred and the transfer qualifies for derecognition. A transfer requires that the Group either (a) transfers the contractual rights to receive the asset’s cash flows; or (b) retains the right to the asset’s cash flows but assumes a contractual obligation to pay those cash flows to a third party. After a transfer, the Group assesses the extent to which it has retained the risks and rewards of ownership of the transferred asset. The asset remains on the balance sheet if substantially all the risks and rewards have been retained. It is derecognised if substantially all the risks and rewards have been transferred.

 

If substantially all the risks and rewards have been neither retained nor transferred, the Group assesses whether or not it has retained control of the asset. If the Group has retained control of the asset, it continues to recognise the asset to the extent of its continuing involvement; if the Group has not retained control of the asset, it is derecognised.

 

A financial liability is removed from the balance sheet when the obligation is discharged, or is cancelled, or expires. On the redemption or settlement of debt securities (including subordinated liabilities) issued by the Group, the Group derecognises the debt instrument and records a gain or loss being the difference between the debt’s carrying amount and the cost of redemption or settlement. The same treatment applies where the debt is exchanged for a new debt issue that has terms substantially different from those of the existing debt. The assessment of whether the terms of the new debt instrument are substantially different takes into account qualitative and quantitative characteristics including a comparison of the present value of the cash flows under the new terms with the present value of the remaining cash flows of the original debt issue discounted at the effective interest rate of the original debt issue.

 

18. Sale and repurchase transactions

Securities subject to a sale and repurchase agreement under which substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the Group continue to be shown on the balance sheet and the sale proceeds recorded as a financial liability. Securities acquired in a reverse sale and repurchase transaction under which the Group is not exposed to substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are not recognised on the balance sheet and the consideration paid is recorded as a financial asset.

 

Securities borrowing and lending transactions are usually secured by cash or securities advanced by the borrower. Borrowed securities are not recognised on the balance sheet or lent securities derecognised. Cash collateral given or received is treated as a loan or deposit; collateral in the form of securities is not recognised. However, where securities borrowed are transferred to third parties, a liability for the obligation to return the securities to the stock lending counterparty is recorded.

 

19. Netting

Financial assets and financial liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the balance sheet when, and only when, the Group currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and it intends either to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The Group is party to a number of arrangements, including master netting agreements, that give it the right to offset financial assets and financial liabilities, but where it does not intend to settle the amounts net or simultaneously, the assets and liabilities concerned are presented gross.

 

20. Capital instruments

The Group classifies a financial instrument that it issues as a liability if it is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset, or to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities on potentially unfavourable terms and as equity if it evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after the deduction of liabilities. The components of a compound financial instrument issued by the Group are classified and accounted for separately as financial assets, financial liabilities or equity as appropriate. Incremental costs and related tax that are directly attributable to an equity transaction are deducted from equity.

 

The consideration for any ordinary shares of the company purchased by the Group (treasury shares) is deducted from equity. On the cancellation of treasury shares their nominal value is removed from equity and any excess of consideration over nominal value is treated in accordance with the capital maintenance provisions of the Companies Act. On the sale or reissue of treasury shares the consideration received and related tax are credited to equity, net of any directly attributable incremental costs.

 

21. Derivatives and hedging

In accordance with IAS 39 ‘hedge relationships’, derivative financial instruments are initially recognised, and subsequently measured, at fair value.

 

A derivative embedded in a contract is accounted for as a stand-alone derivative if its economic characteristics are not closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract; unless the host is a financial asset or the entire contract is measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit or loss.

 

Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value of derivatives that are not the hedging instrument in a qualifying hedge are recognised as they arise in profit or loss. Gains and losses are recorded in Income from ordinary activities except for gains and losses on those derivatives that are managed together with financial instruments designated at fair value; these gains and losses are included in Other operating income. The Group enters into three types of hedge relationship: hedges of changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or unrecognised firm commitment (fair value hedges); hedges of the variability in cash flows from a recognised asset or liability or a highly probable forecast transaction (cash flow hedges); and hedges of the net investment in a foreign operation.

 

Hedge relationships are formally designated and documented at inception. The documentation identifies the hedged item and the hedging instrument and details the risk that is being hedged and the way in which effectiveness will be assessed at inception and during the period of the hedge. If the hedge is not highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk, consistent with the documented risk management strategy, hedge accounting is discontinued. Hedge accounting is also discontinued if the Group revokes the designation of a hedge relationship.

 

Fair value hedge - in a fair value hedge, the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in profit or loss. The gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk is recognised in profit or loss and, where the hedged item is measured at amortised cost, adjusts the carrying amount of the hedged item. Hedge accounting is discontinued if the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting; or if the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised; or if hedge designation is revoked. If the hedged item is one for which the effective interest rate method is used, any cumulative adjustment is amortised to profit or loss over the life of the hedged item using a recalculated effective interest rate.

 

Cash flow hedge - in a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion in profit or loss. When the forecast transaction results in the recognition of a financial asset or financial liability, the cumulative gain or loss is reclassified from equity to profit or loss in the same periods in which the hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss. Otherwise the cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in profit or loss at the same time as the hedged transaction. Hedge accounting is discontinued if the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting; if the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised; if the forecast transaction is no

 

189


 

Accounting policies

 

 

 

 

longer expected to occur; or if hedge designation is revoked. On the discontinuance of hedge accounting (except where a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur), the cumulative unrealised gain or loss is reclassified from equity to profit or loss when the hedged cash flows occur or, if the forecast transaction results in the recognition of a financial asset or financial liability, when the hedged forecast cash flows affect profit or loss. Where a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative unrealised gain or loss is reclassified from equity to profit or loss immediately.

 

Hedge of net investment in a foreign operation - in the hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation, the portion of foreign exchange differences arising on the hedging instrument determined to be an effective hedge is recognised in other comprehensive income. Any ineffective portion is recognised in profit or loss. Non-derivative financial liabilities as well as derivatives may be the hedging instrument in a net investment hedge. On disposal or partial disposal of a foreign operation, the amount accumulated in equity is reclassified from equity to profit or loss.

 

22. Associates and joint ventures

An associate is an entity over which the Group has significant influence. A joint venture is one which it controls jointly with other parties. Investments in associates and interests in joint ventures are recognised using the equity method. They are stated initially at cost, including attributable goodwill, and subsequently adjusted for post-acquisition changes in the Group’s share of net assets.

 

23. Share-based compensation

The Group operates a number of share-based compensation schemes under which it awards RBSG shares and share options to its employees. Such awards are generally subject to vesting conditions: conditions that vary the amount of cash or shares to which an employee is entitled. Vesting conditions include service conditions (requiring the employee to complete a specified period of service) and performance conditions (requiring the employee to complete a specified period of service and specified performance targets to be met). Other conditions to which an award is subject are non-vesting conditions (such as a requirement to save throughout the vesting period).

 

The cost of employee services received in exchange for an award of shares or share options is measured by reference to the fair value of the shares or share options on the date the award is and takes into account non-vesting conditions and market performance conditions (conditions related to the market price of RBSG shares): an award is treated as vesting irrespective of whether any market performance condition or non-vesting condition is met. The fair value of options is estimated using valuation techniques which incorporate exercise price, term, risk-free interest rates, the current share price and its expected volatility. The cost is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period (the period during which all the specified vesting conditions must be satisfied) with a corresponding increase in equity in an equity-settled award, or a corresponding liability in a cash-settled award. The cost is adjusted for vesting conditions (other than market performance conditions) so as to reflect the number of shares or share options that actually vest.

 

If an award is modified, the original cost continues to be recognised as if there had been no modification. Where modification increases the fair value of the award, this increase is recognised as an expense over the modified vesting period. A new award of shares or share options is treated as the modification of a cancelled award if, on the date the new award is, the Group identifies them as replacing the cancelled award. The cancellation of an award through failure to meet non-vesting conditions triggers an immediate expense for any unrecognised element of the cost of an award.

 

24. Cash and cash equivalents

In the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprises cash and deposits with banks with an original maturity of less than three months together with short-term highly liquid investments that are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and subject to insignificant risk of change in value.

 

Critical accounting policies and key sources of estimation uncertainty

The reported results of the Group are sensitive to the accounting policies, assumptions and estimates that underlie the preparation of its financial statements. UK company law and IFRS require the directors, in preparing the Group’s financial statements, to select suitable accounting policies, apply them consistently and make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent. In the absence of an applicable standard or interpretation, IAS 8 ‘Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors’, requires management to develop and apply an accounting policy that results in relevant and reliable information in the light of the requirements and guidance in IFRS dealing with similar and related issues and the IASB’s ‘Conceptual Framework for Financial Reporting’. The judgements and assumptions involved in the Group’s accounting policies that are considered by the Board to be the most important to the portrayal of its financial condition are discussed below. The use of estimates, assumptions or models that differ from those adopted by the Group would affect its reported results

 

Critical accounting policy

 

Note

Deferred tax

 

204

Fair value: financial instruments

 

209

Loan impairment provisions

 

221

Goodwill

 

223

Provisions for liabilities and charges

 

226

 

Accounting Developments

International Financial Reporting Standards

A number of IFRS’s and amendments to IFRS were in issue at 31 December 2018 that would affect the Group from 1 January 2019 or later

 

Effective 1 January 2019

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ was issued in January 2016 to replace IAS 17 ‘Leases’. The Group will apply the standard with effect from 1 January 2019. Lessees will capitalise operating leases through the recognition of assets representing the contractual rights of use. The present value of contractual payments will be recognised as lease liabilities.

 

The Group has new models and processes to implement IFRS 16. The most significant impact from initially applying IFRS 16 will be to recognise rights of use assets in respect of branches and office properties leased by the Group under contracts classified as operating leases under IAS 17. The present value of other contracts is immaterial. The Group will apply IFRS 16 on a modified retrospective basis without restating prior years and electing for the following exemptions on transition at 1 January 2019. The Group will

 

·                  apply IFRS 16 to contracts previously identified as leases by IAS 17

·                  use the incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate

·                  not apply IFRS 16 to operating leases with a remaining lease term of less than 12 months or low value leases (non property leases)

·                  rely on the assessment of whether the lease contract is onerous under IAS 37 at 31 December 2018 as an alternative to performing an impairment review of the right of use assets created on 1 January 2019 Where this is the case the carrying amount of the assets will be adjusted by the onerous lease provision.

·                  exclude initial direct costs from the measurement of the right of use asset

 

The opening balance sheet at 1 January 2019 will be adjusted to create a right of use asset of approximately £1.3 billion. A lease liability will also be recognised of £1.9 billion. Retained earnings will decrease by £0.2 billion after tax. This will have an estimated impact of 21 basis points on the CET 1 ratio. Application of IFRS 16 by the Group is not expected to have a significant impact on lessor accounting or for finance lease accounting by lessees.

 

Effective after 2019

IFRS 17 ‘Insurance contracts’ was issued in May 2017 to replace IFRS 4 and to establish a comprehensive standard for inceptors of insurance policies. The effective date is 1 January 2021, subject to IASB’s approval of a deferral until 1 January 2022.

 

In February 2018 the IASB amended IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’ to clarify the need to update assumptions whenever there is a plan amendment, curtailment or settlement.

 

The Group is assessing the effect of adopting these standards on its financial statements.

 

190


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

1 Net interest income

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

522 

277 

246 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

9,993 

10,409 

10,706 

Other financial assets

534 

348 

306 

Interest receivable (1)

11,049 

11,034 

11,258 

 

 

 

 

Balances with banks

250 

175 

97 

Customer deposits: demand

223 

99 

433 

Customer deposits: savings

510 

445 

432 

Customer deposits: other time

116 

179 

190 

Other financial liabilities

791 

554 

557 

Subordinated liabilities

461 

572 

845 

Internal funding of trading businesses

42 

23 

(4)

Interest payable (1)

2,393 

2,047 

2,550 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

8,656 

8,987 

8,708 

 

Note:

(1)       Negative interest on loans is classed as interest payable and on customer deposits is classed as interest receivable.

 

2 Non-interest income

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Net fees and commissions

2,357 

2,455 

2,535 

 

 

 

 

Loss on redemption of own debt

— 

(7)

(126)

 

 

 

 

Income from trading activities

 

 

 

Foreign exchange

643 

525 

989 

Interest rate

695 

(50)

(480)

Credit

45 

197 

336 

Changes in fair value of own debt and derivative liabilities attributable to own credit

 

 

 

  - debt securities in issue

72 

12 

87 

  - derivative liabilities

20 

(81)

67 

Equities, commodities and other

32 

31 

(25)

 

1,507 

634 

974 

Other operating income

 

 

 

Operating lease and other rental income

256 

276 

287 

Changes in the fair value of financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss

(26)

60 

(13)

Changes in the fair value of own debt designated as at fair value through profit or loss

 

 

 

  attributable to own credit risk

 

 

 

  - debt securities in issue

— 

— 

41 

  - subordinated liabilities

— 

— 

(15)

Changes in fair value of other financial assets fair value through profit or loss

18 

— 

— 

Hedge ineffectiveness

(65)

39 

— 

Profit/(loss) on disposal of amortised cost assets

44 

(35)

(277)

Profit on disposal of fair value through other comprehensive income assets

34 

226 

71 

Profit on sale of property, plant and equipment

50 

75 

18 

Share of profits of associated entities

83 

104 

59 

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries and associates

(72)

245 

273 

Other income (1)

560 

74 

55 

 

882 

1,064 

499 

 

 

 

 

Non-interest income

4,746 

4,146 

3,882 

 

Note:

(1)       Includes income from activities other than banking. 2018 includes insurance recoveries of £357 million.

 

191


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

3 Operating expenses

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Salaries

3,002 

3,180 

3,771 

Variable compensation

225 

298 

281 

Social security costs

307 

318 

388 

Pension costs

401 

467 

357 

Other

187 

413 

327 

Staff costs

4,122 

4,676 

5,124 

 

 

 

 

Premises and equipment

1,383 

1,565 

1,388 

UK bank levy

179 

215 

190 

Depreciation and amortisation

731 

808 

778 

Other administrative expenses (1)

3,193 

3,108 

8,555 

Administrative expenses

5,486 

5,696 

10,911 

Write down of goodwill and other intangible assets

37 

29 

159 

 

9,645 

10,401 

16,194 

 

Note:

(1) Includes litigation and conduct costs, net of amounts recovered. Refer to Notes 20 and 27 for further details.

 

The average number of persons employed, rounded to the nearest hundred, during the year, excluding temporary staff, was 67,600 (2017 - 73,400; 2016 - 82,400). The average number of temporary employees during 2018 was 4,000 (2017 - 5,000; 2016 - 6,700). The number of persons employed at 31 December, excluding temporary staff, by reportable segment, was as follows:

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

UK Personal Banking

23,400 

19,500 

22,600 

Ulster Bank RoI

2,900 

2,600 

3,000 

Personal & Ulster

26,300 

22,100 

25,600 

Commercial Banking

10,200 

6,900 

8,100 

Private Banking

1,900 

1,500 

1,700 

Commercial & Private Banking

12,100 

8,400 

9,800 

RBS International

1,600 

1,600 

800 

NatWest Markets

4,500 

5,300 

1,500 

Central items & other

20,900 

32,300 

39,300 

Total

65,400 

69,700 

77,000 

 

 

 

 

UK

46,600 

51,200 

57,300 

USA

500 

500 

700 

Europe

4,100 

4,200 

5,200 

Rest of the World

14,200 

13,800 

13,800 

Total

65,400 

69,700 

77,000 

 

During 2018 the reporting lines of central and support staff directly supporting a reportable Group segment were realigned to that segment.

 

Share-based payments

As described in the Remuneration report, the Group grants share-based awards to employees principally on the following bases:

 

Award plan

Eligible employees

Nature of award

Vesting conditions (1)

Settlement

Sharesave

UK, Republic of Ireland, Channel Islands, Gibraltar and Isle of Man

Option to buy shares under employee savings plan

Continuing employment or leavers in certain circumstances

2019 to 2023

Deferred performance awards

All

Awards of ordinary shares

Continuing employment or leavers in certain circumstances

2019 to 2025

Long-term incentives (2)

Senior employees

Awards of conditional shares or share options

Continuing employment or leavers in certain circumstances and/or achievement of performance conditions

2019 to 2025

 

Notes:

(1)     All awards have vesting conditions and therefore some may not vest.

(2)     Long-term incentives include the Executive Share Option Plan, the Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Employee Share Plan.

 

192


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

3 Operating expenses continued

The fair value of options granted in 2018 was determined using a pricing model that included: expected volatility of shares determined at the grant date based on historical volatility over a period of up to five years; expected option lives that equal the vesting period; no dividends on equity shares; and risk-free interest rates determined from UK gilts with terms matching the expected lives of the options.

 

The strike price of options and the fair value on granting awards of fully paid shares is the average market price over the five trading days (three trading days for Sharesave) preceding grant date.

 

Sharesave

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

Average

Shares

 

Average

Shares

 

Average

Shares

 

exercise price

 under option

 

exercise price

under option

 

exercise price

under option

 

 £

(million)

 

£

 (million)

 

£

 (million)

At 1 January

2.38 

60 

 

2.46 

56 

 

2.87 

56 

Granted

1.89 

28 

 

2.27 

21 

 

1.68 

17 

Exercised

2.44 

(4)

 

2.46 

(3)

 

2.37 

— 

Cancelled

2.46 

(9)

 

2.49 

(14)

 

3.02 

(17)

At 31 December

2.18 

75 

 

2.38 

60 

 

2.46 

56 

 

Options are exercisable within six months of vesting; 4.9 million options were exercisable at 31 December 2018 (2017 – 3.7 million; 2016 – 8.1 million). The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of options was £2.13 (2017 - £2.77; 2016 - £1.78). At 31 December 2018, exercise prices ranged from £1.68 to £3.43 (2017 - £1.68 to £4.34; 2016 - £1.68 to £4.34) and the remaining average contractual life was 2.9 years (2017 - 2.9 years; 2016 – 2.9 years). The fair value of options granted in 2018 was £21 million (2017 - £21 million; 2016 - £18 million).

 

Deferred performance awards

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

Value at

Shares

 

Value at

Shares

 

Value at

Shares

 

grant

awarded

 

grant

awarded

 

grant

awarded

 

£m

(million)

 

£m

(million)

 

£m

(million)

At 1 January

264 

101 

 

296 

102 

 

276 

80 

Granted

156 

59 

 

152 

63 

 

170 

75 

Forfeited

(21)

(8)

 

(11)

(4)

 

(19)

(7)

Vested

(166)

(60)

 

(173)

(60)

 

(131)

(46)

At 31 December

233 

92 

 

264 

101 

 

296 

102 

 

The awards granted in 2018 vest in equal tranches on their anniversaries, predominantly over three years.

 

 

Long-term incentives

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

Value

Shares

Options

 

Value at

Shares

Options

 

Value at

Shares

Options

 

at grant

awarded

 over shares

 

grant

awarded

 over shares

 

grant

awarded

 over shares

 

£m

 (million)

 (million)

 

£m

 (million)

 (million)

 

£m

 (million)

 (million)

At 1 January

102 

37 

 

119 

38 

 

153 

44 

Granted

12 

— 

 

35 

15 

— 

 

37 

16 

— 

Vested/exercised

(5)

(2)

— 

 

(22)

(7)

— 

 

(39)

(12)

— 

Lapsed

(24)

(8)

— 

 

(30)

(9)

(2)

 

(32)

(10)

(1)

At 31 December

85 

32 

 

102 

37 

 

119 

38 

 

The market value of awards vested/exercised in 2018 was £5 million (2017 - £22 million; 2016 - £40 million). There are vested options of 2 million shares exercisable up to 2020 (2017 - 2 million; 2016 - 4 million).

 

193


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

3 Operating expenses continued

 

Variable compensation awards

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The following tables analyse the Group’s variable compensation awards for 2018.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

Change 

 

£m 

£m 

Non-deferred cash awards (1)

37 

51 

(27)

Total non-deferred variable compensation

37 

51 

(27)

Deferred bond awards

191 

134 

43 

Deferred share awards

107 

157 

(32)

Total deferred variable compensation

298 

291 

Total variable compensation (2)

335 

342 

(2)

 

 

 

 

Variable compensation as a % of operating profit before tax (3)

9%

13%

 

Proportion of variable compensation that is deferred

89%

85%

 

of which

 

 

 

  - deferred bond awards

64%

46%

 

  - deferred share awards

36%

54%

 

 

 

Reconciliation of variable compensation awards to income statement charge

2018 

2017 

2016 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Variable compensation awarded

335 

342 

343 

Less: deferral of charge for amounts awarded for current year

(130)

(133)

(103)

Income statement charge for amounts awarded in current year

205 

209 

240 

 

 

 

 

Add: current year charge for amounts deferred from prior years

86 

96 

147 

Less: forfeiture of amounts deferred from prior years

(66)

(7)

(106)

Income statement charge for amounts deferred from prior years

20 

89 

41 

 

 

 

 

Income statement charge for variable compensation (2)

225 

298 

281 

 

 

Actual

 

Expected

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Year in which income statement charge is expected to be taken for
deferred variable compensation

 

 

 

 

 

2020 

2016 

2017 

2018 

 

2019 

and beyond

£m 

£m 

£m 

 

£m

£m

Variable compensation deferred from 2016 and earlier

147 

96 

 

Variable compensation deferred from 2017

— 

— 

81 

 

22 

15 

Less: forfeiture of amounts deferred from prior years

(106)

(7)

(66)

 

— 

— 

Variable compensation for 2018 deferred

— 

— 

— 

 

89 

41 

 

41 

89 

20 

 

120 

60 

 

Notes:

(1)       Cash awards are limited to £2,000 for all employees.

(2)       Excludes other performance related compensation.

(3)       Operating profit before tax and variable compensation expense. This was previously measured against adjusted operating profit before variable compensation expense (2017: 7%).

 

194


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

4 Segmental analysis

Reportable segments

The directors manage RBS primarily by class of business and present the segmental analysis on that basis. This includes the review of net interest income for each class of business. Interest receivable and payable for all reportable segments is therefore presented net. Segments charge market prices for services rendered between each other; funding charges between segments are determined by RBS Treasury, having regard to commercial demands. The segment performance measure is operating profit/(loss).

 

Reportable operating segments

In Q1 2019 and effective from 1 January 2019, Business Banking has been transferred from UK Personal and Business Bank (UK PBB) to Commercial Banking as the nature of the business, including distribution channels, products and customers, are more closely aligned to the Commercial Banking business. 2018 and comparatives have been retrospectively revised, or restated, in this Note as well as Note 3 and other segmental disclosures in Capital and risk management section. Concurrent with the transfer, the reportable operating segments have been renamed as follows:

 

Personal & Ulster comprises two reportable segments: UK Personal Banking and Ulster Bank RoI. UK Personal Banking serves individuals and mass affluent customers in the UK and includes Ulster Bank customers in Northern Ireland. Ulster Bank RoI serves individuals and businesses in the Republic of Ireland (RoI).

 

Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) comprises two reportable segments: Commercial Banking and Private Banking. Commercial Banking serves small businesses, commercial and corporate customers in the UK. Private Banking serves UK high net worth individuals and their business interests.

 

RBS International (RBSI) serves retail, commercial, corporate and financial institution customers in Jersey, Guernsey, Isle of Man and Gibraltar and financial institution customers in Luxembourg and London.

 

NatWest Markets helps global financial institutions and corporates manage their financial risks and achieve their short and long-term financial goals while navigating changing markets and regulation. NatWest Markets does this by providing global market access, financing, risk management and trading solutions from trading hubs in London, Singapore and Stamford with sales offices across key locations in the UK, EU, US and Asia.

 

Central items & other includes corporate functions, such as RBS Treasury, finance, risk management, compliance, legal, communications and human resources. Central functions manages RBS capital resources and RBS-wide regulatory projects and provides services to the reportable segments. Balances in relation to legacy litigation issues and the international private banking business are included in Central items in the relevant periods.

 

Allocation of central balance sheet items

RBS allocates all central costs relating to Services and Functions to the business using appropriate drivers, these are reported as indirect costs in the segmental income statements. Assets (and risk-weighted assets) held centrally, mainly relating to RBS Treasury, are allocated to the business using appropriate drivers.

 

 

Net

Net fees

Other

 

 

Depreciation

Impairment

 

 

interest

and

non-interest

Total

Operating

and

(losses)/

Operating

 

 income

commissions

 income

 income

 expenses

 amortisation

releases

 profit/(loss)

2018 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

UK Personal Banking

4,283 

692 

79 

5,054 

(2,867)

— 

(339)

1,848 

Ulster Bank RoI

444 

91 

75 

610 

(583)

— 

(15)

12 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal & Ulster

4,727 

783 

154 

5,664 

(3,450)

— 

(354) 

1,860 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial Banking

2,855 

1,283 

464 

4,602 

(2,362)

(125)

(147)

1,968 

Private Banking

518 

228 

29 

775 

(476)

(2)

303 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial & Private Banking

3,373 

1,511 

493 

5,377 

(2,838)

(127)

(141)

2,271 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS International

466 

101 

27 

594 

(254)

(6)

336 

NatWest Markets

112 

(33)

1,363 

1,442 

(1,589)

(15)

92 

(70)

Central items & other

(22)

(5)

352 

325 

(783)

(583)

(1,038)

Total

8,656 

2,357 

2,389 

13,402 

(8,914)

(731)

(398)

3,359 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK Personal Banking

4,342 

724 

216 

5,282 

(3,241)

— 

(207)

1,834 

Ulster Bank RoI

421 

94 

89 

604 

(676)

— 

(60)

(132)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal & Ulster

4,763 

818 

305 

5,886 

(3,917)

— 

(267) 

1,702 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial Banking

3,074 

1,405 

200 

4,679 

(2,458)

(144)

(390)

1,687 

Private Banking

464 

179 

35 

678 

(529)

— 

(6)

143 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial & Private Banking

3,538 

1,584 

235 

5,357 

(2,987)

(144)

(396)

1,830 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS International

325 

42 

22 

389 

(217)

(2)

(3)

167 

NatWest Markets

203 

24 

823 

1,050 

(2,250)

49 

174 

(977)

Central items & other

158 

(13)

306 

451 

(222)

(711)

(1)

(483)

Total

8,987 

2,455 

1,691 

13,133 

(9,593)

(808)

(493)

2,239 

2016 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK Personal Banking

4,185 

779 

16 

4,980 

(3,675)

(119)

1,188 

Ulster Bank RoI

409 

82 

85 

576 

(669)

— 

113 

20 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal & Ulster

4,594

861 

101 

5,556 

(4,344)

(6)

1,208 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial Banking

2,903 

1,399 

260 

4,562 

(2,927)

(143)

(212)

1,280 

Private Banking

449 

181 

27 

657 

(549)

— 

111 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial & Private Banking

3,352 

1,580 

287 

5,219 

(3,476)

(143)

(209)

1,391 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS International

303 

50 

21 

374 

(174)

— 

(10)

190 

NatWest Markets

343 

55 

814 

1,212 

(2,810)

(14)

(253)

(1,865)

Central items & other

116 

(11)

124 

229 

(4,612)

(623)

— 

(5,006)

Total

8,708 

2,535 

1,347 

12,590 

(15,416)

(778)

(478)

(4,082)

 

195


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

4 Segmental analysis continued

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

Total revenue

 

Inter 

 

 

 

Inter 

 

 

 

Inter 

 

External 

segment 

Total 

 

External 

segment 

Total 

 

External 

segment 

Total 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

UK Personal Banking

6,188 

63 

6,251 

 

6,406 

39 

6,445 

 

6,303 

50 

6,353 

Ulster Bank RoI

668 

— 

668 

 

676 

(4)

672 

 

660 

661 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal & Ulster

6,856 

63 

6,919 

 

7,082 

35 

7,117 

 

6,963 

51 

7,014 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial Banking

4,576 

89 

4,665 

 

4,532 

79 

4,611 

 

4,532 

70 

4,602 

Private Banking

681 

195 

876 

 

585 

143 

728 

 

567 

172 

739 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial & Private Banking

5,257 

284 

5,541 

 

5,117 

222 

5,339 

 

5,099 

242 

5,341 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS International

506 

148 

654 

 

309 

119 

428 

 

313 

156 

469 

NatWest Markets

1,882 

916 

2,798 

 

1,408 

809 

2,217 

 

1,708 

1,539 

3,247 

Central items & other

2,155 

(1,411)

744 

 

2,147 

(1,185)

962 

 

1,862 

(1,988)

(126)

Total

16,656 

— 

16,656 

 

16,063 

— 

16,063 

 

15,945 

— 

15,945 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK Personal Banking

5,021 

33 

5,054 

 

5,265 

17 

5,282 

 

4,953 

27 

4,980 

Ulster Bank RoI

613 

(3)

610 

 

609 

(5)

604 

 

584 

(8)

576 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal & Ulster

5,634 

30 

5,664 

 

5,874 

12 

5,886 

 

5,537 

19 

5,556 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial Banking

5,079 

(477)

4,602 

 

5,051 

(372)

4,679 

 

4,949 

(387)

4,562 

Private Banking

655 

120 

775 

 

594 

84 

678 

 

554 

103 

657 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial & Private Banking

5,734 

(357)

5,377 

 

5,645 

(288)

5,357 

 

5,503 

(284)

5,219 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS International

469 

125 

594 

 

281 

108 

389 

 

239 

135 

374 

NatWest Markets

1,510 

(68)

1,442 

 

1,077 

(27)

1,050 

 

1,296 

(84)

1,212 

Central items & other

55 

270 

325 

 

256 

195 

451 

 

15 

214 

229 

Total

13,402 

— 

13,402 

 

13,133 

— 

13,133 

 

12,590 

— 

12,590 

 

Analysis of net fees and commissions

UK

Ulster

Commercial

Private

RBS

NatWest

Central items

 

PB

Bank RoI

Banking

Banking

International

Markets

& other

Total

2018

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees and commissions receivable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - Payment services

227 

34 

556 

33 

25 

— 

878 

  - Credit and debit card fees

402 

22 

175 

13 

— 

— 

— 

612 

  - Lending (credit facilities)

408 

29 

415 

29 

88 

— 

971 

  - Brokerage

62 

— 

— 

85 

— 

158 

  - Investment management, trustee and fiduciary services

49 

— 

191 

42 

— 

— 

286 

  - Trade finance

— 

122 

— 

132 

  - Underwriting fees

13 

— 

17 

— 

— 

144 

— 

174 

  - Other

60 

16 

67 

(141)

Total

1,163 

98 

1,345 

261 

102 

390 

(141)

3,218 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees and commissions payable

(471)

(7)

(62)

(33)

(1)

(423)

136 

(861)

Net fees and commissions

692 

91 

1,283 

228 

101 

(33)

(5)

2,357 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees and commissions receivable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  - Payment services

194 

30 

543 

37 

24 

— 

829 

  - Credit and debit card fees

451 

27 

175 

12 

— 

— 

— 

665 

  - Lending (credit facilities)

436 

30 

497 

10 

83 

1,060 

  - Brokerage

69 

10 

— 

— 

63 

— 

148 

  - Investment management, trustee and fiduciary services

72 

35 

133 

— 

249 

  - Trade finance

— 

164 

— 

173 

  - Underwriting fees

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

157 

— 

157 

  - Other

— 

51 

15 

132 

(144)

57 

Total

1,223 

103 

1,465 

206 

43 

440 

(142)

3,338 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees and commissions payable

(499)

(9)

(60)

(27)

(1)

(416)

129 

(883)

Net fees and commissions

724 

94 

1,405 

179 

42 

24 

(13)

2,455 

 

196


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

4 Segmental analysis continued

 

 

 

UK

 

Ulster

 

Commercial

 

Private

 

RBS

 

NatWest

 

Central items

 

 

 

 

PB

 

Bank RoI

 

Banking

 

Banking

 

International

 

Markets

 

& other

 

Total

2016

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees and commissions receivable

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- Payment services

 

215

 

27

 

534

 

32

 

24

 

24

 

 

856

- Credit and debit card fees

 

437

 

25

 

163

 

18

 

2

 

 

 

645

- Lending (credit facilities)

 

416

 

30

 

490

 

2

 

11

 

95

 

 

1,044

- Brokerage

 

63

 

7

 

1

 

7

 

1

 

71

 

4

 

154

- Investment management, trustee and fiduciary services

 

84

 

3

 

37

 

118

 

(3)

 

 

11

 

250

- Trade finance

 

 

2

 

158

 

1

 

5

 

30

 

 

196

- Underwriting fees

 

 

 

 

 

 

83

 

 

83

- Other

 

4

 

 

68

 

28

 

21

 

202

 

(211)

 

112

Total

 

1,219

 

94

 

1,451

 

206

 

61

 

505

 

(196)

 

3,340

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fees and commissions payable

 

(440)

 

(12)

 

(52)

 

(25)

 

(11)

 

(450)

 

185

 

(805)

Net fees and commissions

 

779

 

82

 

1,399

 

181

 

50

 

55

 

(11)

 

2,535

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

 

Assets

 

Liabilities

 

Assets

 

Liabilities

 

Assets

 

Liabilities

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

UK Personal Banking

 

171,011

 

148,792

 

166,560

 

145,104

 

157,296

 

136,744

Ulster Bank RoI

 

25,193

 

21,189

 

24,564

 

19,853

 

24,111

 

19,299

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Personal & Ulster

 

196,204

 

169,981

 

191,124

 

164,957

 

181,407

 

156,043

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial Banking

 

166,478

 

139,804

 

173,621

 

143,450

 

174,514

 

140,737

Private Banking

 

21,983

 

28,554

 

20,290

 

27,049

 

18,578

 

26,673

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial & Private Banking

 

188,461

 

168,358

 

193,911

 

170,499

 

193,092

 

167,410

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RBS International

 

28,398

 

27,663

 

25,867

 

29,077

 

23,420

 

25,280

NatWest Markets

 

244,531

 

227,399

 

277,886

 

248,553

 

372,496

 

340,471

Central items & other

 

36,641

 

54,344

 

49,268

 

75,877

 

28,241

 

60,048

Total

 

694,235

 

647,745

 

738,056

 

688,963

 

798,656

 

749,252

 

 

Segmental analysis of goodwill is as follows:

 

 

 

 

 

Commercial &

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK Personal

 

Private

 

RBS

 

 

 

 

Banking

 

Banking

 

International

 

Total

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

At 1 January 2017 and 31 December 2017

 

2,651

 

2,607

 

300

 

5,558

Acquisitions

 

48

 

 

 

48

Inter-segment transfers

 

(9)

 

9

 

 

At 31 December 2018

 

2,690

 

2,616

 

300

 

5,606

 

197


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

4 Segmental analysis continued

 

Geographical segments

 

The geographical analysis in the tables below has been compiled on the basis of location of office where the transactions are recorded.

 

 

 

UK

 

USA

 

Europe

 

RoW

 

Total

2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Total revenue

 

15,351

 

300

 

838

 

167

 

16,656

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

8,223

 

 

404

 

29

 

8,656

Net fees and commissions

 

2,183

 

12

 

102

 

60

 

2,357

Income from trading activities

 

1,308

 

124

 

68

 

7

 

1,507

Other operating income

 

467

 

119

 

229

 

67

 

882

Total income

 

12,181

 

255

 

803

 

163

 

13,402

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

 

3,805

 

(718)

 

150

 

122

 

3,359

Total assets

 

624,228

 

32,573

 

34,441

 

2,993

 

694,235

Total liabilities

 

588,185

 

31,329

 

27,183

 

1,048

 

647,745

Net assets attributable to equity owners and non-controlling interests

 

36,043

 

1,244

 

7,258

 

1,945

 

46,490

Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

121,267

 

 

5,408

 

208

 

126,883

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total revenue

 

15,011

 

192

 

655

 

205

 

16,063

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

8,611

 

(4)

 

346

 

34

 

8,987

Net fees and commissions

 

2,192

 

97

 

113

 

53

 

2,455

Income from trading activities

 

570

 

83

 

(24)

 

5

 

634

Other operating income

 

806

 

22

 

121

 

108

 

1,057

Total income

 

12,179

 

198

 

556

 

200

 

13,133

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

 

3,230

 

(580)

 

(485)

 

74

 

2,239

Total assets

 

662,314

 

38,485

 

34,280

 

2,977

 

738,056

Total liabilities

 

626,103

 

36,564

 

25,171

 

1,125

 

688,963

Net assets attributable to equity owners and non-controlling interests

 

36,211

 

1,921

 

9,109

 

1,852

 

49,093

Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

128,127

 

78

 

7,823

 

22

 

136,050

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total revenue

 

14,606

 

264

 

738

 

337

 

15,945

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

8,243

 

82

 

302

 

81

 

8,708

Net fees and commissions

 

2,287

 

9

 

175

 

64

 

2,535

Income from trading activities

 

790

 

159

 

18

 

7

 

974

Other operating income

 

261

 

(40)

 

9

 

143

 

373

Total income

 

11,581

 

210

 

504

 

295

 

12,590

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating (loss)/profit before tax

 

(2,214)

 

(1,652)

 

(266)

 

50

 

(4,082)

Total assets

 

715,685

 

44,447

 

32,142

 

6,382

 

798,656

Total liabilities

 

675,089

 

44,513

 

26,311

 

3,339

 

749,252

Net assets attributable to equity owners and non-controlling interests

 

40,596

 

(66)

 

5,831

 

3,043

 

49,404

Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

141,963

 

639

 

8,038

 

51

 

150,691

 

198


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

5 Pensions

 

Defined contribution schemes

The Group sponsors a number of defined contribution pension schemes in different territories, which new employees are offered the opportunity to join.

 

Defined benefit schemes

The Group sponsors a number of pension schemes in the UK and overseas, including the Main section of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (the “Main section”) which operates under UK trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of its members in accordance with the terms of the trust deed, the scheme rules and UK legislation.

 

Pension fund trustees are appointed to operate each fund and ensure benefits are paid in accordance with the scheme rules and national law. The trustees are the legal owner of a scheme’s assets, and have a duty to act in the best interests of all scheme members.

 

The schemes generally provide a pension of one-sixtieth of final pensionable salary for each year of service prior to retirement up to a maximum of 40 years and are contributory for current members. These have been closed to new entrants for over ten years, although current members continue to build up additional pension benefits, currently subject to 2% maximum annual salary inflation, while they remain employed by the Group.

 

The Main section corporate trustee is RBS Pension Trustee Limited (the Trustee), a wholly owned subsidiary of National Westminster Bank Plc, Principal Employer of the Main section. The Board of the Trustee comprises four member trustee directors selected from eligible active staff, deferred and pensioner members who apply and six appointed by the Group. Under UK legislation a defined benefit pension scheme is required to meet the statutory funding objective of having sufficient and appropriate assets to cover its liabilities (the pensions that have been promised to members).

 

Similar governance principles apply to the Group’s other pension schemes.

 

Investment strategy

The assets of the Main section, which is typical of other group schemes, represent 90% of plan assets at 31 December 2018 (2017 - 90%) and are invested in a diversified portfolio as shown below.

 

The Main section employs derivative instruments to achieve a desired asset class exposure and to reduce the section’s interest rate, inflation and currency risk. This means that the net funding position is considerably less sensitive to changes in market conditions than the value of the assets or liabilities in isolation.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

Major classes of plan assets as a percentage of

 

Quoted

 

Unquoted

 

Total

 

Quoted

 

Unquoted

 

Total

total plan assets of the Main section

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

 

%

Equities

 

3.7%

 

5.2%

 

8.9%

 

21.9%

 

4.0%

 

25.9%

Index linked bonds

 

40.1%

 

 

40.1%

 

30.6%

 

 

30.6%

Government bonds

 

12.9%

 

 

12.9%

 

9.2%

 

 

9.2%

Corporate and other bonds

 

12.2%

 

5.2%

 

17.4%

 

15.8%

 

1.0%

 

16.8%

Real estate

 

 

5.5%

 

5.5%

 

 

5.2%

 

5.2%

Derivatives

 

 

6.1%

 

6.1%

 

 

8.1%

 

8.1%

Cash and other assets

 

 

9.1%

 

9.1%

 

 

4.2%

 

4.2%

 

 

68.9%

 

31.1%

 

100.0%

 

77.5%

 

22.5%

 

100.0%

 

 

The Main section’s holdings of derivative instruments are summarised in the table below:

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Notional

 

Fair value

 

Notional

 

Fair value

 

 

amounts

 

Assets

 

Liabilities

 

amounts

 

Assets

 

Liabilities

 

 

£bn

 

£m

 

£m

 

£bn

 

£m

 

£m

Inflation rate swaps

 

13

 

347

 

502

 

11

 

310

 

555

Interest rate swaps

 

55

 

8,132

 

5,362

 

44

 

8,161

 

4,779

Currency forwards

 

10

 

22

 

164

 

12

 

160

 

34

Equity and bond call options

 

1

 

277

 

 

2

 

428

 

Equity and bond put options

 

4

 

3

 

1

 

3

 

3

 

1

Other

 

4

 

1,027

 

1,092

 

4

 

327

 

444

 

 

Swaps have been executed at prevailing market rates and within standard market bid/offer spreads with a number of counterparty banks, including NatWest Markets Plc.

 

At 31 December 2018, the gross notional value of the swaps was £72 billion (2017 - £57 billion) and had a net positive fair value of £2,557 million (2017 - £3,045 million) against which the banks had posted approximately 103% collateral.

 

The schemes do not invest directly in the Group but can have exposure to the Group. The trustees of the respective UK schemes are responsible for ensuring that indirect investments in the Group do not exceed the 5% regulatory limit.

 

199


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

5 Pensions continued

 

 

 

Main section

 

All schemes

 

 

 

 

Present
value

 

Asset

 

Net

 

 

 

Present
value

 

Asset

 

Net

 

 

Fair

 

of defined

 

ceiling/

 

pension

 

Fair

 

of defined

 

ceiling/

 

pension

 

 

value of

 

benefit

 

minimum

 

liability/

 

value of

 

benefit

 

minimum

 

liability/

 

 

plan assets

 

obligation

 

funding (1)

 

(asset)

 

plan assets

 

obligation

 

funding (1)

 

(asset)

Changes in value of net pension liability/(asset)

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

At 1 January 2017

 

43,824

 

38,851

 

4,973

 

 

49,229

 

43,990

 

5,326

 

87

Currency translation and other adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

46

 

46

 

3

 

3

Income statement

 

1,155

 

1,266

 

134

 

245

 

1,285

 

1,518

 

142

 

375

Statement of comprehensive income

 

1,580

 

(9)

 

1,608

 

19

 

1,728

 

4

 

1,634

 

(90)

Contributions by employer

 

264

 

 

 

(264)

 

627

 

 

 

(627)

Contributions by plan participants and other scheme members

 

4

 

4

 

 

 

10

 

10

 

 

Liabilities extinguished upon settlement

 

 

 

 

 

(744)

 

(755)

 

 

(11)

Benefits paid

 

(2,175)

 

(2,175)

 

 

 

(2,435)

 

(2,435)

 

 

At 1 January 2018

 

44,652

 

37,937

 

6,715

 

 

49,746

 

42,378

 

7,105

 

(263)

Currency translation and other adjustments

 

 

 

 

 

20

 

17

 

(1)

 

(4)

Income statement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net interest expense

 

1,123

 

939

 

171

 

(13)

 

1,242

 

1,043

 

179

 

(20)

Current service cost

 

 

190

 

 

190

 

 

240

 

 

240

Past service cost

 

 

14

 

 

14

 

 

14

 

 

14

Loss on curtailments or settlements

 

 

 

 

 

 

74

 

 

74

 

 

1,123

 

1,143

 

171

 

191

 

1,242

 

1,371

 

179

 

308

Statement of comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Return on plan assets excluding recognised interest income

 

(1,891)

 

 

 

1,891

 

(2,090)

 

 

 

2,090

Experience gains and losses

 

 

122

 

 

122

 

 

81

 

 

81

Effect of changes in actuarial financial assumptions

 

 

(2,338)

 

 

(2,338)

 

 

(2,537)

 

 

(2,537)

Effect of changes in actuarial demographic assumptions

 

 

820

 

 

820

 

 

826

 

 

826

Asset ceiling adjustments:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Attributable to contributions required by ring fencing

 

 

 

2,000

 

2,000

 

 

 

2,053

 

2,053

Other movements in the year

 

 

 

(468)

 

(468)

 

 

 

(546)

 

(546)

 

 

(1,891)

 

(1,396)

 

1,532

 

2,027

 

(2,090)

 

(1,630)

 

1,507

 

1,967

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Contributions by employer

 

2,218

 

 

 

(2,218)

 

2,363

 

 

 

(2,363)

Contributions by plan participants and other scheme members

 

7

 

7

 

 

 

12

 

12

 

 

Liabilities extinguished upon settlement

 

 

 

 

 

(259)

 

(259)

 

 

Transfer of pension assets and liabilities from Main section (2)

 

(276)

 

(198)

 

(78)

 

 

 

 

 

Benefits paid

 

(2,027)

 

(2,027)

 

 

 

(2,282)

 

(2,282)

 

 

At 31 December 2018

 

43,806

 

35,466

 

8,340

 

 

48,752

 

39,607

 

8,790

 

(355)

 

Notes:

(1)      The group recognises the net pension scheme surplus or deficit as a net asset or liability. In doing so, the funded status is adjusted to reflect any schemes with a surplus that the Group may not be able to access, as well as any minimum funding requirement to pay in additional contributions. This is most relevant to the Main section, where the surplus is not recognised.

(2)      Includes adjustment for assets of £276 million and liabilities of £198 million transferred at no consideration to establish two separate sections of the RBS Group Pension Fund because ring-fencing rules do not allow employees outside the ring-fenced group to be members of the Main section.

(3)      The Group expects to make contributions to the Main section of £218 million in 2019.

 

 

 

All schemes

 

 

2018

 

2017

Amounts recognised on the balance sheet

 

£m

 

£m

Fund assets at fair value

 

48,752

 

49,746

Present value of fund liabilities

 

39,607

 

42,378

Funded status

 

9,145

 

7,368

Asset ceiling/minimum funding

 

8,790

 

7,105

 

 

355

 

263

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

Net pension asset/(liability) comprises

 

£m

 

£m

Net assets of schemes in surplus (included in Other assets, Note 17)

 

520

 

392

Net liabilities of schemes in deficit (included in Other liabilities, Note 20)

 

(165)

 

(129)

 

 

355

 

263

 

200


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

5 Pensions continued

 

Funding and contributions by the Group

In the UK, the trustees of defined benefit pension schemes are required to perform funding valuations every three years. The trustees and the sponsor, with the support of the Scheme Actuary, agree the assumptions used to value the liabilities and a Schedule of Contributions required to eliminate any funding deficit. The funding assumptions incorporate a margin for prudence over and above the expected cost of providing the benefits promised to members, taking into account the sponsor’s covenant and the investment strategy of the scheme. Similar arrangements apply in the other territories where the Group sponsors defined benefit pension schemes. The last funding valuation of the Main section was at 31 December 2017 and next funding valuation is due at 31 December 2020, to be agreed by 31 March 2022.

 

The triennial funding valuation of the Main section as at 31 December 2017 determined the funding level to be 96%, pension liabilities to be £47 billion and the deficit to be £2 billion, which was eliminated by a £2 billion cash payment in October 2018. The average cost of the future service of current members is 44% of basic salary before administrative expenses and contributions from those members.

 

In October 2018 the Court ruled on the requirement to and method for equalising guaranteed minimum pension benefits arising between 1990 and 1997 between men and women. In 2017 the Group considered that equalisation would change the Main section’s defined benefit obligation by 0.2%.The estimate was updated following the clarity provided by the Court ruling and the impact of any future conversion exercise to rectify the position. The £102 million cost on revision of the previous estimate of the financial assumptions in respect of equalisation is recognised in equity.

 

Assumptions

Placing a value on the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes’ liabilities requires the Group’s management to make a number of assumptions, with the support of independent actuaries. The ultimate cost of the defined benefit obligations depends upon actual future events and the assumptions made are unlikely to be exactly borne out in practice, meaning the final cost may be higher or lower than expected.

 

The most significant assumptions used for the Main section are shown below:

 

 

Principal IAS 19 actuarial

Principal assumptions of 2017 triennial valuation

 

assumptions

 

 

2018

2017

2017

 

%

%

 

Discount rate

2.9

2.6

Fixed interest swap yield curve plus 0.8% per annum

Inflation assumption (RPI)

3.2

3.1

RPI swap yield curve

Rate of increase in salaries

1.8

1.8

 

Rate of increase in deferred pensions

3.1

3.0

 

Rate of increase in pensions in payment

2.9

2.9

Modelled allowance for relevant caps and floors

Lump sum conversion rate at retirement

20

21

18%

Longevity at age 60:

years

years

 

Current pensioners

 

 

 

Males

27.2

27.2

28.1

Females

29.0

28.7

29.7

Future pensioners, currently aged 40

 

 

 

Males

28.4

28.6

29.3

Females

30.5

30.4

31.5

 

 

Discount rate

The IAS 19 valuation uses a single discount rate by reference to the yield on a basket of ‘high quality’ sterling corporate bonds. For the triennial valuation discounting is by reference to a yield curve.

 

The weighted average duration of the Main section’s defined benefit obligation at 31 December 2018 is 20 years (2017 – 21 years).

 

Significant judgement is required when setting the criteria for bonds to be included in IAS 19’s basket of bonds that is used to determine the discount rate used in the valuations. The criteria include issue size, quality of pricing and the exclusion of outliers. Judgement is also required in determining the shape of the yield curve at long durations: a constant credit spread relative to gilts is assumed. Sensitivity to the main assumptions is presented below.

 

201


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

5 Pensions continued

 

The chart below shows the projected benefit payment pattern for the Main section in nominal terms. These cashflows are based on the most recent formal actuarial valuation, effective 31 December 2017.

 

 

The larger outflow in the first four years represents the expected level of transfers out to 31 December 2021.

 

The table below shows how the present value of the defined benefit obligation of the Main section would change if the key assumptions used were changed independently. In practice the variables are somewhat correlated and do not move completely in isolation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Increase in

 

 

(Decrease)/increase

 

(Decrease)/increase

 

net pension assets/

 

 

in value of assets

 

in value of liabilities

 

(obligations)

2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

0.25% increase in interest rates/discount rate

 

(2,214)

 

(1,644)

 

(570)

0.25% increase in inflation

 

1,487

 

1,199

 

288

0.25% increase in credit spreads

 

(5)

 

(1,644)

 

1,639

Longevity increase of one year

 

 

1,414

 

(1,414)

0.25% additional rate of increase in pensions in payment

 

 

1,215

 

(1,215)

Increase in equity values of 10% (1)

 

419

 

 

419

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

0.25% increase in interest rates/discount rate

 

(2,218)

 

(1,964)

 

(254)

0.25% increase in inflation

 

1,289

 

1,329

 

(40)

0.25% increase in credit spreads

 

(7)

 

(1,964)

 

1,957

Longevity increase of one year

 

 

1,478

 

(1,478)

0.25% additional rate of increase in pensions in payment

 

 

1,328

 

(1,328)

Increase in equity values of 10% (1)

 

909

 

 

909

 

Note:

(1) Includes both quoted and private equity.

 

202


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

5 Pensions continued

 

The defined benefit obligation of the Main section is attributable to the different classes of scheme members in the following proportions:

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

Membership category

 

%

 

%

Active members

 

12.9

 

16.2

Deferred members

 

48.6

 

47.3

Pensioners and dependants

 

38.5

 

36.5

 

 

100.0

 

100.0

 

The experience history of Group schemes is shown below:

 

 

 

Main section

 

All schemes

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

2015

 

2014

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

2015

 

2014

History of defined benefit schemes

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Fair value of plan assets

 

43,806

 

44,652

 

43,824

 

30,703

 

30,077

 

48,752

 

49,746

 

49,229

 

34,708

 

34,359

Present value of plan obligations

 

35,466

 

37,937

 

38,851

 

30,966

 

31,776

 

39,607

 

42,378

 

43,990

 

35,152

 

36,643

Net surplus/(deficit)

 

8,340

 

6,715

 

4,973

 

(263

)

(1,699

)

9,145

 

7,368

 

5,239

 

(444

)

(2,284)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Experience (losses)/gains on plan liabilities

 

(122

)

(107

)

658

 

233

 

3

 

(81

)

(93

)

794

 

258

 

18

Experience (losses)/gains on plan assets

 

(1,891

)

1,580

 

8,562

 

(415

)

4,629

 

(2,090

)

1,728

 

9,254

 

(458

)

5,171

Actual return on plan assets

 

(768

)

2,735

 

9,872

 

703

 

5,766

 

(848

)

3,013

 

10,708

 

749

 

6,485

Actual return on plan assets - %

 

(1.7%

)

6.2%

 

32.2%

 

2.3%

 

23.8%

 

(1.7%

)

6.1%

 

30.9%

 

2.2%

 

22.8%

 

6 Auditor’s remuneration

 

Amounts paid to the Group’s auditors for statutory audit and other services are set out below. All audit-related and other services are approved by the Group Audit Committee and are subject to strict controls to ensure the external auditor’s independence is unaffected by the provision of other services. The Group Audit Committee recognises that for certain assignments the auditors are best placed to perform the work economically; for other work the Group selects the supplier best placed to meet its requirements. The Group’s auditors are permitted to tender for such work in competition with other firms where the work is permissible under audit independence rules.

 

Amounts paid to the Group’s auditors for statutory audit and other services are set out below:

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

2016

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Fees payable for the audit of the Group’s annual accounts (1)

 

3.5

 

4.0

 

4.0

- the audit of the company’s subsidiaries (1)

 

27.5

 

22.9

 

20.7

- audit-related assurance services (1,2)

 

2.9

 

4.3

 

4.0

Total audit and audit-related assurance services fees

 

33.9

 

31.2

 

28.7

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other assurance services

 

1.3

 

1.7

 

3.4

Corporate finance services (3)

 

0.2

 

0.2

 

0.2

Non-audit services

 

 

 

Total other services

 

1.5

 

1.9

 

3.6

 

Notes:

(1)       The 2018 audit fee was approved by the Group Audit Committee. At 31 December 2018, £16 million has been billed in and paid in respect of 2018 Group audit fees.

(2)       Comprises fees of £1.1 million (2017 - £1.1 million) in relation to reviews of interim financial information, £1.1 million (2017 - £2.5 million) in respect of reports to the Group’s regulators in the UK and overseas, £0.7 million (2017 - £0.7 million) in relation to non-statutory audit opinions.

(3)       Comprises fees of £0.2 million (FY 2017 - £0.2 million) in respect of work performed by the auditors as reporting accountants on debt and equity issuances undertaken by the Group.

 

203


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

7 Tax

 

 

 

Changes in reporting standards

IAS 12 ‘Income taxes’ was revised with effect from 1 January 2019. The income statement is now required to include any tax relief on the servicing cost of instruments classified as equity. Relief of £67 million (2017 - £93 million; 2016 - £59 million) was recognised in the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 December 2018; this and prior periods have been retrospectively revised, or restated, in this Note, Note 36 Consolidating financial information, consolidated Income statement, statement of comprehensive income and statement of changes in equity.

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Current tax:

 

 

 

Charge for the year

(1,025)

(925)

(1,067)

Over provision in respect of prior years

125 

227 

186 

 

(900)

(698)

(881)

Deferred tax:

 

 

 

(Charge)/credit for the year

(280)

108 

246 

Increase/(reduction) in the carrying value of deferred tax assets

(30)

(317)

Under provision in respect of prior years

(35)

(111)

(155)

Tax charge for the year

(1,208)

(731)

(1,107)

 

The actual tax charge differs from the expected tax (charge)/credit computed by applying the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 19% (2017 – 19.25%; 2016 – 20.00%) as follows:

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Expected tax (charge)/credit

(638)

(431)

816 

Losses and temporary differences in year where no deferred tax asset recognised

(55)

(303)

(742)

Foreign profits taxed at other rates

(8)

104 

340 

UK tax rate change impact (1)

— 

(7)

Items not allowed for tax:

 

 

 

  - losses on disposals and write-downs

(44)

(69)

(45)

  - UK bank levy

(38)

(45)

(41)

  - regulatory and legal actions

(203)

(56)

(952)

  - other disallowable items

(63)

(110)

(141)

Non-taxable items

47 

134 

136 

Taxable foreign exchange movements

(27)

27 

(57)

Losses brought forward and utilised

14 

11 

10 

Increase/(reduction) in carrying value of deferred tax asset in respect of:

 

 

 

  - UK losses

(30)

(317)

Banking surcharge

(357)

(165)

(210)

Adjustments in respect of prior years (2)

90 

116 

31 

Tax credit on paid-in equity

67 

93 

59 

Actual tax charge

(1,208)

(731)

(1,107)

 

Notes:

(1)        In recent years, the UK government has steadily reduced the rate of UK corporation tax, with the latest enacted rates standing at 19% from 1 April 2017 and 17% from 1 April 2020.

(2)        Prior year tax adjustments incorporate refinements to tax computations made on submission and agreement with the tax authorities. Current taxation balances include provisions in respect of uncertain tax positions, in particular in relation to restructuring and other costs where the taxation treatment remains subject to agreement with the relevant tax authorities.

 

 

 

Judgment: Tax contingencies

The Group’s income tax charge and its provisions for income taxes necessarily involve a degree of estimation and judgement. The tax treatment of some transactions is uncertain and tax computations are yet to be agreed with the tax authorities in a number of jurisdictions. The Group recognises anticipated tax liabilities based on all available evidence and, where appropriate, in the light of external advice. Any difference between the final outcome and the amounts provided will affect current and deferred income tax charges in the period when the matter is resolved.

 

Deferred tax

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

£m 

£m 

Deferred tax asset

(1,412)

(1,740)

Deferred tax liability

454 

583 

Net deferred tax asset

(958)

(1,157)

 

204


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

7 Tax continued

 

Net deferred tax asset comprised:

 

 

 

 

 

Tax 

 

 

 

 

Accelerated

 

 

losses 

 

 

 

 

capital

Expense

Financial

carried 

 

 

 

Pension 

allowances

provisions

instruments

forward 

Other

Total 

 

£m 

£m 

£m

£m

£m 

£m 

£m 

At 1 January 2017

(662)

361 

(322)

395 

(1,050)

137 

(1,141)

Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries

— 

(29)

— 

— 

— 

— 

(29)

Charge/(credit) to income statement

(126)

55 

46 

121 

(66)

33 

Charge/(credit) to other comprehensive income

266 

— 

— 

(243)

— 

(19)

Currency translation and other adjustments

— 

(14)

— 

(10)

(1)

(24)

At 1 January 2018

(393)

192 

(266)

198 

(939)

51 

(1,157)

Implementation of IFRS9 on 1 January 2018

— 

— 

— 

16 

— 

— 

16 

(Credit)/charge to income statement

(40)

22 

121 

154 

46 

308 

(Credit)/charge to other comprehensive income

(95)

— 

(23)

— 

33 

(84)

Currency translation and other adjustments

— 

(14)

(2)

(34)

(41)

At 31 December 2018

(528)

220 

(159)

349 

(936)

96 

(958)

 

Deferred tax assets in respect of unused tax losses are recognised if the losses can be used to offset probable future taxable profits after taking into account the expected reversal of other temporary differences. Recognised deferred tax assets in respect of tax losses are analysed further below.

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

£m 

£m 

UK tax losses carried forward

 

 

  - NatWest Markets Plc

151 

125 

  - National Westminster Bank Plc

505 

541 

  - Ulster Bank Limited

19 

14 

Total

675 

680 

Overseas tax losses carried forward

 

 

  - Ulster Bank Ireland DAC

261 

259 

 

936 

939 

 

 

Critical accounting policy: Deferred Tax

The deferred tax assets of £1,412 million at 31 December 2018 (2017 - £1,740 million) principally comprise losses that arose in the UK, and temporary differences. These deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that there will be future taxable profits to recover them.

 

Judgment - The Group has considered the carrying value of deferred tax assets and concluded that, based on management’s estimates, sufficient taxable profits will be generated in future years to recover recognised deferred tax assets.

 

Estimate -These estimates are partly based on forecast performance beyond the horizon for management’s detailed plans. They have regard to inherent uncertainties, such as Brexit and climate change.

 

UK tax losses - Under UK tax rules, tax losses can be carried forward indefinitely. As the recognised tax losses in the Group arose prior to 1 April 2015, credit in future periods is given against 25% of profits at the main rate of UK corporation tax, excluding the Banking Surcharge 8% rate introduced by The Finance (No. 2) Act 2015. Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2018 take into account the reduced rates in respect of tax losses and temporary differences and where appropriate, the banking surcharge inclusive rate in respect of other banking temporary differences.

 

NatWest Markets Plc – NatWest Markets Plc expects that the balance of recognised deferred tax asset at 31 December 2018 of £151 million in respect of tax losses amounting to approximately £800 million will be recovered by the end of 2024. Since 2012 NatWest Markets Plc has reported mixed levels of taxable profits and losses because core banking profitability was offset by a series of restructuring plans as the group reshaped to meet commercial and regulatory demands. In total, £10.2 billion of losses have not been recognised in the deferred tax balance at 31 December 2018; such losses will be available to offset 25% of future taxable profits in excess of those forecast in the closing deferred tax asset.

 

National Westminster Bank Plc – A deferred tax asset of £505 million has been recognised in respect of total losses of £2,936 million. The losses arose principally as a result of significant impairment and conduct charges between 2009 and 2012 during challenging economic conditions in the UK banking sector. National Westminster Bank plc returned to tax profitability during 2015 and expects the deferred tax asset to be consumed by future taxable profits by the end of 2023.

 

205


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

7 Tax continued

Overseas tax losses

Ulster Bank Ireland DAC A deferred tax asset of £261 million has been recognised in respect of losses of £2,089 million of total losses of £8,855 million carried forward at 31 December 2018. The losses arose principally as a result of significant impairment charges between 2008 and 2013 during challenging economic conditions in the Republic of Ireland. Subsequent movements reflect the £: exchange differences. As UBIDAC continues to operate in a small open economy subject to short term volatility and extended non-performing loan realisation periods the company expects, in assessing its deferred tax asset on tax losses, that they will be consumed by future taxable profits by the end of 2027.

 

Unrecognised deferred tax

Deferred tax assets of £5,118 million (2017 - £6,356 million; 2016 - £7,940, million) have not been recognised in respect of tax losses and other temporary differences carried forward of £25,597 million (2017 - £30,049 million; 2016 - £33,376 million) in jurisdictions where doubt exists over the availability of future taxable profits. Of these losses and other temporary differences, £939 million expire within five years and £5,992 million thereafter. The balance of tax losses and other temporary differences carried forward has no expiry date.

 

Deferred tax liabilities of £257 million (2017 - £255 million; 2016 - £258 million) have not been recognised in respect of retained earnings of overseas subsidiaries and held-over gains on the incorporation of overseas branches. Retained earnings of overseas subsidiaries are expected to be reinvested indefinitely or remitted to the UK free from further taxation. No taxation is expected to arise in the foreseeable future in respect of held-over gains. Changes to UK tax legislation largely exempts from UK tax, overseas dividends received on or after 1 July 2009.

 

8 Earnings per share

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m

£m

£m

Earnings

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders

1,622 

752 

(6,955)

 

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares (millions)

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year

12,009 

11,867 

11,692 

Effect of dilutive share options and convertible securities

52 

69 

51 

Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year

12,061 

11,936 

11,743 

 

 

 

 

9 Trading assets and liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

Trading assets and liabilities comprise assets and liabilities held at fair value in trading portfolios.

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

Assets

£m

£m

Loans

 

 

    Reverse repos

24,759 

36,272 

    Collateral given

19,036 

21,558 

Other loans

1,308 

651 

Total loans

45,103 

58,481 

Securities

 

 

    Central and local government

 

 

      - UK

6,834 

3,514 

      - US

4,689 

3,667 

      - other

13,498 

14,736 

Other securities

4,995 

5,593 

Total securities

30,016 

27,510 

Total

75,119 

85,991 

Liabilities

 

 

Deposits

 

 

    Repos

25,645 

28,363 

    Collateral received

20,187 

22,683 

    Other deposits

1,788 

1,302 

Total deposits

47,620 

52,348 

Debt securities in issue

903 

1,107 

Short positions

23,827 

28,527 

Total

72,350 

81,982 

 

206


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

10 Derivatives

Companies within RBS transact derivatives as principal either as a trading activity or to manage balance sheet foreign exchange, interest rate and credit risk.

 

2018 

 

2017

 

Notional 

 

 

 

Notional 

 

 

 

amount 

Assets 

Liabilities 

 

amount 

Assets 

Liabilities 

 

£bn 

£m 

£m 

 

£bn 

£m 

£m 

Exchange rate contracts

3,426 

36,545 

38,230 

 

3,425 

39,211 

41,681 

Interest rate contracts

10,536 

96,410 

90,444 

 

12,016 

120,945 

112,160 

Credit derivatives

16 

346 

208 

 

38 

531 

558 

Equity and commodity contracts

48 

15 

 

156 

107 

 

 

133,349 

128,897 

 

 

160,843 

154,506 

 

RBS enters into fair value hedges, cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations. The majority of RBS’s interest rate hedges relate to the management of RBS’s non-trading interest rate risk. RBS manages this risk within approved limits. Residual risk positions are hedged with derivatives principally interest rate swaps. Suitable larger financial instruments are fair value hedged; the remaining exposure, where possible, is hedged by derivatives documented as cash flow hedges.

 

The majority of RBS’s fair value hedges involve interest rate swaps hedging the fixed interest rate risk in recognised financial assets and financial liabilities. Cash flow hedges relate to exposures to the variability in future interest payments and receipts due to the movement of benchmark interest rates or foreign exchange rates on forecast transactions and on recognised financial assets and financial liabilities. This variability in cash flows is hedged by interest rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. RBS hedges its net investments in foreign operations with currency borrowings and forward foreign exchange contracts.

 

For cash flow hedge relationships of interest rate risk, the hedged items are actual and forecast variable interest rate cash flows arising from financial assets and financial liabilities with interest rates linked to the relevant benchmark rate LIBOR, EURIBOR or the Bank of England Official Bank Rate. The financial assets are loans to banks and customer and the financial liabilities are bank and customer deposits and LIBOR linked medium-term notes and other issued securities. The variability in cash flows due to movements in the relevant benchmark rate is hedged; this risk component is identified using the risk management systems of RBS. This risk component comprises the majority of cash flow variability risk.

 

For cash flow hedging relationships RBS determines that there is an economic relationship between the hedged item and hedging instrument via assessing the initial and ongoing effectiveness by comparing movements in the fair value of the expected highly probable forecast interest cash flows with movements in the fair value of the expected changes in cash flows from the hedging interest rate swap. Hedge effectiveness is measured on a cumulative basis over a time period management determines to be appropriate. The method of calculating hedge ineffectiveness is the hypothetical derivative method. RBS uses the actual ratio between the hedged item and hedging instrument to establish the hedge ratio for hedge accounting. For fair value hedge relationships of interest rate risk, the hedged items are typically large corporate fixed-rate loans, government securities, fixed rate finance leases, fixed rate medium-term notes or preference shares classified as debt. The hedged risk is the risk of changes in the hedged items fair value attributable to changes in the benchmark interest rate embedded in the hedged item. This risk component is identified using the risk management systems of RBS. This risk component comprises the majority of the hedged items fair value risk.

 

For fair value hedge relationships RBS determines that there is an economic relationship between the hedged items and hedging instrument via assessing the initial and ongoing effectiveness by comparing movements in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk with movements in the fair value of the expected changes in cash flows from the hedging interest rate swap. Hedge effectiveness is measured on a cumulative basis over a time period management determines to be appropriate. RBS uses either the actual ratio between the hedged item and hedging instrument(s) or one that minimises hedge ineffectiveness to establish the hedge ratio for hedge accounting. RBS hedges the currency risk of its net investment in foreign currency denominated operations with currency borrowings and forward foreign exchange contracts. RBS reviews the value of the investments net assets, executing hedges where appropriate to reduce the sensitivity of capital ratios to foreign exchange rate movement.

 

The Group hedges currency risk in respect of its net investment in foreign currency denominated operations with currency borrowings and forward foreign exchange contracts. The Group reviews the value of the investments net assets, executing hedges where appropriate, to reduce the sensitivity of capital ratios to foreign exchange movements.

 

Included in the table above are derivatives held for hedging purposes as follows:

 

 

 

2018 

 

 

2017

 

Notional

Assets 

Liabilities 

 

Assets 

Liabilities 

 

£bn

£m 

£m 

 

£m 

£m 

Fair value hedging

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate contracts

60.0 

965 

2,061 

 

904 

2,211 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash flow hedging

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate contracts

149.7 

1,148 

872 

 

1,989 

1,295 

Exchange rate contacts

12.5 

106 

— 

 

63 

37 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net investment hedging

 

 

 

 

 

 

Exchange rate contracts

2.0 

32 

10 

 

11 

28 

 

224.2 

2,251 

2,943 

 

2,967 

3,571 

 

207


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

10 Derivatives continued

The following table shows the period in which the hedging contract ends:

 

 

 

0-3 months

3-12 months

1-3 years

3-5 years

5-10 years

10-20 years

20+ years

Total

Fair value hedging

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hedging assets -  Interest rate risk (£bn)

1.0 

1.8 

11.0 

4.9 

7.8 

3.7 

3.8 

34.0 

Hedging liabilities - Interest rate risk (£bn)

— 

2.0 

7.5 

10.0 

4.6 

1.9 

— 

26.0 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash flow hedging

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Hedging assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Interest rate risk (£bn)

3.9 

10.9 

47.8 

8.7 

10.5 

— 

— 

81.8 

  Average fixed interest rate

1.87 

1.44 

1.13 

2.00 

1.43 

— 

— 

1.33 

Hedging liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Interest rate risk (£bn)

8.6 

18.9 

34.1 

5.1 

0.4 

0.8 

— 

67.9 

  Average fixed interest rate

0.54 

0.56 

1.07 

1.34 

3.96 

4.31 

— 

0.94 

  Exchange rate risk (£bn)

— 

— 

5.8 

4.7 

2.0 

— 

— 

12.5 

  Average USD - £ rate

— 

— 

1.32 

1.37 

1.50 

— 

— 

1.37 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Net investment hedging

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Exchange rate risk (£bn)

1.2 

0.6 

0.2 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2.0 

Principal currency hedges

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Average SAR - £ rate

4.80 

4.83 

4.82 

— 

— 

— 

— 

4.81 

  Average CHF - £ rate

1.22 

1.23 

1.18 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1.21 

 

The table below analyses assets and liabilities subject to hedging derivatives.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Impact on hedged

 

Carrying value

Impact on

items ceased to be

 

(CV) of hedged

hedged items

adjusted for hedging

 

assets and liabilities

included in CV

gains or losses

2018 

£m

£m

£m

Fair value hedging - interest rate

 

 

 

Loans to banks and customers - amortised cost

6,197 

875 

91 

Other financial assets - securities

31,879 

362 

10 

Total

38,076 

1,237 

101 

 

 

 

 

Other financial liabilities - debt securities in issue

23,289 

(19)

— 

Subordinated liabilities

2,359 

22 

— 

Total

25,648 

— 

 

 

 

 

Fair value hedging - exchange rate

 

 

 

Other financial assets - securities

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

Cash flow hedging - interest rate

 

 

 

Loans to banks and customers - amortised cost

81,880 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank and customer deposits

67,854 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash flow hedging - exchange rate

 

 

 

Other financial liabilities - debt securities in issue

5,590 

 

 

Subordinates liabilities

6,902 

 

 

Total

12,492 

 

 

 

208


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

10 Derivatives continued

 

Hedge ineffectiveness recognised in other operating income comprised:

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

 

£m 

£m 

£m 

Fair value hedging

 

 

 

Gains/(losses) on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk

54 

(48)

1,146 

(Losses)/gains on the hedging instruments

(7)

78 

(1,117)

Fair value hedging ineffectiveness

47 

30 

29 

Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness

(112)

(29)

Total

(65)

39 

— 

 

The main sources of ineffectiveness for interest rate risk hedge accounting relationships are:

·          The effect of the counterparty credit risk on the fair value of the interest rate swap, which is not reflected in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the change in interest rate (fair value hedge).

·          Differences in the repricing basis between the hedging instrument and hedged cash flows (cash flow hedge); and

·          Upfront present values on the hedging derivatives where hedge accounting relationships have been designated after the trade date (cash flow hedge and fair value hedge).

 

Additional information on cash flow hedging and hedging of net assets can be found in the Statement of Changes in Equity.

 

11 Financial instruments – classification

The following tables analyse financial assets and liabilities in accordance with the categories of financial instruments on an IFRS 9 basis at 31 December 2018 and on an IAS39 basis at 31 December 2017. Assets and liabilities outside the scope of IFRS 9/IAS 39 are shown within other assets and other liabilities.

 

Assets

 

 

 

Hedging

 

Amortised

Other

 

 

MFVTPL (1)

DFV(2)

derivatives

FVOCI

cost

assets

Total

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Cash and balances at central banks

 

— 

— 

 

— 

88,897 

 

88,897 

Trading assets

 

75,119 

— 

 

— 

 

 

75,119 

Derivatives

 

131,098 

 

2,251 

 

 

 

133,349 

Settlement balances

 

— 

— 

 

— 

2,928 

 

2,928 

Loans to banks - amortised cost (3)

 

 

 

 

 

12,947 

 

12,947 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

 

 

 

 

305,089 

 

305,089 

Other financial assets

 

1,638 

— 

 

46,077 

11,770 

 

59,485 

Intangible assets

 

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

6,616 

6,616 

Other assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

9,805 

9,805 

31 December 2018

 

207,855 

— 

2,251 

46,077 

421,631 

16,421 

694,235 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Held-for-

 

Hedging

Available-

Loans and

Held-to-

Other

 

 

trading

DFV(2)

derivatives

for-sale

receivables

maturity

assets

Total

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Cash and balances at central banks

— 

— 

 

— 

98,337 

— 

 

98,337 

Trading assets

85,991 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

85,991 

Derivatives

157,876 

 

2,967 

 

 

— 

 

160,843 

Settlement balances

— 

— 

 

— 

2,517 

— 

 

2,517 

Loans to banks - amortised cost (3)

 

 

 

 

11,517 

 

 

11,517 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

 

 

 

310,116 

 

 

310,116 

Other financial assets

— 

190 

 

43,968 

3,643 

4,128 

 

51,929 

Intangible assets

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

— 

6,543 

6,543 

Other assets

— 

— 

 

— 

— 

— 

10,263 

10,263 

31 December 2017

243,867 

190 

2,967 

43,968 

426,130 

4,128 

16,806 

738,056 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1)     Mandatory fair value through profit or loss.

(2)     Designated as at fair value through profit or loss.

(3)     Includes items in the course of collection from other banks of £484 million (2017 - £1,017 million).

 

209


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

11 Financial instruments - classification continued

 

 

Held-for-

 

Hedging

 

Other

 

Liabilities

trading

DFV (1)

derivatives

Amortised cost

liabilities

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Bank deposits (2)

— 

— 

 

23,297 

 

23,297 

Customer deposits (3)

— 

— 

 

360,914 

 

360,914 

Settlement balances

— 

— 

 

3,066 

 

3,066 

Trading liabilities

72,350 

— 

 

 

 

72,350 

Derivatives

125,954 

— 

2,943 

 

 

128,897 

Other financial liabilities

— 

2,840 

 

36,892 

 

39,732 

Subordinated liabilities

— 

867 

 

9,668 

 

10,535 

Other liabilities

— 

— 

 

2,218 

6,736 

8,954 

31 December 2018

198,304 

3,707 

2,943 

436,055 

6,736 

647,745 

Bank deposits (2) 

— 

— 

 

30,396 

 

30,396 

Customer deposits (3)

— 

— 

 

361,316 

 

361,316 

Settlement balances

— 

— 

 

2,844 

 

2,844 

Trading liabilities

81,982 

— 

 

 

 

81,982 

Derivatives

150,935 

— 

3,571 

 

 

154,506 

Other financial liabilities

— 

4,277 

 

26,049 

 

30,326 

Subordinated liabilities

— 

939 

 

11,783 

 

12,722 

Other liabilities

— 

— 

 

2,181 

12,690 

14,871 

31 December 2017

232,917 

5,216 

3,571 

434,569 

12,690 

688,963 

 

Notes:

(1)     Designated as at fair value through profit or loss.

(2)     Includes items in the course of transmission to other banks of £125 million (2017 - £214 million).

(3)     The carrying amount of other customer accounts designated as at fair value through profit or loss is £26 million (2017 - £114 million) higher than the principal amount.

 

The Group’s financial assets and liabilities include:

2018 

2017 

 

£m

£m

Reverse repos

 

 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

3,539 

2,152 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

2,308 

Trading assets

24,759 

36,272 

 

 

 

Repos

 

 

Bank deposits

941 

3,839 

Customer deposits

3,774 

6,669 

Trading liabilities

25,645 

28,363 

 

 

 

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

Amounts included in operating profit/(loss) before tax:

£m 

£m 

£m 

(Losses)/Gains on financial assets/liabilities designated as at fair value through profit or loss

(26)

60 

(13)

 

The tables below present information on financial assets and financial liabilities that are offset on the balance sheet under IFRS or subject to enforceable master netting agreements together with financial collateral received or given.

 

 

Instruments which can be offset

 

Potential for offset not recognised by IFRS

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Effect of

 

 

Net amount after

 

Instruments

 

2018 

 

 

 

 

 master netting

 

Other

 the effect of netting

 

outside

 

 

IFRS

Balance

 

and similar

Cash

 financial

 arrangements and

 

netting

Balance

Gross

offset

 sheet

 

agreements

collateral

collateral

related collateral

 

arrangements

sheet total

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

Derivative assets

136,329 

(5,041)

131,288 

 

(106,762)

(17,937)

(4,469)

2,120 

 

2,061 

133,349 

Derivative liabilities

133,965 

(6,776)

127,189 

 

(106,762)

(15,227)

(3,466)

1,734 

 

1,708 

128,897 

Net position (1)

2,364 

1,735 

4,099 

 

— 

(2,710)

(1,003)

386 

 

353 

4,452 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading reverse repos

53,148 

(31,376)

21,772 

 

(762)

— 

(21,000)

10 

 

2,987 

24,759 

Trading repos

55,864 

(31,376)

24,488 

 

(762)

— 

(23,726)

— 

 

1,157 

25,645 

Net position

(2,716)

— 

(2,716)

 

— 

— 

2,726 

10 

 

1,830 

(886)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Derivative assets

175,670 

(17,088)

158,582 

 

(128,287)

(20,311)

(5,850)

4,134 

 

2,261 

160,843 

Derivative liabilities

170,405 

(17,557)

152,848 

 

(128,287)

(18,035)

(3,952)

2,574 

 

1,658 

154,506 

Net position (1)

5,265 

469 

5,734 

 

— 

(2,276)

(1,898)

1,560 

 

603 

6,337 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading reverse repos

65,508 

(32,639)

32,869 

 

(329)

— 

(32,498)

42 

 

3,403 

36,272 

Trading repos

58,695 

(32,639)

26,056 

 

(329)

— 

(25,727)

— 

 

2,307 

28,363 

Net position

6,813 

— 

6,813 

 

— 

— 

(6,771)

42 

 

1,096 

7,909 

 

Note:

(1)             The net IFRS offset balance of £1,735 million (2017 - £469 million) relates to variation margin netting reflected on other balance sheet lines.

 

210


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments - valuation

 

Critical accounting policy: Fair value - financial instruments

In accordance with Accounting policies 13 and 21, financial instruments classified as mandatory fair value through profit or loss, held-for-trading or designated as at fair value through profit or loss and financial assets classified as fair value through other comprehensive income are recognised in the financial statements at fair value. All derivatives are measured at fair value.

 

Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. A fair value measurement takes into account the characteristics of the asset or liability if market participants would take those characteristics into account when pricing the asset or liability at the measurement date. It also uses the assumptions that market participants would use when pricing the asset or liability. In determining fair value the Group maximises the use of relevant observable inputs and minimises the use of unobservable inputs.

 

Modelled approaches may be used to measure instruments classed as Level 2 or 3. Estimation expertise is required in the selection, implementation and calibration of appropriate models. The resulting modelled valuations are considered for accuracy and reliability. Portfolio level adjustments consistent with IFRS 13 are raised to incorporate counterparty credit risk, funding and margining risks. Expert judgement is used in the initial measurement of modelled products by control teams.

 

Where the Group manages a group of financial assets and financial liabilities on the basis of its net exposure to either market risks or credit risk, it measures the fair value of a group of financial assets and financial liabilities on the basis of the price that it would receive to sell a net long position (i.e. an asset) for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position (i.e. a liability) for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction at the measurement date under current market conditions. Credit valuation adjustments are made when valuing derivative financial assets to incorporate counterparty credit risk. Adjustments are also made when valuing financial liabilities measured at fair value to reflect the Group’s own credit standing.

Where the market for a financial instrument is not active, fair value is established using a valuation technique. These valuation techniques involve a degree of estimation, the extent of which depends on the instrument’s complexity and the availability of market-based data. Further details about the valuation methodologies and the sensitivity to reasonably possible alternative assumptions of the fair value of financial instruments valued using techniques where at least one significant input is unobservable are given below.

 

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

 

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

 

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Loans

— 

44,983 

120 

 

— 

58,331 

150 

  Securities

22,003 

7,312 

701 

 

19,648 

7,009 

853 

Derivatives

— 

131,513 

1,836 

 

10 

159,109 

1,724 

Other financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Loans

— 

768 

136 

 

— 

— 

56 

  Securities

40,132 

6,172 

507 

 

37,147 

6,450 

505 

Total financial assets held at fair value

62,135 

190,748 

3,300 

 

56,805 

230,899 

3,288 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Deposits

— 

47,243 

377 

 

— 

52,109 

239 

  Debt securities in issue

— 

791 

112 

 

— 

1,057 

50 

  Short positions

18,941 

4,886 

— 

 

23,715 

4,796 

16 

Derivatives

— 

127,709 

1,188 

 

152,886 

1,618 

Other financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  Debt securities in issue

— 

2,348 

280 

 

— 

3,141 

262 

  Other deposits

— 

212 

— 

 

— 

874 

— 

Subordinated liabilities

— 

867 

— 

 

— 

939 

— 

Total financial liabilities held at fair value

18,941 

184,056 

1,957 

 

23,717 

215,802 

2,185 

 

Notes:

(1)        Transfers between levels are deemed to have occurred at the beginning of the quarter in which the instruments were transferred.

(2)        For an analysis of debt securities, by issuer, measurement classification and analysis of asset backed securities, and derivatives, by type and contract, refer to Capital and Risk management – Credit risk.

(3)        The determination of an instrument’s level cannot be made at a global product level as a single product type can be in more than one level. For example, a single name corporate credit default swap could be in level 2 or level 3 depending on whether the reference counterparty’s obligations are liquid or illiquid.

 

211


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments - valuation continued

Fair value hierarchy

Financial Instruments carried at fair value have been classified under the IFRS fair value hierarchy as follows.

 

Level 1 – Instruments valued using unadjusted quoted prices in active and liquid markets, for identical financial instruments. Examples include government bonds, listed equity shares and certain exchange-traded derivatives.

 

Level 2 - instruments valued using valuation techniques that have observable inputs., Examples include most government agency securities, investment-grade corporate bonds, certain mortgage products, including CLOs, most bank loans, repos and reverse repos, less liquid listed equities, state and municipal obligations, most notes issued, and certain money market securities and loan commitments and most OTC derivatives.

 

Level 3 - instruments valued using a valuation technique where at least one input which could have a significant effect on the instrument’s valuation, is not based on observable market data. Examples include cash instruments which trade infrequently, certain syndicated and commercial mortgage loans, certain emerging markets and derivatives with unobservable model inputs.

 

Valuation techniques

RBS derives fair value of its instruments differently depending on whether the instrument is a non-modelled or a modelled product.

 

Non-modelled products are valued directly from a price input typically on a position by position basis and include cash, equities and most debt securities.

 

Modelled products valued using a pricing model range in complexity from comparatively vanilla products such as interest rate swaps and options (e.g. interest rate caps and floors) through to more complex derivatives. The valuation of modelled products requires an appropriate model and inputs into this model. Sometimes models are also used to derive inputs (e.g. to construct volatility surfaces). RBS uses a number of modelling methodologies.

 

Inputs to valuation models

Values between and beyond available data points are obtained by interpolation and extrapolation. When utilising valuation techniques, the fair value can be significantly affected by the choice of valuation model and by underlying assumptions concerning factors such as the amounts and timing of cash flows, discount rates and credit risk. The principal inputs to these valuation techniques are as follows:

 

Bond prices - quoted prices are generally available for government bonds, certain corporate securities and some mortgage-related products.

 

Credit spreads - where available, these are derived from prices of credit default swaps or other credit based instruments, such as debt securities. For others, credit spreads are obtained from third-party benchmarking services. For counterparty credit spreads, adjustments are made to market prices (or parameters) when the creditworthiness of the counterparty differs from that of the assumed counterparty in the market price (or parameters).

 

Interest rates - these are principally benchmark interest rates such as the London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR), Overnight Index Swaps (OIS) rate and other quoted interest rates in the swap, bond and futures markets.

 

Foreign currency exchange rates - there are observable prices both for spot and forward contracts and futures in the world’s major currencies.

 

Equity and equity index prices - quoted prices are generally readily available for equity shares listed on the world’s major stock exchanges and for major indices on such shares.

 

Commodity prices - many commodities are actively traded in spot and forward contracts and futures on exchanges in London, New York and other commercial centres.

 

Price volatilities and correlations - volatility is a measure of the tendency of a price to change with time.

 

Correlation measures the degree which two or more prices or other variables are observed to move together.

 

Prepayment rates - the fair value of a financial instrument that can be prepaid by the issuer or borrower differs from that of an instrument that cannot be prepaid. In valuing prepayable instruments that are not quoted in active markets, RBS considers the value of the prepayment option.

 

Recovery rates/loss given default - these are used as an input to valuation models and reserves for asset-backed securities and other credit products as an indicator of severity of losses on default. Recovery rates are primarily sourced from market data providers or inferred from observable credit spreads.

 

Valuation control

RBS’s control environment for the determination of the fair value of financial instruments includes formalised protocols for the review and validation of fair values independent of the businesses entering into the transactions.

 

Independent price verification (IPV) is a key element of the control environment. Valuations are first performed by the business which entered into the transaction. Such valuations may be directly from available prices, or may be derived using a model and variable model inputs. These valuations are reviewed, and if necessary amended, by a team independent of those trading the financial instruments, in the light of available pricing evidence.

 

Where measurement differences are identified through the IPV process these are grouped by fair value level and quality of data. If the size of the difference exceeds defined thresholds adjustment to independent levels are made.

 

IPV takes place at least each monthly, for all fair value positions. The IPV control includes formalised reporting and escalation of any valuation differences in breach of established thresholds.

 

The Modelled Product Review Committee sets the policy for model documentation, testing and review, and prioritises models with significant exposure being reviewed by the RBS Model Risk team. Valuation Committees are made up of valuation specialists and senior business representatives from various functions and oversees pricing, reserving and valuations issues. These committees meet monthly to review and ratify any methodology changes. The Executive Valuation Committee meets quarterly to address key material and subjective valuation issues, to review items escalated by Valuation Committees and to discuss other relevant matters of including prudential valuation.

 

Initial classification of a financial instrument is carried out by the Product Control team following the principles in IFRS 13. They base their judgment on information gathered during the IPV process for instruments which include the sourcing of independent prices and model inputs. The quality and completeness of the information gathered in the IPV process gives an indication as to the liquidity and valuation uncertainty of an instrument. These initial classifications are subject to senior management review. Particular attention is paid to instruments crossing from one level to another, new instrument classes or products, instruments that are generating significant profit and loss and instruments where valuation uncertainty is high.

 

RBS uses consensus prices for the IPV of some instruments. The consensus service encompasses the equity, interest rate, currency, commodity, credit, property, fund and bond markets, providing comprehensive matrices of vanilla prices and a wide selection of exotic products.

 

212


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments - valuation continued

RBS contributes to consensus pricing services where there is a significant interest either from a positional point of view or to test models for future business use. Data sourced from consensus pricing services are used for a combination of control processes including direct price testing, evidence of observability and model testing. In practice this means that RBS submits prices for all material positions for which a service is available. Data from consensus services are subject to the same level of quality review as other inputs used for IPV process.

 

In order to determine a reliable fair value, where appropriate, management applies valuation adjustments to the pricing information gathered from the above sources. The sources of independent data are reviewed for quality and are applied in the IPV processes using a formalised input quality hierarchy. These adjustments reflect RBS’s assessment of factors that market participants would consider in setting a price.

 

Where unobservable inputs are used, RBS may determine a range of possible valuations derived from differing stress scenarios to determine the sensitivity associated with the valuation. When establishing the fair value of a financial instrument using a valuation technique, RBS considers adjustments to the modelled price which market participants would make when pricing that instrument. Such adjustments include the credit quality of the counterparty and adjustments to compensate for model limitations.

 

When valuing financial instruments in the trading book, adjustments are made to mid-market valuations to cover bid-offer spread, funding and credit risk. These adjustments are presented in the table below:

 

Adjustment

 

2018
£m

 

2017
£m

Funding – FVA

 

250

 

440

Credit – CVA

 

419

 

346

Bid – Offer

 

238

 

285

Product and deal specific

 

327

 

1,033

 

 

1,234

 

2,104

 

The reduction in valuation reserves was primarily driven by a combination of trade close-out activity and a reallocation of product and deal specific reserves that are now included within the discount rate applied to the derivative cash flows. There was a net increase in CVA due to the extension of the CVA reserve to include margin period of risk on collateralised counterparties and a reclassification of product and deal specific reserves to CVA.

 

Funding valuation adjustment (FVA)

FVA represents an estimate of the adjustment that a market participant would make to incorporate funding costs and benefits that arise in relation to derivative exposures. FVA is calculated as a portfolio level adjustment.

 

Funding levels are applied to estimated potential future exposures. For uncollateralised derivatives, the modelling of the exposure is consistent with the approach used in the calculation of CVA, and the counterparty contingent nature of the exposure is reflected in the calculation. For collateralised derivatives, the exposure reflects initial margin posting requirements.

 

Credit valuation adjustments (CVA)

CVA represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the counterparty credit risk inherent in derivative exposures. CVA is actively managed by a credit and market risk hedging process, and therefore movements in CVA are partially offset by trading revenue on the hedges.

 

The CVA is calculated on a portfolio basis reflecting an estimate of the amount a third party would charge to assume the credit risk.

 

Collateral held under a credit support agreement is factored into the CVA calculation. In such cases where RBS holds collateral against counterparty exposures, CVA is held to the extent that residual risk remains.

 

Bid-offer

Fair value positions are adjusted to bid (long positions) or offer (short positions) levels, by marking individual cash positions directly to bid or offer or by taking bid-offer reserves calculated on a portfolio basis for derivatives exposures. The bid-offer approach is based on current market spreads and standard market bucketing of risk.

 

Bid-offer spreads vary by maturity and risk type to reflect different spreads in the market. For positions where there is no observable quote, the bid-offer spreads are widened in comparison to proxies to reflect reduced liquidity or observability. Bid-offer methodologies may also incorporate liquidity triggers whereby wider spreads are applied to risks above pre-defined thresholds.

 

As permitted by IFRS 13, netting is applied on a portfolio basis to reflect the value at which RBS believes it could exit the portfolio, rather than the sum of exit costs for each of the portfolio’s individual trades. This is applied where the asset and liability positions are managed as a portfolio for risk and reporting purposes.

 

The discount rates applied to derivative cash flows in determining fair value reflect any underlying collateral agreements. Collateralised derivatives are generally discounted at the relevant OIS-related rates at an individual trade level. Reserves are held to the extent that the discount rates applied do not reflect all of the terms of the collateral agreements.

 

Product and deal specific

On initial recognition of financial assets and liabilities valued using valuation techniques incorporating information other than observable market data, any difference between the transaction price and that derived from the valuation technique is deferred. Such amounts are recognised in profit or loss over the life of the transaction; when market data becomes observable; or when the transaction matures or is closed out as appropriate. At 31 December 2018, net gains of £59 million (2017 - £56 million) were carried forward. During the year, net gains of £151 million (2017 - £64 million) were deferred and £148 million (2017 - £80 million) were recognised in the income statement.

 

Where system generated valuations do not accurately recover market prices, manuals valuation adjustments are applied either at a position or portfolio level. Manual adjustments are subject to the scrutiny of independent control teams and are subject to monthly review by senior management.

 

213


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments – valuation: Level 3 ranges of unobservable inputs

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

Financial instrument

 

Valuation Technique

 

Unobservable inputs

 

Units

 

Low

 

High

 

Low

 

High

Trading assets and Other financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans

 

Price-based

 

Price

 

%

 

0

 

132

 

0

 

101

Debt securities

 

Price-based

 

Price

 

GBP

 

0

 

154

 

0

 

370

Equity Shares

 

Price-based

 

Price

 

GBP

 

0

 

24,181

 

0

 

585,066

 

 

Valuation

 

Discount factor

 

%

 

8

 

11

 

9

 

13

 

 

Valuation

 

Fund NAV

 

%

 

80

 

120

 

80

 

120

Trading liabilities and Other financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Customer accounts

 

DCF based on recoveries

 

Correlation

 

%

 

(45)

 

99

 

(29)

 

86

 

 

 

 

Interest rate

 

%

 

(0.36)

 

1.74

 

(0.38)

 

2.61

Debt securities in issue

 

Price-based

 

Price

 

CCY

 

21 JPY

 

136 EUR

 

56 JPY

 

149 EUR

 

 

Valuation

 

Fund NAV

 

GBP

 

0

 

622

 

0

 

977

Derivative assets and liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Credit derivatives

 

DCF based on recoveries

 

Credit spreads

 

bps

 

18

 

500

 

0

 

500

 

 

Option pricing

 

Correlation

 

%

 

(50)

 

80

 

(50)

 

80

 

 

 

 

Volatility

 

%

 

47

 

80

 

38

 

80

 

 

 

 

Upfront points

 

%

 

0

 

100

 

0

 

99

 

 

 

 

Recovery rate

 

%

 

10

 

40

 

10

 

40

 

 

Price-based

 

Price

 

%

 

90

 

110

 

 

 

 

Interest rate & FX derivatives

 

Option pricing

 

Correlation

 

%

 

(45)

 

99

 

(75)

 

100

 

 

 

Volatility

 

%

 

1

 

76

 

0

 

292

Equity derivatives

 

Option pricing

 

Correlation

 

%

 

(57)

 

92

 

(57)

 

95

 

 

 

 

Forward

 

Points

 

864

 

7,106

 

146

 

189

 

 

 

 

Volatility

 

%

 

1

 

49

 

7

 

11

 

Notes:

(1)          The table above presents the range of values for significant inputs used in the valuation of level 3 assets and liabilities. The range represents the highest and lowest values of the input parameters and therefore is not a measure of parameter uncertainty. Movements in the underlying input may have a favourable or unfavourable impact on the valuation depending on the particular terms of the contract and the exposure. For example, an increase in the credit spread of a bond would be favourable for the issuer but unfavourable for the note holder. Whilst RBS indicates where it considers that there are significant relationships between the inputs, their inter-relationships will be affected by macro economic factors including interest rates, foreign exchange rates or equity index levels.

(2)          Credit spreads and discount margins: credit spreads and margins express the return required over a benchmark rate or index to compensate for the credit risk associated with a cash instrument. A higher credit spread would indicate that the underlying instrument has more credit risk associated with it. Consequently, investors require a higher yield to compensate for the higher risk.

(3)          Price and yield: There may be a range of prices used to value an instrument that may be a direct comparison of one instrument or portfolio with another or, movements in a more liquid instrument may be used to indicate the movement in the value of a less liquid instrument. The comparison may also be indirect in that adjustments are made to the price to reflect differences between the pricing source and the instrument being valued.

(4)          Recovery rate: reflects market expectations about the return of principal for a debt instrument or other obligations after a credit event or on liquidation. Recovery rates tend to move conversely to credit spreads.

(5)          Valuation: for private equity investments, values may be estimated by looking at past prices of similar stocks and from valuation statements where valuations are usually derived from earnings measures such as EBITDA or net asset value (NAV). Similarly for equity or bond fund investments, prices may be estimated from valuation or credit statements using NAV or similar measures.

(6)          Correlation: measures the degree by which two prices or other variables are observed to move together. If they move in the same direction there is positive correlation; if they move in opposite directions there is negative correlation. Correlations typically include relationships between: default probabilities of assets in a basket (a group of separate assets), exchange rates, interest rates and other financial variables.

(7)          Volatility: a measure of the tendency of a price to change with time.

(8)          Interest rate delta: these ranges represent the low/high marks on the relevant discounting curve.

(9)          Upfront points: where CDS contracts are standardised, the inherent spread of the trade may exceed the standard premium paid or received under the contract. Upfront points will compensate for the difference between the standard premium and the actual premium at the start of the contract.

(10)     RBS does not have any material liabilities measured at fair value that are issued with an inseparable third party credit enhancement.

 

214


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments – valuation: areas of judgment

Whilst the business has simplified, the diverse range of products historically traded by RBS results in a wide range of instruments that are classified into Level 3 of the hierarchy. Whilst the majority of these instruments naturally fall into a particular level, for some products an element of judgment is required. The majority of RBS financial instruments carried at fair value are classified as Level 2. IFRS requires extra disclosures in respect of level 3 instruments.

 

Active and inactive markets

A key input in the decision making process for the allocation of assets to a particular level is market activity. In general, the degree of valuation uncertainty depends on the degree of liquidity of an input.

 

Where markets are liquid, little judgment is required. However, when the information regarding the liquidity in a particular market is not clear, a judgment may need to be made. This can be more difficult as assessing the liquidity of a market is not always straightforward. For an equity traded on an exchange, daily volumes of trading can be seen, but for an over-the-counter (OTC) derivative assessing the liquidity of the market with no central exchange is more difficult.

 

A key related matter is where a market moves from liquid to illiquid or vice versa. Where this change is considered to be temporary, the classification is not changed. For example, if there is little market trading in a product on a reporting date but at the previous reporting date and during the intervening period the market has been considered to be liquid, the instrument will continue to be classified in the same level in the hierarchy. This is to provide consistency so that transfers between levels are driven by genuine changes in market liquidity and do not reflect short term or seasonal effects. Material movements between levels are reviewed quarterly.

 

The breadth and depth of the IPV data allows for a rules based quality assessment to be made of market activity, liquidity and pricing uncertainty, which assists with the process of allocation to an appropriate level. Where suitable independent pricing information is not readily available, the quality assessment will result in the instrument being assessed as Level 3.

 

Modelled products

For modelled products the market convention is to quote these trades through the model inputs or parameters as opposed to a cash price equivalent. A mark-to-market is derived from the use of the independent market inputs calculated using RBS’s model.

 

The decision to classify a modelled instrument as Level 2 or 3 will be dependent upon the product/model combination, the currency, the maturity, the observability and quality of input parameters and other factors. All these must be assessed to classify the asset. If an input fails the observability or quality tests then the instrument is considered to be in Level 3 unless the input can be shown to have an insignificant effect on the overall valuation of the product.

 

The majority of derivative instruments for example vanilla interest rate swaps, foreign exchange swaps and liquid single name credit derivatives are classified as Level 2 as they are vanilla products valued using observable inputs. The valuation uncertainty on these is considered to be low and both input and output testing may be available.

 

Non-modelled products

Non-modelled products are generally quoted on a price basis and can therefore be considered for each of the three levels. This is determined by the market activity, liquidity and valuation uncertainty of the instruments which is in turn measured from the availability of independent data used by the IPV process to allocate positions to IPV quality levels.

 

The availability and quality of independent pricing information are considered during the classification process. An assessment is made regarding the quality of the independent information. For example, where consensus prices are used for non-modelled products, a key assessment of the quality of a price is the depth of the number of prices used to provide the consensus price. If the depth of contributors falls below a set hurdle rate, the instrument is considered to be Level 3. This hurdle rate is that used in the IPV process to determine the IPV quality rating. However, where an instrument is generally considered to be illiquid, but regular quotes from market participants exist, these instruments may be classified as Level 2 depending on frequency of quotes, other available pricing and whether the quotes are used as part of the IPV process or not.

 

For some instruments with a wide number of available price sources, there may be differing quality of available information and there may be a wide range of prices from different sources. In these situations the highest quality source is used to determine the classification of the asset. For example, a tradable quote would be considered a better source than a consensus price.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Level 3

 

Favourable

 

Unfavourable

 

Level 3

 

Favourable

 

Unfavourable

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans

 

120

 

10

 

(10)

 

150

 

 

Securities

 

701

 

20

 

(10)

 

853

 

30

 

(10)

Derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate

 

1,487

 

120

 

(120)

 

1,340

 

140

 

(140)

Foreign exchange

 

130

 

10

 

(10)

 

148

 

10

 

(10)

Other

 

219

 

10

 

(20)

 

236

 

10

 

(20)

Other financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans

 

136

 

10

 

(20)

 

56

 

 

Securities

 

507

 

50

 

(30)

 

505

 

20

 

(30)

 

 

3,300

 

230

 

(220)

 

3,288

 

210

 

(210)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits

 

377

 

40

 

(40)

 

239

 

20

 

(20)

Debt securities in issue

 

112

 

10

 

(10)

 

50

 

 

Short positions

 

 

 

 

16

 

 

Derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest rate

 

808

 

70

 

(70)

 

1,104

 

120

 

(120)

Foreign exchange

 

279

 

10

 

(10)

 

358

 

10

 

(10)

Other

 

101

 

 

(10)

 

156

 

10

 

(10)

Other financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

280

 

10

 

(10)

 

262

 

10

 

(10)

 

 

1,957

 

140

 

(150)

 

2,185

 

170

 

(170)

 

215


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments – valuation: level 3 sensitivities

The Level 3 sensitivities presented above are calculated at a trade or low level portfolio basis. They are not calculated on an overall portfolio basis and therefore do not reflect the likely potential uncertainty on the portfolio as a whole. The figures are aggregated and do not reflect the correlated nature of some of the sensitivities. In particular, for some of the portfolios the sensitivities may be negatively correlated where a downwards movement in one asset would produce an upwards movement in another, but due to the additive presentation of the above figures this correlation cannot be displayed. The actual potential downside sensitivity of the total portfolio may be less than the non-correlated sum of the additive figures as shown in the above table.

 

Reasonably plausible alternative assumptions of unobservable inputs are determined based on a specified target level of certainty of 90%. The assessments recognise different favourable and unfavourable valuation movements where appropriate. Each unobservable input within a product is considered separately and sensitivity is reported on an additive basis.

 

Alternative assumptions are determined with reference to all available evidence including consideration of the following: quality of independent pricing information taking into account consistency between different sources, variation over time, perceived tradability or otherwise of available quotes; consensus service dispersion ranges; volume of trading activity and market bias (e.g. one-way inventory); day 1 profit or loss arising on new trades; number and nature of market participants; market conditions; modelling consistency in the market; size and nature of risk; length of holding of position; and market intelligence.

 

Other considerations

Whilst certain inputs used to calculate CVA, FVA and own credit adjustments are not based on observable market data, the uncertainty of the inputs is not considered to have a significant effect on the net valuation of the related derivative portfolios and issued debt. The classification of the derivative portfolios and issued debt is not determined by the observability of these inputs and any related sensitivity does not form part of the Level 3 sensitivities presented.

 

Level 3

 

The following table shows the movement in level 3 assets and liabilities in the year.

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

Trading

Other financial

Total

Total

 

Trading

Other financial

Total

Total

 

assets (3)

assets (4)

assets

liabilities

 

assets (3)

assets (4)

assets

liabilities

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

At 1 January (1)

2,692

530

3,222

2,187

 

3,933

604

4,537

2,997

Amounts recorded in the income statement (2)

(147)

178

31

(344)

 

(593)

21

(572)

(341)

Amounts recorded in the statement of comprehensive income

23

23

 

2

2

Level 3 transfers in

1,307

19

1,326

419

 

679

315

994

530

Level 3 transfers out

(624)

(1)

(625)

(231)

 

(1,015)

(3)

(1,018)

(672)

Issuances

47

 

371

371

Purchases

871

16

887

401

 

1,788

20

1,808

412

Settlements

(512)

(3)

(515)

(204)

 

(161)

(161)

(423)

Sales

(930)

(125)

(1,055)

(316)

 

(2,286)

(369)

(2,655)

(323)

Foreign exchange and other adjustments

6

6

(2)

 

11

(29)

(18)

5

At 31 December

2,657

643

3,300

1,957

 

2,727

561

3,288

2,185

Amounts recorded in the income statement in respect of balances held at year end

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- unrealised

(134)

158

24

(330)

 

(59)

(21)

(80)

595

- realised

(2)

6

4

 

271

5

276

(100)

 

Notes:

(1)       Refer to Note 33 for further information on the impact of IFRS9 on classification and basis of preparation, year ended 31 December 2018 prepared under IFRS9 and prior years under IAS39.

(2)       There were £185 million net losses on trading assets and liabilities (2017 - £240 million HFT) recorded in income from trading activities. Net losses on other instruments of £190 million (2017 - £9 million gains) were recorded in other operating income and interest income as appropriate.

(3)       Trading assets comprise assets held at fair value in trading portfolios.

(4)       Other financial assets comprise fair value through other comprehensive income (2017 - available-for-sale), designated at fair value through profit or loss and other fair value through profit or loss.

 

216


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments: fair value of financial instruments not carried at fair value

 

The following table shows the carrying value and fair value of financial instruments carried at amortised cost on the balance sheet.

 

 

 

Items where fair value

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

approximates

 

Carrying

 

 

Fair value hierarchy level

 

 

carrying value

 

value

 

Fair value

Level 1

 

Level 2

 

Level 3

2018

 

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

£bn

 

£bn

 

£bn

Financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

 

88.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Settlement balances

 

2.9

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans to banks

 

0.5

 

12.4

 

12.4

 

9.2

 

3.2

Loans to customers

 

 

 

305.1

 

301.7

 

0.5

 

301.2

Other financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities

 

 

 

11.8

 

11.8

7.3

 

3.0

 

1.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

4.2

 

19.1

 

18.5

 

13.9

 

4.6

Customer deposits

 

307.1

 

53.8

 

54.6

 

10.4

 

44.2

Settlement balances

 

3.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

 

 

36.9

 

38.6

 

36.9

 

1.7

Subordinated liabilities

 

 

 

9.7

 

10.0

 

9.9

 

0.1

Other liabilities - notes in circulation

 

2.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

 

98.3

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Settlement balances

 

2.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans to banks

 

1.0

 

10.5

 

10.5

 

9.1

 

1.4

Loans to customers

 

 

 

310.1

 

306.8

 

1.3

 

305.5

Other financial assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Securities

 

 

 

7.8

 

7.9

4.3

 

1.5

 

2.1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

4.5

 

25.9

 

26.0

 

22.4

 

3.6

Customer deposits

 

321.5

 

39.8

 

39.9

 

12.9

 

27.0

Settlement balances

 

2.8

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other financial liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

 

 

26.0

 

27.3

 

22.2

 

5.1

Subordinated liabilities

 

 

 

11.8

 

12.6

 

12.5

 

0.1

Other liabilities - notes in circulation

 

2.2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

217


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

12 Financial instruments: fair value of financial instruments not carried at fair value continued

 

The fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Quoted market values are used where available; otherwise, fair values have been estimated based on discounted expected future cash flows and other valuation techniques. These techniques involve uncertainties and require assumptions and judgments covering prepayments, credit risk and discount rates. Furthermore there is a wide range of potential valuation techniques. Changes in these assumptions would significantly affect estimated fair values. The fair values reported would not necessarily be realised in an immediate sale or settlement.

 

The assumptions and methodologies underlying the calculation of fair values of financial instruments at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 

Short-term financial instruments

For certain short-term financial instruments: cash and balances at central banks, items in the course of collection from other banks, settlement balances, items in the course of transmission to other banks, customer demand deposits and notes in circulation, carrying value is a reasonable approximation of fair value.

 

Loans to banks and customers

In estimating the fair value of net loans to customers and banks measured at amortised cost, RBS’s loans are segregated into appropriate portfolios reflecting the characteristics of the constituent loans. Two principal methods are used to estimate fair value:

 

(a)     Contractual cash flows are discounted using a market discount rate that incorporates the current spread for the borrower or where this is not observable, the spread for borrowers of a similar credit standing. This method is used for portfolios where counterparties have external ratings: institutional and corporate lending in NatWest Markets.

 

(b)     Expected cash flows (unadjusted for credit losses) are discounted at the current offer rate for the same or similar products. This approach is adopted for lending portfolios in UK PB, Ulster Bank RoI, Commercial Banking (SME loans) and Private Banking in order to reflect the homogeneous nature of these portfolios.

 

For certain portfolios where there are very few or no recent transactions, a bespoke approach is used.

 

Debt securities

The majority of debt securities are valued using quoted prices in active markets, or using quoted prices for similar assets in active markets. Fair values of the rest are determined using discounted cash flow valuation techniques.

 

Deposits by banks and customer accounts

Fair values of deposits are estimated using discounted cash flow valuation techniques.

 

Debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities

Fair values are determined using quoted prices for similar liabilities where available or by reference to valuation techniques, adjusting for own credit spreads where appropriate.

 

13 Financial instruments - maturity analysis

Remaining maturity

The following table shows the residual maturity of financial instruments, based on contractual date of maturity.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Less than

 

More than

 

 

 

Less than

 

More than

 

 

 

 

12 months

 

12 months

 

Total

 

12 months

 

12 months

 

Total

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

 

88,897

 

 

88,897

 

98,337

 

 

98,337

Trading assets

 

49,094

 

26,025

 

75,119

 

66,315

 

19,676

 

85,991

Derivatives

 

28,503

 

104,846

 

133,349

 

32,372

 

128,471

 

160,843

Settlement balances

 

2,928

 

 

2,928

 

2,517

 

 

2,517

Loans to banks - amortised cost

 

12,833

 

114

 

12,947

 

11,424

 

93

 

11,517

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

67,354

 

237,735

 

305,089

 

69,832

 

240,284

 

310,116

Other financial assets

 

11,681

 

47,804

 

59,485

 

8,776

 

43,153

 

51,929

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

7,438

 

15,859

 

23,297

 

10,813

 

19,583

 

30,396

Customer deposits

 

359,148

 

1,766

 

360,914

 

358,857

 

2,459

 

361,316

Settlement balances

 

3,066

 

 

3,066

 

2,844

 

 

2,844

Trading liabilities

 

50,668

 

21,682

 

72,350

 

53,787

 

28,195

 

81,982

Derivatives

 

29,028

 

99,869

 

128,897

 

32,212

 

122,294

 

154,506

Other financial liabilities

 

8,240

 

31,492

 

39,732

 

8,467

 

21,859

 

30,326

Subordinated liabilities

 

299

 

10,236

 

10,535

 

2,383

 

10,339

 

12,722

 

218


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

13 Financial instruments – maturity analysis continued

Assets and liabilities by contractual cash flow maturity

The tables below show the contractual undiscounted cash flows receivable and payable, up to a period of 20 years, including future receipts and payments of interest of financial assets and liabilities by contractual maturity. The balances in the following tables do not agree directly with the consolidated balance sheet, as the tables include all cash flows relating to principal and future coupon payments, presented on an undiscounted basis. The tables have been prepared on the following basis:

 

Financial assets have been reflected in the time band of the latest date on which they could be repaid, unless earlier repayment can be demanded by RBS. Financial liabilities are included at the earliest date on which the counterparty can require repayment, regardless of whether or not such early repayment results in a penalty. If the repayment of a financial instrument is triggered by, or is subject to, specific criteria such as market price hurdles being reached, the asset is included in the time band that contains the latest date on which it can be repaid, regardless of early repayment.

 

The liability is included in the time band that contains the earliest possible date on which the conditions could be fulfilled, without considering the probability of the conditions being met.

 

For example, if a structured note is automatically prepaid when an equity index exceeds a certain level, the cash outflow will be included in the less than three months period, whatever the level of the index at the year end. The settlement date of debt securities in issue, issued by certain securitisation vehicles consolidated by RBS, depends on when cash flows are received from the securitised assets. Where these assets are prepayable, the timing of the cash outflow relating to securities assumes that each asset will be prepaid at the earliest possible date. As the repayments of assets and liabilities are linked, the repayment of assets in securitisations is shown on the earliest date that the asset can be prepaid, as this is the basis used for liabilities.

 

The principal amounts of financial assets and liabilities that are repayable after 20 years or where the counterparty has no right to repayment of the principal are excluded from the table, as are interest payments after 20 years.

 

MFVTPL assets of £207.9 billion (2017 - £243.9 billion) and HFT liabilities of £198.3 billion (2017 - £232.9 billion) have been excluded from the following tables.

 

 

 

0-3 months

 

3-12 months

 

1-3 years

 

3-5 years

 

5-10 years

 

10-20 years

2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Assets by contractual maturity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

 

88,897

 

 

 

 

 

Settlement balances

 

2,928

 

 

 

 

 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

 

11,920

 

925

 

106

 

 

 

Other financial assets (1)

 

4,451

 

7,397

 

14,138

 

11,279

 

11,826

 

2,744

Total maturing assets

 

108,196

 

8,322

 

14,244

 

11,279

 

11,826

 

2,744

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

43,096

 

32,087

 

66,441

 

51,839

 

66,978

 

79,543

Derivatives held for hedging

 

224

 

529

 

995

 

345

 

152

 

130

 

 

151,516

 

40,938

 

81,680

 

63,463

 

78,956

 

82,417

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities by contractual maturity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

7,417

 

21

 

13,785

 

2,003

 

 

59

Settlement balance

 

3,066

 

 

 

 

 

Other financial liabilities

 

1,736

 

7,226

 

10,724

 

11,658

 

9,316

 

2,029

Subordinated liabilities

 

131

 

637

 

1,476

 

7,532

 

1,737

 

1,422

Other liabilities (2)

 

2,152

 

 

 

 

 

Total maturing liabilities

 

14,502

 

7,884

 

25,985

 

21,193

 

11,053

 

3,510

Customer deposits

 

351,054

 

8,114

 

1,727

 

14

 

6

 

26

Derivatives held for hedging

 

181

 

306

 

1,062

 

416

 

637

 

531

 

 

365,737

 

16,304

 

28,774

 

21,623

 

11,696

 

4,067

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees and commitments notional amount

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees (3)

 

3,952

 

 

 

 

 

Commitments (4)

 

116,843

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

120,795

 

 

 

 

 

 

For notes to the above table refer to the following page.

 

219


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

13 Financial instruments – maturity analysis continued

 

 

0-3 months

3-12 months

1-3 years

3-5 years

5-10 years

10-20 years

2017

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Assets by contractual maturity

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

98,337

Settlement balances

2,517

Loans to banks - amortised cost

10,792

633

94

Other financial assets (1)

3,675

5,889

11,960

11,312

12,813

3,638

Total maturing assets

115,321

6,522

12,054

11,312

12,813

3,638

Loans to customers - amortised cost

45,898

32,031

65,077

52,016

68,500

81,995

Derivatives held for hedging

281

832

1,336

334

166

111

 

161,500

39,385

78,467

63,662

81,479

85,744

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities by contractual maturity

 

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

9,180

1,740

3,614

16,023

61

71

Settlement balances

2,844

Other financial liabilities

4,360

4,777

10,640

3,731

9,762

49

Subordinated liabilities

87

2,645

1,515

1,620

7,746

2,582

Other liabilities (2)

2,186

Total maturing liabilities

18,657

9,162

15,769

21,374

17,569

2,702

Customer deposits

356,340

3,843

1,052

77

20

28

Derivatives held for hedging

212

289

1,188

526

813

738

 

375,209

13,294

18,009

21,977

18,402

3,468

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees and commitments notional amount

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees (3)

7,718

Commitments (4)

121,229

 

128,947

 

Notes:

(1)

Other financial assets excludes equity shares.

(2)

Other liabilities include notes in circulation.

(3)

RBS is only called upon to satisfy a guarantee when the guaranteed party fails to meet its obligations. RBS expects most guarantees it provides to expire unused.

(4)

RBS has given commitments to provide funds to customers under undrawn formal facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend subject to certain conditions being met by the counterparty. RBS does not expect all facilities to be drawn, and some may lapse before drawdown.

 

220


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

14 Loan impairment provisions

Loan exposure and impairment metrics

The table below summarises loans and related credit impairment measures on an IFRS 9 basis at 31 December 2018 and 1 January 2018 and on an IAS 39 basis at 31 December 2017.

 

 

31 December

1 January

31 December

 

2018 (1)

2018 (1)

2017 

 

£m

£m

£m

Loans - amortised cost

 

 

 

Stage 1

285,985

333,929

 

Stage 2

26,097

26,972

 

Stage 3

7,718

11,283

 

 

319,800

372,184

321,633

ECL provisions (2)

 

 

 

  - Stage 1

285

261

 

  - Stage 2

763

621

 

  - Stage 3

2,320

3,565

 

 

3,368

4,447

3,814

ECL provision coverage (3)

 

 

 

  - Stage 1 %

0.10

0.1

 

  - Stage 2 %

2.92

2.3

 

  - Stage 3 %

30.06

31.6

 

 

1.05

1.2

1.20

Impairment losses

 

 

 

ECL charge (4)

398

 

530

ECL loss rate - annualised (basis points)

12.45

 

16.48

Amounts written off

1,494

 

1,210

 

Notes:

(1)

The analysis tables as at 31 December 2018 include all loans within IFRS 9 ECL scope and exclude debt securities. The comparative table at 1 January 2018 includes loans and debt securities of £50.4 billion, of which £42.7 billion related to debt securities classified as FVOCI. ECL on these debt securities at 1 January 2018 was £28 million, of which £4 million related to those classified as FVOCI.

(2)

ECL provisions in the above table are provisions on loan assets only. Other ECL provisions not included, relate to cash, debt securities and contingent liabilities and amount to £28 million, of which £5 million was FVOCI.

(3)

ECL provisions coverage is ECL provisions divided by loans - amortised cost.

(4)

ECL charge balances in the above table included a £3 million charge relating to other financial assets, of which a £1 million charge related to assets at FVOCI; and a £31 million release related to contingent liabilities.

 

221


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

14 Loan impairment provisions continued

Critical accounting policy: Loan impairment provisions

The Group’s 2017 loan impairment provisions were established in accordance with IAS 39 in respect of incurred losses. They comprised individual and collective components as more fully explained in the 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F.  In 2018 the loan impairment provisions have been established in accordance with IFRS 9.  Accounting policy 14 sets out how the expected loss approach is applied. At 31 December 2018, customer loan impairment provisions amounted to £3,368 million (2017 - £3,814 million). A loan is impaired when there is objective evidence that the cash flows will not occur in the manner expected when the loan was advanced. Such evidence includes changes in the credit rating of a borrower, the failure to make payments in accordance with the loan agreement; significant reduction in the value of any security; breach of limits or covenants; and observable data about relevant macroeconomic measures.

 

The impairment loss is the difference between the carrying value of the loan and the present value of estimated future cash flows at the loan’s original effective interest rate.

 

The measurement of credit impairment under the IFRS expected loss model depends on management’s assessment of any potential deterioration in the creditworthiness of the borrower, its modelling of expected performance and the application of economic forecasts. All three elements require judgments that are potentially significant to the estimate of impairment losses. Further information and sensitivity analyses are on Page 119.

 

IFRS 9 ECL model design principles

To meet IFRS 9 requirements for ECL estimation, PD, LGD and EAD used in the calculations must be:

 

·                   Unbiased - material regulatory conservatism has been removed to produce unbiased model estimates;

 

·                   Point-in-time - recognise current economic conditions;

 

·                   Forward-looking - incorporated into PD estimates and, where appropriate, EAD and LGD estimates; and

 

·                   For the life of the loan - all models produce a term structure to allow a lifetime calculation for assets in Stage 2 and Stage 3.

 

IFRS 9 requires that at each reporting date, an entity shall assess whether the credit risk on an account has increased significantly since initial recognition. Part of this assessment requires a comparison to be made between the current lifetime PD (i.e. the current probability of default over the remaining lifetime) with the equivalent lifetime PD as determined at the date of initial recognition.

 

The general approach for the IFRS 9 LGD models has been to leverage the Basel LGD models with bespoke IFRS 9 adjustments to ensure unbiased estimates, i.e. use of effective interest rate as the discount rate and the removal of: downturn calibration, indirect costs, other conservatism and regulatory floors.

 

For Wholesale, while conversion ratios in the historical data show temporal variations, these cannot (unlike in the case of PD and some LGD models) be sufficiently explained by the CCI measure and are presumed to be driven to a larger extent by exposure management practices. Therefore point-in-time best estimates measures for EAD are derived by estimating the regulatory model specification on a rolling five year window.

 

Approach for multiple economic scenarios (MES)

The base scenario plays a greater part in the calculation of ECL than the approach to MES.

 

15 Other financial assets

 

 

Debt securities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Central and local government

 

Other

 

 

 

Equity

 

Other

 

 

 

 

UK

 

US

 

Other

 

debt

 

Total

 

shares

 

loans

 

Total

2018

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Mandatory fair value through profit or loss

 

 

 

 

669

 

669

 

65

 

904

 

1,638

Fair value through other comprehensive income

 

17,192

 

11,767

 

11,329

 

5,306

 

45,594

 

483

 

 

46,077

Amortised cost

 

6,928

 

264

 

120

 

4,458

 

11,770

 

 

 

11,770

Total

 

24,120

 

12,031

 

11,449

 

10,433

 

58,033

 

548

 

904

 

59,485

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Designated as at fair value through profit or loss

 

 

 

 

 

 

134

 

56

 

190

Available-for-sale

 

17,656

 

8,461

 

11,454

 

6,110

 

43,681

 

287

 

 

43,968

Loans and receivables

 

 

 

 

3,643

 

3,643

 

 

 

3,643

Held-to-maturity

 

4,128

 

 

 

 

4,128

 

 

 

4,128

Total

 

21,784

 

8,461

 

11,454

 

9,753

 

51,452

 

421

 

56

 

51,929

 

Equity shares classified as fair value through other comprehensive income include the following entities and 2018 dividend income received; VISA Inc. £98 million (dividend of £1 million) and Tradeweb Markets LLC £89 million (dividend of £4 million).

 

222


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

16 Intangible assets

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

Goodwill

Other (1)

Total

Goodwill

Other (1)

Total

Cost

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

At 1 January

18,039

2,259

20,298

17,756

2,095

19,851

Currency translation and other adjustments

77

9

86

283

(3)

280

Acquisition of subsidiaries

48

2

50

Additions

364

364

384

384

Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets

(610)

(610)

(217)

(217)

At 31 December

18,164

2,024

20,188

18,039

2,259

20,298

Accumulated amortisation and impairment

 

 

 

 

 

 

At 1 January

12,481

1,274

13,755

12,198

1,173

13,371

Currency translation and other adjustments

77

5

82

283

(5)

278

Disposals and write-off of fully amortised assets

(573)

(573)

(145)

(145)

Charge for the year

271

271

222

222

Write down of goodwill and other intangible assets

37

37

29

29

At 31 December

12,558

1,014

13,572

12,481

1,274

13,755

Net book value at 31 December

5,606

1,010

6,616

5,558

985

6,543

 

Note:

(1)

Principally internally generated software.

 

Intangible assets other than goodwill are reviewed for indicators of impairment. In 2018 £37 million (2017 - £29 million) of previously capitalised software was impaired primarily as a result of software which is no longer expected to yield future economic benefit.

 

The Group’s goodwill acquired in business combinations analysed by reportable segment in Note 4, Segmental analysis. It is reviewed annually at 31 December for impairment. No impairment was indicated at 31 December 2018 or 2017.

 

Impairment testing involves the comparison of the carrying value of each cash-generating unit (CGU) with its recoverable amount. The carrying values of the segments reflect the equity allocations made by management which are consistent with the Group’s capital targets. In 2018, the methodology was enhanced to reflect legal entity changes in the group. Consequently certain corporate assets, represented primarily by bonds and liquidity assets in Treasury are no longer considered to be directly attributable or directly available to the CGUs. These assets are, therefore, not included in the carrying value of the CGUs, resulting in an increase in the available headroom for some CGUs. Recoverable amount is the higher of fair value and value in use. Value in use is the present value of expected future cash flows from the CGU. Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset in an orderly transaction between market participants. The recoverable amounts for all CGUs at 31 December 2018 were based on value in use, using management’s latest five-year revenue and cost forecasts. The long-term growth rates have been based on expected nominal growth of the CGUs. The pre-tax risk discount rates are based on those observed to be applied to businesses regarded as peers of the CGUs.

 

Critical accounting policy: Goodwill

Critical estimates

Impairment testing involves a number of judgmental areas: the preparation of cash flow forecasts for periods that are beyond the normal requirements of management reporting; the assessment of discount rates appropriate to each business; estimation of the fair value of the CGUs; and the valuation of separable assets of each business whose goodwill is reviewed.

 

The sensitivity to the more significant variables in each assessment is presented below.

 

The table below has not been restated for the re-segmentation which has transferred Business Banking from UK PBB to Commercial Banking. The impact was a transfer of £0.7 billion goodwill from UK PBB to Commercial Banking. This re-segmentation has improved the headroom of Commercial Banking (including Business Banking) by approximatively £4.2 billion and reduced the headroom of UK PBB by the equivalent amount without generating any impairment of the goodwill in the CGUs impacted.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Consequential impact of 1%

Consequential  impact of 5%

Break

 

 

Assumptions

Recoverable

adverse movement in

adverse movement

even

 

 

Terminal

Pre-tax

amount exceeded

Discount

Terminal

Forecast

Forecast

discount

 

Goodwill

growth rate

discount rate

 carrying value

rate

growth rate

Income

cost

rate

31 December 2018

£bn

%

%

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

£bn

%

UK Personal & Business Banking

3.4

1.8

13.1

14.4

(2.2)

(1.4)

(4.0)

(1.7)

27.7

Commercial & Private Banking

1.9

1.8

13.0

4.5

(1.2)

(0.8)

(2.3)

(1.0)

17.6

RBS International

0.3

1.8

12.9

0.7

(0.2)

(0.2)

(0.4)

(0.1)

18.5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

31 December 2017

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

UK Personal & Business Banking

3.4

2.0

13.1

9.7

(1.8)

(1.2)

(4.0)

(1.7)

21.6

Commercial & Private Banking

1.9

2.0

12.9

1.3

(1.2)

(0.8)

(2.4)

(1.0)

13.9

RBS International

0.3

2.0

11.0

0.6

(0.4)

(0.3)

(0.4)

(0.1)

12.8

 

223


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

17 Other assets

 

 

2018

2017

 

£m

£m

Property, plant and equipment

4,351

4,602

Deferred tax (Note 7)

1,412

1,740

Assets of disposal groups (1)

1,404

195

Prepayments

435

392

Accrued income

317

378

Interests in associates (2)

404

1,410

Pension schemes in net surplus (Note 5)

520

392

Tax recoverable

37

27

Other assets

925

1,127

 

9,805

10,263

 

Notes:

(1)

Includes interest in Alawwal Bank £1,179 million (2017 - nil).

(2)

Includes interest in Business Growth Fund £387 million (2017 - £316 million).

 

18 Other financial liabilities

 

 

2018

2017

 

£m

£m

Customer deposits

 

 

 - designated as at fair value through profit or loss

212

874

Debt securities in issue

 

 

 - designated as at fair value through profit or loss

2,628

3,403

 - amortised cost

36,892

26,049

Total

39,732

30,326

 

19 Subordinated liabilities

 

 

2018

2017

 

£m

£m

Dated loan capital

8,262

10,394

Undated loan capital

2,127

2,169

Preference shares

146

159

 

10,535

12,722

 

Certain preference shares issued by the company are classified as liabilities; these securities remain subject to the capital maintenance rules of the Companies Act 2006.

 

224


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

19 Subordinated liabilities continued

 

 

 

Capital

 

 

 

 

 

 

treatment

 

2018

 

2017

Redemptions

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

 

 

 

 

 

 

US$350 million 4.70% dated notes 2018

 

Ineligible

 

267

 

£200 million 7.387% Series 1 non-cumulative convertible £0.01 preference shares

 

 

 

 

 

 

(partial redemption)

 

Ineligible

 

 

15

US$1,000 million 9.118% Series 1 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01

 

 

 

 

 

 

(partial redemption)

 

Ineligible

 

 

48

$156 million 7.65% Series F non-cumulative preference shares (callable)

 

Ineligible

 

 

120

$242 million 7.25% Series H non-cumulative preference shares (callable)

 

Ineligible

 

 

186

$751 million 5.75% Series L non cumulative preference shares (callable)

 

Ineligible

 

 

577

US$750 million 6.8% dated notes 2042 (partial redemption)

 

Ineligible

 

 

360

 

 

 

 

267

 

1,306

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NatWest Markets Plc

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,000 million 6.934% dated notes 2018

 

Tier 2

 

1,743

 

£103 million 9.5% undated subordinated bonds 2018 (callable August 2018)

 

Ineligible

 

103

 

750 million 4.35% subordinated notes 2017

 

Tier 2

 

 

645

CHF124 million 9.375% subordinated notes 2022

 

Tier 2

 

 

101

CAD420 million 10.50% subordinated notes 2022

 

Tier 2

 

 

255

£564 million 10.50% subordinated notes 2022

 

Tier 2

 

 

489

AU$880 million 13.125% subordinated notes 2022

 

Tier 2

 

 

548

US$2,132 million 9.50% subordinated notes 2022

 

Tier 2

 

 

1,724

100 million floating rate subordinated notes 2017

 

Tier 2

 

 

90

£51 million 2.35% + 5 year UK Gilts yield undated subordinated notes (callable December 2012)

 

Ineligible

 

 

51

 

 

 

 

1,846

 

3,903

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NatWest Plc

 

 

 

 

 

 

US$300 million 8.6250% non-cumulative preference shares (callable)

 

Tier 1

 

 

178

 

 

 

 

 

178

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NWM N.V. and subsidiaries

 

 

 

 

 

 

US$500 million 4.65% dated notes 2018

 

Tier 2

 

141

 

US$16 million floating rate notes 2019 (partial redemption)

 

Tier 2

 

2

 

15 million floating rate notes 2022 (partial redemption)

 

Tier 2

 

 

2

250 million 4.70% notes 2019 (partial redemption)

 

Tier 2

 

 

80

US$500 million 4.65% notes 2018 (partial redemption)

 

Tier 2

 

 

244

 

 

 

 

143

 

326

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NatWest Holdings Limited

 

 

 

 

 

 

£20 million 11.75% perpetual Tier 2 capital (partial redemption)

 

Tier 2

 

 

9

38 million 11.375% perpetual Tier 2 capital (partial redemption)

 

Tier 2

 

 

6

 

 

 

 

 

15

 

There were no issuances in 2018 or 2017.

 

225


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

20 Other liabilities

 

 

 

2018

 

2017 

 

 

£m

 

£m 

Retirement benefit liabilities (Note 5)

 

165

 

129

Deferred tax (Note 7)

 

454

 

583

Liabilities of disposal groups

 

1

 

10

Notes in circulation

 

2,152

 

2,186

Current tax

 

100

 

227

Accruals

 

1,047

 

1,074

Deferred income

 

451

 

469

Other liabilities

 

1,580

 

2,436

Provisions for liabilities and charges

 

3,004

 

7,757

 

 

8,954

 

14,871

 

 

 

Payment

 

Other

 

 

 

Litigation

 

 

 

 

 

 

protection

 

customer

 

 

 

and other

 

 

 

 

Provisions for liabilities and charges

 

insurance

 

redress

 

DoJ (2)

 

regulatory

 

Other (3)

 

Total

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

At 1 January 2018

 

1,053 

 

870 

 

3,243 

 

641 

 

1,950 

 

7,757 

Implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018

 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

85 

 

85 

ECL impairment charge

 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

(18)

 

(18)

RMBS transfer

 

— 

 

— 

 

(683)

 

683 

 

— 

 

— 

Transfer from accruals and other liabilities

 

— 

 

(4)

 

— 

 

(4)

 

15 

 

Currency translation and other movements

 

— 

 

 

161 

 

21 

 

(1)

 

189 

Charge to income statement

 

200 

 

245 

 

1,040 

 

181 

 

429 

 

2,095 

Releases to income statement

 

— 

 

(134)

 

— 

 

(325)

 

(304)

 

(763)

Provisions utilised

 

(558)

 

(449)

 

(3,761)

 

(414)

 

(1,166)

 

(6,348)

At 31 December 2018

 

695 

 

536 

 

— 

 

783 

 

990 

 

3,004 

 

Notes:

(1)             Refer to Note 33 for further details on the impact of IFRS 9 on classification and basis of preparation.

(2)             The RMBS provision has been redesignated DoJ and the remaining RMBS litigation matters transferred to Litigation and other regulatory as of 1 January 2018 to reflect progress on resolution.

(3)             Materially comprises provisions relating to property closures and restructuring costs. At 1 January 2018 Other provisions for liabilities and charges included £800 million in respect of a package of remedies that would conclude its State Aid commitments which were paid during 2018.

 

Payment protection insurance

 

To reflect the increased volume of complaints following the FCA’s introduction of an August 2019 PPI timebar as outlined in FCA announcement CP17/3 and the introduction of new Plevin (unfair commission) complaint handling rules, RBS increased its provision for PPI by £200 million in 2018 (2017 - £175 million, 2016 - £601 million, 2015 - £600 million) bringing the cumulative charge to £5.3 billion, of which £4.2 billion (79%) in redress and £0.4 billion in administrative expenses had been paid by 31 December 2018. Of the £5.3 billion cumulative charge, £4.8 billion relates to redress and £0.5 billion to administrative expenses.

 

The principal assumptions underlying the Group’s provision in respect of PPI sales are: assessment of the total number of complaints that the Group will receive; the proportion of these that will result in redress; and the average cost of such redress. The number of complaints has been estimated from an analysis of the Group’s portfolio of PPI policies sold by vintage and by product. Estimates of the percentage of policyholders that will lodge complaints (the take up rate) and of the number of these that will be upheld (the uphold rate) have been established based on recent experience, guidance in FCA policy statements and the expected rate of responses from proactive customer contact. The average redress assumption is based on recent experience and FCA calculation rules. The table below shows the sensitivity of the provision to changes in the principal assumptions (all other assumptions remaining the same).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Sensitivity

Assumptions

 

Actual to
date

 

Future
expected

 

Change in assumption
%

 

Consequential change in
provision
£m

Customer initiated complaints (1)

 

2,779k

 

260k

 

+/- 5

 

+/- 18

Uphold rate (2)

 

89%

 

90%

 

+/- 1

 

+/- 4

Average redress (3)

 

£1,664

 

£1,512

 

+/- 5

 

+/- 18

Processing costs per claim (4)

 

£152

 

£151

 

+/- 20k claims

 

+/- 3

 

Notes:

(1)             Claims received directly by RBS to date, including those received via CMCs and Plevin (commission) only. Excluding those for proactive mailings and where no PPI policy exists.

(2)             Average uphold rate per customer initiated claims received directly by RBS including those received via CMCs, to end of timebar for both PPI (mis-sale) and Plevin (commission), excluding those for which no PPI policy exists.

(3)             Average redress for PPI (mis-sale) and Plevin (commission) pay-outs.

(4)             Processing costs per claim on a valid complaints basis, includes direct staff costs and associated overhead - excluding FOS fees.

 

Background information for all material provisions is given in Note 27

 

Critical accounting policy:  Provisions for liabilities

 

Judgment is involved in determining whether an obligation exists, and in estimating the probability, timing and amount of any outflows. Where the Group can look to another party such as an insurer to pay some or all of the expenditure required to settle a provision, any reimbursement is recognised when, and only when, it is virtually certain that it will be received.

 

Estimates - Provisions are liabilities of uncertain timing or amount, and are recognised when there is a present obligation as a result of a past event, the outflow of economic benefit is probable and the outflow can be estimated reliably. Any difference between the final outcome and the amounts provided will affect the reported results in the period when the matter is resolved.

 

226


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

21 Non-controlling interests

 

 

 

 

 

Other 

 

 

 

 

NWM N.V.

 

interests

 

Total

 

 

£m 

 

£m  

 

£m 

At 1 January 2017

 

733 

 

62 

 

795 

Currency translation and other adjustments

 

22 

 

(5)

 

17 

Profit attributable to non-controlling interests

 

30 

 

 

35 

Dividends paid

 

(20)

 

(5)

 

(25)

Equity withdrawn and disposals

 

(59)

 

— 

 

(59)

At 1 January 2018

 

706 

 

57 

 

763 

Currency translation and other adjustments

 

24 

 

 

25 

Profit/(loss) attributable to non-controlling interests

 

13 

 

(21)

 

(8)

Dividends paid

 

— 

 

(5)

 

(5)

Equity withdrawn and disposals

 

— 

 

(21)

 

(21)

At 31 December 2018

 

743 

 

11 

 

754 

 

22 Share capital and other equity

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Number of shares

 

Allotted, called up and fully paid

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

2018 

 

2017

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

000s 

 

000s

 

Ordinary shares of £1

 

12,049 

 

11,965 

 

12,048,605 

 

11,964,565

 

Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 (1)

 

— 

 

— 

 

10 

 

26,459

 

Non-cumulative preference shares of €0.01 (2)

 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

2,044

 

Non-cumulative preference shares of £1 (3)

 

— 

 

— 

 

— 

 

54

 

Cumulative preference shares of £1

 

 

 

900 

 

900

 

 

Notes:

(1)        26 million shares with a total nominal value of £0.2 million were redeemed in December 2018. (2017 – 46 million shares with a total nominal value of £0.3 million were redeemed).

(2)        2 million shares, with a nominal value of 20 thousand, were redeemed in December 2018.

(3)        54,442 shares, with a nominal value of £54 thousand, were redeemed in December 2018.

 

Movement in allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares

 

 

 

Number of

 

£m

 

shares - 000s

At 1 January 2017

 

11,823

 

11,823,163

Shares issued

 

142

 

141,402

At 1 January 2018

 

11,965

 

11,964,565

Shares issued

 

84

 

84,040

At 31 December 2018

 

12,049

 

12,048,605

 

Ordinary shares

 

There is no authorised share capital under the company’s constitution. At 31 December 2018, the directors had authority granted at the 2018 Annual General Meeting to issue up to £600 million nominal of ordinary shares other than by pre-emption to existing shareholders.

 

On 6 February 2019 RBS held a General Meeting and shareholders approved a special resolution to give authority for the Company to make off-market purchases of ordinary shares from HM Treasury (or its nominee) at such times as the Directors may determine is appropriate.  Full details of the proposal are set out in the Circular and Notice of General Meeting.

 

During 2018, the company allotted and issued the following new ordinary shares of £1 each. The shares were allotted to UBS AG at the subscription prices determined by reference to the average market prices during the sale periods set out below:

 

Month

 

Number
of shares

 

Subscription
price per share

 

Sale period
2018

 

Gross
Proceeds

 

Share price
on allotment

April

 

32 million

 

261.7265p

 

23 Feb–17 Apr

 

£85.0m

 

268.4p

July

 

20 million

 

253.5641p

 

27 Apr–16 Jul

 

£50.7m

 

243.7p

 

In the three years to 31 December 2018, the percentage increase in issued share capital due to non pre-emptive issuance (excluding employee share schemes) for cash was 2.6%. In addition, the company issued 32 million ordinary shares of £1 each in connection with employee share plans.

 

In 2018 RBS paid an interim dividend of £241 million, or 2.0p per ordinary share. In addition, the company announced that the directors have recommended a final dividend of 3.5p per ordinary share, and a further special dividend of 7.5p per ordinary share, which are both subject to shareholders’ approval at the Annual General Meeting on 25 April 2019.

 

If approved, payment will be made on 30 April 2019 to shareholders on the register at the close of business on 22 March 2019. The ex-dividend date will be 21 March 2019. No dividend was paid in 2017.

 

Other securities

Additional Tier 1 Notes issued by RBS having the legal form of debt are classified as equity under IFRS. Capital recognised for regulatory purposes cannot be redeemed without Prudential Regulation Authority consent. This includes ordinary shares, preference shares and additional Tier 1 Notes.

 

These securities entitle the holders to interest which may be deferred at the sole discretion of the company. Repayment of the securities is at the sole discretion of the company on giving between 30 and 60 days notice.

 

Non-cumulative preference shares

Non-cumulative preference shares entitle their holders to periodic non-cumulative cash dividends at specified fixed rates for each Series payable out of distributable profits of the company.

 

The company may redeem some or all of the non-cumulative preference shares from time to time at the rates detailed in the table below plus dividends otherwise payable for the then current dividend period to the date of redemption.

 

In December 2018, the company redeemed in whole the Series S non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01, Series 1,2 and 3 non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01 and Series 1 non-cumulative preference shares of £1. In December 2017, the company redeemed in whole the Series F, H, L and 1 non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 and Series 1 non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01.

 

227


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

22 Share capital and other equity continued

 

Non-cumulative preference shares classified as equity

 

Number of shares

 

 

 

Redemption

 

Redemption

 

in issue

 

Interest rate

 

date on or after

 

price per share

Shares of US$0.01 - Series U

 

10,130 

 

floating

 

29 September 2017

 

US$100,000

 

Note:

(1)        Those preference shares where distributions are discretionary are classified as equity.

 

In the event that the non-cumulative convertible preference shares are not redeemed on or before the redemption date, the holder may convert them into ordinary shares in the company at the prevailing market price.

 

On a winding-up or liquidation of the company, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares are entitled to receive, out of any surplus assets available for distribution to the company’s shareholders (after payment of arrears of dividends on the cumulative preference shares up to the date of repayment) pari passu with the cumulative preference shares and all other shares of the company ranking pari passu with the non-cumulative preference shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company, a liquidation distribution per share equal to the applicable redemption price detailed in the table above, together with an amount equal to dividends for the then current dividend period accrued to the date of payment, before any distribution or payment may be made to holders of the ordinary shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company.

 

Except as described above, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of the company.

 

Holders of the non-cumulative preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of or attend general meetings of the company except if any resolution is proposed for adoption by the shareholders of the company to vary or abrogate any of the rights attaching to the non-cumulative preference shares or proposing the winding-up or liquidation of the company. In any such case, they are entitled to receive notice of and to attend the general meeting of shareholders at which such resolution is to be proposed and are entitled to speak and vote on such resolution (but not on any other resolution). In addition, in the event that, prior to any general meeting of shareholders, the company has failed to pay in full the most recent dividend payment due on the Series U non-cumulative dollar preference shares, the holders shall be entitled to receive notice of, attend, speak and vote at such meeting on all matters together with the holders of the ordinary shares. In these circumstances only, the rights of the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares so to vote shall continue until the company shall have resumed the payment in full of the dividends in arrears.

 

Paid-in equity - comprises equity instruments issued by the company other than those legally constituted as shares.

 

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

2016 

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Additional Tier 1 notes (1)

 

 

 

 

 

 

US$2.0 billion 7.5% notes callable August 2020 (2)

 

1,278

 

1,278

 

1,278

US$1.15 billion 8% notes callable August 2025 (2)

 

734

 

734

 

734

US$2.65 billion 8.625% notes callable
August 2021
(3)

 

2,046

 

2,046

 

2,046

EMTN notes

 

 

 

 

 

 

US$564 million 6.99% capital securities
(redeemed October 2017)

 

-

 

-

 

275

CAD321 million 6.666% notes
(redeemed October 2017)

 

-

 

-

 

156

Trust preferred issues: subordinated notes (4)

 

 

 

 

 

 

£93 million 5.6457% 2047
(redeemed June 2017)
(5)

 

-

 

-

 

93

 

 

4,058

 

4,058

 

4,582 

 

Notes:

(1)    The coupons on these notes are non-cumulative and payable at the company’s discretion. In the event the Group’s CET1 ratio falls below 7% any outstanding notes will be converted into ordinary shares at a fixed price. While taking the legal form of debt these notes are classified as equity under IFRS.

(2)    Issued in August 2015. In the event of conversion, converted into ordinary shares at a price of $3.606 nominal per £1 share.

(3)    Issued in August 2016. In the event of conversion, converted into ordinary shares at a price of $2.284 nominal per £1 share.

(4)    Subordinated notes issued to limited partnerships that have in turn issued partnership preferred securities to RBS Capital Trust D that issued trust preferred securities to investors.

(5)    Preferred securities in issue - £93 million RBS Capital Trust D, fixed/floating rate non-cumulative trust preferred securities.

 

Merger reserve - the merger reserve comprises the premium on shares issued to acquire NatWest, less goodwill amortisation charged under previous GAAP.

 

228


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

22 Share capital and other equity continued

 

Capital redemption reserve - under UK companies legislation, when shares are redeemed or purchased wholly or partly out of the company’s profits, the amount by which the company’s issued share capital is diminished must be transferred to the capital redemption reserve. The capital maintenance provisions of UK companies legislation apply to the capital redemption reserve as if it were part of the company’s paid up share capital. On 15 June 2017, the Court of Session approved a reduction of RBSG plc capital so that the amounts which stood to the credit of the capital redemption reserve were transferred to retained earnings.

 

Own shares held - at 31 December 2018, 8 million ordinary shares of £1 each of the company (2017 - 16 million) were held by employee share trusts in respect of share awards and options granted to employees. During the year, the employee share trusts purchased 25 million ordinary shares and delivered 33 million ordinary shares in satisfaction of the exercise of options and the vesting of share awards under the employee share plans.

 

RBS optimises capital efficiency by maintaining reserves in subsidiaries, including regulated entities. Certain preference shares and subordinated debt are also included within regulatory capital. The remittance of reserves to the company or the redemption of shares or subordinated capital by regulated entities may be subject to maintaining the capital resources required by the relevant regulator.

 

UK law prescribes that only the reserves of the company are taken into account for the purpose of making distributions and in determining permissible applications of the share premium account.

 

23 Leases

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Operating lease

 

 

Finance lease contracts and hire purchase agreements

 

assets:

 

 

Gross

 

Present value

 

Other

 

Future

 

Present

 

future minimum

Year in which receipt will occur

 

amounts

 

adjustments

 

movements

 

drawdowns

 

value

 

lease rentals

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

2018 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Within 1 year

 

3,237 

 

(208)

 

(123)

 

(70)

 

2,836 

 

139 

After 1 year but within 5 years

 

4,566 

 

(370)

 

(100)

 

— 

 

4,096 

 

325 

After 5 years

 

1,935 

 

(710)

 

(38)

 

— 

 

1,187 

 

49 

Total

 

9,738 

 

(1,288)

 

(261)

 

(70)

 

8,119 

 

513 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2017 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Within 1 year

 

3,164 

 

(212)

 

(125)

 

(70)

 

2,757 

 

129 

After 1 year but within 5 years

 

4,686 

 

(444)

 

(94)

 

— 

 

4,148 

 

257 

After 5 years

 

2,062 

 

(742)

 

(27)

 

— 

 

1,293 

 

21 

Total

 

9,912 

 

(1,398)

 

(246)

 

(70)

 

8,198 

 

407 

 

Nature of operating lease assets on the balance sheet

 

2018

 

2017 

 

£m

 

£m 

Transportation

 

313

 

283

Cars and light commercial vehicles

 

11

 

45

Other

 

285

 

271

 

 

609

 

599

 

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

2016 

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Amounts recognised as income and expense

 

 

 

 

 

 

Finance leases - contingent rental rebate

 

(44)

 

(34)

 

(76)

Operating leases - minimum rentals payable

 

233 

 

221 

 

239 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Finance lease contracts and hire purchase agreements

 

 

 

 

 

 

Accumulated allowance for uncollectable minimum receivables

 

62 

 

63 

 

54 

 

Residual value exposures

The table below gives details of the unguaranteed residual values included in the carrying value of finance lease receivables and operating lease assets.

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Year in which residual value will be recovered

 

Year in which residual value will be recovered

 

 

 

 

After 1 year

 

After 2
years

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

After 1 year

 

After 2
years

 

 

 

 

 

 

Within 1

 

but within

 

but within

 

After 5

 

 

 

Within 1

 

but within

 

but within

 

After 5

 

 

 

 

year

 

2 years

 

5 years

 

years

 

Total

 

year

 

2 years

 

5 years

 

years

 

Total

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Operating leases

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

- transportation

 

25 

 

15 

 

94 

 

14 

 

148 

 

29 

 

22 

 

69 

 

17 

 

137 

- cars and light commercial vehicles

 

 

 

 

— 

 

 

 

 

 

— 

 

19 

- other

 

26 

 

19 

 

37 

 

10 

 

92 

 

21 

 

24 

 

30 

 

 

84 

Finance lease contracts

 

68 

 

32 

 

67 

 

38 

 

205 

 

88 

 

20 

 

72 

 

27 

 

207 

Hire purchase agreements

 

55 

 

 

— 

 

— 

 

57 

 

38 

 

 

 

— 

 

41 

 

 

175 

 

69 

 

200 

 

62 

 

506 

 

181 

 

75 

 

179 

 

53 

 

488 

 

Acting as a lessor, RBS provides asset finance to its customers. It purchases plant, equipment and intellectual property, renting them to customers under lease arrangements that, depending on their terms, qualify as either operating or finance leases.

 

229


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

24 Structured entities

 

A structured entity (SE) is an entity that has been designed such that voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, for example, when any voting rights relate to administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual arrangements. SEs are usually established for a specific, limited purpose. They do not carry out a business or trade and typically have no employees. They take a variety of legal forms - trusts, partnerships and companies - and fulfil many different functions. As well as being a key element of securitisations, SEs are also used in fund management activities in order to segregate custodial duties from the provision of fund management advice.

 

Consolidated structured entities

 

Securitisations

 

In a securitisation, assets, or interests in a pool of assets, are transferred generally to an SE which then issues liabilities to third party investors. The majority of securitisations are supported through liquidity facilities or other credit enhancements.

 

RBS arranges securitisations to facilitate client transactions and undertakes own asset securitisations to sell or to fund portfolios of financial assets. RBS also acts as an underwriter and depositor in securitisation transactions in both client and proprietary transactions.

 

RBS involvement in client securitisations takes a number of forms. It may: sponsor or administer a securitisation programme; provide liquidity facilities or programme-wide credit enhancement; and purchase securities issued by the vehicle.

 

Own asset securitisations

 

In own-asset securitisations, the pool of assets held by the SE is either originated by RBS, or (in the case of whole loan programmes) purchased from third parties.

 

The table below analyses the asset categories for those own-asset securitisations where the transferred assets continue to be recorded on RBS balance sheet.

 

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

 

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

 

 

Debt securities in issue

 

 

 

 

 

Held by third

 

Held by

 

 

 

 

 

Held by third

 

Held by 

 

 

 

 

 

Assets 

 

parties

 

RBS (1)

 

Total 

 

Assets 

 

parties

 

RBS (1)

 

Total

 

Asset type

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m

 

Mortgages - RoI

 

2,817 

 

778 

 

2,239 

 

3,017 

 

4,073 

 

— 

 

4,688 

 

4,688

 

Cash deposits

 

221 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

518 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,038 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,591 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Note:

(1)      Debt securities retained by RBS may be pledged with central banks.

 

Other credit risk transfer securitisations

RBS also transfers credit risk on originated loans and mortgages without the transfer of assets to an SE. As part of this, RBS enters into credit derivative and financial guarantee contracts with consolidated SEs. At 31 December 2018, debt securities in issue by such SEs (and held by third parties) were £596 million (2017 - £398 million). The associated loans and mortgages at 31 December 2018 were £8,402 million (2017 - £6,092 million).

 

Covered debt programme

Group companies have assigned loans to customers and debt investments to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security for issues of debt securities. RBS retains all of the risks and rewards of these assets and continues to recognise them. The partnerships are consolidated by RBS and the related covered bonds included within other financial liabilities. At 31 December 2018, £9,446 million (2017 - £8,915) of loans to customers and £478 million (2017 - £76 million) of debt investments provided security for debt securities in issue and other borrowing of £6,627 million (2017 - £6,307 million).

 

230


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

24 Structured entities continued

Unconsolidated structured entities

RBS’s interests in unconsolidated structured entities are analysed below

 

 

 

2018

 

2017

 

 

Asset backed

 

Investment

 

 

 

Asset backed

 

Investment

 

 

 

 

securitisation

 

funds

 

 

 

securitisation

 

funds

 

 

 

 

vehicles

 

and other

 

Total

 

vehicles

 

and other

 

Total

 

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

 

£m

Trading assets and derivatives

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Trading assets

 

590 

 

164 

 

754 

 

884 

 

131 

 

1,015 

Derivative assets

 

495 

 

325 

 

820 

 

660 

 

117 

 

777 

Derivative liabilities

 

(223)

 

(332)

 

(555)

 

(561)

 

(131)

 

(692)

Total

 

862 

 

157 

 

1,019 

 

983 

 

117 

 

1,100 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Non trading assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Loans to customers

 

1,636 

 

544 

 

2,180 

 

1,243 

 

120 

 

1,363 

Other financial assets

 

4,461 

 

 

4,461 

 

3,888 

 

141 

 

4,029 

Total

 

6,097 

 

544 

 

6,641 

 

5,131 

 

261 

 

5,392 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liquidity facilities/loan commitments

 

2,138 

 

213 

 

2,351 

 

2,117 

 

455 

 

2,572 

Guarantees

 

 

10 

 

13 

 

229 

 

 

234 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Maximum exposure

 

9,100 

 

924 

 

10,024 

 

8,460 

 

838 

 

9,298 

 

25 Asset transfers

 

Transfers that do not qualify for derecognition

RBS enters into securities repurchase, lending and total return transactions in accordance with normal market practice which includes the provision of additional collateral if necessary. Under standard terms in the UK and US markets, the recipient has an unrestricted right to sell or repledge collateral, subject to returning equivalent securities on settlement of the transaction.

 

Securities sold under repurchase transactions and transactions with the substance of securities repurchase agreements are not derecognised if RBS retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. The fair value (and carrying value) of securities transferred under such transactions included on the balance sheet, are set out below. All of these securities could be sold or repledged by the holder.

 

The following assets have failed derecognition (1)

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Trading assets

 

14,020 

 

10,463

Other financial assets

 

9,890 

 

13,717

 

 

23,910 

 

24,180

 

Note:

(1)     Associated liabilities were £23,222 million (2017 - £23,692 million).

 

Assets pledged as collateral

 

The Group pledges collateral with its counterparties in respect of derivative liabilities and bank and other borrowings.

 

Assets pledged against liabilities

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Trading assets

 

35,571 

 

36,631

Loans to banks - amortised cost

 

1,050 

 

738

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

25,930 

 

31,312

Other financial assets

 

713 

 

3,397

 

 

63,264 

 

72,078

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities secured by assets

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

16,326 

 

20,226

Derivatives

 

21,884 

 

22,956

 

 

38,210 

 

43,182

 

231


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

26 Capital resources

Under Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR), regulators within the European Union monitor capital on a legal entity basis, with local transitional arrangements on the phasing in of end-point CRR.

The capital resources based on the PRA transitional basis for Bank are set out below.

 

 

 

PRA transitional basis

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

 

£m

 

£m

Shareholders’ equity (excluding non-controlling interests)

 

 

 

 

Shareholders’ equity

 

45,736 

 

48,330 

Preference shares - equity

 

(496)

 

(2,565)

Other equity instruments

 

(4,058)

 

(4,058)

 

 

41,182 

 

41,707 

 

 

 

 

 

Regulatory adjustments and deductions

 

 

 

 

Own credit

 

(405)

 

(90)

Defined benefit pension fund adjustment

 

(394)

 

(287)

Cash flow hedging reserve

 

191 

 

(227)

Deferred tax assets

 

(740)

 

(849)

Prudential valuation adjustments

 

(494)

 

(496)

Goodwill and other intangible assets

 

(6,616)

 

(6,543)

Expected losses less impairments

 

(654)

 

(1,286)

Foreseeable ordinary and special dividends

 

(1,326)

 

— 

Other regulatory adjustments

 

(105)

 

28 

 

 

(10,543)

 

(9,750)

 

 

 

 

 

CET1 capital

 

30,639 

 

31,957 

 

 

 

 

 

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

 

 

 

 

Qualifying instruments and related share premium

 

4,051 

 

4,041 

Qualifying instruments and related share premium subject to phase out

 

1,393 

 

3,416 

Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties subject to phase out

 

140 

 

140 

AT1 capital

 

5,584 

 

7,597 

 

 

 

 

 

Tier 1 capital

 

36,223 

 

39,554 

 

 

 

 

 

Qualifying Tier 2 capital

 

 

 

 

Qualifying instruments and related share premium

 

6,386 

 

6,501 

Qualifying instruments issued by subsidiaries and held by third parties

 

1,565 

 

1,876 

Tier 2 capital

 

7,951 

 

8,377 

 

 

 

 

 

Total regulatory capital

 

44,174 

 

47,931 

 

It is RBS policy to maintain a strong capital base, to expand it as appropriate and to utilise it efficiently throughout its activities to optimise the return to shareholders while maintaining a prudent relationship between the capital base and the underlying risks of the business. In carrying out this policy, RBS has regard to the supervisory requirements of the PRA. The PRA uses capital ratios as a measure of capital adequacy in the UK banking sector, comparing a bank’s capital resources with its risk-weighted assets (the assets and off-balance sheet exposures are ‘weighted’ to reflect the inherent credit and other risks); by international agreement, the Pillar 1 capital ratios should be not less than 8% with a Common Equity Tier 1 component of not less than 4.5%. RBS has complied with the PRA’s capital requirements throughout the year.

 

A number of subsidiaries and sub-groups within RBS, principally banking entities, are subject to various individual regulatory capital requirements in the UK and overseas. Furthermore, the payment of dividends by subsidiaries and the ability of members of RBS to lend money to other members of RBS may be subject to restrictions such as local regulatory or legal requirements, the availability of reserves and financial and operating performance.

 

232


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

27 Memorandum items

Contingent liabilities and commitments

The amounts shown in the table below are intended only to provide an indication of the volume of business outstanding at 31 December 2018. Although RBS is exposed to credit risk in the event of a customer’s failure to meet its obligations, the amounts shown do not, and are not intended to, provide any indication of RBS’s expectation of future losses.

 

 

 

 

 

More than 

 

More than 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1 year but 

 

3 years but 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Less than 

 

less than 

 

less than 

 

Over 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1 year 

 

3 years 

 

5 years 

 

5 years 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m 

 

£m

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security

 

1,296 

 

414 

 

250 

 

1,992 

 

3,952 

 

7,718 

Other contingent liabilities

 

1,111 

 

582 

 

211 

 

1,148 

 

3,052 

 

3,391 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

 

61,105 

 

20,934 

 

32,535 

 

5,305 

 

119,879 

 

124,941 

Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

63,512 

 

21,930 

 

32,996 

 

8,445 

 

126,883 

 

136,050 

 

Banking commitments and contingent obligations, which have been entered into on behalf of customers and for which there are corresponding obligations from customers, are not included in assets and liabilities. RBS’s maximum exposure to credit loss, in the event of its obligation crystallising and all counterclaims, collateral or security proving valueless, is represented by the contractual nominal amount of these instruments included in the table above. These commitments and contingent obligations are subject to RBS’s normal credit approval processes.

 

Guarantees - RBS gives guarantees on behalf of customers. A financial guarantee represents an irrevocable undertaking that RBS will meet a customer’s specified obligations to third party if the customer fails to do so. The maximum amount that RBS could be required to pay under a guarantee is its principal amount as in the table above. RBS expects most guarantees to expire unused.

 

Other contingent liabilities - these include standby letters of credit, supporting customer debt issues and contingent liabilities relating to customer trading activities such as those arising from performance and customs bonds, warranties and indemnities.

 

Standby facilities and credit lines - under a loan commitment, RBS agrees to make funds available to a customer in the future. Loan commitments, which are usually for a specified term, may be unconditionally cancellable or may persist, provided all conditions in the loan facility are satisfied or waived. Commitments to lend include commercial standby facilities and credit lines, liquidity facilities to commercial paper conduits and unutilised overdraft facilities.

 

Other commitments - these include documentary credits, which are commercial letters of credit providing for payment by RBS to a named beneficiary against presentation of specified documents, forward asset purchases, forward deposits placed and undrawn note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities, and other short-term trade related transactions.

 

 

Contractual obligations for future expenditure not provided for in the accounts

The following table shows contractual obligations for future expenditure not provided for in the accounts at the year end.

 

 

 

 

2018 

 

2017 

 

 

£m 

 

£m 

Operating leases

 

 

 

 

Minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable leases (1)

 

 

 

 

- within 1 year

 

232 

 

220 

- after 1 year but within 5 years

 

736 

 

696 

- after 5 years

 

1,721 

 

1,676 

 

 

2,689 

 

2,592 

Capital expenditure on property, plant and equipment

 

17 

 

18 

Contracts to purchase goods or services (2)

 

541 

 

682 

 

 

3,247 

 

3,292 

 

Notes:

(1)      Predominantly property leases.

(2)      Of which due within 1 year: £253 million (2017 - £276 million).

 

233


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

27 Memorandum items continued

Trustee and other fiduciary activities

In its capacity as trustee or other fiduciary role, the Group may hold or place assets on behalf of individuals, trusts, companies, pension schemes and others. The assets and their income are not included in the Group’s financial statements. The Group earned fee income of £257 million (2017 - £244 million; 2016 - £251 million) from these activities.

 

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS), the UK’s statutory fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms, pays compensation if a firm is unable to meet its obligations. The FSCS funds compensation for customers by raising management expenses levies and compensation levies on the industry. In relation to protected deposits, each deposit-taking institution contributes towards these levies in proportion to their share of total protected deposits on 31 December of the year preceding the scheme year (which runs from 1 April to 31 March), subject to annual maxima set by the Prudential Regulation Authority. In addition, the FSCS has the power to raise levies on a firm that has ceased to participate in the scheme and is in the process of ceasing to be authorised for the costs that it would have been liable to pay had the FSCS made a levy in the financial year it ceased to be a participant in the scheme.

 

The FSC had borrowed from HM Treasury to fund compensation costs associated with the failure of Bradford & Bingley, Heritable Bank, Kaupthing Singer & Friedlander, Landsbanki ‘Icesave’ and London Scottish Bank plc. The industry has now repaid all outstanding loans with the final £4.7 billion being repaid in June 2018. The loan was interest bearing with the reference rate being the higher of 12 month LIBOR plus 111 basis points or the relevant gilt rate for the equivalent cost of borrowing from HMT.

 

RBS Group has accrued £1.8 million for its share of estimated FSCS levies.

 

Litigation, investigations and reviews

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (the ‘company’ or RBSG) and certain members of the Group are party to legal proceedings and the subject of investigation and other regulatory and governmental action (‘Matters’) in the United Kingdom (UK), the United States (US), the European Union (EU) and other jurisdictions.

 

RBS recognises a provision for a liability in relation to these Matters when it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle an obligation resulting from past events, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

 

In many proceedings and investigations, it is not possible to determine whether any loss is probable or to estimate reliably the amount of any loss, either as a direct consequence of the relevant proceedings and investigations or as a result of adverse impacts or restrictions on RBS’s reputation, businesses and operations. Numerous legal and factual issues may need to be resolved, including through potentially lengthy discovery and document production exercises and determination of important factual matters, and by addressing novel or unsettled legal questions relevant to the proceedings in question, before a liability can reasonably be estimated for any claim. RBS cannot predict if, how, or when such claims will be resolved or what the eventual settlement, damages, fine, penalty or other relief, if any, may be, particularly for claims that are at an early stage in their development or where claimants seek substantial or indeterminate damages.

 

There are situations where RBS may pursue an approach that in some instances leads to a settlement agreement. This may occur in order to avoid the expense, management distraction or reputational implications of continuing to contest liability, or in order to take account of the risks inherent in defending claims or investigations, even for those Matters for which RBS believes it has credible defences and should prevail on the merits. The uncertainties inherent in all such Matters affect the amount and timing of any potential outflows for both Matters with respect to which provisions have been established and other contingent liabilities.

 

The future outflow of resources in respect of any Matter may ultimately prove to be substantially greater than or less than the aggregate provision that RBS has recognised. Where (and as far as) liability cannot be reasonably estimated, no provision has been recognised.

 

Other than those discussed below, no member of the Group is or has been involved in governmental, legal or regulatory proceedings (including those which are pending or threatened) that are expected to be material, individually or in aggregate. RBS expects that in future periods, additional provisions, settlement amounts and customer redress payments will be necessary, in amounts that are expected to be substantial in some instances.

 

For a discussion of certain risks associated with the Group’s litigation, investigations and reviews, see the Risk Factor relating to legal, regulatory and governmental actions and investigations set out on page 274.

 

Litigation

Residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS) litigation in the US

RBS companies continue to defend RMBS-related claims in the US in which plaintiffs allege that certain disclosures made in connection with the relevant offerings of RMBS contained materially false or misleading statements and/or omissions regarding the underwriting standards pursuant to which the mortgage loans underlying the RMBS were issued. The remaining RMBS lawsuits against RBS companies consist of cases filed by the Federal Home Loan Banks of Boston and Seattle and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation that together involve the issuance of less than US$1 billion of RMBS issued primarily from 2005 to 2007. In addition, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. previously agreed to settle a purported RMBS class action entitled New Jersey Carpenters Health Fund v. Novastar Mortgage Inc. et al. for US$55.3 million, which has been paid into escrow pending court approval of the settlement.

 

London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) and other rates litigation

NatWest Markets Plc and certain other members of the Group, including RBSG, are defendants in a number of class actions and individual claims pending in the US (primarily in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York (SDNY)) with respect to the setting of LIBOR and certain other benchmark interest rates. The complaints allege that certain members of the Group and other panel banks violated various federal laws, including the US commodities and antitrust laws, and state statutory and common law, as well as contracts, by manipulating LIBOR and prices of LIBOR-based derivatives in various markets through various means.

 

Several class actions relating to USD LIBOR, as well as more than two dozen non-class actions concerning USD LIBOR, are part of a coordinated proceeding in the SDNY. In December 2016, the SDNY held that it lacks personal jurisdiction over NatWest Markets Plc with respect to certain claims. As a result of that decision, all Group companies have been dismissed from each of the USD LIBOR-related class actions (including class actions on behalf of over-the-counter plaintiffs, exchanged-based purchaser plaintiffs, bondholder plaintiffs, and lender plaintiffs), but six non-class cases in the coordinated proceeding remain pending against Group defendants. The dismissal of Group companies for lack of personal jurisdiction is the subject of a pending appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit.

 

Among the non-class claims dismissed by the SDNY in December 2016 were claims that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) had asserted on behalf of certain failed US banks. On 10 July 2017, the FDIC, on behalf of 39 failed US banks, commenced substantially similar claims against RBS companies and others in the High Court of Justice of England and Wales. The action alleges that the defendants breached

 

234


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

27 Memorandum items continued

Litigation, investigations and reviews

English and European competition law as well as asserting common law claims of fraud under US law.

 

In addition, there are two class actions relating to JPY LIBOR and Euroyen TIBOR, both pending before the same judge in the SDNY. In the first class action, which relates to Euroyen TIBOR futures contracts, the court dismissed the plaintiffs’ antitrust claims in March 2014, but declined to dismiss their claims under the Commodity Exchange Act for price manipulation, and the case is proceeding in the discovery phase. The second class action relates to other derivatives allegedly tied to JPY LIBOR and Euroyen TIBOR. The court dismissed that case on 10 March 2017 on the ground that the plaintiffs lack standing. The plaintiffs have commenced an appeal of that decision.

 

There is also a class action relating to the Singapore Interbank Offered Rate and Singapore Swap Offer Rate pending in the SDNY. In that case, the court denied defendants’ motion to dismiss on 5 October 2018. The court’s ruling would permit certain antitrust claims to proceed against NatWest Markets Plc and other non-RBS defendants, however, in November 2018, the defendants filed another motion to dismiss plaintiffs’ claims.

 

Four other class action complaints were filed against RBS companies in the SDNY, each relating to a different reference rate. In the case relating to Pound Sterling LIBOR, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies, for various reasons, on 21 December 2018, and plaintiffs are seeking reconsideration of that decision. In the case relating to the Australian Bank Bill Swap Reference Rate, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies for lack of personal jurisdiction on 26 November 2018, but plaintiffs have filed an amended complaint, which will be the subject of a further motion to dismiss. In the case relating to Euribor, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies for lack of personal jurisdiction on 21 February 2017. In the case relating to Swiss Franc LIBOR, the court dismissed all claims against all defendants on various grounds on 25 September 2017, but held that it has personal jurisdiction over NatWest Markets Plc and allowed the plaintiffs to replead their complaint. Defendants’ renewed motion to dismiss the amended complaint relating to Swiss Franc LIBOR remains pending.

 

NatWest Markets Plc has also been named as a defendant in a motion to certify a class action relating to LIBOR in the Tel Aviv District Court in Israel.

 

NatWest Markets Plc is defending a claim in the High Court in London brought by London Bridge Holdings Ltd and others, in which the claimants allege LIBOR manipulation in connection with the sale of interest rate hedging products. The sum claimed in that case is £446.7 million.

 

On 4 February 2019, a claim was issued against NatWest Markets Plc by London Borough of Newham, in respect of certain lender option borrower option (LOBO) loans.

 

Details of UK litigation claims in relation to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate hedging products (IRHPs) involving LIBOR-related allegations are set out under ‘Interest rate hedging products litigation’ on page 236.

 

In January 2019, a class action antitrust complaint was filed in the SDNY alleging that the defendants (USD ICE LIBOR panel banks and affiliates) have conspired to suppress USD ICE LIBOR from 2014 to the present by submitting incorrect information to ICE about their borrowing costs. The RBS defendants are RBSG, NatWest Markets Plc, NatWest Markets Securities Inc., and NatWest Plc.

 

FX antitrust litigation

NatWest Markets Plc and certain other members of the Group, including RBSG, are defendants in several cases relating to NatWest Markets Plc’s foreign exchange (FX) business, each of which is pending before the same federal judge in the SDNY.

 

In 2015, RBS companies paid US$255 million to settle the consolidated antitrust class action on behalf of persons who entered into over-the-counter FX transactions with defendants or who traded FX instruments on exchanges. That settlement received final court approval in August 2018. On 7 November 2018, some members of the settlement class who opted out of the settlement filed their own non-class complaint in the SDNY asserting antitrust claims against RBS companies and others. On 31 December 2018, some of the same claimants, as well as others, filed proceedings in the High Court in London, asserting competition claims against NatWest Markets Plc and several other banks.

 

Two other FX-related class actions remain pending. First, there is a class action on behalf of ‘consumers and end-user businesses,’ which is proceeding in the discovery phase following the SDNY’s denial of the defendants’ motions to dismiss in March 2018. Second, there is a class action on behalf of ‘indirect purchasers’ of FX instruments (which plaintiffs define as persons who transacted FX instruments with retail foreign exchange dealers that transacted directly with defendant banks). That case is also proceeding in discovery following the SDNY’s denial of defendants’ motion to dismiss on 25 October 2018.

 

RBS companies have also been named as defendants in two motions to certify FX-related class actions in the Tel Aviv District Court in Israel.

 

Certain other foreign exchange transaction related claims have been or may be threatened against RBS companies. RBS cannot predict whether any of these claims will be pursued, but expects that some may.

 

US Treasury securities antitrust litigation

NatWest Markets Securities Inc. is a defendant in a consolidated antitrust class action pending in the SDNY on behalf of persons who transacted in US Treasury securities or derivatives based on such instruments, including futures and options. The plaintiffs allege that defendants rigged the US Treasury securities auction bidding process to deflate prices at which they bought such securities and colluded to increase the prices at which they sold such securities to plaintiffs. The defendants’ motion to dismiss this matter remains pending.

 

Swaps antitrust litigation

NatWest Markets Plc and other members of the Group, including RBSG, as well as a number of other interest rate swap dealers, are defendants in several cases pending in the SDNY alleging violations of the US antitrust laws in the market for interest rate swaps. There is a consolidated class action complaint on behalf of persons who entered into interest rate swaps with the defendants, as well as non-class action claims by three swap execution facilities (TeraExchange, Javelin, and trueEx). The plaintiffs allege that the swap execution facilities would have successfully established exchange-like trading of interest rate swaps if the defendants had not unlawfully conspired to prevent that from happening through boycotts and other means. Discovery in these cases is ongoing.

 

In addition, on 8 June 2017, TeraExchange filed a complaint against RBS companies, including RBSG, as well as a number of other credit default swap dealers, in the SDNY. TeraExchange alleges it would have established exchange-like trading of credit default swaps if the defendant dealers had not engaged in an unlawful antitrust conspiracy. On 1 October 2018, the court dismissed all claims against RBS companies.

 

Madoff

NatWest Markets N.V. (NWM N.V.) is a defendant in two actions filed by Irving Picard, as trustee for the bankruptcy estates of Bernard L. Madoff and Bernard L. Madoff Investment Securities LLC, in bankruptcy court in New York. In both cases, the trustee alleges that certain transfers received by NatWest Markets N.V. amounted to fraudulent conveyances that should be clawed back for the benefit of the Madoff estate.

 

235


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

27 Memorandum items continued

Litigation, investigations and reviews

In the primary action, filed in December 2010, the trustee originally sought to recover US$75.8 million in redemptions that NWM N.V. allegedly received from certain Madoff feeder funds and US$162.1 million that NWM N.V. allegedly received from certain swap counterparties. In August 2018, the trustee voluntarily dismissed a portion of this claim (relating to US$74.6 million received from certain swap counterparties) without prejudice to-refiling at a later date. Otherwise this action remains pending before the bankruptcy court, where it will in due course be the subject of a motion to dismiss. In the second action, filed in October 2011, the trustee seeks to recover an additional US$21.8 million. In November 2016, the bankruptcy court dismissed this case on international comity grounds, and that decision is currently on appeal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit.

 

Thornburg adversary proceeding

Certain RBS companies were defendants in an adversary proceeding filed in the US bankruptcy court in Maryland by the trustee for TMST, Inc. (formerly known as Thornburg Mortgage, Inc.). The trustee sought recovery of transfers made under certain restructuring agreements as avoidable fraudulent and preferential transfers. On 26 October 2018, the bankruptcy court approved a US$23.5 million settlement of this matter. RBS companies have paid this settlement amount, which was covered by a provision existing as of 30 September 2018.

 

Interest rate hedging products and similar litigation

RBS is dealing with a number of active litigation claims in the UK in relation to the alleged mis-selling of interest rate hedging products (IRHPs). In general claimants allege that the relevant IRHPs were mis-sold to them, with some also alleging that misrepresentations were made in relation to LIBOR. Claims have been brought by customers who were considered under the UK Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) redress programme for IRHPs, as well as customers who were outside of the scope of that programme, which was closed to new entrants on 31 March 2015. RBS remains exposed to potential claims from customers who were either ineligible to be considered for redress or who are dissatisfied with their redress offers.

 

Property Alliance Group (PAG) v NatWest Markets Plc was the leading case before the English High Court involving both IRHP mis-selling and LIBOR misconduct allegations. The amount claimed was £34.8 million and the trial ended in October 2016. In December 2016 the Court dismissed all of PAG’s claims. PAG appealed that decision, and the Court of Appeal’s judgment dismissing the appeal was handed down on 2 March 2018. On 24 July 2018 the Supreme Court declined the request from PAG for permission to appeal an aspect of the judgment relating to implied representations of Sterling LIBOR rates. The Court of Appeal’s decision may impact other IRHP and LIBOR-related cases currently pending in the English courts, some of which involve substantial amounts.

 

Separately, NatWest Markets Plc is defending claims filed in France by five French local authorities relating to structured interest rate swaps. The plaintiffs allege, among other things, that the swaps are void for being illegal transactions, that they were mis-sold, and that information / advisory duties were breached. One of the claims is now at an end following the Court of Appeal’s dismissal of the claim, and is not being appealed to the Supreme Court. Three of the claims were also dismissed  but are subject to appeal to the Supreme Court. The fifth claim remains to be heard before the lower courts.

 

Tax dispute

HMRC issued a tax assessment in 2012 against NatWest Markets Plc for approximately £86 million regarding a value-added-tax (‘VAT’) matter in relation to the trading of European Union Allowances (‘EUAs’) by an RBS joint venture subsidiary in 2009. RBS has lodged an appeal, which is still to be heard, before the First-tier Tribunal (Tax), a specialist tax tribunal, challenging the assessment (the ‘Tax Dispute’). In the event that the assessment is upheld, interest and costs would be payable, and a penalty of up to 100 per cent of the VAT held to have been legitimately denied by HMRC could also be levied. Separately, RBS is a named defendant in civil proceedings before the High Court brought in 2015 by ten companies (all in liquidation) (the ‘Liquidated Companies’) and their respective liquidators (together, ‘the Claimants’). The Liquidated Companies previously traded in EUAs in 2009 and are alleged to be defaulting traders within (or otherwise connected to) the EUA supply chains forming the subject of the Tax Dispute. The Claimants claim approximately £71.4 million plus interest and costs and allege that NatWest Markets Plc dishonestly assisted the directors of the Liquidated Companies in the breach of their statutory duties and/or knowingly participated in the carrying on of the business of the Liquidated Companies with intent to defraud creditors. The trial in that matter concluded on 20 July 2018 and judgment is awaited.

 

US Anti-Terrorism Act litigation

NatWest Plc is defending lawsuits filed in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York by a number of US nationals (or their estates, survivors, or heirs) who were victims of terrorist attacks in Israel. The plaintiffs allege that NatWest Plc is liable for damages arising from those attacks pursuant to the US Anti-Terrorism Act because NatWest Plc previously maintained bank accounts and transferred funds for the Palestine Relief & Development Fund, an organisation which plaintiffs allege solicited funds for Hamas, the alleged perpetrator of the attacks.

 

In October 2017, the trial court dismissed claims against NatWest Plc with respect to two of the 18 terrorist attacks at issue. On 14 March 2018, the trial court granted a request by NatWest Plc for leave to file a renewed summary judgment motion in respect of the remaining claims, which has now been filed. No trial date has been set.

 

NatWest Markets N.V. and certain other financial institutions, are defendants in several actions pending in the United States District Courts for the Eastern and Southern Districts of New York, filed by a number of US nationals (or their estates, survivors, or heirs), most of whom are or were US military personnel, who were killed or injured in attacks in Iraq between 2003 and 2011. NatWest Markets Plc is also a defendant in some of these cases.

 

The attacks at issue in the cases were allegedly perpetrated by Hezbollah and certain Iraqi terror cells allegedly funded by the Islamic Republic of Iran. According to the plaintiffs’ allegations, the defendants are liable for damages arising from the attacks because they allegedly conspired with Iran and certain Iranian banks to assist Iran in transferring money to Hezbollah and the Iraqi terror cells, in violation of the US Anti-Terrorism Act, by agreeing to engage in ‘stripping’ of transactions initiated by the Iranian banks so that the Iranian nexus to the transactions would not be detected. The first of these actions was filed in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York in November 2014. On 27 July 2018, the magistrate judge in that case issued a report to the district court recommending that the district court deny the defendants’ pending motion to dismiss. NatWest Markets N.V. has requested that the district court grant the motion to dismiss notwithstanding the magistrate’s recommendation. The other actions are either subject to a pending motion to dismiss, or will be the subject of such a motion in due course.

 

Securities underwriting litigation

NatWest Markets Securities Inc. is an underwriter defendant in several securities class actions in the US in which plaintiffs generally allege that an issuer of public debt or equity securities, as well as the underwriters of the securities (including NatWest Markets Securities Inc.), are liable to purchasers for misrepresentations and omissions made in connection with the offering of such securities.

 

Investigations and reviews

RBS’s businesses and financial condition can be affected by the actions

 

236


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

27 Memorandum items continued

Litigation, investigations and reviews

of various governmental and regulatory authorities in the UK, the US, the EU and elsewhere. RBS has engaged, and will continue to engage, in discussions with relevant governmental and regulatory authorities, including in the UK, the US, the EU and elsewhere, on an ongoing and regular basis, and in response to informal and formal inquiries or investigations, regarding operational, systems and control evaluations and issues including those related to compliance with applicable laws and regulations, including consumer protection, business conduct, competition/anti-trust, anti-bribery, anti-money laundering and sanctions regimes.

 

The NatWest Markets business in particular has been providing, and continues to provide, information regarding a variety of matters, including, for example, the setting of benchmark rates and related derivatives trading, conduct in the foreign exchange market, and various issues relating to the issuance, underwriting, and sales and trading of fixed-income securities, including structured products and government securities, some of which have resulted, and others of which may result, in investigations or proceedings.

 

Any matters discussed or identified during such discussions and inquiries may result in, among other things, further inquiry or investigation, other action being taken by governmental and regulatory authorities, increased costs being incurred by RBS, remediation of systems and controls, public or private censure, restriction of RBS’s business activities and/or fines. Any of the events or circumstances mentioned in this paragraph or below could have a material adverse effect on RBS, its business, authorisations and licences, reputation, results of operations or the price of securities issued by it.

 

RBS is co-operating fully with the investigations and reviews described below.

 

RMBS and other securitised products investigations

In the US, RBS companies have in recent years been involved in investigations relating to, among other things, issuance, underwriting and trading in RMBS and other mortgage-backed securities and collateralised debt obligations (CDOs).

 

Investigations by the US Department of Justice (DoJ) and certain state attorneys general relating to the issuance and underwriting of RMBS were resolved in 2018. Certain other state attorneys general have sought information regarding similar issues, and RBS is aware that at least one such investigation is ongoing.

 

In October 2017, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. entered into a non-prosecution agreement (NPA) with the United States Attorney for the District of Connecticut (USAO) in connection with alleged misrepresentations to counterparties relating to secondary trading in various forms of asset-backed securities. As part of the NPA, the USAO agreed not to file criminal charges relating to certain conduct and information described in the NPA if NatWest Markets Securities Inc. complies with the terms of the NPA. In October 2018, NatWest Markets Securities Inc. agreed to a six-month extension of the NPA while the USAO reviews the circumstances of an unrelated matter reported during the course of the NPA.

 

US mortgages - loan repurchase matters

RBS’s NatWest Markets business in North America was a purchaser of non-agency residential mortgages in the secondary market, and an issuer and underwriter of non-agency RMBS, and, in some circumstances, made certain representations and warranties regarding the characteristics of the underlying loans. As a result, NatWest Markets may be, or may have been, contractually required to repurchase such loans or indemnify certain parties against losses for certain breaches of such representations and warranties. Depending on the extent to which such loan repurchase related claims are pursued against and not rebutted by NatWest Markets on timeliness or other grounds, the aggregate potential impact on RBS, if any, may be material.

 

Foreign exchange related investigations

In 2014 and 2015, NatWest Markets Plc paid significant penalties to resolve investigations into its FX business by the FCA, the CFTC, the DoJ, and the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve). As part of its plea agreement with the DoJ, NatWest Markets Plc pled guilty to a one-count information charging an antitrust conspiracy occurring between as early as December 2007 to at least April 2010. NatWest Markets Plc admitted that it knowingly, through one of its euro/US dollar currency traders, joined and participated in a conspiracy to eliminate competition in the purchase and sale of the euro/US dollar currency pair exchanged in the FX spot market. On 5 January 2017, the United States District Court for the District of Connecticut imposed a sentence on NatWest Markets Plc consisting of a US$395 million fine and a three-year probation, which among other things, prohibits NatWest Markets Plc from committing another crime in violation of US law or engaging in the FX trading practices that form the basis for the charged crime and requires NatWest Markets Plc to implement a compliance program designed to prevent and detect the unlawful conduct at issue and to strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by other regulators (including the FCA and the CFTC). A violation of the terms of probation could lead to the imposition of additional penalties.

 

As part of the settlement with the Federal Reserve, NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets Securities Inc. entered into a cease and desist order (the FX Order). In the FX Order, which is publicly available and will remain in effect until terminated by the Federal Reserve, NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets Securities Inc. agreed to take certain remedial actions with respect to FX activities and certain other designated market activities, including the creation of an enhanced written internal controls and compliance program, an improved compliance risk management program, and an enhanced internal audit program. NatWest Markets Plc and NatWest Markets Securities Inc. are obligated to implement and comply with these programs as approved by the Federal Reserve, and are also required to conduct, on an annual basis, a review of applicable compliance policies and procedures and a risk-focused sampling of key controls.

 

NatWest Markets Plc is co-operating with investigations and responding to inquiries from other governmental and regulatory (including competition) authorities on similar issues relating to failings in its FX business. The timing and amount of financial penalties with respect to any further settlements and related litigation risks and collateral consequences remain uncertain and may well be material.

 

FCA review of RBS’s treatment of SMEs

In 2014, the FCA appointed an independent Skilled Person under section 166 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to review RBS’s treatment of SME customers whose relationship was managed by RBS’s Global Restructuring Group (GRG) in the period 1 January 2008 to 31 December 2013.

 

The Skilled Person delivered its final report to the FCA during September 2016, and the FCA published an update in November 2016. In response, RBS announced redress steps for SME customers in the UK and the Republic of Ireland that were in GRG between 2008 and 2013. These steps were (i) an automatic refund of certain complex fees; and (ii) a new complaints process, overseen by an independent third party. The complaints process closed on 22 October 2018 for new complaints in the UK and, with the exception of a small cohort of potential complainants for whom there is an extended deadline, on 31 December 2018 for new complaints in the Republic of Ireland.

 

RBS made a provision of £400 million in 2016, in respect of the above redress steps, of which £270 million had been utilised by 31 December 2018. An additional provision of £50 million was taken at 31 December 2018 reflecting the increased costs of the complaints process.

 

237


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

27 Memorandum items continued

Litigation, investigations and reviews

The FCA published a summary of the Skilled Person’s report in November 2017. The UK House of Commons Treasury Select Committee, seeking to rely on Parliamentary powers, published the full version of the Skilled Person’s report on 20 February 2018. On 31 July 2018, the FCA confirmed that it had concluded its investigation and that it does not intend to take disciplinary or prohibitory action against any person in relation to these matters. It has subsequently indicated that it will shortly publish a final summary of its investigative work.

 

Investment advice review

As a result of an FSA review in 2013, the FCA required RBS to carry out a past business review and customer contact exercise on a sample of historic customers who received investment advice on certain lump sum products, during the period from March 2012 until December 2012. The review was conducted by an independent Skilled Person under section 166 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000. Redress was paid to certain customers in that sample group.

 

RBS later agreed with the FCA that it would carry out a wider review/remediation exercise relating to certain investment, insurance and pension sales from 1 January 2011 to 1 April 2015. That exercise is materially complete. Phase 2 (covering sales in 2010) started in April 2018 and was targeted for completion by the end of 2018, however the deadline has now been extended to April 2019.

 

In addition, RBS agreed with the FCA that it would carry out a remediation exercise, for a specific customer segment who were sold a particular structured product. Redress was paid to certain customers who took out the structured product.

 

RBS provisions in relation to these matters totalled £206 million as at 31 December 2018, of which £144 million had been utilised by that date.

 

Packaged accounts

RBS has had dedicated resources in place since 2013 to investigate and resolve packaged account complaints on an individual basis. RBS provisions for this matter totalled £444 million as at 31 December 2018. The FCA conducted a thematic review of packaged bank accounts across the UK from October 2014 to April 2016, the results of which were published in October 2016. RBS made amendments to its sales process and complaints procedures to address the findings from that review.

 

FCA investigation into RBS’s compliance with the Money Laundering Regulations 2007

On 21 July 2017, the FCA notified RBS that it was undertaking an investigation into RBS’s compliance with the Money Laundering Regulations 2007 in relation to certain customers. Following amendment to the scope of the investigation, there are currently two areas under review: (1) compliance with Money Laundering Regulations in respect of Money Service Business customers; and (2) the Suspicious Transactions regime in relation to the events surrounding particular customers. The investigations in both areas are assessing both criminal and civil culpability. RBS is cooperating with the investigations, including responding to several information requests from the FCA.

 

Systematic Anti-Money Laundering Programme assessment

In December 2018, the FCA commenced a Systematic Anti-Money Laundering Programme assessment of RBS. RBS is responding to requests for information from the FCA.

 

Payment Protection Insurance (PPI)

Since 2011, RBS has been implementing the FCA’s policy statement for the handling of complaints about the mis-selling of PPI (Policy Statement 10/12). In August 2017, the FCA’s new rules and guidance on PPI complaints handling (Policy Statement 17/3) came into force. The Policy Statement introduced new so called ‘Plevin’ rules, under which customers may be eligible for redress if the bank earned a high level of commission from the sale of PPI, but did not disclose this detail at the point of sale. The Policy Statement also introduced a two year PPI deadline, due to expire in August 2019, before which new PPI complaints must be made. RBS is implementing the Policy Statement.

 

RBS has made provisions totalling £5.3 billion to date for PPI claims, including an additional provision of £200 million taken at Q3 2018, reflecting greater than predicted complaints volumes. Of the £5.3 billion cumulative provision, £4.7 billion had been utilised by 31 December 2018.

 

FCA mortgages market study

In December 2016, the FCA launched a market study into the provision of mortgages. On 4 May 2018 the interim report was published. This found that competition was working well for many customers but also proposed remedies to help customers shop around more easily for mortgages. Following a period of consultation, the final report is due to be published in Q1 2019.

 

FCA strategic review of retail banking models

On 11 May 2017 the FCA announced a strategic review of retail banking models. The FCA used the review to understand how these models operate, including how ‘free if in credit’ banking is paid for and the impact of changes such as increased use of digital channels and reduced branch usage.

 

On 18 December 2018, the FCA published its final report containing a number of findings, including that personal current accounts are an important source of competitive advantage for major banks. Following the review, the FCA is to continue to monitor retail banking models, analyse new payments business models and undertake exploratory work to understand certain aspects of SME banking.

 

US/Swiss tax programme

In December 2015, Coutts & Co Ltd., a member of the Group incorporated in Switzerland, entered into a non-prosecution agreement (the NPA) with the DoJ. This was entered into as part of the DoJ’s programme for Swiss banks, related to its investigations of the role that Swiss banks played in concealing the assets of US tax payers in offshore accounts (US related accounts). Coutts & Co Ltd. paid a US$78.5 million penalty and acknowledged responsibility for certain conduct set forth in a statement of facts accompanying the agreement. Under the NPA, which has a term of four years, Coutts & Co Ltd. is required, among other things, to provide certain information, cooperate with the DoJ’s investigations, and commit no U.S. federal offences. If Coutts & Co Ltd. abides by the NPA, the DoJ will not prosecute it for certain tax-related and monetary transaction offences in connection with US related accounts.

 

Since the signing of the NPA in 2015, Coutts & Co Ltd has identified and disclosed to the DoJ a number of US related accounts that were not included in its original submission supporting the NPA. Coutts & Co Ltd is in discussions with the DoJ regarding these additional accounts and has agreed with the DoJ to undertake additional review work, which is ongoing.

 

Enforcement proceedings and investigations in relation to Coutts & Co Ltd

In February 2017, the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority (FINMA) took enforcement action against Coutts & Co Ltd with regard to failures of money laundering checks and controls on certain client accounts that were connected with the Malaysian sovereign wealth fund, 1MDB, and were held with Coutts & Co Ltd. FINMA accordingly required Coutts & Co Ltd to disgorge profits of CHF 6.5 million. There are two administrative criminal proceedings pending before the Swiss Finance Department against two former employees of Coutts & Co Ltd. In addition, the Monetary Authority of Singapore (MAS)’s supervisory examination of Coutts & Co Ltd’s Singapore branch revealed breaches of anti-money laundering requirements. MAS imposed on Coutts & Co Ltd financial penalties amounting to SGD 2.4 million in December 2016.

 

238


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

27 Memorandum items continued

Litigation, investigations and reviews

In addition, Coutts & Co Ltd continues to assist with investigations and enquiries from authorities where requested to do so.

 

Regulator requests concerning certain historic Russian transactions

Media coverage in 2017 highlighted an alleged money laundering scheme involving Russian entities between 2010 and 2014. Allegedly certain European banks, including RBS and 16 other UK based financial institutions, and certain US banks, were involved in processing certain transactions associated with this scheme. RBS has responded to requests for information from the FCA, PRA and regulators in other jurisdictions.

 

Review and investigation of treatment of tracker mortgage customers in Ulster Bank Ireland DAC

In December 2015, the Central Bank of Ireland (CBI) announced that it had written to a number of lenders requiring them to put in place a robust plan and framework to review the treatment of customers who have been sold mortgages with a tracker interest rate or with a tracker interest rate entitlement. The CBI stated that the intended purpose of the review was to identify any cases where customers’ contractual rights under the terms of their mortgage agreements were not fully honoured, or where lenders did not fully comply with various regulatory requirements and standards regarding disclosure and transparency for customers. The CBI has required Ulster Bank Ireland DAC (UBI DAC), a member of the Group incorporated in the Republic of Ireland, to participate in this review and UBI DAC is co-operating with the CBI in this regard. UBI DAC submitted its phase 2 report to the CBI in March 2017, identifying impacted customers. The redress and compensation phase (phase 3) commenced in Q4 2017 and is ongoing.

 

RBS has made provisions totalling 297 million (£266 million) to date for this matter. Of the 297 million (£266 million) cumulative provision, 211million (£189 million) had been utilised by 31 December 2018.

 

Separately, in April 2016, the CBI notified UBI DAC that it was also commencing an investigation under its Administrative Sanctions Procedure into suspected breaches of the Consumer Protection Code 2006 during the period 4 August 2006 to 30 June 2008 in relation to certain customers who switched from tracker mortgages to fixed rate mortgages. This investigation is ongoing and UBI DAC continues to co-operate with the CBI.

 

As part of an internal review of the wider retail and commercial loan portfolios extending from the tracker mortgage examination programme, UBI DAC identified further legacy business issues. A programme is ongoing to identify and remediate impacted customers. RBS has made provisions totalling 167 million (£150 million) based on expected remediation and project costs of which 41 million (£37 million) had been utilised by 31 December 2018.

 

28 Analysis of the net investment in business interests and intangible assets

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

Acquisitions and disposals

£m 

£m 

£m 

Fair value given for businesses acquired (1)

(113)

(131)

(87)

Additional investment in associates

(9)

— 

— 

Net outflow of cash in respect of acquisitions

(122)

(131)

(87)

Net assets/(liabilities) sold

— 

177 

(400)

Non-cash consideration

— 

(15)

(5)

Profit on disposal

— 

155 

22 

Net cash and cash equivalents disposed

— 

— 

55 

Net inflow/(outflow) of cash in respect of disposals

— 

317 

(328)

Dividends received from associates

(1)

Cash expenditure on intangible assets

(364)

(384)

(480)

Net (outflow)/inflow 

(481)

(199)

(886)

 

Note:

(1)       2018 includes the purchase of Free agent.

 

29 Analysis of changes in financing during the year

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Share capital, share premium,

 

 

 

 

paid-in equity and merger reserve

 

Subordinated liabilities

 

2018

2017

2016

 

2018

2017

2016

 

£m

£m

£m

 

£m

£m

£m

At 1 January

27,791 

52,979 

50,577 

 

12,722 

19,419 

19,847 

Issue of ordinary shares

144 

306 

300 

 

 

 

 

Issue of Additional Tier 1 capital notes

— 

— 

2,046 

 

 

 

 

Redemption of paid-in equity

— 

(720)

(110)

 

 

 

 

Redemption of subordinated liabilities

 

 

 

 

(2,258)

(5,747)

(3,606)

Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing

144 

(414)

2,236 

 

(2,258)

(5,747)

(3,606)

Transfer to retained earnings

— 

(25,789)

— 

 

 

 

 

Ordinary shares issued in respect of employee share schemes

80 

71 

166 

 

 

 

 

Redemption of debt preference shares

— 

748 

— 

 

 

 

 

Other adjustments including foreign exchange

— 

196 

— 

 

71 

(950)

3,178 

At 31 December

28,015 

27,791 

52,979 

 

10,535 

12,722 

19,419 

 

239


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

30 Analysis of cash and cash equivalents

 

 

 

 

2018 
£m 

2017 
£m 

2016 
£m 

At 1 January

 

 

 

  - cash

98,337 

88,414 

94,832 

  - cash equivalents

24,268 

10,156 

8,760 

  

122,605 

98,570 

103,592 

Net cash outflow

(13,794)

24,035 

(5,022)

At 31 December

108,811 

122,605 

98,570 

 

 

 

 

Comprising:

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

88,897 

98,337 

74,250 

Treasury bills and debt securities

83 

427 

387 

Net loans to banks

19,831 

23,841 

23,933 

Cash and cash equivalents

108,811 

122,605 

98,570 

 

Note:

(1)     Includes cash collateral posted with bank counterparties in respect of derivative liabilities of £7,302 million (2017 - £6,883 million; 2016 - £6,661 million).

 

Certain members of RBS are required by law or regulation to maintain balances with the central banks in the jurisdictions in which they operate. These balances are set out below.

 

 

2018 

2017 

2016 

Bank of England

£0.9bn

£0.6bn

£0.5bn

De Nederlandsche Bank

0.1bn

0.1bn

0.4bn

 

31 Directors’ and key management remuneration

 

2018 

2017 

Directors’ remuneration

£000 

£000 

Non Executive Directors

2,001 

1,747 

Chairman and executive directors

 

 

  -emoluments

4,657 

5,299 

 

6,658 

7,046 

Amounts receivable under long-term incentive plans and share option plans

— 

1,225 

Total

6,658 

8,271 

 

No directors accrued benefits under defined benefit schemes or money purchase schemes during 2018 and 2017.

The executive directors may participate in the company’s long-term incentive plans, executive share option and sharesave schemes and details of their interests in the company’s shares arising from their participation are given in the Directors’ remuneration report. Details of the remuneration received by each director are also given in the Directors’ remuneration report.

 

Compensation of key management

The aggregate remuneration of directors and other members of key management during the year was as follows:

 

 

2018 

2017 

 

£000 

£000 

Short-term benefits

20,316 

19,019 

Post-employment benefits

82 

434 

Share-based payments

— 

3,558 

 

20,398 

23,011 

 

A new board and committee operating model was introduced in 2018 in order to align with UK ring-fencing requirements. The definition of key management has been revised and now comprises members of the RBSG and NWH Ltd Boards, members of the RBSG and NWH Ltd Executive Committees, and the Chief Executives of NatWest Markets Plc and RBS International. This is on the basis that these individuals have been identified as Persons Discharging Managerial Responsibilities (PDMRs) of RBSG under the new governance structure.

 

32 Transactions with directors and key management

At 31 December 2018, amounts outstanding in relation to transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by authorised institutions in the Group, as defined in UK legislation, were £9,660 in respect of loans to five persons who were directors of the company at any time during the financial period.

 

For the purposes of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’, key management comprise directors of the company and Persons Discharging Managerial Responsibilities (PDMRs) of RBSG under the new governance structure. The captions in the Group’s primary financial statements include the following amounts attributable, in aggregate, to key management:

 

 

2018
£000 

2017 
£000 

Loans to customers

1,544

3,942

Customer deposits

31,361

23,619

 

Key management have banking relationships with Group entities which are entered into in the normal course of business and on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and security, as for comparable transactions with other persons of a similar standing or, where applicable, with other employees. These transactions did not involve more than the normal risk of repayment or present other unfavourable features.

 

240


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

33 Adoption of IFRS 9

The Group’s accounting policies have significantly changed on the adoption of IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ with effect from 1 January 2018. Prior years are re-presented but there has been no restatement of prior year data.

 

IFRS 9 changed the classification categories of financial assets from IAS 39. Held-for-trading assets were classified to mandatory fair value through profit or loss; loans and receivables were classified to amortised cost; and available-for-sale assets were classified as fair value through other comprehensive income unless they were deemed to be in a fair value business model or failed the contractual cash flow requirements under IFRS 9. There were no changes in the classification and measurement of financial liabilities.

 

Loans to customers of £2.1 billion were reclassified from loans and receivables under IAS 39 to fair value through profit or loss under IFRS 9. As a result, their carrying value increased by £583 million.

 

The net increase to loan impairments under IAS 39 was £616 million under the expected credit loss requirements of IFRS 9, including £85 million under provisions for contingent liabilities and commitments. This includes discontinued activities which is shown below on other assets and other liabilities

 

The impact on the Group’s balance sheet at 1 January 2018 and the key movements in relation to the impact on classification and measurement, expected credit losses and tax are as follow:

 

 

 

Changes to presentation

 

IFRS 9 impact

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Held-for-trading

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

31 December

exported to

 

30 December

Classification

Expected

 

1 January

 

2017 

trading

New

2017 

&

credit

 

2018 

 

(IAS 39)

assets/liabilities

presentation

re-presented

measurement

losses

Tax

(IFRS 9)

 

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

98,337 

— 

— 

98,337 

— 

(1)

— 

98,336 

Trading assets

 

85,991 

— 

85,991 

— 

— 

— 

85,991 

Derivatives

 

— 

160,843 

160,843 

— 

— 

— 

160,843 

Settlement balances

 

— 

2,517 

2,517 

— 

— 

— 

2,517 

Loans and advances to banks

30,251 

(18,734)

(11,517)

— 

 

 

 

 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

 

— 

11,517 

11,517 

— 

(3)

— 

11,514 

Loans and advances to customers

349,919 

(39,747)

(310,172)

— 

 

 

 

 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

 

— 

310,116 

310,116 

(2,191)

(524)

— 

307,401 

Debt securities

78,933 

(27,481)

(51,452)

— 

 

 

 

 

Equity shares

450 

(29)

(421)

— 

 

 

 

 

Other financial assets

 

— 

51,929 

51,929 

2,752 

(3)

— 

54,678 

Settlement balances

2,517 

— 

(2,517)

— 

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

160,843 

— 

(160,843)

— 

 

 

 

 

Intangible assets

6,543 

— 

— 

6,543 

— 

— 

— 

6,543 

Property, plant and equipment

4,602 

— 

(4,602)

— 

 

 

 

 

Deferred tax

1,740 

— 

(1,740)

— 

 

 

 

 

Assets of disposal groups

195 

— 

(195)

— 

 

 

 

 

Other assets

3,726 

— 

6,537 

10,263 

— 

— 

25 

10,288 

Total assets

738,056 

— 

— 

738,056 

561 

(531)

25 

738,111 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Deposits by banks

46,898 

(16,502)

(30,396)

— 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

 

— 

30,396 

30,396 

— 

— 

— 

30,396 

Customer accounts

398,036 

(36,720)

(361,316)

— 

 

 

 

 

Customer deposits

 

— 

361,316 

361,316 

— 

— 

— 

361,316 

Debt securities in issue

30,559 

(233)

(30,326)

— 

 

 

 

 

Settlement balances

2,844 

— 

— 

2,844 

— 

— 

— 

2,844 

Trading liabilities

 

81,982 

— 

81,982 

— 

— 

— 

81,982 

Short positions

28,527 

(28,527)

— 

— 

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

154,506 

— 

— 

154,506 

— 

— 

— 

154,506 

Other financial liabilities

 

— 

30,326 

30,326 

— 

— 

— 

30,326 

Subordinated liabilities

12,722 

— 

— 

12,722 

— 

— 

— 

12,722 

Other liabilities

14,871 

— 

— 

14,871 

— 

85 

41 

14,997 

Total liabilities

688,963 

— 

— 

688,963 

— 

85 

41 

689,089 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total equity

49,093 

— 

— 

49,093 

561 

(616)

(16)

49,022 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total liabilities and equity

738,056 

— 

— 

738,056 

561 

(531)

25 

738,111 

 

241


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

33 Adoption of IFRS 9 continued

The table below reflects the impact of IFRS 9 on total equity:

 

 

Total

£m

At 31 December 2017 - under IAS 39

49,093 

Classification & measurement

561 

  - Mandatory fair value through profit or loss assets - adjustments following business model reviews (SPPI) (1)

579 

  - Equity shares held at cost under IAS 39 - fair value adjustments through FVOCI reserve

48 

  - Additional write-down of amortised cost assets

(66)

Expected credit losses

(616)

  - Amortised cost assets

(531)

  - Contingent liabilities and commitments

(85)

Tax

(16)

At 1 January 2018 - under IFRS on transition to IFRS 9

49,022 

 

Note:

(1)        Includes £583 million credit in relation to loans to customers and £4 million debit in relation to debt securities.

 

34 Related parties

UK Government

On 1 December 2008, the UK Government through HM Treasury became the ultimate controlling party of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc. The UK Government’s shareholding is managed by UK Government Investments Limited, a company wholly owned by the UK Government. As a result, the UK Government and UK Government controlled bodies became related parties of the Group.

 

The Group enters into transactions with many of these bodies on an arm’s length basis. Transactions include the payment of: taxes principally UK corporation tax (Note 7) and value added tax; national insurance contributions; local authority rates; and regulatory fees and levies (including the bank levy (Note 3) and FSCS levies (Note 27) together with banking transactions such as loans and deposits undertaken in the normal course of banker-customer relationships.

 

Bank of England facilities

The Group may participate in a number of schemes operated by the Bank of England in the normal course of business.

 

Members of the Group that are UK authorised institutions are required to maintain non-interest bearing (cash ratio) deposits with the Bank of England amounting to 0.296% of their average eligible liabilities in excess of £600 million. They also have access to Bank of England reserve accounts: sterling current accounts that earn interest at the Bank of England Rate.

 

Other related parties

(a)     In their roles as providers of finance, RBS companies provide development and other types of capital support to businesses. These investments are made in the normal course of business and on arm’s length terms. In some instances, the investment may extend to ownership or control over 20% or more of the voting rights of the investee company. However, these investments are not considered to give rise to transactions of a materiality requiring disclosure under IAS 24.

(b)     RBS recharges The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund with the cost of administration services incurred by it. The amounts involved are not material to the Group.

(c)     In accordance with IAS 24, transactions or balances between RBS entities that have been eliminated on consolidation are not reported.

(d)    The captions in the primary financial statements of the parent company include amounts attributable to subsidiaries. These amounts have been disclosed in aggregate in the relevant notes to the financial statements.

 

35 Post balance sheet events

On 6 February 2019, a General Meeting of shareholders authorised the directors to agree buy-backs by the company of ordinary shares from HM Treasury. The authority is subject to renewal at the company’s forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

 

Other than this there have been no other significant events between 31 December 2018 and the date of approval of these accounts which would require a change to or additional disclosure in the accounts.

 

242


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information

NatWest Markets Plc (‘NWM Plc’) (formerly RBS plc, renamed in 2018) is a wholly owned subsidiary of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (‘RBSG plc’) and was able to offer and sell certain securities in the US from time to time pursuant to a registration statement on Form F-3 filed with the SEC with a full and unconditional guarantee from RBSG plc.

 

NWM Plc utilises an exception provided in Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X, and therefore does not file its financial statements with the SEC. In accordance with the requirements to qualify for the exception, presented below is condensed consolidating financial information for:

·                  RBSG plc on a stand-alone basis as guarantor;

·                  NWM Plc on a stand-alone basis as issuer;

·                  Non-guarantor Subsidiaries of RBSG plc and NWM Plc on a combined basis (‘Subsidiaries’);

·                  Consolidation adjustments; and

·                  RBSG plc consolidated amounts (‘RBS Group’).

 

Under IAS 27, RBSG plc and NWM Plc account for investments in their subsidiary undertakings at cost less impairment. Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X requires a company to account for its investments in subsidiary undertakings using the equity method, which would decrease the results for the period of RBSG plc and increase the results for the period of NWM Plc in the information below by £811 million and £1,546 million respectively for the year ended 31 December 2018 (increase by £92 million and £934 million respectively for the year ended 31 December 2017; increase by £142 million and decrease by £1,316 million respectively for the year ended 31 December 2016).

 

The net assets of RBSG plc would be decreased and NWM Plc increased in the information below by £8,651 million and £165 million respectively at 31 December 2018 (decreased £6,631 million and £9,319 million respectively at 31 December 2017).

 

NWM Plc Disposal groups and discontinued operations

NatWest Holdings Limited (NatWest Holdings)

The transfer of the NWM Plc UK Personal Banking (UK PB), Ulster Bank RoI, Commercial & Private Banking (CPB) and certain parts of Central items and NatWest Markets, included in the ring-fenced bank, to subsidiaries of NatWest Holdings, was completed in 2018. It was followed by the transfer of NatWest Holdings to RBSG plc. Accordingly, all of the NWM Plc activities now undertaken by NatWest Holdings and its subsidiaries were classified as disposal groups in the NWM Plc accounts at 31 December 2017 and presented as discontinued operations until business transferred in 2018, with comparatives re-presented.

 

243


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information continued

 

Income statement

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2018

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Net interest income

(368)

(239)

8,028 

1,235 

8,656 

Non-interest income

2,794 

1,002 

3,740 

(2,790)

4,746 

Total income

2,426 

763 

11,768 

(1,555)

13,402 

Operating expenses

(85)

(1,262)

(6,855)

(1,443)

(9,645)

Impairment releases/(losses)

89 

(429)

(59)

(398)

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

2,342 

(410)

4,484 

(3,057)

3,359 

Tax

149 

51 

(1,322)

(86)

(1,208)

Profit/(loss) from continuing operations

2,491 

(359)

3,162 

(3,143)

2,151 

Profit/(loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax

— 

54 

— 

(54)

— 

Profit/(loss) for the year

2,491 

(305)

3,162 

(3,197)

2,151 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

(38)

30 

(8)

Preference shareholders

182 

— 

— 

— 

182 

Paid-in equity holders

355 

— 

— 

— 

355 

Ordinary shareholders

1,954 

(305)

3,200 

(3,227)

1,622 

 

2,491 

(305)

3,162 

(3,197)

2,151 

 

Statement of comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2018

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Profit/(loss) for the year

2,491 

(305)

3,162 

(3,197)

2,151 

Items that do not qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

 

Remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes

 

 

 

 

 

  - contributions in preparation for ring-fencing (1)

— 

(53)

(2,000)

— 

(2,053)

  - other movements

— 

(9)

95 

— 

86 

Profit on fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at

 

 

 

 

 

  fair value through profit or loss due to own credit risk

— 

121 

79 

— 

200 

Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI)

 

 

 

 

 

  financial assets

— 

22 

28 

(2)

48 

Tax 

— 

(24)

526 

— 

502 

 

— 

57 

(1,272)

(2)

(1,217)

Items that do qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

 

Fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI)

 

 

 

 

 

 financial assets

— 

(339)

808 

(462)

Cash flow hedges

78 

223 

(550)

(332)

(581)

Currency translation

— 

168 

(2,488)

2,630 

310 

Tax 

(15)

36 

40 

128 

189 

 

63 

88 

(2,190)

1,964 

(75)

Other comprehensive income/(loss) after tax

63 

145 

(3,462)

1,962 

(1,292)

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

2,554 

(160)

(300)

(1,235)

859 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) is attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

(103)

120 

17 

Preference shareholders

182 

— 

— 

— 

182 

Paid-in equity holders

355 

— 

— 

— 

355 

Ordinary shareholders

2,017 

(160)

(197)

(1,355)

305 

 

2,554 

(160)

(300)

(1,235)

859 

 

Note:

(1)     On 17 April 2018 RBS agreed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Trustees of the RBS Group Pension Fund in connection with the requirements of ring-fencing. NatWest Markets Plc cannot continue to be a participant in the Main section and separate arrangements are required for its employees. Under the MoU NatWest Bank made a contribution of £2 billion on 9 October 2018 to strengthen funding of the Main section in recognition of the changes in convenant. Also under the MoU, NatWest Markets Plc is required to make a £53 million contribution to the NWM section in Q1 2019.

 

244


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information continued

 

Income statement

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2017

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Net interest income

203 

(26)

6,157 

2,653 

8,987 

Non-interest income

1,390 

909 

(674)

2,521 

4,146 

Total income

1,593 

883 

5,483 

5,174 

13,133 

Operating expenses

(122)

(1,601)

(3,946)

(4,732)

(10,401)

Impairment releases/(losses)

— 

77 

(370)

(200)

(493)

Operating profit/(loss) before tax

1,471 

(641)

1,167 

242 

2,239 

Tax 

(94)

168 

(853)

48 

(731)

Profit/(loss) from continuing operations

1,377 

(473)

314 

290 

1,508 

(Loss)/profit from discontinued operations, net of tax

— 

(510)

— 

510 

— 

Profit/(loss) for the year

1,377 

(983)

314 

800 

1,508 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

30 

35 

Preference shareholders

234 

— 

— 

— 

234 

Paid-in equity holders

483 

— 

— 

487 

Ordinary shareholders

660 

(983)

309 

766 

752 

 

1,377 

(983)

314 

800 

1,508 

 

Statement of comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2017

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Profit/(loss)for the year

1,377 

(983)

314 

800 

1,508 

Items that do not qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

 

Profit on remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes

— 

86 

— 

90 

Loss on fair value of credit in financial liabilities designated at

 

 

 

 

 

  fair value through profit or loss due to own credit risk

— 

(68)

(58)

— 

(126)

Tax 

— 

(18)

— 

(10)

 

— 

(82)

36 

— 

(46)

Items that do qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

 

Available-for-sale financial assets

— 

52 

(341)

315 

26 

Cash flow hedges

(204)

(424)

(24)

(417)

(1,069)

Currency translation

— 

(22)

495 

(373)

100 

Tax  

38 

93 

20 

105 

256 

 

(166)

(301)

150 

(370)

(687)

Other comprehensive (loss)/income after tax

(166)

(383)

186 

(370)

(733)

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

1,211 

(1,366)

500 

430 

775 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) is attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

— 

52 

52 

Preference shareholders

234 

— 

— 

— 

234 

Paid-in equity holders

483 

— 

— 

487 

Ordinary shareholders

494 

(1,366)

500 

374 

 

1,211 

(1,366)

500 

430 

775 

 

245


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information continued

 

Income statement

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2016

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Net interest income

267 

6,050 

2,387 

8,708 

Non-interest income

(4,945)

1,066 

(5,099)

12,860 

3,882 

Total income

(4,678)

1,070 

951 

15,247 

12,590 

Operating expenses

(738)

(3,864)

(5,911)

(5,681)

(16,194)

Impairment releases/(losses)

— 

73 

(4)

(547)

(478)

Operating (loss)/profit before tax

(5,416)

(2,721)

(4,964)

9,019 

(4,082)

Tax 

66 

(199)

(827)

(147)

(1,107)

(Loss)/profit from continuing operations

(5,350)

(2,920)

(5,791)

8,872 

(5,189)

(Loss)/profit from discontinued operations, net of tax

— 

(531)

— 

531 

— 

(Loss)/profit for the year

(5,350)

(3,451)

(5,791)

9,403 

(5,189)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

10 

Preference shareholders

260 

23 

— 

(23)

260 

Paid-in equity holders

294 

— 

— 

303 

Dividend access share

1,193 

— 

— 

— 

1,193 

Ordinary shareholders

(7,097)

(3,474)

(5,796)

9,412 

(6,955)

 

(5,350)

(3,451)

(5,791)

9,403 

(5,189)

 

Statement of comprehensive income

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2016

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

(Loss)/profit for the year

(5,350)

(3,451)

(5,791)

9,403 

(5,189)

Items that do not qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

 

Profit/(loss) on remeasurement of retirement benefit schemes

— 

63 

(1,112)

— 

(1,049)

Tax 

— 

(21)

309 

— 

288 

 

— 

42 

(803)

— 

(761)

Items that do qualify for reclassification

 

 

 

 

 

Available-for-sale financial assets

— 

(61)

293 

(326)

(94)

Cash flow hedges

189 

(40)

615 

765 

Currency translation

— 

(90)

709 

644 

1,263 

Tax 

(35)

28 

50 

(149)

(106)

 

154 

(163)

1,053 

784 

1,828 

Other comprehensive income/(loss) after tax

154 

(121)

250 

784 

1,067 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

(5,196)

(3,572)

(5,541)

10,187 

(4,122)

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income is attributable to:

 

 

 

 

 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

87 

34 

121 

Preference shareholders

260 

23 

— 

(23)

260 

Paid-in equity holders

294 

— 

— 

303 

Dividend access share

1,193 

— 

— 

— 

1,193 

Ordinary shareholders

(6,943)

(3,595)

(5,628)

10,167 

(5,999)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(5,196)

(3,572)

(5,541)

10,187 

(4,122)

 

246


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information continued

 

Balance sheet

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

At 31 December 2018

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

— 

11,095 

77,802 

— 

88,897 

Trading assets

— 

61,990 

13,228 

(99)

75,119 

Derivatives

543 

134,291 

3,710 

(5,195)

133,349 

Settlement balances

— 

1,421 

1,507 

— 

2,928 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

— 

454 

12,527 

(34)

12,947 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

— 

7,908 

297,200 

(19)

305,089 

Amount due from holding company and fellow subsidiaries

22,791 

11,800 

70,638 

(105,229)

— 

Other financial assets

241 

10,995 

48,481 

(232)

59,485 

Intangible assets

— 

— 

6,314 

302 

6,616 

Other assets

56,773 

2,087 

10,968 

(60,023)

9,805 

Total assets

80,348 

242,041 

542,375 

(170,529)

694,235 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

— 

2,777 

20,596 

(76)

23,297 

Customer deposits

— 

2,390 

358,531 

(7)

360,914 

Amount due to holding company and fellow subsidiaries

635 

23,505 

80,933 

(105,073)

— 

Settlement balances

— 

1,977 

1,089 

— 

3,066 

Trading liabilities

— 

54,540 

17,909 

(99)

72,350 

Derivatives

445 

129,974 

3,655 

(5,177)

128,897 

Other financial liabilities

16,821 

16,279 

6,625 

39,732 

Subordinated liabilities

7,941 

659 

2,058 

(123)

10,535 

Other liabilities

119 

1,018 

8,552 

(735)

8,954 

Total liabilities

25,961 

233,119 

499,948 

(111,283)

647,745 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Owners’ equity

54,387 

8,922 

42,416 

(59,989)

45,736 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

11 

743 

754 

Total equity

54,387 

8,922 

42,427 

(59,246)

46,490 

Total liabilities and equity

80,348 

242,041 

542,375 

(170,529)

694,235 

 

247


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information continued

 

Balance sheet

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

At 31 December 2017

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Assets

 

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

— 

93 

36,707 

61,537 

98,337 

Trading assets

— 

73,011 

13,051 

(71)

85,991 

Derivatives

163 

162,005 

3,101 

(4,426)

160,843 

Settlement balances

— 

1,614 

899 

2,517 

Loans to banks - amortised cost

— 

195 

5,181 

6,141 

11,517 

Loans to customers - amortised cost

— 

9,133 

223,755 

77,228 

310,116 

Amounts due from holding company and fellow subsidiaries

24,987 

6,470 

14,352 

(45,809)

— 

Other financial assets

107 

3,079 

4,350 

44,393 

51,929 

Intangible assets

— 

— 

531 

6,012 

6,543 

Other assets

47,605 

270,289 

(33,032)

(274,599)

10,263 

Total assets

72,862 

525,889 

268,895 

(129,590)

738,056 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

Bank deposits

— 

527 

22,367 

7,502 

30,396 

Customer deposits

— 

3,063 

274,847 

83,406 

361,316 

Amounts due to holding company and fellow subsidiaries

163 

14,994 

30,652 

(45,809)

— 

Settlement balances

— 

1,372 

1,472 

— 

2,844 

Trading liabilities

— 

64,182 

17,913 

(113)

81,982 

Derivatives

284 

155,098 

3,289 

(4,165)

154,506 

Other financial liabilities

9,202 

11,255 

1,243 

8,626 

30,326 

Subordinated liabilities

7,864 

— 

2,197 

2,661 

12,722 

Other liabilities

388 

230,876 

(110,598)

(105,795)

14,871 

Total liabilities

17,901 

481,367 

243,382 

(53,687)

688,963 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Owners’ equity

54,961 

44,522 

25,382 

(76,535)

48,330 

Non-controlling interests

— 

— 

131 

632 

763 

Total equity

54,961 

44,522 

25,513 

(75,903)

49,093 

Total liabilities and equity

72,862 

525,889 

268,895 

(129,590)

738,056 

 

248


 

Notes on the consolidated accounts

 

 

 

 

36 Consolidating financial information continued

 

Cash flow statement

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2018

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Net cash flows from operating activities

13,711 

(1,308)

(81,109)

68,478 

(228)

Net cash flows from investing activities

(9,481)

18,288 

(32,446)

15,684 

(7,955)

Net cash flows from financing activities

(4,169)

(5,795)

7,988 

(4,311)

(6,287)

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

332 

565 

(222)

676 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

62 

11,517 

(105,002)

79,629 

(13,794)

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2018

245 

13,058 

196,214 

(86,912)

122,605 

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2018

307 

24,575 

91,212 

(7,283)

108,811 

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2017

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Net cash flows from operating activities

4,973 

(74,357)

105,401 

2,724 

38,741 

Net cash flows from investing activities

(2,078)

(2,077)

1,911 

(4,238)

(6,482)

Net cash flows from financing activities

(3,831)

(9,668)

573 

4,718 

(8,208)

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

(14)

87 

(1,102)

1,013 

(16)

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

(950)

(86,015)

106,783 

4,217 

24,035 

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2017

1,195 

99,073 

89,431 

(91,129)

98,570 

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2017

245 

13,058 

196,214 

(86,912)

122,605 

 

 

 

 

 

Consolidation

 

For the year ended 31 December 2016

RBSG plc

NWM Plc

Subsidiaries

adjustments

RBS Group

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

Net cash flows from operating activities

(3,026)

3,098 

(6,823)

3,101 

(3,650)

Net cash flows from investing activities

2,538 

(4,495)

(1,919)

(483)

(4,359)

Net cash flows from financing activities

(1,445)

(13,459)

(1,490)

11,287 

(5,107)

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

122 

7,316 

4,260 

(3,604)

8,094 

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

(1,811)

(7,540)

(5,972)

10,301 

(5,022)

Cash and cash equivalents at 1 January 2016

3,006 

106,613 

95,403 

(101,430)

103,592 

Cash and cash equivalents at 31 December 2016

1,195 

99,073 

89,431 

(91,129)

98,570 

 

Trust preferred securities

The Group has issued trust preferred securities through trusts 100% owned by the Group (through partnership interests held by RBSG Capital Corporation and RBS) which meet the definition of a finance subsidiary in Regulation S-X, Rule 3-10. The securities represent undivided beneficial interests in the assets of the trusts, which consist of partnership preferred securities representing non-cumulative perpetual preferred limited partnership interests issued by Delaware limited partnerships. The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc has provided subordinated guarantees for the benefit of the holders of the trust preferred securities and the partnership preferred securities. Under the terms of the guarantees, the Group has fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a subordinated basis, payments on such trust preferred securities and partnership preferred securities, to the extent they are due to be paid and have not been paid by, or on behalf of, the trusts and the partnerships, as the case may be. Following implementation of IFRS 10 the trusts are no longer consolidated by the Group. For those securities that were classified as subordinated liabilities, the Group’s outstanding instruments with the trusts are classified as subordinated liabilities.

 

249


 

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
No.

 

Description

 

 

 

99.1

 

Consent of independent registered public accounting firm (Ernst & Young LLP)

101.INS

 

XBRL Instance Document

101.SCH

 

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme

101.CAL

 

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Calculation Linkbase

101.DEF

 

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Definition Linkbase

101.LAB

 

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Label Linkbase

101.PRE

 

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Scheme Presentation Linkbase

 

296


 

SIGNATURE

 

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorised

 

 

 

 

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

Registrant

 

 

 

 

/s/ Katie Murray

Katie Murray

Chief Financial Officer

30 April 2019

 

297